Toshiba Two Way Radio MMU AP0091H User Manual
FILE NO. A05-004-1  
Revised: Jan./2006  
SERVICE MANUAL  
R410A  
System air conditioner  
The indoor units in the Super Heat Recovery Multi System are common to those used in the Super Modular Multi  
System air conditioner. Therefore refer to the service manuals A03-009, A03-010, and A03-011 separately issued.  
Heat RecoveryType  
Indoor Unit  
Outdoor Unit  
4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
MMU-AP0091H, AP0121H, AP0151H,  
MMU-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H,  
MMU-AP0301H, AP0361H, AP0481H  
MMU-AP0561H  
Inverter Unit  
MMY-MAP0802FT8  
MMY-MAP1002FT8  
MMY-MAP1202FT8  
2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
MMU-AP0071WH, AP0091WH, AP0121WH,  
MMU-AP0151WH, AP0181WH, AP0241WH,  
Flow Selector Unit (FS unit)  
MMU-AP0271WH, AP0301WH, AP0481WH*  
RBM-Y1122FE  
RBM-Y1802FE  
RBM-Y2802FE  
* CHINA market only  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
MMU-AP0071YH, AP0091YH, AP0121YH,  
MMU-AP0151SH, AP0181SH, AP0241SH,  
MMU-AP0152SH, AP0182SH, AP0242SH  
Concealed Duct Standard Type  
MMD-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH, AP0151BH,  
MMD-AP0181BH, AP0241BH, AP0271BH, AP0301BH,  
MMD-AP0361BH, AP0481BH, AP0561BH  
Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type  
MMD-AP0181H, AP0241H, AP0271H,  
MMD-AP0361H, AP0481H  
Slim Duct Type  
MMD-AP0071SPH, AP0091SPH, AP0121SPH,  
MMD-AP0151SPH, AP0181SPH  
Under Ceiling Type  
MMC-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H,  
MMC-AP0271H, AP0361H, AP0481H  
High Wall Type  
MMK-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H,  
MMK-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H,  
MMK-AP0072H, AP0092H, AP0122H  
Floor Standing Cabinet Type  
MML-AP0071H, AP0091H, AP0121H,  
MML-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H  
Floor Standing Concealed Type  
MML-AP0071BH, AP0091BH, AP0121BH,  
MML-AP0151BH, AP0181BH, AP0241BH  
Floor Standing Type  
MMF-AP0151H, AP0181H, AP0241H,AP0271H,  
MMF-AP0361H, AP0481H, AP0561H  
PRINTED IN JAPAN, Jan., 2006 ToMo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
SAFETY CAUTION ............................................................................................ 4  
1. OUTLINE................................................................................................... 9  
2. WIRING DIAGRAM ................................................................................. 14  
3. PARTS RATING ...................................................................................... 30  
4. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMATIC DRAWING ............................... 48  
5. SYSTEM REFRIGERANT CYCLE DRAWING ....................................... 53  
6. CONTROL OUTLINE .............................................................................. 60  
7. APPLIED CONTROL .............................................................................. 71  
8. TEST OPERATION ................................................................................. 86  
9. TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................... 116  
10. CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL CIRCUIT ........................................ 174  
11. BACKUP OPERATIONS (EMERGENCY OPERATION)....................... 188  
12. OIL LEVEL JUDGMENT DISPLAY....................................................... 190  
13. REFRIGERANT RECOVERY  
WHEN REPLACING THE COMPRESSOR ........................................... 191  
14. LEAKAGE/CLOGGING OF OIL-EQUALIZATION CIRCUIT................. 197  
15. REPLACING COMPRESSOR............................................................... 199  
16. REPLACING PROCEDURE OF PARTS ............................................... 206  
17. P.C. BOARD .......................................................................................... 217  
NOTE  
Ensure power is isolated from the unit when replacing the high performance filter or when opening the  
service panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY CAUTION  
The important contents concerned to the safety are described on the product itself and on this Service Manual.  
Please read this Service Manual after understanding the described items thoroughly in the following contents  
(Indications/Illustrated marks), and keep them.  
[Explanation of indications]  
Indication  
Explanation  
Indicates contents assumed that an imminent danger causing a death or serious injury of  
the repair engineers and the third parties when an incorrect work has been executed.  
DANGER  
Indicates possibilities assumed that a danger causing a death or serious injury of the  
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work  
when an incorrect work has been executed.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Indicates contents assumed that an injury or property damage (∗) may be caused on the  
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work  
when an incorrect work has been executed.  
∗ Property damage : Enlarged damage concerned to property, furniture, and domestic animal/pet  
[Explanation of illustrated marks]  
Mark  
Explanation  
Indicates prohibited items (Forbidden items to do)  
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete prohibited contents.  
Indicates mandatory items (Compulsory items to do)  
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete mandatory contents.  
Indicates cautions (including danger/warning)  
The sentences or illustration near or in an illustrated mark describe the concrete cautious contents.  
[Confirmation of warning label on the main unit]  
Confirm that labels are indicated on the specified positions  
(Refer to the Parts disassembly diagram (Outdoor unit).)  
If removing the label during parts replace, stick it as the original.  
DANGER  
Turn “OFF” the breaker before removing the front panel and cabinet, otherwise an electric  
shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
During operation, a high voltage with 400V or higher of circuit (∗) at secondary circuit of the high-  
voltage transformer is applied.  
If touching a high voltage with the naked hands or body, an electric shock is caused even if using an  
electric insulator.  
Turn off breaker.  
∗ : For details, refer to the electric wiring diagram.  
When removing the front panel or cabinet, execute short-circuit and discharge between high-  
voltage capacitor terminals.  
If discharge is not executed, an electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
After turning off the breaker, high voltage also keeps to apply to the high-voltage capacitor.  
Execute discharge  
between terminals.  
Do not turn on the breaker under condition that the front panel and cabinet are removed.  
An electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.  
Prohibition  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
Before troubleshooting or repair work, check the earth wire is connected to the earth  
terminals of the main unit, otherwise an electric shock is caused when a leak occurs.  
If the earth wire is not correctly connected, contact an electric engineer for rework.  
Check earth wires.  
Do not modify the products.  
Do not also disassemble or modify the parts. It may cause a fire, electric shock or injury.  
Prohibition of modification.  
For spare parts, use those specified (∗).  
If unspecified parts are used, a fire or electric shock may be caused.  
∗: For details, refer to the parts list.  
Use specified parts.  
Before troubleshooting or repair work, do not bring a third party (a child, etc.) except  
the repair engineers close to the equipment.  
It causes an injury with tools or disassembled parts.  
Do not bring a child  
close to the equipment.  
Please inform the users so that the third party (a child, etc.) does not approach the equipment.  
Connect the cut-off lead cables with crimp contact, etc, put the closed end side  
upward and then apply a water-cut method, otherwise a leak or production of fire is  
caused at the users’ side.  
Insulating measures  
When repairing the refrigerating cycle, take the following measures.  
1) Be attentive to fire around the cycle. When using a gas stove, etc, be sure to put out fire  
before work; otherwise the oil mixed with refrigerant gas may catch fire.  
2) Do not use a welder in the closed room. When using it without ventilation, carbon  
monoxide poisoning may be caused.  
No fire  
3) Do not bring inflammables close to the refrigerant cycle, otherwise fire of the welder may  
catch the inflammables.  
Check the used refrigerant name and use tools and materials of the parts which  
match with it.  
For the products which use R410A refrigerant, the refrigerant name is indicated at a  
position on the outdoor unit where is easy to see. To prevent miss-charging, the route of the  
service port is changed from one of the former R22.  
For an air conditioner which uses R410A, never use other refrigerant than R410A.  
For an air conditioner which uses other refrigerant (R22, etc.), never use R410A.  
If different types of refrigerant are mixed, abnormal high pressure generates in the refriger-  
ating cycle and an injury due to breakage may be caused.  
Do not charge refrigerant additionally.  
If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas leaks, the refrigerant composition in  
the refrigerating cycle changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteristics or  
refrigerant over the specified standard amount is charged and an abnormal high pressure is  
applied to the inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of breakage or injury.  
Therefore if the refrigerant gas leaks, recover the refrigerant in the air conditioner, execute  
vacuuming, and then newly recharge the specified amount of liquid refrigerant. In this time,  
never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount.  
Refrigerant  
When recharging the refrigerant in the refrigerating cycle, do not mix the refrigerant  
or air other than R410A into the specified refrigerant.  
If air or others is mixed with the refrigerant, abnormal high pressure generates in the  
refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of injury due to breakage.  
After installation work, check the refrigerant gas does not leak.  
If the refrigerant gas leaks in the room, poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire  
such as fan heater, stove or cocking stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.  
Never recover the refrigerant into the outdoor unit.  
When the equipment is moved or repaired, be sure to recover the refrigerant with recover-  
ing device. The refrigerant cannot be recovered in the outdoor unit; otherwise a serious  
accident such as breakage or injury is caused.  
After repair work, surely assemble the disassembled parts, and connect and lead the  
removed cables as before. Perform the work so that the cabinet or panel does not  
catch the inner cables.  
If incorrect assembly or incorrect cable connection was done, a disaster such as a leak or  
fire is caused at user’s side.  
Assembly/Cabling  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
After the work has finished, be sure to use an insulation tester set (500V mugger) to  
check the resistance is 2MΩ or more between the charge section and the non-charge  
metal section (Earth position).  
If the resistance value is low, a disaster such as a leak or electric shock is caused at user’s  
side.  
Insulator check  
Ventilation  
When the refrigerant gas leaks during work, execute ventilation.  
If the refrigerant gas touches to a fire, poisonous gas generates. A case of leakage of the  
refrigerant and the closed room full with gas is dangerous because a shortage of oxygen  
occurs. Be sure to execute ventilation.  
When checking the circuit inevitably under condition of the power-ON, use rubber  
gloves and others not to touch to the charging section.  
If touching to the charging section, an electric shock may be caused.  
Be attentive to  
electric shock  
When the refrigerant gas leaks, find up the leaked position and repair it surely.  
If the leaked position cannot be found up and the repair work is interrupted, pump-down  
and tighten the service valve, otherwise the refrigerant gas may leak into the room.  
The poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire such as fan heater, stove or cocking  
stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.  
When installing equipment which includes a large amount of charged refrigerant such  
as a multi air conditioner in a sub-room, it is necessary that the density does not the  
limit even if the refrigerant leaks.  
Compulsion  
If the refrigerant leaks and exceeds the limit density, an accident of shortage of oxygen is  
caused.  
For the installation/moving/reinstallation work, follow to the Installation Manual.  
If an incorrect installation is done, a trouble of the refrigerating cycle, water leak, electric  
shock or fire is caused.  
After repair work has finished, check there is no trouble.  
If check is not executed, a fire, electric shock or injury may be caused. For a check, turn off  
the power breaker.  
After repair work (installation of front panel and cabinet) has finished, execute a test  
run to check there is no generation of smoke or abnormal sound.  
Check after rerair  
If check is not executed, a fire or an electric shock is caused. Before test run, install the  
front panel and cabinet.  
Check the following items after reinstallation.  
1) The earth wire is correctly connected.  
2) The power cord is not caught in the product.  
3) There is no inclination or unsteadiness and the installation is stable.  
If check is not executed, a fire, an electric shock or an injury is caused.  
Check after reinstallation  
CAUTION  
Be sure to put on gloves (∗) during repair work.  
If not putting on gloves, an injury may be caused with the parts, etc.  
(∗) Heavy gloves such as work gloves  
Put on gloves  
Cooling check  
When the power was turned on, start to work after the equipment has been  
sufficiently cooled.  
As temperature of the compressor pipes and others became high due to cooling/heating  
operation, a burn may be caused.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Tools  
(1) Required Tools for R410A  
• New Refrigerant (R410A)  
This air conditioner adopts a new HFC type refrigerant (R410A) which does not deplete the ozone layer.  
Mixing of different types of oil may cause generation of sludge, clogging of capillary, etc.  
Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types.  
1. Safety Caution Concerned to New Refrigerant  
1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22))  
2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
The pressure of R410A is high 1.6 times of that of the former refrigerant (R22). Accompanied with change of  
refrigerant, the refrigerating oil has been also changed.Therefore, be sure that water, dust, the former refriger-  
ant or the former refrigerating oil is not mixed into the refrigerating cycle of the air conditioner with new refriger-  
ant during installation work or service work. If an incorrect work or incorrect service is performed, there is a  
possibility to cause a serious accident. Use the tools and materials exclusive to R410A to purpose a safe work.  
The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.  
Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)  
2. Cautions on Installation/Service  
(1) Do not mix the other refrigerant or refrigerating oil.  
Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability  
For the tools exclusive to R410A, shapes of all the joints including the service port differ from those of the  
former refrigerant in order to prevent mixture of them.  
R410A  
Conventional air  
conditioner installation  
air conditioner installation  
No.  
Used tool  
Usage  
Existence of  
Whether conven-  
new equipment tional equipment can can be used with  
Whether new equipment  
(2) As the use pressure of the new refrigerant is high, use material thickness of the pipe and tools which are  
specified for R410A.  
for R410A  
be used  
conventional refrigerant  
(3) In the installation time, use clean pipe materials and work with great attention so that water and others do  
not mix in because pipes are affected by impurities such as water, oxide scales, oil, etc. Use the clean  
pipes.  
Flare tool  
Pipe flaring  
Ye s  
*(Note 1)  
Ye s  
Copper pipe gauge for  
adjusting projection  
margin  
Flaring by conventional  
flare tool  
Ye s  
Ye s  
*(Note 1)  
No  
*(Note 1)  
No  
Be sure to brazing with flowing nitrogen gas. (Never use gas other than nitrogen gas.)  
(4) For the earth protection, use a vacuum pump for air purge.  
Torque wrench  
Gauge manifold  
Charge hose  
Connection of flare nut  
(5) R410A refrigerant is azeotropic mixture type refrigerant.Therefore use liquid type to charge the refrigerant.  
(If using gas for charging, composition of the refrigerant changes and then characteristics of the air condi-  
tioner change.)  
Evacuating, refrigerant  
charge, run check, etc.  
Ye s  
No  
No  
Vacuum pump adapter Vacuum evacuating  
Ye s  
Ye s  
No  
Ye s  
Ye s  
3. Pipe Materials  
For the refrigerant pipes, copper pipe and joints are mainly used. It is necessary to select the most appropriate  
pipes to conform to the standard. Use clean material in which impurities adhere inside of pipe or joint to a  
minimum.  
Electronic balance for  
Refrigerant charge  
refrigerant charging  
Ye s  
Refrigerant cylinder  
Leakage detector  
Charging cylinder  
Refrigerant charge  
Gas leakage check  
Refrigerant charge  
Ye s  
Ye s  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Ye s  
No  
(1) Copper pipe  
(Note 2)  
(Note 1) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projection  
<Piping>  
margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary.  
The pipe thickness, flare finishing size, flare nut and others differ according to a refrigerant type.  
(Note 2) Charging cylinder for R410A is being currently developed.  
When using a long copper pipe for R410A, it is recommended to select “Copper or copper-base pipe without  
seam” and one with bonded oil amount 40mg/10m or less. Also do not use crushed, deformed, discolored  
(especially inside) pipes. (Impurities cause clogging of expansion valves and capillary tubes.)  
General tools (Conventional tools can be used.)  
<Flare nut>  
Use the flare nuts which are attached to the air conditioner unit.  
In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary  
as the general tools.  
(1) Vacuum pump  
(7) Screwdriver (+, –)  
Use vacuum pump by  
attaching vacuum pump adapter.  
(2) Joint  
(8) Spanner or Monkey wrench  
(9) Hole core drill  
The flare joint and socket joint are used for joints of the copper pipe.The joints are rarely used for installa-  
tion of the air conditioner. However clear impurities when using them.  
(2) Torque wrench  
(3) Pipe cutter  
(4) Reamer  
(10) Hexagon wrench (Opposite side 4mm)  
(11) Tape measure  
(12) Metal saw  
(5) Pipe bender  
(6) Level vial  
Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check.  
(1) Clamp meter  
(2) Thermometer  
(3) Insulation resistance tester (Megger)  
(4) Electroscope (Volt meter)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Recharge of Refrigerant  
When recharge of the refrigerant is required, charge the new refrigerant with the specified amount in the  
procedure as described below.  
Recover the refrigerant and check there is no refrigerant in the  
equipment.  
Leave it as it is for 1 to 2 minutes and check the indicator  
of the compound gauge does not return.  
Connect the charge hose to the packed valve service ports at gas  
side, liquid side, and balance side of the outdoor unit.  
Set the refrigerant cylinder on the electronic balance,  
connect the charge hose to connecting ports of the  
cylinder and the electronic gauge, and then charge the  
liquid refrigerant from the service port at liquid side.  
(Shield with the gauge manifold so that refrigerant does  
not flow to gas side.)  
Connect the charge hose to vacuum pump adaptor.  
Open the packed valves of the balance pipe fully at liquid and gas  
(Charge the refrigerant as below.)  
sides, and then return the valve at gas side a little to the closed side.  
Low-  
High-  
Open fully PMV of the outdoor unit.  
pressure gauge pressure gauge  
• Turn on power of the outdoor unit.  
• Short CN30 on I/F P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
Connected to  
indoor unit  
Valve fully closed  
(gas side)  
•
Turn off power of the outdoor unit within 2 minutes after shorting CN30.  
Gauge  
manifold  
V
L
VH  
Main  
pipe  
Center unit  
Open fully the handle on the Low side of the gauge manifold, and  
then turn on the power of vacuum pump for vacuuming.  
Brazed  
Service  
port  
Reducing  
valve  
Ø6.4  
Copper pipe  
Fully  
tightened  
When the pressure has lowered until indication of the compound  
gauge pointed –0.1MPa (–76cmHg), open fully the handle Low and  
turn off the power of vacuum pump.  
Service port  
Valve fully closed  
(liquid side)  
Fully  
tightened  
Nitrogen  
gas  
Never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount.  
Do not charge the additional refrigerant.  
Ø6.4  

‚
Copper pipe  
Valve fully closed  
(balance)  
If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas  
leaks, the refrigerant composition in the refrigerating cycle  
changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteris-  
tics or refrigerant over the specified standard amount is  
charged and an abnormal high pressure is applied to the  
inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of  
breakage or injury.  
Connected to other  
terminal units  
4mm-hexagonal wrench is required.  
Set the equipment so that liquid refrigerant can be charged.  

‚
When using a cylinder with siphon pipe, liquid can be charged without inverting the cylinder.  
[ Cylinder with siphon ]  
[ Cylinder without siphon ]  
Gauge manifold  
Gauge manifold  
Siphon  
OUTDOOR unit  
OUTDOOR unit  
c y l i n d e r  
a n t i g e r R e f r  
Refrigerant  
cylinder  
Electronic  
balance  
Electronic  
balance  
R410A refrigerant is consisted with HFC mixed refrigerant.  
Therefore if the refrigerant gas is charged, the composition  
of the charged refrigerant changes and characteristics of  
the equipment changes.  
6. Environmental concern  
Use “Vacuum pump method” for an air purge (Discharge of air in the connecting pipe) in installation time.  
• Do not discharge flon gas into the air to protect the earth environment.  
• Using the vacuum pump method, clear the remaining air (Nitrogen, etc.) in the unit. If the air remains, the  
pressure in the refrigerating cycle becomes abnormally high and an injury could occur through failure of  
the product.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. OUTLINE  
“Super Heat Recovery Multi System” is a multi air conditioning system which enables each  
indoor unit in a refrigerant line to independently select cooling or heating operation.  
As it is able to operate simultaneously in cooling and heating modes, further heat recovery  
becomes possible.This system is most suitable for a building etc. where cool and hot air are  
mixed, such as a building where there are large temperature differences between rooms,  
caused by the influence of daylight or where used in a server room and permanent cooling is  
required.  
Heating and cooling operation are automatically selected in individual unit;  
You can save time for operation.  
For example, when heating is required for early morning and cooling for daytime, a Flow Selector Unit provides  
automatically a smooth selection of heating or cooling operation.  
Therefore you can obtain a comfortable room environment without feeling somewhat out of place and moreover  
you can save time to select heat/cool operation.  
INFORMATION  
The Super Heat Recovery Multi system is different from that of the conventional Multi air conditioner in several  
ways such as the heating and cooling operations are mixed and only a part of the air conditioning system  
operates in cooling function.  
For this reason, the following table explains the operation modes of this air conditioner.  
The following table explains the representation of the operation modes within this Manual.  
Operation mode  
Operation mode  
1. All Cooling  
Outline  
All indoor units are under cooling operation only.  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as condenser.  
2. All Heating  
All indoor units are under heating operation only.  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as evaporator.  
3. Simultaneous operation  
MIU for simultaneous operation  
3-1. Mainly cooling, partly Indoor units are under heating/cooling simultaneous operation with subjective cooling operation  
heating operation Outdoor heat exchanger (Sub heat exchanger) is used as condenser.  
3-2. Mainly heating, partly Indoor units are under heating/cooling simultaneous operation with subjective heating operation  
cooling operation  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as evaporator.  
4. Defrost  
Using the reversing operation of the 4-way valve, ice on the outdoor heat exchanger is dissolved  
within single cooling cycle.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1. Component Multi Using High-efficiency Refrigerant R410A  
1. Outdoor units  
Inverter unit  
Corresponding HP  
Appearance  
8 HP  
10 HP  
MAP1002FT8  
28.0  
12 HP  
MAP1202FT8  
33.5  
Model name Heat pump  
Cooling capacity (kW)  
MMY- MAP0802FT8  
22.4  
25.0  
13  
Heating capacity (kW)  
31.5  
37.5  
No. of connectable indoor units  
16  
20  
2. Combination of outdoor units  
Corresponding HP  
16 HP  
18 HP  
AP1802FT8  
50.4  
20 HP  
AP2002FT8  
56.0  
24 HP  
26 HP  
AP2602FT8  
73.0  
28 HP  
AP2802FT8  
78.5  
30 HP  
AP3002FT8  
84.0  
Combined Model  
MMY- AP1602FT8  
AP2402FT8  
68.0  
Cooling capacity (kW)  
Heating capacity (kW)  
45.0  
50.0  
8 HP  
8 HP  
—
56.5  
63.0  
76.5  
81.5  
88.0  
95.0  
10 HP  
8 HP  
10 HP  
10 HP  
—
8 HP  
8 HP  
8 HP  
40  
10 HP  
8 HP  
10 HP  
10 HP  
8 HP  
10 HP  
10 HP  
10 HP  
48  
Combined outdoor units  
—
8 HP  
No. of connectable indoor units  
27  
30  
33  
43  
47  
3. Branching joints and headers  
Model name  
Usage  
Appearance  
RBM-BY53FE Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
RBM-BY103FE Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
RBM-BY53E Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Total below 6.4  
Total below 14.2  
Total below 6.4  
Total below 14.2  
Total below 25.2  
Total below 25.2  
Total below 25.2  
Total below 25.2  
Total below 14.2  
Total below 25.2  
Total below 14.2  
Total below 25.2  
Total below 14.2  
Total below 25.2  
Total below 14.2  
Total below 25.2  
For 3 piping  
For 2 piping (∗5)  
For 3 piping  
RBM-BY103E Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
RBM-BY203FE Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
RBM-BY303FE Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
RBM-BY203E Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
RBM-BY303E Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Y-shape branching joint (∗3)  
For 2 piping (∗5)  
For 3 piping  
RBM-1043FE  
RBM-2043FE  
RBM-1043E  
RBM-2043E  
RBM-1083FE  
RBM-2083FE  
RBM-1083E  
RBM-2083E  
Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
Indoor unit capacity code (∗1)  
4-branching header (∗4)  
For 2 piping (∗5)  
For 3 piping  
8-branching header (∗4)  
For 2 piping (∗5)  
The following 3 types of T joint pipes are supplied as 1 set.  
• Balance pipe (Ø9.5) × 1  
• Liquid side  
(Corresponded dia. Ø12.7 to Ø19.1) × 1  
• Suction gas side  
(Corresponded dia. Ø22.2 to Ø34.9) × 1  
T-branch joint  
BT13-FE  
• Discharge gas side  
(Corresponded dia. Ø19.1 to Ø22.2) × 1  
∗1 “Capacity code” can be obtained from page 11, 12. (Capacity code is not actual capacity)  
∗2 If the total capacity code value of indoor unit exceeds that of the outdoor unit, apply capacity code of the outdoor unit.  
∗3 When using a Y-shape branching joint for 1st branching, select according to the capacity code of the outdoor unit.  
∗4 Max. 6.0 capacity code in total can be connected.  
∗5 This is used for branching to “cooling only” indoor unit.  
∗6 Model names for outdoor described in this guide are shortened because of the space constraint.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Flow selector units (FS unit)  
Model name  
Usage  
Appearance  
RBM-Y1121FE  
Capacity rank for indoor unit :Type 007 to 030  
RBM-Y1801FE  
RBM-Y2802FE  
Capacity rank for indoor unit :Type 036 to 056  
Capacity rank for indoor unit :Type 018 to 096  
* Accessory part (Sold separately): Connection cable kit (RBC-CBK15FE), up to 15m.  
5. Indoor units  
Cooling  
capacity (kW) capacity (kW)  
Heating  
Type  
Appearance  
Model name  
Capacity rank Capacity code  
MMU-AP0091H  
MMU-AP0121H  
MMU-AP0151H,  
MMU-AP0181H  
MMU-AP0241H  
MMU-AP0271H  
MMU-AP0301H  
MMU-AP0361H  
MMU-AP0481H  
MMU-AP0561H  
MMU-AP0071WH  
MMU-AP0091WH  
MMU-AP0121WH  
MMU-AP0151WH  
MMU-AP0181WH  
MMU-AP0241WH  
MMU-AP0271WH  
MMU-AP0301WH  
009 type  
012 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
027 type  
030 type  
036 type  
048 type  
056 type  
007 type  
009 type  
012 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
027 type  
030 type  
1
2.8  
3.6  
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
9.0  
11.2  
14.0  
16.0  
2.2  
2.8  
3.6  
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
9.0  
3.2  
4.0  
1.25  
1.7  
2
5.0  
6.3  
2.5  
3
8.0  
4-way Air Discharge  
Cassette Type  
9.0  
3.2  
4
10.0  
12.5  
16.0  
18.0  
2.5  
5
6
0.8  
1
3.2  
1.25  
1.7  
2
4.0  
5.0  
2-way Air Discharge  
Cassette Type  
6.3  
2.5  
3
8.0  
9.0  
3.2  
10.0  
MMU-AP0481WH  
(CHINA only)  
048 type  
5
14.0  
16.0  
MMU-AP0071YH  
MMU-AP0091YH  
MMU-AP0121YH  
MMU-AP0151SH  
MMU-AP0181SH  
MMU-AP0241SH  
007 type  
009 type  
012 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
0.8  
1
2.2  
2.8  
3.6  
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
2.5  
3.2  
4.0  
5.0  
6.3  
8.0  
1.25  
1.7  
2
1-way Air Discharge  
Cassette Type  
2.5  
MMU-AP0152SH  
MMU-AP0182SH  
MMU-AP0242SH  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
1.7  
2
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
5.0  
6.3  
8.0  
2.5  
MMD-AP0071BH  
MMD-AP0091BH  
MMD-AP0121BH  
MMD-AP0151BH  
MMD-AP0181BH  
MMD-AP0241BH  
MMD-AP0271BH  
MMD-AP0301BH  
MMD-AP0361BH  
MMD-AP0481BH  
MMD-AP0561BH  
007 type  
009 type  
012 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
027 type  
030 type  
036 type  
048 type  
056 type  
0.8  
1
2.2  
2.8  
2.5  
3.2  
1.25  
1.7  
2
3.6  
4.0  
4.5  
5.0  
5.6  
6.3  
Concealed Duct  
Standard Type  
2.5  
3
7.1  
8.0  
8.0  
9.0  
3.2  
4
9.0  
10.0  
12.5  
16.0  
18.0  
11.2  
14.0  
16.0  
5
6
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cooling  
Heating  
Type  
Appearance  
Model name  
Capacity rank Capacity code  
capacity (kW) capacity (kW)  
MMD-AP0181H  
MMD-AP0241H  
MMD-AP0271H  
MMD-AP0361H  
MMD-AP0481H  
MMD-AP0071SPH  
MMD-AP0091SPH  
MMD-AP0121SPH  
MMD-AP0151SPH  
MMD-AP0181SPH  
MMC-AP0151H  
MMC-AP0181H  
MMC-AP0241H  
MMC-AP0271H  
MMC-AP0361H  
MMC-AP0481H  
MMK-AP0071H  
MMK-AP0091H  
MMK-AP0121H  
MMK-AP0151H  
MMK-AP0181H  
MMK-AP0241H  
MMK-AP0072H  
MMK-AP0092H  
MMK-AP0122H  
MML-AP0071H  
MML-AP0091H  
MML-AP0121H  
MML-AP0151H  
MML-AP0181H  
MML-AP0241H  
MML-AP0071BH  
MML-AP0091BH  
MML-AP0121BH  
MML-AP0151BH  
MML-AP0181BH  
MML-AP0241BH  
MMF-AP0151H  
MMF-AP0181H  
MMF-AP0241H  
MMF-AP0271H  
MMF-AP0361H  
MMF-AP0481H  
MMF-AP0561H  
018 type  
024 type  
027 type  
036 type  
048 type  
007 type  
009 type  
012 type  
015 type  
018 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
027 type  
036 type  
048 type  
007 type  
009 type  
012 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
007 type  
009 type  
012 type  
007 type  
009 type  
012 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
007 type  
009 type  
012 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
015 type  
018 type  
024 type  
027 type  
036 type  
048 type  
056 type  
2
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
11.2  
14.0  
2.2  
2.8  
3.6  
4.5  
5.6  
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
11.2  
14.0  
2.2  
2.8  
3.6  
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
2.2  
2.8  
3.6  
2.2  
2.8  
3.6  
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
2.2  
2.8  
3.6  
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
4.5  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
11.2  
14.0  
16.0  
6.3  
8.0  
9.0  
12.5  
16.0  
2.5  
3.2  
1.0  
5.0  
6.3  
5.0  
6.3  
8.0  
9.0  
12.5  
16.0  
2.5  
3.2  
4.0  
5.0  
6.3  
8.0  
2.5  
3.2  
4.0  
2.5  
3.2  
4.0  
5.0  
6.3  
8.0  
2.5  
3.2  
4.0  
5.0  
6.3  
8.0  
5.0  
6.3  
8.0  
9.0  
12.5  
16.0  
18.0  
2.5  
3
Concealed Duct  
High Static  
Pressure Type  
4
5
0.8  
1
Slim Duct Type  
1.25  
1.7  
2
1.7  
2
2.5  
3
Under Ceiling Type  
4
5
0.8  
1
1.25  
1.7  
2
High Wall Type  
2.5  
0.8  
1
1.25  
0.8  
1
1.25  
1.7  
2
Floor Standing  
Cabinet Type  
2.5  
0.8  
1
1.25  
1.7  
2
Floor Standing  
Concealed Type  
2.5  
1.7  
2
2.5  
3
Floor Standing Type  
4
5
6
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Remote controllers  
Name  
Wired remote controller  
Simple wired remote controller  
Weekly timer  
CODE No.  
SuMoTuWeTh Fr Sa  
SET DATA SETTING TEST  
PROGRAM1  
UNIT No.  
TEST  
SETTING  
˚C  
˚F  
ERROR  
PROGRAM2  
PROGRAM3  
R.C.  
No.  
H
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
Appearance  
WEEKLY TIMER  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
TIME  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
Model name  
Name  
RBC-AMT31E  
RBC-AS21E  
RBC-EXW21E  
Wireless remote controller kit  
Receiver section  
Receiver section  
mounted separately  
Receiver section  
Appearance  
Model name  
Type  
RBC-AX2U (W)-E  
RBC-AX22CE  
TCB-AX21E  
Under Ceiling type  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette  
type (MMU-AP✽✽✽2SH Series)  
4-way Air Discharge  
Cassette type  
Separate sensor type  
Name  
Central remote controller  
ZONE  
ALL  
ZONE  
GROUP  
CODE  
No.  
1234  
TEST  
UNIT No.  
SET DATA  
SETTING  
R.C.  
No.  
Appearance  
GROUP  
SELECT  
ZONE  
CL SET  
Model name  
Type  
TCB-SC642TLE  
64 system center controller  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PMV  
LM2  
3
3
LM1  
3
3
FM  
1
1
2
2
4
4
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
1
2
2
4
4
5
5
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
FS  
CN334  
(BLU)  
CN333  
(WHI)  
CN82  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
CN33  
(WHI)  
CN34  
(RED)  
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
3
3
1
1
CN68  
(BLU)  
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
RY302  
RY303  
CN104  
(YEL)  
DM  
TA  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
Motor drive  
circuit  
1
2
3
CN304  
(GRY)  
TCJ  
TC2  
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
Indoor control P.C. board  
MCC-1402  
Fuse  
T6.3A  
250V~  
Fuse  
T3.15A  
250V~  
1
2
3
1
2
3
RED  
~
CN100  
(BRN)  
+
DC20V  
1
2
3
1
2
3
Power  
supply  
circuit  
CN67  
(BLK)  
DC15V  
DC12V  
DC7V  
TC1  
~
WHI  
1
2
3
CN80  
(GRN)  
PNL  
P301  
BLK  
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
1
2
1
2
CN66  
(WHI)  
CN73  
(RED)  
EXCT  
RED  
WHI  
1
2
1
2
CN44  
(BLN)  
CN50  
(WHI)  
CN32  
(WHI)  
CN61  
(YEL)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN81  
(BLK)  
CN40  
(BLU)  
CN41 CN309  
CN20 CN70  
(BLU) (WHI)  
Filter input  
Indoor unit  
(BLU)  
(YEL)  
Closed end  
connector  
R(L) S(N)  
T10  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
Earth screw  
1
3
(Fandrive)  
(Option)  
Power supply  
Single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
TR  
1.  
indicates the terminal block, letter at inside  
indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site.  
1
1
2
2
Network adaptor  
(Option)  
CN01  
(WHI)  
U1  
U
2
A B  
3.  
indicates the control P.C. board.  
BLK  
WHI  
3
2
1
3
2
1
Network  
adaptor  
P.C. board  
MCC-1401  
Symbol  
Parts name  
CN02  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
2
CN03  
(RED)  
FM  
TA  
Fan motor  
U
1
U2  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Outdoor unit  
TC1  
X Y  
WHI  
BLK  
WHI  
BLK  
TCJ  
Temp sensor  
CN1  
CN001  
(WHI)  
(WHI)  
TC2  
Temp sensor  
Color identification  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
LM1, LM2  
DM  
Louver motor  
RED : RED  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
GRN : GREEN  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
FS  
RY302  
PMV  
Drain control relay  
Pulse Motor Valve  
Wired remote  
controller  
Adaptor for wireless  
remote controller  
BRN : BROWN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHI  
RED  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RC  
LM  
PMV  
1
1
2
2
DM  
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
FM  
FS  
BLK  
RED  
DP  
(BLU)  
CN068  
LM  
(GRN)  
CN033  
FS  
PMV  
(BLU)  
CN082  
FAN  
CN083(WHI)  
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
(RED)  
CN030  
9
H
M
L
UL  
1
2
1
2
Color  
indication  
CN104  
(YEL)  
RY007  
TA  
RED : RED  
P301  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRW : BROWN  
GRN : GREEN  
(BLK)  
RY002  
RY001  
TCJ  
TC2  
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
RY006  
1
2
3
CN304  
(GRY)  
RY004  
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN100  
(BRW)  
TC1  
Indoor control P.C. board  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN039  
(YEL)  
CN080  
(GRN)  
RY005  
PNL  
Fuse  
T5.0A  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
CN073  
(RED)  
EXCT  
CN067  
(BLK)  
250V~  
1
2
1
2
CN070  
(WHI)  
Filter  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
Power supply  
circuit  
CN066  
(WHI)  
CN081  
(BLK)  
1
2
CN044  
(BRW)  
CN040 CN041  
(BLU) (BLU)  
CN050  
(WHI)  
CN075  
(WHI)  
CN061  
(YEL)  
CN032  
(WHI)  
CN060  
(WHI)  
CN074  
(WHI)  
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Option  
Fan drive  
TR  
Closed end  
connector  
CN02  
(YEL)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Symbol  
FM  
Parts name  
Sub P.C. board  
MCC-1520  
Fan motor  
Indoor unit  
Line Filter  
RC  
Running capacitor  
Transformer  
Earth screw  
R(L) S(N)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN01  
(WHI)  
TR  
Network  
adaptor  
(Option)  
1
1
2
2
Power supply  
Single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
CN01  
(WHI)  
U1  
U
2
A B X Y  
LM  
Louver motor  
TA  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
3
1
3
2
1
TC1,TC2,TCJ  
RY001  
RY002  
RY004  
RY005~007  
FS  
TR  
1
2
1
2
Louver control relay  
Drain control relay  
Heater control relay  
Fan motor control relay  
Float switch  
CN03  
(RED)  
U1  
U2  
CN02  
(BLU)  
MCC-1401  
CN1  
(WHI)  
1.  
indicates the terminal block, letter at inside  
indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site.  
3. indicates the control P.C. board.  
1
1
2
2
Outdoor unit  
DM  
Drain pump motor  
Pulse Motor Valve  
Remote controller  
PMV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
DM  
PMV  
LM  
FS  
FM  
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
RC  
DP  
(BLU)  
CN068  
LM  
(GRN)  
CN033  
FS  
PMV  
(BLU)  
CN082  
FAN  
CN083(WHI)  
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
(RED)  
CN030  
H
M
L
UL  
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
Color  
RY007  
indication  
CN301  
(BLK)  
TA  
RED : RED  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRW : BROWN  
GRN : GREEN  
RY002  
RY001  
TCJ  
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
RY006  
Heater  
1
CN304  
(GRY)  
RY004  
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN100  
(BRW)  
TC1  
Indoor control P.C. board  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN309  
(YEL)  
CN080  
(GRN)  
PNL  
RY005  
AC IN  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
CN073  
(RED)  
EXCT  
1
CN067  
(BLK)  
Fuse  
T5.0A  
1
2
CN070  
(WHI)  
Filter  
2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
Power supply  
circuit  
CN066  
(WHI)  
CN081  
(BLK)  
CN044 CN040 CN041  
(BRW) (BLU) (BLU)  
CN050  
(WHI)  
CN075  
(WHI)  
CN061  
(YEL)  
CN032  
(WHI)  
CN060  
(WHI)  
CN074  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
TR  
Option  
Fan drive  
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN02  
(YEL)  
BLU  
MCC-1401  
BLU  
Network  
adaptor  
(Option)  
RED Closed end  
connector  
Sub P.C. board  
MCC-1520  
Line Filter  
Symbol  
FM  
Parts name  
1
1
2
2
CN01  
(WHI)  
Fan motor  
WHI  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
2
1
2
RC  
Running capacitor  
Power transformer  
Louver motor  
CN01  
(WHI)  
Network  
adaptor  
P.C. board  
TR  
BLU  
Indoor unit  
Earth screw  
CN03  
(RED)  
LM  
R(L) S(N)  
U
1
U2  
A B X Y  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
TA  
TR  
AI-NET  
central control  
terminal  
3
3
2
2
1
1
Power supply  
Single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
CN02  
(BLU)  
TC1,TCJ  
RY001  
RY002  
RY004  
RY005~007  
FS  
Louver motor control relay  
Drain pump control relay  
Heater control relay  
Fan motor control relay  
Float switch  
U
1
U
2
1.  
indicates the terminal block, letter at inside  
indicates the terminal number.  
CN1  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
2
Outdoor  
unit  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site.  
3. indicates the control P.C. board.  
Drain pump motor  
DM  
Remote controller  
Pulse Motor Valve  
PMV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
PMV  
LM  
3
4
5
6
DM  
FM  
1
2
2
FS  
FS  
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
1
RC  
DM  
LM  
PMV  
RED BLK ORN BLU YEL  
FAN  
CN083  
(WHI)  
9
7
5
3
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN068  
(BLU)  
CN033  
(GRN)  
CN030  
(RED)  
CN082  
(BLU)  
9
7
5
3
1
H
M
L
UL  
TA  
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
RY007  
P301  
BLK  
RY002  
RY001  
TCJ  
TC2  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
RY004  
(GRY)  
RY006  
1
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
3
1
3
CN304  
1
2
3
1
3
TC1  
CN100  
(BRW)  
RY005  
1
3
Control P.C. board  
for Indoor unit  
MCC-1403  
(YEL)  
CN309  
1
2
3
AC IN  
CN080  
(GRN)  
1
3
1
PNL  
FUSE  
T5.0A 250V~  
3
(BLK)  
CN067  
1
2
CN073  
(RED)  
EXCT  
Filter  
1
2
CN066  
(WHI)  
CN070  
(WHI)  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
Color  
CN044  
(BRW)  
Power supply  
circuit  
CN081  
(BLK)  
indication  
RED : RED  
1
2
CN040  
(BLU)  
CN061  
(YEL)  
CN032  
(WHI)  
CN060  
(WHI)  
CN041  
(BLU)  
CN050  
(WHI)  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRW : BROWN  
GRN : GREEN  
CN075  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN074  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
RC  
EMG  
Fan  
drive  
Option  
CN02  
(YEL)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Network adapter  
1
1
2
2
(Option)  
Sub P.C. board  
MCC-1520  
TR  
CN01(WHI)  
1
1
2
2
3
1
3
2
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN01  
(WHI)  
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
Parts name  
Symbol  
CN02  
(BLU)  
FM  
RC  
TR  
LM  
TA  
Fan motor  
Running capacitor  
Transformer  
Louver motor  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Louver control relay  
Drain control relay  
Fan motor control relay  
Float switch  
Drain pump motor  
Pulse motor valve  
Line Filter  
CN03(RED)  
TR  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
Closed-end  
connector  
1
1
2
2
U1 U2  
A
B
R(L) S(N)  
TC1,TC2,TCJ  
RY001  
RY002  
RY005~007  
FS  
MCC-1401  
X
Y
Power supply  
single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
1. indicates the terminal bolock, letter.  
U1 U2  
1
2
Letter at inside indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate  
the wiring at side.  
1
2
Outdoor unit  
Remote controller  
CN1  
DM  
PMV  
3.  
indicates the control P.C. board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color  
Parts name  
Fan motor  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Louver motor  
Drain pump motor  
Float switsh  
Drain control relay  
Pulse motor valve  
Transformer  
Symbol  
indication  
FM  
TA  
RED: RED  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY: GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN: ORANGE  
BRN: BRWN  
GRN: GREEN  
TC1  
TCJ  
TC2  
LM  
DP  
FS  
RY302  
PMV  
TR  
PMV  
FM  
LM  
High ceiling setup  
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
FS  
CN34  
(RED)  
CN334  
(WHI)  
CN333  
(WHI)  
CN82  
(BLU)  
CN33  
(WHI)  
5
5
4
4
1
1
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
1
3
3
3
2
1
2
1
2
2
CN68  
(BLU)  
CN112 CN111 CN110  
TA  
1
1
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
(WHI)  
(WHI)  
(WHI)  
DP  
RY302  
Motor drive  
circuit  
3
3
1
3
1
3
TCJ  
TC2  
1
2
1
2
CN71  
(CHK)  
CN102  
(RED)  
CN304  
(GRY)  
Fuse  
RY303  
Fuse  
CN72 (DISP)  
T3.15A  
250V~  
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
RED  
WHI  
DC20V  
DC15V  
DC12V  
DC7V  
1
Power  
supply  
circuit  
CN67  
(BLK)  
T6.3A 250V~  
3
1
3
1
3
TC1  
CN100  
(BRW)  
BLK  
P301  
Control P.C. board  
for indoor unit  
MCC-1402  
1
2
CN66  
(WHI)  
1
2
3
Flow selector unit  
earth screw  
CN80  
PNL  
(GRN)  
BLK  
BLU  
1
1
2
2
CN40  
(BLU)  
1
2
CN73  
(RED)  
BLU  
BLK  
1
1
2
2
RED  
EXCT  
Filter  
WHI  
U
1
U2  
A B  
TR  
1
3
1
2
3
WHI  
CN01  
(WHI)  
Closed-end  
CN41  
(BLU)  
1
3
1
2
3
1
2
CN70  
(WHI)  
connector  
CN02  
(BLU)  
CN309 CN50  
(YEL) (WHI)  
CN061  
(YEL)  
CN32  
(WHI)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN81  
(BLK)  
CN20  
(BLU)  
CN03  
(RED)  
BLK  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
WHI  
BLK  
1
1
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
2
2
R(L) S(N)  
T10  
Fan  
drive  
Option  
GRL  
MCC-1401  
U
1
U
2
A
B
1
1
2
2
Outdoor  
unit  
Power supply  
single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
AI-NET  
X Y  
CN001(WHI)  
1. indicates the terminal bolock letter.  
Letter at inside indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the  
wiring at side  
Wired  
Adapter for  
wireless remote  
controller  
Network adapter  
(Option)  
remote  
controller  
3.  
indicates a control P.C. board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM  
5
4
5
4
PMV  
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
FS  
CN333  
(WHI)  
CN82  
(BLU)  
CN33  
(WHI)  
CN34  
(RED)  
5
5
4
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
3
3
1
1
CN68  
(BLU)  
3
1
2
3
4
5
2
CN334  
(WHI)  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
RY302  
CN104  
(YEL)  
DM  
TA  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
Motor drive  
circuit  
1
2
3
CN304  
(GRY)  
TCJ  
TC2  
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
Indoor control P.C. board  
Fuse  
Fuse  
1
2
3
1
2
3
T6.3A  
T3.15A  
RED  
~
~
CN100  
(BRN)  
+
DC20V  
1
2
3
1
2
3
Power  
supply  
circuit  
CN67  
(BLK)  
DC15V  
DC12V  
DC7V  
250V~  
P301  
250V~  
TC1  
WHI  
1
2
3
CN80  
(GRN)  
PNL  
1
1
3
2
BLK  
2
1
2
1
2
CN66  
(WHI)  
CN73  
(RED)  
EXCT  
Reactor  
WHI  
1
2
1
2
RED  
CN44  
CN40  
(BLU)  
CN41 CN309  
(BLU) (YEL)  
CN50  
(WHI)  
CN61  
(YEL)  
CN32  
(WHI)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN81  
(BLK)  
CN20 CN70  
(BLU) (WHI)  
(BRW)  
WHI  
Indoor unit  
Closed end  
connector  
T10  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
R(L) S(N)  
(Fan drive) (Signal output)  
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
Earth screw  
Indoor unit power supply  
Single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
TR  
Network  
adaptor  
(Option)  
Color identification  
1
1
2
2
CN01  
(WHI)  
U
1
U2  
A B  
RED : RED  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
GRN : GREEN  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK  
WHI  
3
2
1
3
2
1
Network  
adaptor  
P.C. board  
BRW : BROWN  
CN02  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
2
CN03  
(RED)  
Symbol  
FM  
Parts name  
WHI  
BLK  
WHI  
BLK  
Fan motor  
X Y  
CN1  
(WHI)  
CN001  
(WHI)  
TA  
Indoor temp sensor  
Indoor temp sensor  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
U1  
U2  
TC1,TC2,TCJ  
DM  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
Outdoor unit  
1.  
indicates the terminal block, letter at inside  
indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site.  
3. indicates the control P.C. board.  
FS  
RY302  
PMV  
Drain pump control relay  
Pulse Motor Valve  
Wired remote  
controller  
Adaputor for wired  
remote controller  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(Option)  
DP  
TC1  
TA  
TCJ  
TC2  
Spark  
killer  
WHI  
8
7
RED  
9
43F1  
Color  
indication  
DP  
(BLU)  
CN068  
LM  
(GRN)  
CN033  
FAN  
CN083(WHI)  
8
8
7
7
6
6
4
4
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
CN100  
(BRN)  
RED : RED  
9
5
3
1
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
FS  
CN030  
(RED)  
CN104 CN102 CN101  
(YEL) (RED) (BLK)  
1
2
3
H
M
L
UL  
(BLK)  
RY007  
CN080  
(GRN)  
P301  
PNL  
1
2
CN073  
(RED)  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRW : BROWN  
GRN : GREEN  
EXCT  
Filter  
1
2
3
RY002  
RY001  
CN304  
(GRY)  
RY004  
RY006  
1
2
CN070  
(WHI)  
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
CN309  
(YEL)  
Indoor control P.C. board  
RY005  
CN081  
(BLK)  
CN067  
(BLK)  
1
2
3
1
2
3
Fuse  
T5.0A  
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
2
1
3
4
6
5
2
1
3
4
6
Power  
supply  
circuit  
1
2
CN066  
(WHI)  
CN082  
(BLU)  
PMV  
CN044 CN040 CN041  
(BRW) (BLU) (BLU)  
CN050  
(WHI)  
CN061  
(YEL)  
CN032  
(WHI)  
CN060  
(WHI)  
CN074  
(WHI)  
CN075  
(WHI)  
1
EMG  
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
RC  
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
TR  
Option  
Fan drive  
T10  
OC  
Network adaptor  
(Option)  
CN02  
(YEL)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
MCC-1401  
1
1
2
2
CN01  
(WHI)  
Sub P.C. board  
MCC-1520  
U1  
U2  
A B  
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
3
1
3
2
1
CN01  
(WHI)  
U1  
U2  
CN1  
(WHI)  
CN02  
(BLU)  
RED  
WHI  
TR  
CN03  
(RED)  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
Outdoor unit  
Symbol  
FM  
Parts name  
Closed  
end  
Remote controller  
X Y  
Fan motor  
connector  
1.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site.  
3. indicates the control P.C. board.  
indicates the terminal block, letter at inside indicates the terminal number.  
RC  
Running capacitor  
Transformer  
RED  
F
RED  
WHI  
TR  
A
RED  
6
4
5
3
T10A,250V~  
4. When attaching a drain pump, exchange CN030 connector with the connector  
of the float switch.  
5. A part is connected to the terminal block.  
When exchanging to the outside static pressure necessary at the local site,  
check the terminal No. and lead color of the fan motor in the below diagram,  
and then exchange the lead wire indicated by the arrow mark (  
TA  
Indoor temp sensor  
43F1  
43F1  
TC1,TC2,TCJ Temp sensor  
RY005~007  
RY001  
RY002  
PMV  
Fan motor control relay  
YEL  
RC  
R(L)  
S(N)  
Louver motor control relay  
Drain control relay  
Pulse Motor Valve  
Fuse  
Closed end  
connector  
).  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Indoor unit  
Earth screw  
GRY  
Wired for MMD-AP0481 only  
BLU  
F
Power supply  
Single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
(BRN Wire)  
FM  
43F1  
DM  
Fan motor control relay  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
ORN  
BLK  
Sold  
separately  
BRN  
WHI  
GRY  
49F  
FS  
Motor over heating protection sRwEitDch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PMV  
LM  
3
3
FM  
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
1
1
2
2
4
4
5
5
FS  
CN334  
(WHI)  
CN333  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN82  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
CN33  
(WHI)  
CN34  
(RED)  
5
5
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
1
3
3
CN68  
(BLU)  
3
2
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
RY302  
RY303  
CN104  
(YEL)  
DM  
TA  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
Motor drive  
circuit  
CN304  
(GRY)  
1
2
3
TCJ  
TC2  
Indoor control P.C. board  
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
Fuse  
T3.15A  
~
+
DC20V  
DC15V  
DC12V  
DC7V  
1
2
3
1
2
3
Power  
supply  
circuit  
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN67  
Fuse  
T6.3A  
250V~  
P301  
CN100  
(BRW)  
(BLK)  
~
TC1  
BLK  
1
2
3
CN80  
(GRN)  
PNL  
1
2
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
CN66  
(WHI)  
Indoor unit  
1
2
BLU  
BLU  
CN73  
(RED)  
EXCT  
1
2
1
2
RED  
WHI  
Earth screw  
CN40  
(BLU)  
1
2
BLK  
BLK  
CN70  
(WHI)  
Closed end  
terminal  
FILTER  
1
3
1
2
3
CN41  
(BLU)  
R(L) S(N)  
CN309 CN50  
(YEL) (WHI)  
CN61  
(YEL)  
CN32  
(WHI)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN81  
(BLK)  
CN20  
(BLU)  
Power supply  
single phase  
200-240V 50Hz  
200V 60Hz  
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
T10  
Fandrive  
Option  
GRL  
Network  
adaptor  
(Option)  
TR  
1
1
2
2
CN01  
(WHI)  
Color identification  
U1  
U2  
A B  
RED : RED  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
GRN : GREEN  
BLK  
WHI  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
3
2
1
3
2
1
Network  
adaptor  
P.C. board  
BRW : BROWN  
CN02  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
2
CN03  
(RED)  
Symbol  
FM  
Parts name  
WHI  
BLK  
WHI  
BLK  
X Y  
Fan motor  
CN1  
(WHI)  
CN001  
(WHI)  
TA  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
U1  
U2  
TC,TC2,TCJ  
LM  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
Outdoor unit  
1.  
indicates the terminal block, letter at inside  
indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at site.  
Louver motor  
RY302  
DM  
Drain control relay  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
Sold  
separately  
Wired remote Adaptor for wireless  
controller  
3.  
indicates the control P.C. board.  
FS  
remote controller  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FM  
5
4
5
4
PMV  
1
1
TA  
TCJ  
TC2  
TC1  
1
1
2
2
3
3
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
CN334  
(WHI)  
CN333  
(WHI)  
5
5
4
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
1
3
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
3
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
2
CN82  
(BLU)  
CN33  
(WHI)  
CN34  
(RED)  
CN104 CN102 CN101 CN100  
1
3
1
3
(YEL) (RED) (BLK)  
(BRW)  
CN68  
(BLU)  
RY302  
1
2
CN103  
(GRN)  
Motor drive  
circuit  
1
1
2
3
CN080  
(GRN)  
RY303  
LM  
3
Control P.C. board  
for Indoor unit  
MCC-1402  
CN304  
(GRY)  
FUSE  
T6.3A 250V~  
FUSE  
T3.15A 250V~  
1
2
CN73  
(RED)  
EXCT  
RED  
WHI  
DC20V  
1
1
Power  
supply  
circuit  
DC15V  
DC12V  
DC7V  
1
2
CN70  
(WHI)  
3
3
CN67  
(BLK)  
P301  
BLK  
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
1
2
CN66  
(WHI)  
RED  
Closed-end  
connector  
CN50  
(WHI)  
CN61  
(YEL)  
CN32  
(WHI)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN81  
(BLK)  
CN20  
(BLU)  
CN40  
(BLU)  
CN41  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
3
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
CN309  
(YEL)  
WHI  
Fandrive  
Option  
BLU  
BLU  
R(L) S(N)  
BLK  
BLK  
Power supply  
single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
1
1
2
2
GRY  
TR  
GRY  
1. indicates the terminal bolock.  
Indoor unit  
CN01(WHI)  
CN02  
(BLU)  
BLK  
WHI  
3
1
3
2
1
Letter at inside indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate  
the wiring at side.  
U1 U2  
A
B
X
Y
Earth screw  
3.  
indicates the control P.C. board.  
Color  
indication  
CN03(RED)  
RED : RED  
1
1
2
2
WHI  
BLK WHI  
BLK  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRW : BROWN  
GRN : GREEN  
Parts name  
Fan motor  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Pulse motor valve  
Louver motor  
Symbol  
U1 U2  
FM  
TA  
1
1
CN1  
2
2
1
1
2
2
CN001  
(WHI)  
TC1,TC2,TCJ  
PMV  
Outdoor  
unit  
(WHI)  
Network adaptor  
(Option)  
LM  
Wired remote Adaptor for  
controller wireless remote  
controller  
MCC-1401  
RY303  
Louver control relay  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color identification  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
BRW  
RED  
WHI  
YEL  
BLU  
BLK  
GRY  
PNK  
ORN  
BROWN  
RED  
WHITE  
YELLOW  
BLUE  
BLACK  
GRAY  
PINK  
ORANGE  
GREEN &  
YELLOW  
GREEN  
Louver  
motor  
Pulse motor  
valve  
1. indicates the terminal block, letter at inside  
indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the  
wiring at site.  
Fan  
motor  
BLK  
S
5 4 3 2 1  
6 5 4 3 2  
F
3.  
indicates the control P.C. board.  
GRN & YEL  
Outdoor unit  
HBS  
1 2 3 4 5  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
6 5 4 3  
6 5 4 3  
1
1
:
GRN  
CN22  
6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2  
BLU  
1 1  
2 2  
CN50  
(WHI)  
BLU  
CN82  
(BLU)  
CN210  
(WHI)  
CN33  
(WHI)  
CN44 CN40  
(BRW) (BLU)  
Heat exchanger  
RED  
F301 Fuse  
T3. 15A 250V~  
BLK  
WHI  
3 3  
2
1 1  
CN41  
(BLU)  
1 1  
DC 15V  
WHI  
3 3  
Heat  
BLK  
BLK  
1 1  
2
3 3  
DC 0V  
DC 12V (BRW)  
exchanger  
sensor  
(TC1)  
5
CN100  
Power  
supply  
circuit  
CN67  
(BLK)  
DC 7V  
CN81 (BLK)  
CN213 (WHI)  
BLK  
BLK  
Heat  
1 1  
(BLU) 2 2  
CN101  
exchanger  
sensor  
(TC2)  
CN309  
(YEL)  
GRN & YEL  
1
1
3
3
1 2 3 4 5  
1 2 3 4 5  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10  
1 2 3 4  
7 8 9 10  
1
2
CN103  
(GRN)  
TF  
BLK  
BLK  
Heat  
CN102 1 1  
(YEL) 2 2  
exchanger  
sensor  
(TCJ)  
WHI  
BLK  
(MCC-1510)  
Control P.C.board for indoor unit  
1 2 3 4 5  
9
7 6 5 4 3 2  
1 2  
1 2  
BLK  
BLK  
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
Thermo  
sensor  
(TA)  
1 1  
2 2  
CN104  
(WHI)  
CN32  
(WHI)  
CN61  
(YEL)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN80  
(GRN)  
Infrared rays receive  
and indication parts  
(MCC-861)  
CN1(WHI)  
Power Supply  
Single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
1 2  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
Option  
1 2 3  
Wierd remote  
controller  
(Sold separately)  
Flow selector unit  
(Sold separately)  
Fan drive  
PNL/EMG  
1 2 3 4  
HA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PMV  
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
FM  
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
RC  
PMV  
FS  
RED BLK ORN BLU YEL  
FAN  
CN083  
(WHI)  
9
7
5
3
1
LM  
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
1
3
3
DP  
CN068  
(BLU)  
CN033  
(GRN)  
CN082  
(BLU)  
CN030  
(RED)  
9
7
5
3
1
1
3
3
2
H
M
L
UL  
TA  
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
RY007  
P301  
(BLK)  
RY002  
RY001  
TCJ  
TC2  
TC1  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
RY004  
(GRY)  
RY006  
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
CN304  
1
2
1
2
CN100  
(BRN)  
RY005  
Control P.C. board  
for Indoor unit  
MCC-1403  
(YEL)  
1
2
3
CN309  
CN080  
(GRN)  
AC IN  
RED  
WHI  
PNL  
FUSE  
T5.0A 250V~  
1
2
CN073  
(RED)  
EXCT  
Filter  
CN067  
(BLK)  
1
2
CN070  
(WHI)  
CN066  
(WHI)  
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
CN081  
(BLK)  
Power supply  
circuit  
Color  
indication  
RED : RED  
CN040  
(BLU)  
CN061  
(YEL)  
CN032  
(WHI)  
CN060  
(WHI)  
CN041  
(BLU)  
CN050  
(WHI)  
CN075  
(WHI)  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN074  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
RC  
T10  
Fan  
drive  
Option  
CN02  
(YEL)  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRW : BROWN  
GRN : GREEN  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Network adapter  
1
1
2
2
(Option)  
Sub P.C. board  
MCC-1520  
TR  
CN01(WHI)  
3
1
3
2
1
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
CN01  
(WHI)  
CN02  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Line filter  
Parts name  
Fan motor  
Running capacitor  
Transformer  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Louver control relay  
Drain control relay  
Heater control relay  
Fan motor control relay  
Pulse motor valve  
Symbol  
RED  
Closed-end  
connector  
WHI  
CN03(RED)  
FM  
RC  
TR  
TA  
TR  
1
1
2
2
U1 U2  
A
B
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
MCC-1401  
X Y  
R(L) S(N)  
TC1,TC2,TCJ  
RY001  
RY002  
RY004  
RY005~007  
PMV  
Power supply  
single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
U1 U2  
1. indicates the terminal block.  
1
1
CN1  
2
2
Letter at inside indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate  
the wiring at side.  
Outdoor unit  
Remote controller  
3.  
indicates the control P.C. board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHI  
RED  
1
3
2
4
5
6
1
3
2
4
5
6
RC  
PMV  
2
4
5
6
3
2
4
5
6
3
GRN  
GRN  
FM  
FM  
RED  
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
RC  
RED BLK ORN BLU YEL  
RED BLK ORN BLU YEL  
FAN  
CN083  
(WHI)  
FAN  
CN083  
(WHI)  
9
7
5
3
1
9
7
5
3
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN068  
(BLU)  
CN033  
(GRN)  
PMV  
9
7
5
3
1
9
7
5
3
1
2
H
M
L
UL  
CN030  
(RED)  
CN082  
(BLU)  
TA  
For AP0071BH,AP0091BH,AP0121BH  
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
RY007  
R301  
(BLK)  
RY002  
RY001  
TCJ  
TC2  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
RY004  
RY006  
1
2
1
2
1
3
CN101  
(BLK)  
(GRY)  
CN304  
1
2
3
1
3
TC1  
CN100  
(BRW)  
RY005  
1
3
1
3
Control P.C. board  
for undoor unit  
MCC-1403  
(YEL)  
CN309  
1
2
3
AC IN  
CN080  
(GRN)  
1
3
1
PNL  
FUSE  
T5.0A 250V~  
3
(BLK)  
CN067  
1
2
CN073  
(RED)  
EXCT  
Filter  
1
2
CN070  
(WHI)  
1
2
CN066  
(WHI)  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
CN044  
(BRW)  
Power supply  
circuit  
CN081  
(BLK)  
EMG  
CN040  
(BLU)  
CN061  
(YEL)  
CN032  
(WHI)  
CN060  
(WHI)  
CN041  
(BLU)  
CN050  
(WHI)  
CN075  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN074  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
Fan  
drive  
Option  
CN02  
(YEL)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
1
2
2
Sub P.C. board  
MCC-1520  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN01  
(WHI)  
Network  
adaptor  
(Option)  
1
1
2
2
TR  
TR  
CN01(WHI)  
3
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
CN02  
(BLU)  
U1 U2  
A
B
X
Y
CN03  
(RED)  
CN03(RED)  
MCC-1401  
Closed-end  
connector  
Color  
indication  
RED : RED  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
Parts name  
Fan motor  
Running capacitor  
Transformer  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Louver control relay  
Drain control relay  
Heater control reley  
Fan motor control relay  
Pulse motor valve  
RED  
WHI  
Symbol  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
FM  
RC  
TR  
TA  
U1 U2  
1
1
2
2
Outdoor unit  
R(L) S(N)  
CN1  
Remote controller  
Power supply  
single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
TC1,TC2,TCJ  
RY001  
RY002  
RY004  
RY005~007  
PMV  
1.  
indicates the terminal block.  
Letter at inside indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the wiring at side.  
3. indicates the control P.C. board.  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRW : BROWN  
GRN : GREEN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
1
RC  
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
6
7
PMV  
LM  
FM  
2
1
1
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
2
LM  
FS  
PMV  
RED BLK ORN BLU YEL  
FAN  
CN083  
(WHI)  
BRW  
DP  
9
7
5
3
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN068  
(BLU)  
CN033  
(GRN)  
CN030  
(RED)  
CN082  
(BLU)  
9
7
5
3
1
1
3
2
H
M
L
UL  
TA  
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
RY007  
P301  
(BLK)  
RY002  
RY001  
TCJ  
TC2  
1
2
1
2
CN102  
(RED)  
RY004  
RY006  
1
3
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
(GRY)  
CN304  
1
3
1
3
TC1  
CN100  
(BRW)  
RY005  
1
3
1
3
Control P.C. board  
for Indoor unit  
MCC-1403  
(YEL)  
CN309  
1
2
3
AC IN  
CN080  
(GRN)  
1
3
1
PNL  
FUSE  
T5.0A 250V~  
3
(BLK)  
CN067  
1
2
CN073  
(RED)  
EXCT  
Filter  
1
2
CN066  
(WHI)  
CN070  
(WHI)  
1
2
Color  
1
2
3
4
5
indication  
CN044  
(BRW)  
Power supply  
circuit  
CN081  
(BLK)  
RED : RED  
1
2
CN040  
(BLU)  
CN061  
(YEL)  
CN032  
(WHI)  
CN060  
(WHI)  
CN041  
(BLU)  
CN050  
(WHI)  
CN075  
(WHI)  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN074  
(WHI)  
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
RC  
EMG  
Fan  
drive  
Option  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRW : BROWN  
GRN : GREEN  
CN02  
(YEL)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Network adaptor  
1
1
2
2
(Option)  
Sub P.C. board  
MCC-1520  
TR  
CN01(WHI)  
1
1
2
2
Flow selector  
unit earth  
screw  
3
1
3
2
1
CN02  
(BLU)  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
CN01  
(WHI)  
Line filter  
CN03(RED)  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
Closed-end  
connector  
TR  
1
1
2
2
U1 U2  
A
B
Parts name  
Symbol  
R(L) S(N)  
FM  
RC  
TR  
LM  
TA  
Fan motor  
Running capacitor  
Transformer  
Louver motor  
Indoor temp sensor  
Temp sensor  
Louver control relay  
Drain control relay  
Fan motor control relay  
Pulse motor valve  
MCC-1401  
X
Y
Power supply  
single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
220V 60Hz  
U1 U2  
1
1
CN1  
2
2
Outdoor unit  
Remote controller  
TC1,TC2,TCJ  
RY001  
RY002  
RY005~007  
PMV  
1. indicates the terminal block, letter.  
Letter at inside indicates the terminal number.  
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate  
the wiring at side.  
3.  
indicates the control P.C. board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Non Drain pump type  
("SH" Type)  
PMV  
Non Drain pump type  
("SH" Type)  
Drain pump type  
("SPH" Type)  
FM  
CN34  
(RED)  
CN68  
(BLU)  
1
1
3
3
6
6
4
4
3
3
1
1
2
2
5
5
2
(External static pressure setup)  
FS  
1
Color  
indication  
3
CN34  
(RED)  
CN334  
(WHI)  
CN333  
(WHI)  
CN82  
(BLU)  
CN33  
(WHI)  
RED : RED  
5
5
4
4
1
1
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
2
Drain pump type  
("SPH" Type)  
TA  
CN112 CN111 CN110  
(WHI) (WHI) (WHI)  
1
2
1
2
CN104  
(YEL)  
CN68  
(BLU)  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRN : BRWN  
GRN : GREEN  
1
1
CN71  
CN72  
(CHK)  
(DISP)  
TCJ  
TC2  
RY302  
1
2
1
2
DM  
CN102  
(RED)  
3
3
Motor drive  
circuit  
1
2
1
2
CN101  
(BLK)  
1
3
CN304  
(GRY)  
1
3
1
3
TC1  
Fuse  
Fuse  
T3.15A  
250V~  
CN100  
(BRW)  
T6.3A  
250V~  
Control P.C. board  
for undoor unit  
MCC-1402  
RED  
WHI  
DC20V  
DC15V  
DC12V  
DC7V  
1
3
1
3
Power  
supply  
circuit  
1
2
3
CN80  
(GRN)  
PNL  
CN67  
(BLK)  
1
2
P301  
CN73  
(RED)  
EXCT  
BLK  
1
2
CN66  
(WHI)  
1
2
CN70  
(WHI)  
1
2
CN44  
(BRW)  
CN40  
(BLU)  
CN41  
(BLU)  
CN309  
(YEL)  
CN50  
(WHI)  
CN61  
(YEL)  
CN32  
(WHI)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
CN81  
(BLK)  
CN20  
(BLU)  
WHI  
RED  
Closed-end  
connector  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
3
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Fan drive  
Option  
Flow  
Selector unit  
Indoor unit  
R(L) S(N)  
Parts name  
Fan motor  
Indoor temp sensor  
TC1,TC2,TCJ Temp sensor  
Symbol  
FM  
TA  
Power supply  
220-240V~, 50Hz  
220V~, 60Hz  
1. indicates the terminal bolock.  
Earth screw  
Earth screw  
Letter at inside indicates the terminal number.  
U1 U2  
A
B
2. A dotted line and broken line indicate the  
wiring at side  
RY302  
PMV  
DM  
Drain control relay  
Pulse motor valve  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
3.  
indicate a control P.C. board.  
FS  
U1 U2  
A
B
Outdoor unit  
Wired remote  
controller  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–
+
FM  
1
1
2
2
Pressure  
Sensor  
PS  
Pressure  
Sensor  
PD  
Option  
Board  
Option  
Board  
Option  
Board  
Option  
Board  
Option  
Board  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV3  
63H1  
63H2  
1
1
3
3
U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6  
BLU  
YEL  
CN506(BLK)  
2
2
1
1
3
3
2
2
1
1
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
4
4
3
3
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
1
3
1
3
3
–
+
U
V
W
CN500  
(WHI)  
CN502  
(BLU)  
1
2
BLU(BLK)  
1
5
1
5
Power supply  
7
5
3
1
7
5
3
1
3
3
CN01 CN03  
(BLU) (WHI)  
CN300  
(WHI)  
CN301  
(WHI)  
CN302  
(RED)  
CN500  
(WHI)  
CN501  
(RED)  
CN508  
(RED)  
CN509  
(BLK)  
CN510  
(WHI)  
CN513  
(BLU)  
CN512  
(BLU)  
CN306 CN308  
(WHI)  
FAN IPDU  
TD1  
BLK  
P.C. board for FAN  
CN503 MCC-1439  
(BLU)  
CN502  
(WHI)  
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
P.C. Board  
MCC-896, 897  
(YEL)  
BLU(BLK)  
BLU(BLK)  
WHI  
BLU  
RED  
PNK  
1
3
1
3
CN309(WHI)  
BLU  
GRY  
RED  
3
1
3
1
CN501  
(RED)  
CN505(RED)  
(WHI)  
CN01  
(WHI)  
3
1
7
5
3
1
TD2  
(RED)  
CN503  
(PNK)  
CN504  
SV61  
BLU  
BLU(BLK)  
RY500  
RY503  
CR500  
CR503  
1
1
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
BLK  
BLK  
2
1
2
1
TS1  
(GRY)  
CN504  
(WHI)  
Interface Control P.C. Board  
MCC-1429  
Indoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
BLU  
BLU  
YEL  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
SV42  
BLU  
BLK  
BLK  
ON  
2
1
2
1
TS2  
CN522  
(BLK)  
CN311(BLU)  
Central remote  
controller  
SW30  
RED  
BLU  
BLU  
BLK  
BLK  
2
1
2
1
TE1  
CN505  
(GRN)  
(BLK)  
SV41  
3
3
1
1
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
3
3
1
1
RY502  
RY504  
CN25  
(WHI)  
CR502  
CR504  
BLK  
BLK  
2
1
2
1
TO  
(BLK)  
CN507  
(YEL)  
YEL  
BLU  
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN17  
(BLK)  
CN310(WHI)  
SV51  
CN06  
(WHI)  
CN18  
(RED)  
BLU(BLK)  
CN26  
(BLU)  
3
3
BLU  
BLU  
2
1
TK1  
(BLK)  
CN514  
(BLK)  
IPDU P.C. Board (1)  
BLU(BLK)  
BLU(BLK)  
BLK  
WHI  
RED  
YEL  
BLU  
W
V
U
1
3
1
3
CN11  
MCC-1502  
BLK  
WHI  
RED  
1 2 3 4  
SW11  
1 2 3 4  
SW12  
1 2 3 4  
1 2 3 4  
SW14  
CN312(WHI)  
SV2  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1
ON  
BLU  
CN03 L1  
CN02 L2  
CN01 L3  
3
3
CM1  
CN10  
CN09  
CN22  
CN23  
TK2  
(BLU)  
RY506  
RY507  
RY508  
RY509  
RY513  
CN515  
(GRN)  
CR506  
CR507  
CR508  
CR509  
CR513  
SW13  
1 2 3 4  
BLU  
BLU  
1
3
1
3
BLU(BLK)  
BLU(BLK)  
CN15 CN13  
1
3
1
3
CN324(RED)  
SV3A  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 2 3 4  
SW06  
CN31  
1 2 3 4  
1 2 3 4  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
TK3  
(BLU)  
CN21  
WHI  
CN20  
WHI  
CN516  
(RED)  
BLU  
SW07  
SW08  
SW09  
SW10  
1
3
1
3
BLU(BLK)  
BLU(BLK)  
(Srvice)  
1
3
1
3
CN313(YEL)  
SV3B  
BLU  
BLU  
Reactor  
BLK  
TK4  
(GRN)  
CN523  
(YEL)  
BLU  
BLU  
1
3
1
3
BLU(BLK)  
CN800  
1
1
CN314(BLK)  
SV3C  
SW04 SW05 SW06  
+
–
+
–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BLK  
BLK  
CN30 CN32  
BLK  
2
1
2
1
CN521  
(WHI)  
TL  
(WHI)  
HVC1  
HVC2  
BLU  
1
1
BLK  
CN322(WHI)  
SV11  
Noise filter  
P.C. board  
PTC Themistor  
RED  
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
BLU  
BLU  
4
3
4
3
2
1
D600 D601 D602 D603 D604  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
CN511  
(GRN)  
RED  
OCR  
Option  
board  
MCC-1366  
CN21  
Mg-SW  
RED  
RED  
1
3
5
2
4
6
2
CN319(WHI)  
SV12  
BLU  
BLU  
RED  
WHI  
BLK  
GRY  
CN01 CN17  
CN02 CN18  
CN03 CN19  
CN04 CN20  
3
1
3
1
BLU  
BLU  
1
3
1
3
CN100  
(BLK)  
4
6
RY514  
RY516  
RY517  
WHI  
BLK  
BLK  
CR514  
CR516  
CR517  
CN802  
Flash  
RY518  
RY510 RY511  
RY521  
RY519  
CN316(WHI)  
GRY  
GRY  
GRY  
3
1
3
1
A1 A2  
BRW  
CN402  
WHI  
Transformer  
CN22(WHI)CN23(BLU)  
Heater 1  
CN315(BLU)  
T6.3A  
FUSE  
RED  
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
CN401  
CN600(WHI)  
3
1
3
1
BRW  
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
T6.3A  
FUSE  
T6.3A  
FUSE  
CR  
CR  
518 510  
CR511  
CR521  
CR519  
T Heater 2  
CN307(WHI)  
CN305(RED)  
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
3
3
4
3
2
2
1
1
7
7
5
5
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
3
1
CN321  
(RED)  
CN323  
(WHI)  
CN317  
(BLU)  
CN400  
(WHI)  
Parts name  
Compressor  
Pulse motor valve  
CN325  
(YEL)  
Option  
Symbol  
CM1, CM2  
BLK  
BLK  
1
3
3
PMV1, PMV2, PMV3  
SV2, SV41, SV42, SV51, SV3A, SV3B, SV3C, SV3D,  
SV3E, SV61, SSV11, SV12  
3
3
1
1
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
CN25  
(WHI)  
ORN  
SV SV  
3D 3E  
ORN  
2-way valve coil  
4WV1  
Accumulator  
heater  
Comp2  
1
CN06  
(WHI)  
CN18  
(RED)  
CN17  
(BLK)  
CN26  
(BLU)  
4WV1  
4-way valve coil  
Comp1  
COMP1, COMP2  
TS1, TS2  
TD1, TD2  
TE1  
Compressor case thermo.  
Pipe temp. sensor (Inlet)  
Pipe temp. sensor (Outlet)  
Heat exchange temp. sensor  
Air temp. sensor  
3
BLK  
WHI  
RED  
YEL  
IPDU Board (2)  
Earth screw  
W
V
U
CN11 MCC-1502  
BLK  
WHI  
RED  
CN03 L1  
CN02 L2  
CN01 L3  
CM2  
CN10  
CN09  
CN22  
CN23  
RED  
WHI  
BLK  
GRY  
L1  
L2  
L3  
N
Color  
Parts layout  
CN15 CN13  
indication  
BLU  
TO  
Power Supply  
3phase  
380-415V 50Hz  
U
1
U
2
U
3
U4  
U
5
U6  
TK1, TK2, TK3, TK4  
TL  
Oil temp. sensor  
Liquid temp. sensor  
RED : RED  
Fan IPDU  
MCC-896  
CN08  
WHI  
CN07  
WHI  
YEL  
Interface  
control  
Connecting terminal  
BLU  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
BRN : BRWN  
VLT : VIOLET  
Noise filter  
P.C. board  
MCC-1366  
HEATER1, HEATER2, ACCUM HEATER Case heater, 230V, 26W  
P.C. board  
(I/F)  
Reactor  
FM  
PS  
PD  
63H1, 63H2  
MG-SW  
OCR  
Fan motor (DC)  
MG-  
SW  
MCC-1429  
Power supply  
for fan  
MCC-1439  
Low pressure sensor  
High pressure sensor  
High pressure switch  
Magnetic switch  
Overcurrent relay  
High voltage capacitor  
1. The two-dot chain line indicates wiring at the local site, and the dashed line indicates  
accessories sold separately and service wires, respectively.  
, and indicate the terminal board and the numerals indicate the terminal numbers.  
indicates P.C. board.  
* Be sure to fix the electric parts cover surely with two screws.  
(Otherwise water enters into the box resulting in malfunction.)  
OCR  
2.  
3.  
,
L1  
L2  
L3  
N
Comp. IPDU  
Comp. IPDU  
No.2  
MCC-1502  
Power supply  
terminal  
No.1  
MCC-1502  
HVC1, HVC2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flow Selector unit  
Indoor unit  
Supplied wire (Power supply)  
RBM-Y1802FE only  
Earth screw  
RBM-Y2802FE  
only  
RBM-Y2802FE only  
SVD SVD  
1 1  
SVS SVS SVS SVSS SVDD  
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
5
5
7
7
9
9
Control P.C. board  
for indoor unit  
3 3  
CN01  
(RED)  
CN10  
(WHI)  
CN67  
(BLK)  
Control P.C. board  
MCC-1431  
1 2 3 4 5  
1 2 3 4 5 (BLK)  
CN81  
COM SVD SVS SVDD  
SVSS  
CN02  
(GRN)  
R(L) S(N)  
1 2 3 4 5  
1 2 3 4 5  
BRW  
YEL  
BLU  
Power supply  
single phase  
220-240V 50Hz  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
ORN  
WHI  
Supplied wire (Control wiring)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. PARTS RATING  
3-1. Indoor Unit  
4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMU-AP  
0091H  
0121H  
0151H  
0181H  
0241H  
0271H  
0301H  
SWF-230-60-1  
ADP-1409  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
FS-0218-102  
TA sensor  
Lead wire length : 155mm  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
TC1 sensor  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Pulse motor  
Pulse motor valve  
Louver motor (panel)  
EDM-B25YGTF  
EDM-B40YGTF  
MP24GA  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMU-AP  
0361H  
0481H  
SWF-200-90-1  
0561H  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
ADP-1409  
FS-0218-102  
TA sensor  
Lead wire length : 155mm  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
TC1 sensor  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Pulse motor  
Pulse motor valve  
Louver motor (panel)  
EDM-B60YGTF-1  
MP24GA  
2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMU-AP  
0071WH  
0091WH  
0121WH  
0151WH  
0181WH  
AF-230-53-4G  
AC 400V, 1.0µF  
AF-230-39-4B  
Running capacitor for fan motor  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
AC 450V, 2.0µF  
PJD-05230TF-1  
FS-0208-608  
TT-13  
Control P.C. board transformer  
Pulse motor  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
EDM-B25YGTF  
EDM-B40YGTF  
Lead wire length : 268mm  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMU-AP  
0241WH  
0271WH  
0301WH  
0481WH  
AF-200-53-4F  
AF-200-92-4B  
AC 500V, 5µF  
Running capacitor for fan motor  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
AC 450V, 2.5µF  
AC 450V, 3.5µF  
PJD-05230TF-1  
FS-0208-608  
TT-13  
Control P.C. board transformer  
Pulse motor  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
EDM-B40YGTF  
Lead wire length : 268mm  
EDM-B60YGTF-1  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette (Compact type) Type  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMU-AP  
0071YH  
0091YH  
AF-200-22-4N-1  
0121YH  
Running capacitor for fan motor  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
AC 400V, 1µF  
PJD-05230TF-1  
FS-0208-602  
Control P.C. board transformer  
Pulse motor  
TT-13  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
EDM-B25YGTF  
Lead wire length : 818mm  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC1 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMU-AP  
0151SH  
0181SH  
AF-200-34-4D  
AC 450V, 1.5µF  
0241SH  
0152SH  
0182SH  
0242SH  
SWF-280-60-1  
—
Running capacitor for fan motor  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
AC 500V, 2.5µF  
PJD-05230TF-2  
FS-0208-603  
TT-13  
ADP-1409  
FS-0218-103  
—
Control P.C. board transformer  
Pulse motor  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
EDM-B40YGTF  
EDM-B40YGTF-3  
Lead wire length : 155mm Vinyl tube  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Concealed Duct Standard Type  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMD-AP  
0071BH  
0091BH  
0121BH  
ICF-280-120-2  
ADP-1409  
0151BH  
0181BH  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
Pulse motor  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
FS-0218-102  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
EDM-B25YGTF  
EDM-B40YGTF  
Lead wire length : 618mm  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMD-AP  
0241BH  
0271BH  
0301BH  
0361BH  
0481BH  
0561BH  
ICF-280-120-1  
ICF-280-120-2  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
Pulse motor  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
ADP-1409  
FS-0218-102  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
EDM-B40YGTF  
EDM-B60YGTF-1  
Lead wire length : 618mm  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMD-AP  
0181H  
0241H  
STF-200-160-4A  
AC 400V, 8µF  
ADP-1409  
0271H  
0361H  
0481H  
STF-200-160-4B  
AC 500V, 4µF  
STF-200-260-4C  
AC 450V, 6µF  
STF-200-260-4B  
AC 400V, 8µF  
Running capacitor for fan motor  
Drain pump motor  
Float switch  
FS-0218-102-6  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
EDM-B40YGTF  
Lead wire length : 1200mm  
EDM-B60YGTF-1  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Slim Duct Type  
Model  
MMD-AP  
0071SPH(SH)  
0091SPH(SH)  
0121SPH(SH)  
SWF-280-60-1  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
0151SPH(SH)  
0181SPH(SH)  
Fan motor  
Pulse motor  
Pulse motor valve  
Drain pump motor ∗  
Float switch ∗  
TA sensor  
EDM-B25YGTF  
EDM-B40YGTF  
ADP-1409  
FS-0218-102  
Lead wire length : 1558mm  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
∗
“SPH” series only.  
Under Ceiling Type  
Model  
MMC-AP  
0151H  
0181H  
0241H  
0271H  
0361H  
0481H  
Fan motor  
Louver motor  
Pulse motor  
SWF-280-60-1  
SWF-280-60-2  
SWF-280-120-2  
MP24GA1  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
EDM-B40YGTF  
EDM-B60YGTF-1  
Lead wire length : 155mm Vinyl tube  
TC1 sensor  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
High Wall Type  
Model  
MMK-AP 0071H  
0091H  
0121H  
0151H  
0181H  
0241H  
0072H  
0092H  
ICF-340-30 or MF-340-30  
MP24Z  
0122H  
Fan motor  
ICF-280-120-3  
MT8-3-6  
Louver motor  
Pulse motor  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
EDM-B40YGTF  
Lead wire length : 818mm Vinyl tube  
EDM-B25YGTF  
EDM-B25YGTF-3  
Lead wire length : 318mm Vinyl tube  
TC1 sensor  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 600mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 800mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 800mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Floor Standing Cabinet Type  
Model  
Fan motor  
MML-AP  
0071H  
0091H  
0121H  
0151H  
0181H  
AF200-70-4K  
AC450V, 2µF  
0241H  
AF-200-19-4F  
AF-200-45-4F  
Running capacitor for fan motor  
Transformer  
AC450V, 1.2µF  
EDM-B25YGTF  
AC400V, 1.8µF  
TT13  
Pulse motor  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor valve  
TA sensor  
EDM-B40YGTF  
Lead wire length : 818mm Vinyl tube  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Floor Standing Concealed Type  
Model  
Fan motor  
MML-AP  
0071BH  
0091BH  
0121BH  
0151BH  
0181BH  
AF-200-70-4K  
AC450V, 1µF  
0241BH  
AF-200-19-4G  
AC450V, 1.5µF  
Running capacitor for fan motor  
Transformer  
AC450V, 2µF  
TT-13  
Pulse motor  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor valve  
EDM-B25YGTF  
EDM-B40YGTF  
TA sensor  
Lead wire length : 818mm Vinyl tube  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 2000mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 2000mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 2000mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Floor Standing Type  
Model  
Fan motor  
MMF-AP  
0151H  
AF-200-37R  
AC500V, 3µF  
0181H  
0241H  
AF-200-63T  
AC500V, 3.5µF  
TT-13  
0271H  
0361H  
0481H  
0561H  
AF-200-110M-1  
AF-200-160H-1  
AC500V, 4µF  
Running capacitor for fan motor  
Transformer  
Pulse motor  
EDM-MD12TF-3  
Pulse motor valve  
Louver motor  
EDM-B40YGTF  
EDM-B60YGTF-1  
MT8-3-9  
TA sensor  
Lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube  
TC1 sensor  
Ø4 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Blue)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 2000mm Vinyl tube (Black)  
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2. Outdoor Unit  
Model  
MMY-  
MAP0802FT8  
DA421A3FB-23M  
MAP1002FT8  
Output: : 3.75kW × 2  
AC220-240V 50Hz  
HAM-MD12TF-3  
MAP1202FT8  
Compressor  
4-way valve coil (Heat pump only)  
Pulse motor valve coil  
LB64046  
VPV-MOAJ524C0  
DC12V  
AC220–240V 50Hz  
2-way valve coil  
VPV  
SV2, SV3A, SV3B, SV3C, SV3D, SV3E  
SV41, SV42, SV5, SV6, SV11, SV12  
VPV-122DQ1  
VPV-303DQ1  
VPV-603DQ2  
VPV-1204DQ50  
ACB-JB215  
SV2, SV3C, SV3D, SV3E, SV6, SV12  
SV3A, SV41, SV42, SV5  
SV3B  
2-way valve  
SV11  
High-pressure SW  
OFF : 3.73MPa, ON : 2.9MPa  
0.5 to 3.5V / 0 to 0.98MPa  
0.5 to 4.3V / 0 to 3.73MPa  
DC280V, 600W  
Pressure sensor (For high pressure) 150XA4-H3  
Pressure sensor (For low pressure) 150XA4-L1  
Fan motor  
MF-230-600-2  
Case heater  
AC240V, 29W × 3  
Compressor case thermo.  
US-622KXTMQO-SS  
OFF : 125°C, ON : 90°C × 2  
3-3. Outdoor Control Unit  
Heat Recovery Model  
Model  
MMY-  
MAP0802FT8  
JXO-3004  
MAP1002FT8  
AC600V / 30A, 4P  
AC30V (or DC42V) / 1A, 6P  
1.45mH / 25A  
MAP1202FT8  
Power supply terminal block  
Communication line terminal block  
Inductor  
JXO-B2H  
CH-44FK  
Smoothing condenser (For compressor) 400LRSN 1500M  
1500µF / 400V  
Power supply transformer  
P.C. board (Noise filter)  
TT-01-03T  
AC230V, 350mA  
MCC-1366  
FKX-240NK-4810US  
FKX-220NK-6310US  
0.48mH / 30A (MCC-1366 P.C. board)  
0.63mH / 25A (MCC-1366 P.C. board)  
MCC-1429  
Line filter (AC)  
P.C. board (Control board)  
P.C. board (IPDU for compressor)  
P.C. board (Power supply board)  
P.C. board (IPDU for fan)  
Power complex module  
Pipe temp. sensor (TD)  
Pipe temp. sensor (TS)  
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE)  
Outside temp. sensor (TO)  
Oil temp. sensor (TK)  
IPDU-4T62DA1E  
6.2kW MCC-1502  
MCC-1439  
IPDU-2D16DA1  
800W MCC-896, MCC-897  
25A/1200V (MCC-1502 P.C. board)  
–30°C to 135°C (Ambient temp. range)  
–20°C to 80°C (Ambient temp. range)  
–20°C to 80°C (Ambient temp. range)  
–20°C to 80°C (Ambient temp. range)  
–30°C to 135°C (Ambient temp. range)  
–20°C to 80°C (Ambient temp. range)  
1000µF / 400V  
6MBR25UA120  
—
—
—
—
—
—
Liquid temp. sensor (TL)  
Smoothing capacitor (For fan)  
Magnet SW  
400LRSN1000M  
FC-2S  
400V / 38A  
Thermistor  
ZPROYCE101A500  
100Ω, 13A, 500V  
3-4. Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit)  
Model  
P.C. board (Control board)  
2-way valve coil  
RBM-Y1122FE  
RBM-Y1802FE  
RBM-Y2802FE  
MCC-1431  
VPV  
AC220-240V 50Hz  
VPV-122DQ1  
VPV-1204DQ50  
SVSS, SVDD  
SVS, SVD  
2-way valve  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO sensor  
TE sensor  
TS2 sensor  
SV2 valve  
Check joint  
(Low pressure)  
Low pressure  
sensor  
SV42 valve  
SV41 valve  
SV3D valve  
SV11 valve  
SV3E valve  
SV3C valve  
SV5 valve  
SV6 valve  
SV3A valve  
TK1, TK2 sensor  
TS1 sensor  
SV12 valve  
High pressure  
SW1  
TD1 sensor  
PMV  
4-way valve  
SV3B valve  
TL sensor  
High pressure  
SW2  
TK3 sensor  
TK4 sensor  
TD2 sensor  
Check joint  
(High pressure)  
High pressure sensor  
Check joint  
(Liquid pipe)  
Front side  
Rear side  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Concealed Duct Type]  
3-6. Name of Each Part  
3-6-1. Indoor Unit  
Air outlet flange  
Discharge duct connection.  
Earth screw  
Earth screws are situated  
inside the electric parts box.  
Sold Separately Parts  
[4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type]  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
2-way discharge/3-way discharge  
Select air flow direction in cooling or  
heating operation.  
2-way discharge or 3-way discharge can be  
selected according to the shape or  
arrangement of the room.  
SuMoTuWeTh Fr Sa  
ERROR  
PROGRAM1  
PROGRAM2  
PROGRAM3  
Air filter  
Earth screw  
Situated inside the electric  
parts box.  
For details, consult with the dealer from  
Air inlet  
Air filter is situated in the air grille.  
Filter dust and other trash.  
(Air filter is situated in the air inlet grille.)  
which you have purchased the air conditioner.  
WEEKLY TIMER  
CODE No.  
SET DATA SETTING TEST  
UNIT No.  
[Concealed Duct, High Static Pressure Type]  
R.C.  
No.  
H
Air outlet  
Air inlet  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
Discharge duct connection.  
Suction duct connection.  
Air filter  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
Filters dust and other trash.  
(Air filter is situated in the air grille.)  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
Clip  
Air inlet grille  
To open/close the air inlet grille.  
Earth screw  
Drain pan  
Earth screws situated  
in the electric parts box.  
[2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type]  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
Select air flow direction in cooling or  
heating operation.  
Earth screw  
Situated inside the electric parts box.  
[Slim Duct Type]  
Air inlet  
Earth screw  
Situated in the  
electric parts box.  
Center panel  
Suction duct connection  
.
ALL  
ZONE  
ZONE  
GROUP  
CODE  
No.  
1234  
TEST  
UNIT No.  
SET DATA  
SETTING  
R.C.  
No.  
Air filter  
Air filter  
Air inlet  
(Air filter is not supplied on  
certain models within the series.  
Filters dust and other trash.  
(Air filter is situated in the air grille.)  
GROUP  
)
Air outlet  
Discharge duct connection  
SELECT  
ZONE  
TEST  
SETTING  
˚C  
.
[1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type]  
[Under Ceiling Type]  
CL SET  
MMU-AP0071YH to AP0121YH  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
Select air flow direction in  
cooling or heating operation.  
Earth screw  
Situated inside the  
electric parts box.  
MMU-AP0151SH to AP0241SH  
Button  
Button to open/close the  
inlet grille.  
Air inlet grille  
Earth screw  
Situated inside the electric parts box.  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
Select air flow direction in cooling  
or heating operation.  
Earth screw  
Situated inside the  
electric parts box.  
Air filter  
Air filter is situated in the air grille.  
Filters dust and other trash.  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
(
)
Change the direction of the air  
to be discharged according to  
cool/heat mode.  
[High Wall Type]  
MMK-AP0071H to AP0241H  
Earth screw  
Air inlet grille  
Situated inside the  
electric parts box.  
Air inlet grille  
Air filter  
Filters dust and other trash.  
(Air filter is situated in the air inlet grille.)  
Air inlet grille  
Air filter  
Filters dust and other trash.  
(Air filter is situated in the air inlet grille.)  
Air filter  
Filters dust and  
other trash.  
(Air filter is situated in  
the air inlet grille.)  
MMU-AP0152SH, AP0182SH, AP0242SH  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
Button  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
Change the direction of the air  
to be discharged according to  
cool/heat mode.  
Button to open/close  
suction port  
Select air flow direction in cooling or  
heating operation mode.  
MMK-AP0072H to AP0122H  
Earth screw  
Situated inside the  
electric parts box.  
Air inlet grille  
Air filter  
Air filter  
Filters dust and  
other trash.  
(Air filter is situated in  
the air inlet grille.)  
Filters dust and other trash.  
(Air filter is situated in the air grille)  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
Air inlet grille.  
Air filter  
Filters dust and other trash.  
(Provided on the suction port.)  
Change the direction of the air  
to be discharged according to  
cool/heat mode.  
Earth screw  
Situated inside the electric box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7. Parts Name of Remote Controller  
Display section  
Type]  
[Floor Standing Cabinet  
Air outlet/Air outlet louver  
Changes the direction of the air flow.  
In the illustration, all of the indicators are displayed for the purpose of explanation.  
CODE No.  
SET DATA SETTING TEST  
In normal operation, only the icons relevant to the mode of operation would be  
displayed.  
UNIT No.  
Display  
section  
R.C.  
No.  
H
TEMP.  
ON  
/
OFF  
• When turning on the power breaker switch for the first time, [SET DATA]  
flashes on the display part of the remote controller. While this display is  
flashing, the system is performing a self-check function. Wait until this check  
has been completed and the [SET DATA] display has disappeared before  
using the remote controller.  
Earth screw  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
Situated inside the electric parts box.  
Operation  
section  
TIME  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
Air filter  
Filters dust and other trash.  
(Situated inside the air grille.)  
7 8 9  
Air inlet grille  
Air outlet port  
2
17  
16  
13  
14  
Type]  
[Floor Standing Concealed  
CODE No.  
1
SET DATA SETTING TEST  
3
UNIT No.  
10  
4
6
R.C.  
No.  
H
Earth screw  
Situated inside the electric parts box.  
5
Drain pan (With drain filter)  
This accessory is installed at the local site.  
11  
12  
Air inlet grille  
15  
Air filter  
Filters dust and other trash.  
Front panel (Lower side)  
1
2
3
SET DATA display  
Displayed during initialization of controller.  
12  
13  
PRE-HEAT display  
(Situated inside the suction port.)  
Displayed when the heating or defrost operation is  
carried out. While this indication is displayed, the  
indoor fan stops or the runs in LOW fan speed.  
Operation mode select display  
The selected operation mode is displayed.  
Operation ready display  
Type]  
[Floor Standing  
CHECK display  
Will be displayed when a error condition  
occurs or a protection device operates.  
Displayed when cooling or heating operation is  
impossible because the outdoor temperature goes  
outside the operating range.  
Fixing metal holder  
Vertical louver  
The air can automatically be discharged  
rightward/leftward at stated periods.  
Horizontal louver/Air outlet port  
Changes the direction of the air flow.  
4
5
Timer time display  
Displays the selected delay time.  
(When a malfunction occurs, a check code is  
displayed in place of the time display.)  
14  
15  
No function display  
Displayed when the selected function is not avail-  
able.  
Air inlet grille  
Fan mode display  
The selected Fan mode is displayed.  
Timer SETIN setup display  
By pressing the Timer Set button, the display  
of the timer is shown in the following order:  
Drain pan  
Water accumulated in the drain pan is  
drained through the drain pipe.  
(AUTO)  
(MED.)  
(HIGH)  
(LOW)  
Air filter  
Filters dust and other trash.  
[OFF]  
[ON]  
→
[OFF] repeat OFF timer →  
In the Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type  
models, [HIGH] only is displayed for the air speed.  
→ No display.  
6
7
8
Filter display  
Fixing metal holder (Right and left)  
16  
17  
Mode select control display  
Earth screw  
Situated inside the electric parts box.  
If “FILTER  
” is displayed, clean the air filter.  
Displayed when pushing “Operation mode select  
button while the operation mode is fixed to heating  
or cooling by the system manager of the air condi-  
tioner.  
”
TEST run display  
Displayed during a test run.  
3-6-2. Outdoor Unit  
Louver position display  
Central control display  
Displayed when using the remote controller with a  
central control remote controller, etc.  
Air outlet (Discharge)  
Hot air is discharged when cooling operation is performed.  
Cold air is discharged when heating operation is performed.  
(for 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType  
and Under CeilingType model only)  
Displays louver position.  
If the remote controller is prohibited on fan the  
9
Louver swing display  
Indicates the movement of the louver.  
centralcontrol side,  
flashes when operating the  
Air inlet  
Situated at front, rear, left,  
and right sides.  
ON / OFF  
MODE  
following  
,
,
/
buttons and  
the function is not accepted.  
10  
11  
Setpoint temperature display  
The selected set up temp. is displayed.  
Power source aperture  
(The different settings available on the remote  
controller when in use with a central controller, can  
be referred to in the owners manual of the central  
controller.)  
Remote controller sensor display  
Displayed while the sensor of the remote  
controller is used.  
Refrigerant pipe access for connection  
Fixing leg  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation section  
Push each button to select the desired operation.  
This remote controller can operate up to a maximum 8 indoor units.  
3-8. Correct Usage  
When the product is operated for the first time, or after the SET DATA value has been changed, the procedure  
below should be followed.The remote controller can memorize user settings and can be recalled and acti  
ON / OFF  
• The remote controller can memorize user settings and can be recalled and activated by a single press of  
vated by a single push of the  
button.  
ON / OFF  
the  
button.  
Preparation  
7
Power the system by switching the electrical isolation device on and by pushing the ON/OFF button on the  
remote controller.  
1
• When the power is switched on, a partition line is shown on the remote controller display.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
• The remote controller performs a self-check function for approximately 1 minute during which user input will  
not be accepted.  
8
10  
2
TIMER SET  
FAN  
MODE  
VENT  
REQUIREMENT  
9
4
6
ON / OFF  
• While using the air conditioner, operate it only with  
button without turning off the main power  
TIME  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
switch and the leak breaker.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
• Do not turn off the earth leakage breaker while the air conditioner is in use.  
• When the air conditioner has not been operated for a period of time, ensure the earth leakage breaker is  
turned on for 12 or more hours prior to the start up of operation.  
5
3
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
1
2
1
Fan mode select button  
Selects the desired air speed.  
7
8
Operation lamp  
4
Lit during normal product operation.  
3
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
The Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type  
models cannot be operated.  
Flashes to indicate malfunction or incorrect  
timer setting.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
ON / OFF  
2
3
Timer set button  
button  
Used for setting the timer function.  
Push to cycle between ON and OFF mode.  
ON / OFF  
When the unit is OFF, the Operation Lamp and  
the display will turn OFF.  
1
2
Push  
button.  
Check button  
The operation lamp goes on, and the operation starts.  
The CHECK button is used for the check  
operation. During normal operation, do not  
use this button.  
MODE  
9
Operation select button  
Select an operation mode with the  
button.  
AUTO  
HEAT  
DRY  
COOL  
FAN  
LOW  
Selects the desired operation mode.  
One push of the button, and the display  
changes in the order shown on the right.  
(Dehumidity)  
4
Fan button  
10  
Set up temperature button  
When an after-market fan device is connected  
to the system, this button activates the device.  
• “DRY mode” function is not available on the  
Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type.  
Adjusts the temperature set point for the  
room.  
AUTO  
HIGH  
MED.  
• If  
is displayed on the remote controller  
when pushing the FAN button, a fan is not  
connected.  
FAN  
Set the desired temperature by pressing the  
3
Select air volume with  
button.  
or  
.
One push of the button, and the display changes in the order shown on the right.  
• When air volume is “AUTO ”, air volume differs according to the temperature difference between  
the set temperature and the room temperature.  
5
6
Filter reset button  
Resets the “FILTER  
” display.  
• In DRY mode, “AUTO  
” is displayed and the air volume is LOW.  
Unit and Auto louver buttons  
• In heating operation, if the room temperature is not heated sufficiently with volume “LOW ” operation,  
UNIT  
select “MED.  
” or “HIGH  
” operation.  
:
OPTION :  
• The temperature which the temperature sensor detects is one near the air inlet of the indoor unit.  
Therefore it slightly differs from the room temperature according to the installation status.The setup  
value is a criterion of the room temperature. (Automatic air speed cannot be selected in FAN mode.)  
Select the desired indoor unit by pressing the  
unit button.  
Remote controller sensor  
The temperature sensor in the indoor unit mea-  
sures the room temperature.  
SWING/FIX  
:
• Air volume of function is not available on “Concealed Duct High Static Pressure Type” air speed “HIGH  
The remote controller can also measure the room  
temperature.  
” only is displayed.  
Press the button to set the louver into Auto  
mode.  
4
Determine the set up temperature by pushing the “TEMP.  
” or “TEMP.  
” button.  
For details of this feature, contact the dealer from  
whom you purchased the product.  
• This function is not available on the Con-  
cealed Duct Standard Type, High Static  
Pressure Type, Floor standing Cabinet Type,  
Floor Standing Concealed Type, or Slim Duct  
Type.  
Stop  
Push  
ON / OFF  
button.  
The operation lamp goes off, and the operation stops.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to set up the air direction  
Push SWING/FIX button.  
REQUIREMENT  
[In Cooling operation]  
1
Every push of the button, the air direction changes.  
• The operation starts after approximately 1 minute.  
[In Heating operation]  
In Heating operation  
• In heating operation, the fan operation may continue for approximately 30 seconds after the air condi-  
tioner has stopped.  
Set the air outlet louver downward.  
If directing it upward, the hot air may not reach the floor.  
• The indoor fan continues in preheat operation for 3 to 5 minutes, and then blows out the hot air.  
Initial setup  
(
symbol is displayed on the remote controller.)  
• When the temperature of the room has reached the set point temperature and after the unit has  
stopped, the air speed is lowered and the air volume is greatly reduced.  
• In defrost mode, the fan stops so that cool air is not discharged. PRE-DEF symbol  
is displayed.  
In Cooling / Dry operation  
Set the air outlet louver upward.  
If directing it downward, dew condensation may fall on or near the air discharge port.  
[In Automatic operation]  
• Using the difference between the set point temperature and the room temperature, the heating and  
cooling operations are automatically performed.  
Initial setup  
How to start louvre swinging  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
MODE  
2
Push SWING/FIX button.  
3-9. Adjustment of Wind Direction  
To increase the cooling or heating effect, be sure to make proper use of the discharge louver for  
cooling or heating operation.  
Set the louver direction to the lowest  
position, and then push  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
again.  
• [SWING  
] is displayed and the air direction  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
VENT  
automatically changes upward/downward.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
As the characteristics of the air, cool air collects at lower levels, and hot air collects at higher levels.  
SET CL  
In cases where one remote controller controls  
the multiple indoor units, each indoor unit can  
be selected and its air direction can be set up.  
CAUTION  
Set the louver so that air blows out horizontally.  
If cooling operation is performed with the louver blowing air downwards, the air outlet or surface of the  
louver will be wet with dew, which may drip.  
How to stop louver swinging  
1, 2, 3  
4
SWING/FIX  
3
Push  
button again while the louver is  
In FAN operation  
In all modes  
operating.  
• The louver stops at a position when you push  
SWING/FIX. If pushing SWING/FIX again, the air direction  
descends from the highest position.  
4-way Air Discharge CassetteType  
• While the air conditioner stops, the discharge louver directs downward automatically.  
Series of  
operation  
* In COOL/DRY operation, the louver does not  
stop at the lowest position.  
If stopping the louver as it directs downward  
during operation, it stops after moving to the  
3rd position from the highest position.  
UNIT  
• When the heating operation is in PREHEAT/DEFROST  
The rotation of the louver starts after PREHEAT/DEFROST  
on the remote controller even if the heating operation is in PREHEAT/DEFROST  
state, the louver is directed upward.  
Initial setup  
status cleared  
, is displayed  
status.  
Display when stopping the swing  
[In Cooling operation]  
4
Use the discharge louver with horizontal set point.  
UNIT  
• Push  
to set up the air direction individu-  
ally in each indoor unit.  
Then the indoor unit No. in a group control is  
displayed.  
Fan/Heat  
operation  
Cool/Dry  
operation  
For the displayed indoor unit, set up the air  
direction.  
[In Heating operation]  
Use the discharge louver with downward set point.  
• If the unit No. is not displayed, all the indoor  
units are operated at the same time.  
No display  
Unit No. 1-1  
Unit No. 1-2  
UNIT  
• Every time is  
pushed, the display is  
exchanged as follows:  
Unit No. 1-4  
Unit No. 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-way discharge or 3-way discharge can be selected according to the configuration of the room. For details,  
consult with the dealer from which you have purchased the air conditioner.  
Under Ceiling Type, 1-way Air Discharge CassetteType (2SH Series)  
• When the air conditioner is stopped, the horizontal louver (Up/Down air direction adjustment  
plate) automatically directs upward.  
INFORMATION  
• If cooling operation has been selected while the louver is in a downward position, the cabinet or surface  
of the louver may become wet with dew.  
• When the air conditioner is in stand-by status waiting to heat, the horizontal louver (Up/Down  
air direction adjustment plate) directs upward.The swinging operation starts upon the heating  
operation starting, but “SWING  
ing operation.  
” is displayed on the remote controller even when in heat-  
• If heating operation has been selected while the louver is in a horizontal position, the room temperature  
may not be even.  
• Never handle the louver directly with hands as a malfunction or injury may occur.  
How to set up the air flow direction  
Push SWING/FIX button during operation.  
Use the louver operation functions on the remote controller to change direction of the louver.  
1
Every pushing of the button, the air direction changes.  
In Cooling / Dry operation  
In Heating operation  
2-way Air Discharge CassetteType  
Set the horizontal louver  
(Up/Down air direction  
Set the horizontal louver  
(Up/Down air direction  
[In Cooling operation]  
adjustment plate) downward.  
If directing it upward, the hot  
air may not reach the floor.  
adjustment plate) upward. If directing  
it downward, dew condensation may  
fall on or near the air discharge port.  
Use the air outlet louver with horizontal set point.  
Initial setup  
Initial setup  
[In Heating operation]  
Use the air outlet louver with downward set point.  
How to start swinging  
How to set up the air direction  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
2
Push SWING/FIX button.  
Set the direction of the horizontal louver (Up/  
SWING/FIX  
1
Push  
button during operation.  
• [SWING  
] is displayed and the air direction automatically changes upward/downward.  
Down air direction adjustment plate) to the  
lowest position and then push  
again.  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
SWING/FIX  
In case when one remote controller controls multiple indoor units, each indoor unit can be selected and  
the air direction can be set up.  
button  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SWING/FIX  
• [SWING  
] is displayed and the air direction  
SET CL  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
2
3
Push  
air outlet louver.  
button again during swinging of the  
automatically changes upward/downward.  
In cases where one remote controller controls the  
multiple indoor units, each indoor unit can be  
selected and air flow direction set up.  
• The air outlet louver can be stopped at the required  
position.  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
UNIT  
1, 2, 3  
4
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
How to stop swinging  
UNIT  
• To set up the air direction individually, push  
SWING/FIX  
button to display each indoor unit No. in a group  
control.Then set the air direction on the displayed  
indoor unit.  
In FAN operation  
In all modes  
3
Push  
button again during swinging of  
the horizontal louver.  
• The horizontal louvre can be stopped at the  
desired position.The air direction can be again set  
up from the uppermost position by pushing SWING/FIX  
button.  
1, 2  
3
• If there is no display, all the indoor units can be oper-  
Series of  
operation  
ated collectively.  
UNIT  
Initial setup  
• Every pushing of the  
button, the display will  
No display  
Unit No. 1-1  
Unit No. 1-2  
change as shown in the figure.  
* While the horizontal louver is set downward in  
cooling/drying operation, it does not stop.  
Unit No. 1-4  
Unit No. 1-3  
Display when stopping the swing  
If stopping the horizontal louver which directs  
downward during swinging, it will stop after  
reaching the 3rd position from the upper position.  
1-way Air Discharge CassetteType (1H Series)  
Adjustment of air direction upward/downward  
[In Cooling operation]  
UNIT  
Fan/Heat  
operation  
Cool/Dry  
operation  
4
UNIT  
In cooling operation, use the air outlet louver in a position that will defuse  
cool air throughout the room.  
• Push  
to set up the air direction individually in  
each indoor unit.Then the indoor unit No. in a  
group control is displayed. For the displayed indoor  
unit, set up the air direction.  
[In Heating operation]  
In heating operation, use the air outlet louver in a downward position so  
that the air is directed to the floor.  
• If the unit No. is not displayed, all the indoor units  
are operated at the same time.  
UNIT  
Adjustment of air the direction rightward/leftward  
To change the discharge direction from the right or left position, set the  
vertical grille inside of the air outlet louver to the required direction.  
• Every time  
changed as follows:  
is pushed, the display is ex-  
No display Unit No. 1-1  
Unit No. 1-2  
Setup the air flow direction and swinging  
Unit No. 1-4  
Unit No. 1-3  
Refer to the description of the “2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Right/Left air direction adjustment  
To change the air outlet direction to the right or left side, set the vertical louver located behind the horizontal  
louver to the desired direction.  
Floor Standing CabinetType  
[In Cooling operation]  
INFORMATION  
In cooling operation, set the air outlet louver with a horizontal  
set point so that the cold air diffuses the whole room.  
• If cooling operation is performed with a donwards discharge,  
dew may form on the surface of the cabinet or the horizontal  
louver resulting in possible dripping.  
• If heating operation is performed with a horizontal discharge,  
the room temperature may not be equal i.e. there may be a  
large variance between one side of the room with the other.  
[In Heating operation]  
In heating operation, set the air outlet louver with a down-  
wards set point so that the hot air blows towards the floor.  
High Wall Type  
Adjustment of air Flow direction Upwards/Downwards  
[In Cooling operation]  
How to change the air outlet port  
Change the air outlet port using the following procedure.  
In cooling operation, use the horizontal louver with a horizontal set  
point so that the cold air diffuses the whole room.  
1
Remove the two fixing screws on the air outlet  
port.  
[In Heating operation]  
(The fixing screws are reused.)  
In heating operation, use the horizontal louver with a downwards set  
point so that the hot air blows towards the floor.  
2
Remove the discharge port, by pushing up on the  
rear side, to a point where you can remove it from  
the rear clip.  
REQUIREMENT  
• If cooling operation is performed with the louver set at a down-  
wards position, dew may form on the surface of the cabinet or  
the horizontal louver resulting in possible dripping.  
• If heating operation is performed with the louver set in a horizon-  
tal position, the room temperature may not be equal i.e. there  
may be a large variance between one side of the room with the  
other.  
3
4
Lift the air outlet port upwards and remove it.  
• Do not move the horizontal louver directly with your hands;  
otherwise a fault maybe caused. Select the direction of the  
horizontal louver using the SWING/FIX button on the remote controller.  
The horizontal louver will not stop immediately even if the switch  
is pushed. Note pushing the switch again when the required  
louver direction has been reached will stop the louver.  
Reverse the air outlet port and attach it to the  
main unit.  
Pay attention so that four claw hooks (two at rear and  
two at the lower sides) are hooked on the mounting  
position.  
5
Be sure to tighten the air outlet port with the  
removed fixing screws so that the air outlet port  
does not come off.  
Adjustment of air Flow direction rightwards/leftwards  
To change the air outlet direction to the right or left side, set the  
vertical louver located behind the horizontal louver to the desired  
direction.  
Setup of air direction and swinging  
1H series: Refer to the description of  
“2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type”.  
2H series: Refer to the description of “Under Ceiling Type,  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type (2SH Series)”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Floor Standing Type  
3-10. Timer Operation  
Adjustment of air Flow direction upwards/downwards  
The type of timer operation can be selected from the following three types.  
OFF timer  
:The operation stops when the time on the timer has reached the set time.  
[In Cooling operation]  
Repeat OFF timer :The unit will stop, every time the set time period has elapsed.  
In cooling operation, move the louver with your hands so that the horizontal  
air outlet points in a direction so that the cold air diffuses the entire room.  
ON timer  
:The unit will start when the time on the timer has reached the set time.  
Timer operation  
[In Heating operation]  
In heating operation, move the louver with your hands so that the horizon-  
tal air outlet points in a downward direction, towards the floor.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
Adjustment of air Flow direction rightwards/leftwards  
[In case of using unsymmetrical air directions]  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
2
Lift up the vertical louver lightly and direct it towards the desired  
direction once completed lower the louver back down.  
1
1
In this case, do not use the Swing function.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
2
[In case of automatic swing]  
In this case, do not use the  
swing function.  
SWING/FIX  
1
Push the  
button during operation.  
• [SWING  
] is displayed and the air direc-  
tion will automatically change rightwards/  
leftwards.  
3 4  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
In cases where one remote controller  
controls multiple indoor units, it is possible to  
set each indoor unit individually, so that the  
air flow direction can be altered.  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
1
2
Push the TIMER SET button.  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
• The timer display (type) changes for every  
push of the button.  
SWING/FIX  
SET CL  
2
3
Push the  
button again whilst the  
(OFF timer)  
(Repeat OFF timer)  
No display  
(ON timer)  
vertical louver is moving will allow you  
to stop the louver in the desired posi-  
tion.  
• SET TIME and timer time displays flash.  
TIME  
Push the  
buttons to select the “SET TIME”.  
For every push of the  
button, the set time increases in the unit of 0.5 hr (30 minutes).  
UNIT  
1, 2  
3
The maximum set time is 72.0 hr.  
Swing button  
For every push of the  
button, the set time decreases in the unit of 0.5 hr (30 minutes).  
• To set up the air flow the direction individu-  
UNIT  
ally, push the  
button to display each  
The minimum set time is 0.5 hr.  
indoor unit No. in a group control.  
Then set up the air flow direction to the  
desired indoor unit.  
No display  
Unit No. 1-1  
Unit No. 1-2  
3
Push the SET button.  
SETTING  
• The  
display disappears and the timer time display goes on.  
is activated, the chosen time period will be displayed.  
Once the time has been reached, all displays except the ON light will disappear.)  
Unit No. 1-4  
Unit No. 1-3  
• If there is no display, all the indoor units can  
(When the ON timer  
be operated collectively.  
UNIT  
• Every push of the  
the display as shown in the figure.  
button, will change  
Cancel of timer operation  
4
Push the CL button.  
INFORMATION  
• TIMER display will disappear.  
• If cooling operation is performed with downward air outlet, dew may form on the surface of the cabinet  
or the horizontal louver, resulting in possible dripping of water.  
• If heating operation is performed with the horizontal air outlet actively moving, unevenness of the tem-  
perature may increase within the room.  
NOTICE  
• When the unit stops after the timer has reached the preset time, the Repeat OFF timer will resume the  
• Do not move the louver directly with your hands during swing operation; otherwise a fault may be caused.  
The vertical louver does not stop immediately even if the SWING/FIX button is pushed.  
To adjust the stop position, push the SWING/FIX button.  
ON / OFF  
operation. However by pushing the  
timer has again reached its set time.  
button the repeat function will stop once the time on the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11. Installation  
3-12. Maintenance  
Installation location  
Cleaning of air filter  
• When [FILTER] is displayed on the remote controller, its is time to check and if necessary clean the filter.  
• Clogging of air filter decreases the cooling/heating effect.  
WARNING  
• Select a location for installation that will be able to safely support the weight of the unit.  
If the installation location is not strong enough to support the unit and the unit falls, injury could result.  
CODE No.  
SET DATA SETTING TEST  
UNIT No.  
CAUTION  
R.C.  
No.  
H
FILTER display  
• Do not install the unit in a location where combustible gases could conceivably leak.  
Notifies that it is time to clean the air filter.  
Leaking gases that accumulate in the vicinity of the unit could be ignited by the unit.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
REQUIREMENT  
• A location that permits the level installation of the unit  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
FILTER reset  
SET CL  
• A location that provides enough space to service the unit safely  
• A location where water draining from the unit will not pose a problem  
Push the FILTER switch after cleaning.  
The “FILTER” display will disappear.  
Avoid the following types of locations :  
• Locations where salt is present in large amounts (seaside areas), or where sulfuric gases are present in  
large amounts (hot springs areas)  
(If the unit is to be used in such areas, special maintenance is necessary.)  
WARNING  
Be sure to turn off the main power supply prior to any maintenance.  
• Locations that generate oils (including machine oils), steam, oily smoke, or corrosive gases  
• Locations where organic solvents are used  
• Please do not intend to do the daily maintenance and/or Air Filter cleaning by yourself.  
Cleaning of the air filter and other parts of the unit involves dangerous work in high places, so be sure to  
have a qualified service person do it. Do not attempt it by yourself.  
• Locations in the vicinity of equipment that generates high frequency signals  
• Locations where the outdoor unit will blow in the direction of a neighbor's window  
• Locations where the noise of the outdoor unit will pose a problem  
• Locations with poor air circulation  
Daily maintenance  
• For daily maintenance including Air Filter cleaning, please use qualified service personnel, particularly for  
the following models;  
4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
2-way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
Concealed Duct Type  
Slim Duct Type  
Concealed Duct, High Static Pressure Type  
Under Ceiling Type  
Electric wiring  
WARNING  
Ensure that the unit is correctly earthed.  
NO GOOD  
Grounding is necessary. If earthing is incomplete, an electric shock may be caused.  
NO GOOD  
CAUTION  
Check that the circuit breaker is fitted.  
NO GOOD  
Attaching a earth leakage breaker is necessary. Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused.  
2-way Air Discharge  
Cassette Type  
4-way Air Discharge  
Cassette Type  
1-way Air Discharge  
Cassette Type  
Make sure that the correct capacity Fuses are used.  
Using wire or copper wire may cause a fire or unit fault.  
NO GOOD  
Ensure that the power supply to the unit is exclusive and is the correct rated voltage.  
NO GOOD  
NO GOOD  
To disconnect the appliance from the main power supply.  
This appliance must be connected to the main power supply by means of a circuit breaker or a switch with  
a contact separation of at least 3mm.  
NO GOOD  
Concealed Duct Type  
Under Ceiling Type  
Slim Duct Type  
Concealed Duct,  
High Static Pressure Type  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Re-installing the air filter  
High Wall Type  
• Insert the upper portion of air filter confirming alignment with the right and left edges of the indoor unit until it  
is located.  
(Model : 1H series)  
• Push the projection at the center of the air filter.  
• Close the air inlet grille.  
• Undo the clip on the air filter, pull the air filter downwards while  
pushing it towards the main unit side.  
If the FILTER lamp on the indoor unit is lit, push the FILTER button on the remote controller or the TEMPO-  
RARY button on the indoor unit to turn off the lamp.  
Push the air filter,  
and pull it downward.  
(Model : 2H series)  
• Open the air inlet grille.  
Lift the air inlet grille up in to the horizontal position.  
• Take hold of the left and right handles of the air filter and lift it up  
slightly, then pull downwards to remove it from the filter holder.  
Filter holder  
Cleaning the air inlet grille  
1. Remove the air inlet grille.  
Hold the two sides of the air inlet grille and open in an  
upwards direction.  
Filter holder  
Move the center arm to the left and remove the grille.  
2. Wash it with water using a soft sponge or towel.  
(Do not use metallic scrubbing brush or other hard brushes.)  
Floor Standing CabinetType  
• Use of such hard objects will cause scratches on the  
surface of the grille, and the metal coating to peel off.  
• Gently push down the upper part of the suction port, and then pull  
towards you to remove it.  
• If very dirty, clean the air inlet grille with a neutral detergent  
for kitchen use, and rinse it off with water.  
• Take out the air filter inside of the suction port.  
3. Wipe the air inlet grille and allow to dry.  
4. Fit the left and right arms of the air inlet grille to the shafts on  
the two sides of the air conditioner and push in completely,  
then push in the center arm.  
Floor Standing ConcealedType  
5. Check that the center arm has been completely inserted and  
then close the air inlet grille.  
• Push down on the hook of the air filter on the front panel (Lower  
side).  
• Push the arrow locations (Four) at the bottom of the air  
• Pull the air filter towards you to remove it.  
inlet grille to check whether the grill is completely closed.  
Front panel  
(Lower)  
Air filter knob  
Floor Standing Type  
Removal / Attachment of air filter  
Cleaning of main unit / remote controller  
• Pull the air filter towards you.  
• To attach the air filter, insert it into the main body  
and push.  
CAUTION  
• Wipe them with a soft and dry cloth.  
• A cloth dampened with cold water may be used on the indoor  
unit if it is very dirty.  
• Never use a damp cloth on the main unit or remote controller.  
NOTE  
• Do not use or leave a chemically treated duster on the unit for  
Thinner  
• When cleaning the air filter, use a small brush or cleaning device.  
If the air filter is heavily stained use a neutral detergent mixed with warm water.  
long periods of time, as it may damage or alter the colour of  
the unit surface.  
Polishing  
powder  
Benzene  
Chemical  
floor-cloth  
Do not use.  
• After washing the filter, rinse it out thoroughly and place in the shade to dry.  
Do not expose to direct sun light.  
• Do not use benzine, thinner, polishing powder, or similar  
solvents for cleaning. These may cause the plastic surface to  
crack or deform.  
• Once the air filter has dried, place the air filter back into the unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you do not plan to use the unit for more than 1 month  
1. Operate the fan for 3 to 4 hours to dry the inside of the unit  
• Operate “FAN” mode.  
3-13. Air Conditioner Operations and Performance  
Check before operation  
• Check whether earth wire is disconnected or out of place.  
WARNING  
2. Stop the air conditioner and turn off the main power supply  
or the circuit breaker.  
Turn on the power supply  
12 hours or more before  
starting the air conditioner.  
• Check that air filter is installed to the indoor unit.  
Wipe with a  
dry soft cloth  
Heating capacity  
• During heating operation the heat pump system operates by  
absorbing the heat from the outside air and discharging it into the room.  
Checks before operation  
Therefore if the outside temperature drops, the units heating capacity will decrease.  
1. Check that the air filters are installed.  
2. Check that the air outlet or inlet is not blocked.  
• When the temperature of the outside air is low, it is recommended that you use other forms of heating in  
conjunction with the air conditioner.  
3. Turn on the main power switch or the circuit breaker  
for the main power supply to the air conditioner.  
Defrost operation during heating operation  
• If the outdoor unit has a build up of frost during the heating operation, the operation mode changes auto-  
matically to defrost mode to increase the heating effect (for approximatley 2 to 10 minutes).  
When the unit has not been  
turn on for a long period of time,  
ensure the unit is dry, as shown  
above and then operate in fan  
only mode for 3 to 4 hours.  
• During defrost operation, fans of the indoor and the outdoor units will stop.  
Protection for 3 minutes  
• The outdoor unit will not operate for approximately 3 minutes after the air conditioner has been immediately  
NOTE  
restarted after being stop, or the power supply has been turned on. This is to protect the system.  
For an Air conditioning system which is operated regularly, cleaning and maintenance of the indoor/  
outdoor units are strongly recommended.  
As a general rule, if an indoor unit is operated for about 8 hours daily, the indoor/outdoor units will need to  
be cleaned at least once every 3 MONTHS. This cleaning and maintenance shall be carried out by a  
qualified person.  
Failure to clean the indoor/outdoor units regularly will result in poor performance, icing, water leakage and  
even compressor failure.  
Main power failure  
• If a power failure occurs during operation, all operations will stop.  
• When restarting the unit, push the ON/OFF button again.  
Fan rotation of stopped unit  
• When other indoor units within the same system are in operation, the fan on the indoor units that are on  
“stand-by” will rotate to protect the machine once per approximately 1 hour for several minutes.  
HINTS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATION  
Protective device (High pressure switch)  
The high pressure switch will stop the unit automatically when excessive load is applied to the air conditioner.  
If the protective device operates, the operation lamp will stay lit but the operation will stop.  
Maintain room temperature at comfortable level  
Clean air filters  
When the protective device operates, check characters “ ” on the remote controller display.  
The clogged air filter impairs the performance of the air conditioner.  
The protective device may operate in the following cases.  
Gee, chilly  
Never open doors and windows more than what is necessary  
Control  
• When suction or discharge port on the outdoor unit is blocked.  
• When strong wind blows continuously against the discharge port of the outdoor unit.  
• When dust or dirt is excessively adhered to the air filter of the indoor unit.  
• When the discharge port of the indoor unit is blocked.  
To keep the cool or warm air in the room, never open doors and  
windows more than what is necessary.  
Window curtains  
In cooling, close the curtains to avoid direct sunlight.  
Clean, please.  
Cooling/heating operation of a Heat Recovery Multi air conditioner  
In heating, close the curtains to keep the heat in.  
• When the outdoor temperature goes out of the operating range, the cooling or heating modes may not be  
performed in order to protect the equipment. In this case, the “ ” light goes on.  
Ensure uniform circulation of room air  
Adjust the air flow direction so that the air is  
evenly circulated throughout the room.  
Characteristics of heating operation  
• Hot air will not be blown out immediately from the indoor unit. It will take between 3 to 5 minutes (depending  
on temperature conditions of the room and the outside) before the indoor heat exchanger warms up suffi-  
ciently, to allow hot air to be blown.  
• During operation, the indoor unit may stop if the outside temperature becomes to high.  
• When other indoor units are in heating operation, the fan operation of the indoor unit on fan only operation  
may be stopped temporarily to prevent hot air from being blown out.  
Blows upward  
Please close  
Air flow adjustment  
Cool and  
dry air  
Characteristics of cooling/heating simultaneous operation  
Warm  
air  
• If the outdoor temperature drops during operation, the fan of the outdoor unit may stop.  
Blows downward  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Air conditioner operating conditions  
For specified performance, operate the air conditioner under the following temperature conditions:  
3-15. When the Following Symptoms are Found  
Check the points described below before contacting your local service repair center.  
Cooling operation  
Outdoor temperature : –10°C to 43°C (Dry-bulb temp.)  
Symptom  
Cause  
Room temperature : 21°C to 32°C (Dry-bulb temp.), 15°C to 24°C (Wet-bulb temp.)  
Outdoor unit  
Indoor unit  
• White misty cold air or • The fan on the outdoor unit automatically stops when  
Room relative humidity – less than 80 %. If the air conditioner operates  
CAUTION  
water is blown out.  
performing a defrost operation.  
in excess of this figure, the surface of the air conditioner may cause dewing.  
Outdoor temperature : –15°C to 21°C (Dry-bulb temp.), –15°C to 15.5°C (Wet-bulb temp.)  
Room temperature : 15°C to 28°C (Dry-bulb temp.)  
• Sometimes, the noise  
“Pushu !” is heard.  
• Solenoid valve works when defrost operation starts and  
finishes.  
Heating operation  
• “Swish” sound is  
sometimes heard.  
• When the unit is in operation,a sound such as the movement  
of water from one area to another may be heard. This sound  
may become larger after a period of 2 to 3 minutes once the  
unit has begun operation. This is not a cause for concern,  
but is the movement of the refrigerant or the draining sound  
of the dehumidifier.  
• If the air conditioner is used outside of the above conditions, the units safety protection devices may operate.  
* Do not use “Super HRM” for other than personal usage where the ambient temperature may go down below  
–5°C. (For example, OA equipment/Electric device/Food/Animals and plants/Art object)  
• Slight “Pishi!” sound is • This is sound generated when the heat exchanger, etc.  
CAUTION  
heard.  
expands and contracts slightly due to the change of tem-  
perature.  
When outdoor temperature goes out of specified range, “  
or ” mark is indicated on the Wired remote  
• Discharge air smells.  
• “ ” indication is lit.  
• Various odurs such as those from a carpet, clothes, ciga-  
rette, or cosmetics will adhere to the air conditioner.  
• Has the outdoor temperature gone out of its specified range  
specified range?  
• When the manager of the air conditioner has fixed the  
operation to either COOL or HEAT, but a request/demand  
contrary to this setup operation is requested.  
controller display and the required operation will stop.  
“
&
” :When in heating operation.  
Notice :  
• This indication is not failure.  
“
” : When in cooling operation.  
• When outdoor temperature goes back to specified range, “ or ” will disappear and the unit will begin  
• When the fan operation is stopped to prevent the discharge  
of hot air.  
normal operation.  
• The unit operation may stop if the next operation (request) cannot be fulfilled because it falls outside the  
specification for Super HRM. See below for the maximum cooling and heating specifications.  
(Outdoor temp. (DB) < –10°C : Cooling mode, > 21°C : Heating mode)  
• Sound or cool air is  
blown from the  
indoor unit.  
• Since refrigerant is flowed temporarily to prevent the stay of  
oil or refrigerant in the stand by indoor unit, the sound of  
flowing refrigerant, “Kyururu” or “Shaa” may be heard.  
When indoor unit operates in HEAT mode, and cold air in  
COOL mode white steam may be blown out.  
• When power of the air  
conditioner is turned  
on, “Ticktock” sound is  
heard.  
• Sound is generated when the expansion valve operates  
when power supply has been turned on.  
3-14. Re-Installation  
DANGER  
Operates or stops automatically.  
Does not operate.  
• Is the timer “ON” or “OFF”?  
If the unit position is to be changed and re-located to a new position ask your local dealer or  
installation specialist. Do not attempt to move the air conditioner yourself, as incorrect installation  
may cause electric shock or fire.  
• Is there a power failure to the unit?  
• Has the power supply been turned off?  
• Has the power fuse or breaker blown?  
• Has the protective device operated?  
(The operation lamp goes on.)  
• Is the timer “ON”? (The operation lamp goes on.)  
• Has the outdoor temperature gone out of the specified range  
for the outdoor unit?  
Do not install the air conditioner in the following places  
• Do not install the air conditioner in any place within 1 m from a TV, stereo or radio set. If the unit is installed in  
such places, noise transmitted from the air conditioner may affect the operation of these appliances.  
Silent  
• Do not install the air conditioner near a high frequency appliance (sewing machine or massager for business  
use, etc.), as the air conditioner may malfunction.  
Air is not cooled or warmed sufficiently.  
• Is the suction port or discharge port of the outdoor unit  
obstructed?  
• Are there any doors or windows open?  
• Is the air filter clogged with dust?  
• Is the discharge louver of the indoor unit set at appropriate  
position?  
• Do not install the air conditioner in a humid or oily place, or in a place where steam, soot or corrosive gas maybe  
generated.  
It’s strange.  
• Do not install the air conditioner in a salty place such as a seaside area.  
• Do not install the air conditioner in a place where a great deal of machine oil is used.  
• Do not install the air conditioner in a place where it is usually exposed to strong change winds such as in a  
seaside area or on the roof / upper floor of a building.  
• Is the air selection set to “LOW” or “MED” and is the opera-  
tion mode set to “FAN Only”?  
• Is the setup temp. the appropriate temperature?  
• Has the outdoor temperature gone out of the specified range?  
• Do not install the air conditioner in a place where sulfureous gas maybe generated such as in a spa.  
• Do not install the air conditioner in a vessel or mobile crane.  
When the following symptoms are found, stop the unit operation immediately, turn off the power supply, and contact the  
dealer from where you have purchased the air conditioner.  
• Activation of the power supply causing the unit to operate in an unstable fashion (power on, power off, power on,  
Be careful with noise or vibrations  
• Do not install the air conditioner in a place where the noise or the hot air  
created by the outdoor unit will come into contact with your neighbours.  
power off etc).  
• Install the air conditioner on a solid and stable foundation as this will reduce  
the transmission of noise and vibration that is produced from the outdoor unit.  
• The main power fuse often blows out, or circuit breaker is often activated.  
• Foreign matters or water have entered the unit by mistake.  
• If one indoor unit is operating, some sound may be audible from other indoor  
units that are connected within the same system (even when not in operation)  
• When the unit fails to operate after the protective device (circuit breaker) has been removed. Not recommended.  
• Other unexplained symptoms or unit abnormalities, that cannot be explained.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Confirmation and check  
When a error has occurred in the air conditioner,  
the check code and the indoor unit No. will appear  
on the display part of the remote controller.  
CODE No.  
UNIT No.  
R.C.  
No.  
The check code is only displayed during while the  
unit is operating.  
If the display disappears, operate the air condi-  
tioner according to the following “Confirmation of  
error history” for confirmation.  
Check code  
Indoor unit No. in which  
an error has occurred  
Confirmation of error history  
When a error has occurred on the air conditioner,  
the error history can be confirmed with the follow-  
ing procedure. (Up to 4 errors can be stored in the  
memory of the remote controller.)  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
2
3
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
The history can be confirmed from both operating  
status and stop status.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
1
Procedure  
Description  
SET  
TEST  
When pushing the  
and  
buttons at the same time  
for 4 seconds or more, the following display will appear.  
If [Service check] is displayed, the mode enters into the  
change error history mode.  
CODE No.  
UNIT No.  
• [01 : Order of error history] is displayed in CODE No.  
window.  
1
R.C.  
No.  
• [Check code] is displayed in CHECK window.  
• [Indoor unit address in which the error has occurred] is  
displayed in UNIT No.  
For every push of the  
is displayed in order.  
,
button used to set temperature, the trouble history stored in memory  
The numbers in CODE No. indicate CODE No. [01] (latest) → [04] (oldest).  
2
3
CAUTION  
CL  
Do not push the  
button because all the error history of the indoor unit will be deleted.  
TEST  
After confirmation, push the  
button to return to the normal display.  
1. Check the error codes according to the above procedure.  
2. Ask an authorized dealer or qualified service (maintenance) professional to repair or maintain the air  
conditioner.  
3. More details of the service codes are explained in the Service Manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMATIC DRAWING  
4-1. Inverter Unit (8, 10, 12HP)  
Model: MMY-MAP0802FT8, MAP1002FT8, MAP1202FT8  
Propeller fan  
FM  
Fan motor  
Sensor  
(TE1)  
(Right side)  
Sensor  
(TO)  
Strainer  
Main heat exchanger  
Pulse motor valve  
(Left side)  
Solenoid valve  
(SV12)  
Main heat exchanger  
(PMV1) (PMV2)  
Sub heat exchanger (Right side)  
Sub heat exchanger (Left side)  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
(PMV3)  
4-Way valve  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV11)  
Solenoid  
Capillary  
tube  
Low-  
pressure  
sensor  
valve  
Sensor  
(TS1)  
(SV5)  
Check  
valve  
Sensor  
(TS2)  
High-pressure  
sensor  
Check  
joint  
Solenoid valve  
(SV2)  
Capillary  
tube  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV6)  
Check joint  
Sensor  
(TL)  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Oil  
separator  
Capillary tube  
Solenoid valve  
(SV3D)  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Liquid  
tank  
Solenoid valve  
(SV42)  
Check  
valve  
Check  
valve  
Solenoid valve  
(SV41)  
High-  
pressure  
switch  
High-  
pressure  
switch  
Accumulator  
Check  
joint  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3C)  
Capillary  
tube  
Sensor  
(TD2)  
Sensor  
(TD1)  
Sensor  
(TK3)  
Strainer Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Check  
valve  
Capillary  
tube  
Capillary  
tube  
Sensor  
(TK1)  
Sensor  
(TK2)  
Oil tank  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3E)  
Sensor  
(TK4)  
Capillary tube  
Capillary tube  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3A)  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3B)  
Check  
valve  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Service Service Service  
Service  
valve of valve at valve at valve at  
balance liquid  
pipe side  
discharge suction  
gas side gas side  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2. Explanation of Functional Parts  
Functional part name  
Functional outline  
Solenoid valve SV3A  
(Connector CN324: Red)  
Closed : Allows oil to collect/remain in the oil tank.  
Open : Allows oil to exit the oil tank.  
SV3B  
SV3C  
SV3D  
SV3E  
SV2  
(Connector CN313: Blue)  
Open : Allows oil to return to the outdoor unit via the balance pipe.  
(Connector CN314: Black)  
Open : Pressurizes the oil tank..  
(Connector CN323:White)  
Open : Supplies oil to the compressor from the oil separator.  
(Connector CN323:White)  
Open :Turns on during operation and balances oil between compressors.  
(Hot gas bypass) (Connector CN312:White)  
1) Low pressure release function  
2) High pressure release function  
3) Gas balance function during stop time  
SV4 1  
SV4 2  
(Gas balance control for compressor start-up) (Connector CN311: Blue)  
1) For gas balance start  
2) High pressure release function  
3) Low pressure release function  
SV5  
(Connector CN310:White)  
1) Increase of No. of heating indoor units, Gas balance function in defrost time  
2) Low-pressure balance function of discharge gas pipe during all cooling operation  
(Connector CN309:White)  
1) Liquid bypass function for discharge temp. release (Cooling bypass circuit)  
SV6  
SV11  
(Connector CN322:White)  
1) For shutdown discharge gas (During all cooling operation and defrost operation)  
SV12  
(Connector CN319:White)  
1) Flow-rate control function of refrigerant to sub heat exchanger during simultaneous operation  
2) Flow-rate control function of refrigerant to sub heat exchanger during defrost operation  
4-way valve  
(Connector CN317: Blue)  
1) Cooling/Heating selection  
2) Reverse defrost  
3) Main-/Sub-heat exchanger selection  
Pulse motor  
valve  
PMV1, 2  
PMV3  
(Connector CN300, 301:White)  
1) Super heat control function during all heating operation and mainly heating, partly cooling operation  
2) Under-cool adjustment function during all cooling operation  
3) Divided flow control function during mainly cooling, partly heating operation  
(Connector CN302: Red)  
1) For flow-rate control of sub heat exchanger during simultaneous operation  
(Control function of heating divided flow)  
2) A function preventive high pressure up during all cooling or all heating operation  
Oil separator  
1) Prevention for early drop of oil level (Decrease of flow-out of discharge oil to cycle)  
2) Reserve function of surplus oil  
Temp. sensor TD1, TD2  
(TD1: Connector CN502:White, TD2: Connector CN503: Pink)  
1) Protection of compressor discharge temp.  
2) Releasing of discharge temp.  
TS1  
TS2  
(Connector CN504:White)  
1) Controls super heat of PMV1 and 2 during all heating operation and simultaneous operation  
(Connector CN522: Black)  
1) Controls indoor oil recovery during all cooling operation and mainly cooling, partly heating operation  
2) Detects overheat of cycle.  
TE  
(Connector CN505: Green)  
1) Controls defrost during all heating operation and simultaneous operation.  
2) Controls outdoor fan during all heating operation and simultaneous operation.  
TK1, TK2,  
TK3, TK4,  
TK1: Connector CN514: Black, TK2: Connector CN515: Green,  
TK3: Connector CN516: Red,  
TK4: Connector CN523:Yellow  
1) Judges oil level of compressor.  
TL  
(Connector CN521:White)  
1) Detects under-cool during all cooling operation and simultaneous operation.  
TO  
(Connector CN507:Yellow)  
1) Detects external ambient temperature.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Functional part name  
Functional outline  
Pressure High pressure sensor  
sensor  
(Connector CN501: Red)  
1) Detects high pressure and uses it to control the capacity of the compressor.  
2) Detects high pressure during all cooling operation and uses it to control the fan when cooling  
with low outside air.  
3) Detects under-cool of the indoor unit of which heating thermo.-ON during all heating operation  
and simultaneous operation.  
4) Controls outdoor fan rpm during mainly cooling, part heating operation.  
Low pressure sensor  
(Connector CN500:White)  
1) Detects low pressure and uses it to control capacity of the compressor during all cooling  
operation and simultaneous operation  
2) Detects low pressure and uses it to controls super heat during all heating operation and  
simultaneous operation  
Heater  
Compressor case heater  
Accumulator case heater  
(Compressor 1 Connector CN316:White, Compressor 2 Connector CN315: Blue)  
1) Prevents liquid accumulation in the compressor  
(Connector CN321: Red)  
1) Prevents liquid accumulation to accumulator  
Balance pipe  
1) Oil balancing pipe between outdoor unit (This unit does not use this Balance pipe.)  
Operation mode  
Operation mode  
Outline  
1. All Indoor Unit(s)  
Operating for Cooling  
Only cooling operation without heating operation  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as a condenser.  
2. All Indoor Unit(s)  
Operating for Heating  
Only heating operation without cooling operation  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as an evaporator.  
3. Simultaneous operation  
MIU for simultaneous operation  
3-1. Mainly cooling, partly Cooling/heating simultaneous operation with subjective cooling operation  
heating operation Outdoor heat exchanger (Sub heat exchanger) is used as a condenser.  
3-2. Mainly heating, partly Cooling/heating simultaneous operation with subjective heating operation  
cooling operation  
Outdoor heat exchanger (Main heat exchanger) is used as an evaporator.  
4. Defrost  
Using the reversing operation of the 4-way valve, ice on the outdoor heat exchanger is  
dissolved within a single cooling cycle.  
For details of operation mode, refer to page 53 to 59.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration of outdoor unit heat exchanger  
Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit)  
RBM-Y1122FE  
Discharge gas pipe  
Suction gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
Propeller fan  
Fan motor  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Capillary  
tube  
Capillary  
SVS  
tube  
Capillary  
tube  
SVD  
Check  
valve  
SVDD  
SVSS  
Strainer  
To indoor  
liquid side  
To indoor  
gas side  
Main heat exchanger  
RBM-Y1802FE  
* RBM-Y1801FE has two “SVS” valves.  
Wind  
Wind  
Discharge gas pipe  
Suction gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Sub heat  
exchanger  
Sub heat  
exchanger  
Capillary  
Capillary  
tube  
tube  
Capillary  
tube  
SVD  
Check  
valve  
SVS SVS  
SVDD SVSS  
Strainer  
Front side  
(Right)  
Rear side  
(Left)  
To indoor  
liquid side  
To indoor  
gas side  
RBM-Y2802FE  
* RBM-Y2802FE has three “SVS” valves and two “SVD”.  
Discharge gas pipe  
Suction gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Capillary  
Capillary  
tube  
tube  
Capillary  
tube  
Check  
valve  
SVD  
SVS SVS SVS  
SVDD SVSS  
Strainer  
To indoor  
liquid side  
To indoor  
gas side  
Functional part name  
Functional outline  
Solenoid valve  
SVD  
(Discharge gas block valve)  
1) High pressure gas circuit during heating operation  
SVS  
(Suction gas block valve)  
1) Low pressure gas circuit during cooling operation  
SVDD (Pressure valve)  
1) For pressurizing when No. of heating indoor units increases.  
SVSS  
(Reducing valve)  
1) For recovery of refrigerant of the stopped indoor unit of which cooling thermo-OFF  
2) For reducing pressure when a No. of heating indoor units decreases.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3. Indoor Unit  
Liquid side Gas side  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Air heat exchanger  
at indoor side  
Pulse Motor  
Valve (PMV)  
Distributor  
Sensor  
(TCJ)  
Fan  
Sensor  
(TC2)  
Sensor  
(TC1)  
Sensor  
(TA)  
M
Fan motor  
(NOTE) MMU-AP0071YH to AP0121YH type air conditioners have no TC2 sensor.  
Functional part name  
Functional outline  
Pulse Motor Valve PMV  
(Connector CN082 (6P): Blue)  
1) Controls super heat in cooling operation  
2) Controls under cool in heating operation  
3) Recovers refrigerant oil in cooling operation  
4) Recovers refrigerant oil in heating operation  
Temp. sensor  
1. TA  
(Connector CN104 (2P):Yellow)  
1) Detects indoor suction temperature  
2. TC1 (Connector CN100 (3P): Brown)  
1) Controls PMV super heat in cooling operation  
3. TC2 (Connector CN101 (2P): Black)  
1) Controls PMV under cool in heating operation  
4. TCJ (Connector CN102 (2P): Red)  
1) Controls PMV super heat in cooling operation  
2) [MMU-AP0071 to AP0121YH only]  
Controls PMV under cool in heating operation  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. SYSTEM REFRIGERANT CYCLE DRAWING  
5-1. Refrigerant Piping Systematic Diagram in System  
Selection of operation mode  
For the selection of each operation mode, refer to the below table:  
“Stop Once” this means the system does not operate for 3 minutes after operation before update has stopped.  
After update  
Mainly cooling, partly Mainly heating, partly  
All cooling operation  
(OFF)  
All heating operation  
(ON)  
heating cooperation  
(ON)  
cooling operation  
(ON)  
All cooling operation  
(OFF)  
Operation continues  
Operation continues  
Stop Once  
(OFF à ON)  
(OFF à ON)  
(OFF à ON)  
Mainly cooling,  
partly heating  
cooperation (ON)  
Operation continues  
Operation continues  
(As ON)  
Operation continues  
(As ON)  
(ON à OFF)  
Before  
update  
Mainly heating,  
partly cooling  
operation (ON)  
Stop Once  
(ON à OFF)  
Operation continues  
(As ON)  
Operation continues  
(As ON)  
All heating operation  
(ON)  
Stop Once  
(ON à OFF)  
Operation continues  
(As ON)  
Operation continues  
(As ON)  
Note) Phrases in the parentheses of the table indicate the status of the 4-way valve.  
ON-OFF list of Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit) valve  
Outline of control valve output of FS unit (Basic operation)  
Indoor operation mode  
SVD  
SVDD  
SVS  
SVSS  
(High pressure  
circuit valve)  
(Pressure valve  
<For delay>)  
(Low pressure  
circuit valve)  
(Reducing valve  
<For delay>)  
1. Stop (Remote controller OFF)  
<All system stop>  
OFF  
<OFF>  
OFF  
<OFF>  
OFF  
<OFF>  
ON  
<OFF>  
2. Cooling thermo-OFF  
3. Cooling thermo-ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
4. Heating thermo-OFF  
5. Heating thermo-ON  
6. “E04” error is being detected  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2. All cooling operation (Operation of cooling only)  
In high outside temperature (10°C or more: Criterion)  
Header unit  
Follower unit  
FM  
FM  
TE1  
TE1  
Sensor  
TO  
Sensor  
TO  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
SV12  
SV12  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV3  
PMV3  
OFF  
OFF  
4-Way valve  
4-Way valve  
SV11  
SV11  
SV5  
TS1  
TS2  
SV5  
TS1  
TS2  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
SV6  
SV6  
SV2  
SV2  
TL  
TL  
OS  
OS  
SV3D  
SV3D  
Liquid  
tank  
Liquid  
tank  
SV41  
HP  
SV41  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
Accumulator  
Accumulator  
SV3C  
SV3C  
TD1  
TD1  
TD2  
TD2  
TK3  
TK3  
TK1  
TK2  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
Oil tank  
TK4  
TK4  
SV3E  
SV3E  
SV3A  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3B  
Suction gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
FS unit  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Indoor unit  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
PMV  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC2  
TC2  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
Cooling  
Cooling  
Cooling  
Stop  
High pressure gas or condensed liquid refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant (Refrigerant recovery line)  
High pressure refrigerant (Push-in circuit)  
Outdoor unit  
Flow selector/Indoor unit  
4-way valve  
SV4 (n)  
SV5  
OFF  
(Note 1)  
OFF  
SV3A  
SV3B  
OFF  
OFF  
Cooling thermo.-ON  
Stop  
SVD  
OFF  
ON  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
SV3C  
SV3D  
SV3E  
OFF  
SVS  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
SV6  
Control  
ON  
Control  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
SV11  
SV12  
OFF  
PMV1, 2  
PMV3  
Control  
Close  
Control  
Close  
Outdoor fan  
Control  
(Note 1) SV4 on the stopped compressor is ON.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In low outside temperature (15°C or less: Criterion)  
Header unit  
Follower unit  
FM  
FM  
TE1  
TE1  
Sensor  
TO  
Sensor  
TO  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
SV12  
SV12  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV3  
PMV3  
OFF  
OFF  
4-Way valve  
4-Way valve  
SV11  
SV11  
SV5  
TS1  
TS2  
SV5  
TS1  
TS2  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
SV6  
SV6  
SV2  
SV2  
TL  
TL  
OS  
OS  
SV3D  
SV3D  
Liquid  
tank  
Liquid  
tank  
SV41  
HP  
SV41  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
Accumulator  
Accumulator  
SV3C  
SV3C  
TD1  
TD1  
TD2  
TD2  
TK3  
TK3  
TK1  
TK2  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
Oil tank  
TK4  
TK4  
SV3E  
SV3E  
SV3A  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3B  
Suction gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
FS unit  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Indoor unit  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
Cooling  
Cooling  
Cooling  
Stop  
High pressure gas or condensed liquid refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant (Refrigerant recovery line)  
High pressure refrigerant (Push-in circuit)  
Outdoor unit  
Flow selector/Indoor unit  
4-way valve  
SV4 (n)  
SV5  
OFF  
(Note 1)  
ON  
SV3A  
SV3B  
OFF  
OFF  
Cooling thermo.-ON  
Stop  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
ON  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
SV3C  
SV3D  
SV3E  
OFF  
SV6  
Control  
OFF  
Control  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
OFF  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
SV11  
SV12  
OFF  
PMV1, 2  
PMV3  
Control  
Close  
Control  
Close  
Outdoor fan  
Control  
(Note 1) SV4 on the stopped compressor is ON.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3. All heating operation (Operation of heating only)  
Header unit  
Follower unit  
FM  
FM  
TE1  
TE1  
Sensor  
TO  
Sensor  
TO  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
SV12  
SV12  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV3  
PMV3  
4-Way valve  
4-Way valve  
OFF  
OFF  
SV11  
SV11  
TS1  
TS1  
Pd  
sensor  
Pd  
sensor  
SV5  
SV5  
TS2  
TS2  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
SV6  
SV6  
SV2  
SV2  
TL  
TL  
OS  
OS  
SV3D  
SV3D  
Liquid  
tank  
Liquid  
tank  
SV41  
HP  
SV41  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
Accumulator  
Accumulator  
SV3C  
SV3C  
TD1  
TD1  
TD2  
TD2  
TK3  
TK3  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
TK4  
TK4  
SV3E  
SV3E  
SV3A  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3B  
Suction gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
FS unit  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Indoor unit  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC2  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
Heating  
Heating  
Heating  
Stop  
High pressure gas or condensed liquid refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant (Refrigerant recovery line)  
High pressure refrigerant (Push-in circuit)  
Outdoor unit  
Flow selector/Indoor unit  
4-way valve  
SV4 (n)  
SV5  
OFF  
SV3A  
SV3B  
OFF  
ON  
Heating thermo.-ON  
Heating thermo.-OFF  
Stop  
(Note 1)  
OFF  
SVD  
SVS  
ON  
OFF  
SVD  
SVS  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Close  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
SV3C  
SV3D  
SV3E  
OFF  
SV6  
Control  
ON  
Control  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
OFF  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
SV11  
OFF  
SV12  
OFF  
PMV1, 2  
PMV3  
Control  
Close  
Control  
Close  
Outdoor fan  
Control  
(Note 1) SV4 on the stopped compressor is ON.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4. Mainly Cooling, Partly Heating Operation  
(Cooling/heating simultaneous operation with subjective cooling operation)  
Header unit  
Follower unit  
FM  
FM  
TE1  
TE1  
Sensor  
TO  
Sensor  
TO  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
SV12  
SV12  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV1  
PMV2  
Operating  
Operating  
for condenser  
for condenser  
PMV3  
PMV3  
4-Way valve  
4-Way valve  
ON  
ON  
SV11  
SV11  
TS1  
TS1  
Pd  
sensor  
Pd  
sensor  
SV5  
SV5  
TS2  
TS2  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
SV6  
SV6  
SV2  
SV2  
TL  
TL  
OS  
OS  
SV3D  
SV3D  
Liquid  
tank  
Liquid  
tank  
SV41  
HP  
SV41  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
Accumulator  
Accumulator  
SV3C  
SV3C  
TD1  
TD1  
TD2  
TD2  
TK3  
TK3  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
TK4  
TK4  
SV3E  
SV3E  
SV3A  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3B  
Suction gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
FS unit  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Indoor unit  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
PMV  
TC2  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC2  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
Cooling  
Cooling  
Stop  
Heating  
High pressure gas or condensed liquid refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant (Refrigerant recovery line)  
High pressure refrigerant (Push-in circuit)  
Outdoor unit  
Flow selector/Indoor unit  
4-way valve  
SV4 (n)  
SV5  
ON  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3C  
SV3D  
SV3E  
OFF  
OFF  
Cooling thermo.-ON  
Heating thermo.-ON  
Stop  
(Note 1)  
OFF  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
ON  
SVD  
SVS  
ON  
OFF  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
SV6  
Control  
ON  
Control  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
OFF  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
OFF  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
SV11  
OFF  
SV12  
Control  
PMV1, 2 Close (Note 2)  
PMV3 Control  
Control  
Control  
Close  
Outdoor fan Control  
(Note 1) SV4 on the stopped compressor is ON. (Note 2) May be controlled.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5. Mainly Heating, Partly Cooling Operation  
(Cooling/heating simultaneous operation with subjective heating operation)  
Header unit  
Follower unit  
FM  
FM  
TE1  
TE1  
Sensor  
TO  
Sensor  
TO  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
SV12  
SV12  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV3  
PMV3  
4-Way valve  
4-Way valve  
ON  
ON  
SV11  
SV11  
TS1  
TS1  
Pd  
sensor  
Pd  
sensor  
SV5  
SV5  
TS2  
TS2  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
SV6  
SV6  
SV2  
SV2  
TL  
TL  
OS  
OS  
SV3D  
SV3D  
Liquid  
tank  
Liquid  
tank  
SV41  
HP  
SV41  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
Accumulator  
Accumulator  
SV3C  
SV3C  
TD1  
TD1  
TD2  
TD2  
TK3  
TK3  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
TK4  
TK4  
SV3E  
SV3E  
SV3A  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3B  
Suction gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
FS unit  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Indoor unit  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC2  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
Heating  
Heating  
Stop  
Cooling  
High pressure gas or condensed liquid refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant (Refrigerant recovery line)  
High pressure refrigerant (Push-in circuit)  
Outdoor unit  
Flow selector/Indoor unit  
4-way valve  
SV4 (n)  
SV5  
ON  
(Note 1)  
OFF  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3C  
SV3D  
SV3E  
OFF  
OFF  
Cooling thermo.-ON  
Heating thermo.-ON  
Stop  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
ON  
SVD  
SVS  
ON  
OFF  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
SV6  
Control  
ON  
Control  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
OFF  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
OFF  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
SV11  
OFF  
SV12  
Close (Note 2) PMV1, 2  
Control PMV3  
Control  
Close (Note 2)  
Control  
Control  
Close  
Outdoor fan  
(Note 1) SV4 on the stopped compressor is ON. (Note 2) May be controlled.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6. Defrost  
Header unit  
Follower unit  
FM  
FM  
TE1  
TE1  
Sensor  
TO  
Sensor  
TO  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
SV12  
SV12  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV3  
PMV3  
OFF  
OFF  
4-Way valve  
4-Way valve  
SV11  
SV11  
Pd  
sensor  
Pd  
sensor  
SV5  
TS1  
SV5  
TS1  
TS2  
TS2  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
SV6  
SV6  
SV2  
SV2  
TL  
TL  
OS  
OS  
SV3D  
SV3D  
Liquid  
tank  
Liquid  
tank  
SV41  
HP  
SV41  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
Accumulator  
Accumulator  
SV3C  
SV3C  
TD1  
TD1  
TD2  
TD2  
TK3  
TK3  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
TK4  
TK4  
SV3E  
SV3E  
SV3A  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3B  
Suction gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVS  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
SVD  
FS unit  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
SVDD SVSS  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Indoor unit  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
Cooling  
Heating  
Heating  
Stop  
High pressure gas or condensed liquid refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant  
Low pressure gas refrigerant (Refrigerant recovery line)  
High pressure refrigerant (Push-in circuit)  
Defrost operation is carried out during all heating operation or Mainly heating, part cooling operation.  
Outdoor unit  
Flow selector/Indoor unit  
Cooling thermo.-ON Others  
4-way valve  
SV4 (n)  
SV5  
OFF  
SV3A  
SV3B  
OFF  
OFF  
(Note 1)  
ON  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
ON  
SVD  
SVS  
OFF  
ON  
SV3C  
SV3D  
SV3E  
OFF  
SV6  
Control  
OFF  
Control  
ON  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
Fan  
OFF  
SVDD  
SVSS  
PMV  
Fan  
OFF  
ON  
SV11  
ON  
SV12  
Close  
PMV1, 2  
PMV3  
Control  
Control  
Control  
Control  
Control  
Stop  
Outdoor fan Stop (Note 2)  
(Note 1) SV4 on the stopped compressor is ON. (Note 2) May be controlled.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. CONTROL OUTLINE  
6-1. Indoor Unit  
6-1-1. Control Specifications  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
1
Power supply  
is reset.  
(1) Identification of outdoor unit  
When the power supply is reset, the outdoor units are  
individually identified and communication is established.  
(2) Check code clear  
When the power supply is reset, the check code is also reset.  
If an abnormal status is still present upon restart the check  
code will be displayed again on the remote controller.  
2
Operation  
select  
(1) Based upon the operation command received from the  
remote controller or central controller, the operation mode is  
selected.  
∗ Concealed Duct High  
Static Pressure type air  
conditioner cannot operate  
in drying mode.  
Remote controller  
Control outline  
command  
STOP  
FAN  
Stops air conditioner.  
Fan only operation  
COOL  
Cooling operation  
DRY  
Dry operation ∗  
HEAT  
Heating operation  
COOL/HEAT AUTO  
COOL/HEAT AUTO operation  
Heating operation is automatically selected with difference  
between the set point temperature and room temperature.  
3
Room temp.  
control  
(1) Set point temperature adjustment range on remote controller  
(°C)  
Allcooling  
18 to 29°C  
18 to 30°C  
All heating  
18 to 29°C  
16 to 30°C  
Wired type  
Wireless type  
(2) The set point temperature in heating operation can be offset  
using item code (DN) 06.  
Setup data  
0
2
4
6
Heating suction temperature  
shift  
Setup temp. correction  
+0°C  
+2°C  
+4°C  
+6°C  
Setup at shipment  
Setup data  
2
4
5
Automatic  
capacity  
control  
(1) The difference between the temperature reading taken from  
the Ta (room) sensor and the Ts (set point) selected on the  
remote controller is used to determine the demand frequency  
to the outdoor unit.  
Air volume  
control  
(1) The remote controller is used to select the modes “HIGH  
HH > H+ > H >  
L+ > L > LL  
(HH)”, “MED (M)”, “LOW (L)” or “AUTO”.  
(2) The difference between the temperature reading taken from  
the Ta (room) sensor and the Ts (set point) selected is used  
to control the air volume setting when in “AUTO” mode.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
6
Prevention of  
cold air  
(1) In all heating operation, the upper limit of the fan tap is set by  
one with higher temperature of TC2 sensor and TCJ sensor.  
discharge  
• When B zone has continued for 6 minutes, the operation  
shifts to C zone.  
• In defrost time, the control point is set to +6°C.  
• In D and E zones, priority  
is given to remote control-  
ler air speed setup.  
• In A and B zones, “ ” is  
displayed.  
(˚C)  
32  
A zone: OFF  
B zone:  
Over 26˚C, below 28˚C, LOW  
C zone:  
Over 28˚C, below 30˚C, MED  
D zone:  
Over 30˚C, below 32˚C, HIGH  
D
C
30  
28  
26  
E
E zone: Ultra HIGH  
20  
16  
B
A
7
Freeze  
(1) In all cooling operation, the air conditioner operates as de-  
scribed below based upon temp. detected by TC1, TC2 and  
TCJ sensors.  
prevention  
control (Low  
temp. release)  
To prevent the heat exchanger from freezing, the operation  
stops.  
• When “J” zone is detected for 5 minutes, the command  
frequency becomes “S0” to the outdoor unit.  
• In “K” zone, the timer count is interrupted, and held.  
• When “I ” zone is detected, the timer is cleared and the  
operation returns to the normal operation.  
• When the command frequency became S0 with continua-  
tion of “J” zone, operation of the the indoor fan in LOW  
mode until it reaches the “I ” zone.  
It is reset when the following conditions are satisfied.  
Reset conditions  
>
>
>
1) TC1 12°C and TC2 12°C and TCJ 12°C  
2) 30 minutes passed after stop.  
TC1  
10°C (5°C)  
0°C  
a
P1  
Q1  
(˚C)  
K
P1  
Q1  
J
(2) In all cooling operation, the air conditioner operates as  
described below based upon temp. detected by TC2 and TCJ  
sensors.  
• When “M” zone is detected for 45 minutes, the command  
frequency becomes “S0” to the outdoor unit.  
• In “N” zone, the timer count is interrupted and held.  
• When shifting to “M” zone again, the timer count restarts  
and continues.  
• If “L” zone is detected, the timer is cleared and the opera-  
tion returns to normal operation.  
Reset conditions  
>
>
>
1) TC1 12°C and TC2 12°C and TCJ 12°C  
2) 30 minutes passed after stop.  
(˚C)  
L
TC2, TCJ  
5°C  
P2  
N
P2  
Q2  
∗ In a Model without TC2,  
TC2 is not judged.  
M
Q2  
–2.0°C  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
8
Recovery control  
for cooling  
refrigerant and oil  
(1) The indoor unit which stops operation, thermostat is OFF,  
or operates in FAN mode opens PMV of the indoor unit by  
the specified opening degree when cooling refrigerant or oil  
recovery signal is received from the outdoor unit.  
• Recovery operation is  
usually executed every 2  
hours.  
(2) Drain pump of 4-way air discharge cassette type and  
concealed duct type operate during recovery control mode.  
9
Recovery control  
for heating  
The indoor unit which stops operation, thermostat is OFF, or  
operates in FAN mode performs the following controls when  
• In the indoor unit which  
thermostat is OFF, or  
operates in FAN mode,  
refrigerant and oil the heating refrigerant/Oil recovery signal is received from the  
outdoor unit.  
“
” lamp goes on.  
1) Opens PMV of the indoor unit by the specified opening  
degree.  
2) Stops the fan.  
• Recovery operation is  
usually executed every  
1 hour.  
3) Only 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type air conditioner  
rotates the indoor fan with intermittent operation for  
approximately 1 minute after recovery control.  
4) Only 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type air conditioner  
rotates the indoor fan with intermittent operation for  
approximately 1 minute after recovery control as the  
outdoor unit.  
5) After recovery control, drain pump of 4-way air discharge  
cassette type and concealed duct type will operate.  
10 Short intermittent (1) For 5 minutes after the operation has started, the operation  
operation  
compensation  
control  
is continued even if entering thermostat-OFF condition.  
(2) However, if the thermostat has been turned off by changing  
the set up temp., the thermostat is OFF with even the  
above condition. The protective control has priority.  
11 Drain pump  
control  
(1) During “COOL” operation (including DRY operation), the  
Check code [P10]  
drain pump operates.  
(2) While the drain pump operates, if the float switch works,  
the drain pump continues operation and a check code is  
displayed.  
(3) While the drain pump stops, if the float switch works, turn  
off the capacity demand command, stop the operation, and  
operate the drain pump. If the float switch continues  
operating for approx. 5 minutes, the operation stops and  
the check code is displayed.  
(4) In heating operation, if humidifier “provided” is judged,  
compressor “ON”, compressor “ON”, fan “ON”, and MAX  
(TC2, TCJ) > 33°C, the drain pump operates.  
12 Elimination of  
remaining heat  
(1) When the air conditioner stops in the “HEAT” mode, drive  
the indoor fan with “LOW” mode for approx. 30 seconds.  
13 Auto louver  
control  
(1) When the louver signal has been received from the remote  
controller, the louver operates if the indoor fan is operating.  
(2) In 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type, the discharge louver  
automatically directs downward if the operation stops.  
(3) In 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type, the discharge louver  
directs upward if the heating operation is being prepared.  
14 Filter sign display (1) The operation time of the indoor fan is integrated and  
(None in wireless  
type)  
∗ Provided in the  
separately laid  
type  
stored in memory, and the filter exchange signal is sent to  
the remote controller to display on the remote controller  
LCD after the specified time.  
(2) When the filter reset signal is received form the remote  
controller, time of the integrated timer is cleared. In this  
time, if the specified time has passed, the measured time is  
reset and LCD display disappears.  
TCB-AX21E.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
” and “  
display  
(Operation and  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
15  
“
”
<Operation standby> .......... Display on remote controller  
(1) • “P05” is one of displays of power wire missing.  
• “P05” of power cable is detected.  
• “ ” goes on.  
heating stand-by)  
• “COOL/DRY” operation cannot be performed because the  
other indoor unit is under “HEAT” operation.  
• “HEAT” operation cannot be performed because COOL  
priority is set (Outdoor I/F P.C. board SW11 1-bit is ON)  
and the other indoor unit is under “COOL/DRY” operation.  
• “FAN” operation cannot be performed because the system  
performs “Heat oil/Refrigerant recovery” operation.  
• There is a unit in which indoor overflow “P10” is detected.  
• There is a unit in which interlock alarm “P23” is detected.  
(2) The above indoor units unavailable to operate waits under  
condition of thermostat OFF.  
• “ ” goes on.  
<HEAT standby> .................. Display on remote controller  
(1) • HEAT thermostat is OFF.  
• During HEAT operation, the fan rotates with lower air speed  
than one specified in order to prevent discharge of cold  
draft or stops. (including case that defrost operation is  
being performed)  
• “HEAT” operation cannot be performed because COOL  
priority is set (Outdoor I/F P.C. board SW11 bit 1 is ON) and  
the other indoor unit is under “COOL/DRY” operation.  
(2) “HEAT standby” is displayed until the above conditions are  
released.  
16 Selection of  
central control  
mode  
(1) The contents which can be changed on the remote controller  
at indoor unit side can be selected by setup at the central  
controller side.  
(2) In case of operation from TCC-LINK central controller  
(TCB-SC642TLE, etc.)  
[Central control mode 1] : Cannot operate  
[Central control mode 2] :  
Cannot operate, stop, select mode, set up temp.  
[Central control mode 3] :  
Cannot select mode, set up temp.  
[Central control mode 4] : Cannot select mode  
(3) RBC-AMT21E (Wired remote controller)  
If operation is performed  
from the remote  
While mode is the central control mode, “  
lights on the display part of the remote controller.  
CENTRAL”  
controller “CENTRAL  
CONTROL” mode, the  
status is notified with  
receiving sound.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2. Outdoor Unit  
6-2-1. Operation Start/Operation End  
The compressor, solenoid valve, pulse motor valve (PMV), outdoor fan, etc. are controlled by a command from  
the indoor controller.The follower outdoor unit starts/stops by a command from the header outdoor unit.  
No.  
Item  
Operation explanation and applied data, etc.  
Remarks  
1
Pulse Motor Valve  
(PMV) control  
(1) PMV control (using two PMV, 1 and 2)  
• During heating operation,  
PMV2 is 0 pulses and  
PMV may be controlled  
with only PMV 1, with a  
minimum of 45 pulses.  
• Each PMV is controlled between 90 to 1000 pulses  
during operation.  
• In cooling operation, PMV opening is dependent upon  
detected readings from the TL sensor and Pd pres-  
sure sensor (sub-cool control).  
• In heating operation, PMV opening is dependent upon  
detected readings from the TS and TD sensors and  
the Ps pressure sensor (super-heat control).  
• Each PMV will be fully closed when the system is in  
‘Standby’ or ‘No demand’ modes and when a malfunc-  
tion in the system has occurred.  
1000  
PMV 2  
550  
500  
90  
PMV 1  
45  
Min.  
Med.  
Max.  
(2) PMV3 control  
1) PMV3 (Pulse Motor Valve 3) is controlled between 0  
to 500 pulses during mainly cooling, part heating or  
mainly heating, part cooling operation.  
2) PMV3 opening is controlled according to the demand  
capacity difference (HP) between the cooling  
capacity and the total heating capacity.  
3) The PMV will be fully closed when the system is in  
‘Standby’ or ‘No demand’ modes and when a mal-  
function in the system has occurred.  
2
Outdoor fan control (1) Fan control in all cooling operation  
1) The outdoor fan speed/mode is determined by the  
When TE temp. (ambient  
temperature) exceeds 25°C,  
Heating operation stops.  
detected Pd pressure value.  
2) When cooling operation has started, the outdoor fan  
speed of the master unit is controlled using the  
detected Pd pressure value.  
(2) Fan control in all heating operation  
1) The outdoor fan speed/mode is determined by the  
detected TE sensor value.  
2) If a TE value > 25°C has been continuously detected  
for 5 minutes, the operation may stop.  
3) After start up, this control is not available during the  
specified time after a defrost operation.  
4) This operation may start and stop repeatedly when  
the system is undercharged.  
(3) Fan control for mainly cooling, part heating operation  
• The maximum fan speed  
differs depending on the  
outdoor HP.  
The outdoor fan speed (mode) is controlled according to  
the target of the Pd (Discharge pressure).  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Operation explanation and applied data, etc.  
Remarks  
3
Capacity control  
1) The capacity request command received from the  
indoor controller determines the inverter frequency  
control of the outdoor unit.  
• Min. frequency: 26Hz  
2) The two compressors in each outdoor unit swap  
starting order on successive operation.  
4
Oil level detection  
control  
1) Measurement of sensors TK1 to TK4 is used to  
determine whether the correct amount of oil is  
present in the compressor case.  
• The detection is per-  
formed when one or both  
compressors are oper-  
ated.  
2) A comparison of measurements taken from TK1/TK2  
with that of TK3/TK4 is used to judge whether there is • Adequate oil level  
sufficient oil in the compressor case. If there is  
insufficient oil in the compressor case, the system  
switches to the oil equalizing control method.  
(Standard)  
1) The oil level of com-  
pressor 1 is adequate  
when TK1 - TK3 > 15°C  
2) The oil level of com-  
pressor 2 is adequate  
when TK2 - TK3 > 15°C  
3) This control is performed during compressor opera-  
tion.  
(SV2)  
Oil  
separator  
(SV3D)  
OFF  
(SV42)  
(SV41)  
(SV3C)  
OFF  
(TD1)  
(TD2)  
(TK3)  
(TK1)  
(TK2)  
Oil tank  
ON  
(SV3E)  
(TK4)  
(SV3A)  
OFF  
Balance pipe  
Packed valve  
(SV3B)  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Oil short  
protective  
control  
Operation explanation and applied data, etc.  
Remarks  
5
This control is provided to prevent oil shortage occurring in the  
compressors of each outdoor unit.  
The control is achieved by ON/OFF operation of the solenoid  
valves SV3A, SV3B, SV3C and SV3D.  
(1) Oil-short protective control  
The oil shortage protection control function stops the outdoor  
unit, if an oil shortage continues for 30 minutes, after 2  
minutes, 30 seconds the outdoor unit restarts.  
If this function is activated on 3 successive occasions, an error  
check code (H07) is generated and the outdoor unit is  
stopped.  
• Oil accumulated in the  
oil separator is returned  
to the compressor.  
6
Refrigerant/Oil  
recovery control  
(1) During cooling operation, this function is executed to regularly  
to recover the refrigerant/oil from the indoor units and con-  
necting pipe-work back to the outdoor unit.  
This function is also performed to prevent stagnated refriger-  
ant accumulating in the outdoor heat exchanger during low  
ambient cooling.  
The control is managed by the header outdoor unit.  
1) Control conditions  
• Control for refrigerant/  
oil recovery is per-  
formed approximately  
every 2 hours.  
• Cooling oil recovery operation is executed approximately  
every 2 hours.  
2) Contents of control  
• Recovery lasts for  
approximately 2 or 3  
minutes though this is  
dependent upon the  
system capacity.  
• The recovery period lasts for approximately 2 or 3  
minutes though this is dependant on the system capacity.  
(2) Refrigerant recovery control in heating room  
This function is executed regularly to recover the liquid  
refrigerant from the indoor unit.  
It is also used to recover oil present in the outdoor heat  
exchanger during the heating overload operation (except  
during defrost operation).  
The control is managed by the header outdoor unit.  
1) Heating operation oil, recovery control is executed approxi-  
mately every hour.  
2) The period of recovery lasts for approximately 2 to 10  
minutes though this is dependent upon the load condition.  
(3) Control for refrigerating / whilst oil recovery in simultaneous  
operation.  
This function is executed to recover the refrigerating oil  
accumulated in the low-pressure gas inter-unit piping.  
(regardless of all cooling operation/all heating operation).  
• Heating operation, oil  
recovery is executed  
approximately every  
hour.  
1) Control condition  
• When the combined time of the compressor-ON has  
reached 95 minutes in simultaneous operation.  
2) Control contents  
• Recovery lasts for  
approximately 2 to 10  
minutes though this is  
dependent upon the  
load condition.  
When the conditions have been satisfied, upon changing  
the indoor unit mode from heating to cooling, (stop the  
indoor fan) the oil is recovered for a period between 2  
minutes 30 seconds to 10 minutes. The indoor unit in  
cooling operation continues operation.  
7
Defrost control  
(Reverse cycle  
defrost method)  
(1) Defrost start condition  
• During the defrost  
operation, all solenoid  
4-way valves are OFF  
and all compressors  
are operating.  
The defrost function is initiated when the measurement  
temperature taken from the TE sensor is lower than -2°C for a  
period of 25 minutes after compressor initial start up and 55  
minutes after subsequent start ups.  
(2) Contents of control  
• If the outdoor units are combined, the minimum duration for  
the defrost operation is 2 minutes.  
(3) Defrost stop condition  
• The outdoor fan speed and compressor inverter frequency  
are determined by the measurement of Pd pressure during  
defrost operation.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Operation explanation and applied data, etc.  
(1) SV2 gas balance control  
Remarks  
8
Release valve  
control  
In order to decrease the starting load on the compressor, SV2 valve  
is opened during the time the compressor is ‘OFF’, and the gas is  
balanced.  
(2) SV2 high pressure release control  
This function limits the pressure level during the low frequency  
operation of the inverter.  
(3) SV2 low pressure release control  
This function is used to prevent rapid pressure drop during transient  
operation of the unit. This is performed by the header unit only. The  
function is performed when required, except during ‘No demand’  
status or when the system is in ‘Standby’.  
(4) SV41, SV42 valves  
1) SV41, 42 low-pressure release control  
This function is used to prevent pressure dropping to low.  
The function is performed during defrost operation, heat start up,  
all cooling operation, or mainly cooling or part heating operation.  
• Control contents (Defrost/heating start pattern)  
Turn on SV41 and SV42 when PS pressure ≤ 0.1MPa, and turn  
off SV41 and SV42 when PS pressure ≥ 0.15MPa.  
• Control contents (All cooling operation, Mainly cooling, part  
heating operation)  
Turn on SV41 and SV42 when PS pressure ≤ 0.14MPa and Pd  
pressure ≤ 1.8MPa, and turn off SV41 and SV42 when PS  
pressure ≥ 0.24MPa and Pd pressure ≥ 2.2MPa  
2) High pressure release control  
This function is for gas bypass control which emergently prevents  
the high pressure cut.  
Turn on SV41 and SV42 when Pd pressure ≥ 3.5MPa, and turn off  
SV41 and SV42 when Pd pressure ≤ 3.45MPa.  
(5) SV6 valve  
1) Cooling bypass control  
This function is a liquid refrigerant bypass control to suppress the  
rise of the discharge temperature or the inside temperature of the  
compressor.  
Turn on SV6 valve when the discharge temperature (TD1 or TD2)  
becomes 96°C or higher and turns off when it drops below 84°C  
by bypassing liquid refrigerant.  
(6) PMV3  
1) High pressure release control (All heating operation)  
This function suppresses the rise of high pressure during the  
inverter low frequency operation when in all heating operation  
mode.  
Set up PMV3 opening to 45 pulses when Pd pressure = 3.45MPa.  
2) High pressure release control (All cooling operation)  
Set up PMV3 opening to 60 pulses when Pd pressure = 3.5MPa.  
9
Frequency  
release  
control  
(1) High pressure release control  
This function is to correct the operation command of the compressor  
and suppress the rise of high pressure.  
1) Control contents  
The operation frequency is decreased by 1 step when Pd pres-  
sure ≥ 3.4MPa. It is decreased by 1 step every 10 seconds until  
Pd pressure drops below 3.4MPa.  
2) Release condition  
• When Pd pressure ≤ 3.2MPa  
• When refrigerant recovery control starts in all heating mode  
• During defrost operation, stop, thermo OFF  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No.  
Item  
Operation explanation and applied data, etc.  
Remarks  
10 Compressor  
stop due to  
Each compressor is stopped should the Pd pressure sensor reach a  
value of 3.5 MPa. This control is performed by the header unit and  
any follower units.  
high pressure  
release  
11 Case heater  
control  
Heating is provided for both the compressor case and accumulator.  
When the compressor in any outdoor unit is stopped, the heater is  
switched on to prevent accumulation of refrigerant.  
After installation of a system, it should be powered for the specified  
period of time prior to operating a test run to prevent damage to the  
system.  
If the system has not been powered for a prolonged period of time, it  
is important to apply power for the specified period of time before  
resuming operation.  
This function is often performed in conjunction with the compressor  
winding heating control. When this occurs, a noise may be heard  
which is not an indication of a malfunction.  
(1) Contents of control  
• The function is performed during when the compressor is off.  
• When the TO sensor temp measures 28°C or higher the heater  
turns off and turns on when it change:measures 25°C or lower  
• The heater remains ‘ON’ for 10 minutes after the compressor  
has changed mode from Off to On.  
12 IPDU control  
The IPDU controls the inverter compressor by communicating a  
command frequency that controls the compressor speed, depending  
on any active releases.  
The main controls of the IPDU P.C. board are:  
(1) Current release control  
Feedback from the AC input current sensor (CT) is used to  
prevent the inverter input current exceeding its specified limit  
(2) Heat sink temperature detection control  
• Feedback from the thermistor (TH) on the compressor driving  
module is used to prevent the IGBT from overheating. The  
highest value is taken from IPDU 1 and IPDU 2 TH sensors.  
• A TH sensor is  
provided in each two  
IPDU.  
(3) Over-current protective control  
• When an over-current condition is detected by the IPDU, the  
compressor is stopped.  
(4) Compressor case thermo control  
• The compressor stops when the compressor case thermostat is  
activated.  
• Whenever this condition occurs, a 1 count is added to the  
system error count.  
• After a period of 2 minutes and 30 seconds, the compressor is  
reactivated and the error count cleared if the operation contin-  
ues without further error for a period of 10 minutes or more.  
• The case thermostat  
is normally closed  
and connected to  
interface P.C. board.  
• If the error count reaches 4, the check code [H04] is displayed  
(for compressor 1) and [H14] (for compressor 2).  
13 High pressure  
prevention  
(1) High pressure SW control  
• The high pressure switch is connected to the IPDU board and is  
in the normally closed condition.  
control  
• When the high pressure switch is activated, the compressor is  
stopped.  
• Whenever this condition occurs, a 1 count is added to the  
system error count.  
• After a period of 2 minutes and 30 seconds, the drive to the  
compressor is reactivated and the error count is cleared if the  
operation continues with further error for a period of 10 minutes  
or more.  
• If the error count reaches 4, the check code [P04] is displayed.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other cautions  
1. Cooling operation in low ambient temperatures  
1) The indoor unit freeze prevention control system (TC sensor) may decrease the command frequency to  
the outdoor unit when low coil temperatures are detected.  
2) The cooling capacity control may decrease the command frequency to the outdoor unit when low ambient  
temperature is detected.  
3) When the discharge temperature sensor value reaches 60°C or below, the frequency may be increased  
above the required demand from the indoor unit.  
2. PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) for outdoor unit  
1) When the system power is turned on an audible “clicking” sound is omitted due to the PMV initialising,  
this is a normal condition. When the outdoor unit is situated near other sources of noise, this sound may  
not be noticeable.  
2) Do not remove the driving part (head) of the PMV during operation as it may cause the PMV to malfunction.  
3) When transporting or replacing the outdoor unit, never keep the driving part (head) removed from the  
PMV body as the valve will be closed and may result in damage or failure due to sealed liquid compression.  
4) When refitting the driving part (head) to the body of the PMV, apply pressure until a “click” sound can be  
heard, complete the process by resetting the power to the system.  
Release control list  
Release item  
High pressure release  
Low pressure release  
Operation  
SV2 ON, SV41, SV42 ON  
PMV3=45 pulses (All heating operation), 60 pulses (All cooling operation)  
Operation frequency limit  
SV2 ON, SV41, SV42 ON, Operation frequency limit  
Discharge temp. release SV6 ON, Operation frequency limit  
Current release  
Operation frequency limit  
Heat sink release  
Outdoor fan speed up, Operation frequency limit  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil equation control schematic diagram  
Header outdoor unit  
(MMY-MAP1202FT8)  
Follower outdoor unit  
(MMY-MAP1202FT8)  
Unit to  
send oil  
Unit to  
received oil  
FM  
FM  
TE1  
TE1  
Sensor  
Sensor  
TO  
Main heat exchanger  
TO  
Main heat exchanger  
Main heat exchanger  
SV12  
Main heat exchanger  
SV12  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV1  
PMV2  
PMV3  
PMV3  
OFF  
OFF  
4-Way valve  
4-Way valve  
SV11  
SV11  
SV5  
TS1  
TS2  
SV5  
TS1  
TS2  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
Pd sensor  
SV6  
SV6  
SV2  
SV2  
TL  
TL  
OS  
OS  
SV3D  
SV3D  
Liquid  
tank  
Liquid  
tank  
SV41  
HP  
SV41  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
SV42  
HP  
Accumulator  
Accumulator  
SV3C  
SV3C  
TD1  
TD1  
TD2  
TD2  
TK3  
TK3  
TK1  
TK2  
TK1  
TK2  
Oil tank  
Oil tank  
TK4  
TK4  
SV3E  
SV3E  
SV3A  
SV3A  
SV3B  
SV3B  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. APPLIED CONTROL  
7-1. Indoor Unit  
7-1-1. Setup of Selecting Function in Indoor Unit  
(Be sure to Execute Setup by a Wired Remote Controller)  
<Procedure> Execute the setup operation while the unit stops.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
3
5
6
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
4
2
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
1
SET  
CL  
TEST  
1
2
Push  
,
, and  
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.  
The firstly displayed unit No. indicates the master indoor unit address in the group control.  
In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit is turned on.  
UNIT  
Every pushing  
button, the indoor unit numbers in the group control are successively  
displayed. In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit only is turned on.  
Specify the item code (DN) using the setup temperature and buttons.  
Select the setup data using the timer time and buttons.  
3
4
(When selecting the DN code to “33”, change the temperature indication of the unit from “°C”  
to “°F” on the remote controller.)  
SET  
5
6
Push  
button. (OK if display goes on.)  
2
.
• To change the item to be set up, return to procedure  
• To change the selected indoor unit, return to procedu3re  
.
TEST  
Pushing  
button returns the status to normal stop status.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table: Function selecting item code (DN)  
(Items necessary to perform the applied control at the local site are described.)  
DN  
Item  
Description  
At shipment  
01 Filter display delay  
timer  
0000 : None  
0002 : 2500H  
0004 : 10000H  
0001 : 150H  
0003 : 5000H  
According to type  
02 Dirty state of filter  
0000 : Standard  
0000 : Standard  
0099 : Unfixed  
0000 : No priority  
0001 : High degree of dirt (Half of standard time)  
03 Central control  
address  
0001 : No.1 unit  
0099 : Unfixed  
to  
0064 : No.64 unit  
04 Specific indoor unit  
priority  
0000 : No priority  
0001 : Priority  
06 Heating temp shift  
0000 : No shift  
0002 : +2°C  
0001 : +1°C  
0002 : +2°C  
(Floor type 0000: 0°C)  
to  
0010 : +10°C  
(Up to +6 recommended)  
0d Existence of [AUTO] 0000 : Provided  
0001 : Not provided  
0000 : Not provided  
mode  
0001 : Not provided (Automatic selection from connected outdoor unit)  
0E Follows operation  
mode of the header  
unit  
0000 : Does not follow  
0001 : Follows  
0F Cooling only  
0000 : Heat pump  
0001 : Cooling only (No display of [AUTO] [HEAT])  
0000 : Heat pump  
10 Type  
0000 : (1-way air discharge cassette)  
0001 : (4-way air discharge cassette) to 0037  
According to model type  
11 Indoor unit capacity 0000 : Unfixed  
0001 to 0034  
According to capacity type  
0099 : Unfixed  
12 Line address  
0001 : No.1 unit  
0001 : No.1 unit  
0000 : Individual  
to  
to  
0030 : No.30 unit  
0064 : No.64 unit  
0001 : Header unit of group  
13 Indoor unit address  
14 Group address  
0099 : Unfixed  
0099 : Unfixed  
0002 : Follower unit of group  
19 Louver type  
(Adjustment of air  
direction)  
0000 : Not provided  
0001 : Swing only  
According to type  
0004 : [4-way Air Discharge Cassette type] and [Under Ceiling type]  
1E Temp difference of  
[AUTO] mode  
0000 : 0 deg  
to  
0010 : 10 deg  
0003 : 3 deg  
(Ts±1.5)  
(For setup temperature, reversal of COOL/HEAT by ± (Data value)/2)  
selection COOL →  
HEAT, HEAT →COOL  
28 Automatic restart of 0000 : None  
power failure  
0001 : Restart  
0000 : None  
0000 : Usual  
0002 : None  
29 Operation condition  
of humidifier  
0000 : Usual  
0001 : Condition ignored  
(Detection control for heat exchanger temperature)  
2A Selection of option/  
error input (CN70)  
0000 : Filter input  
0002 : None  
0001 : Alarm input (Air washer, etc.)  
2E HA terminal (CN61) 0000 : Usual  
select  
0001 : Leaving-ON prevention control  
0001 : Available  
0000 : Usual  
(HA terminal)  
30 Automatic elevating  
grille  
0000 : Unavailable  
0000 : Unavailable  
31 Ventilating fan  
control  
0000 : Unavailable  
0001 : Available  
0000 : Unavailable  
32 TA sensor selection  
0000 : Body TA sensor  
0001 : Remote controller sensor  
0000 : Body TA sensor  
33 Temperature unit  
select  
0000 : °C (at factory shipment)  
0001 : °F  
0000 : °C  
40 Drain pump control  
0000 : None  
0002 : None  
0001 : Pump ON  
0003 : Pump OFF  
0003 : Pump OFF  
0000 : Standard  
5d High ceiling selection [4-way Air Discharge Cassette type] and [Under Ceiling type]  
(Air volume selection) 0000 : Standard filter  
0003 : High efficiency filter  
0001 : Super-long life filter  
[Concealed Duct Standard type]  
0000 : Standard static pressure (40Pa)  
0001 : High static pressure 1 (70Pa)  
0003 : High static pressure 2 (100Pa)  
0005 : Correspond to quiet sound  
0006 : Low static pressure (20Pa)  
60 Timer set  
0000 : Available (Operable)  
0001 : Unavailable (Operation prohibited)  
0000 : Available  
(Wired remote  
controller)  
62 Anti-ceiling  
0000 : Clear  
4- way Air Discharge  
Cassette type only  
smudging control  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TYPE  
Item code [10]  
Setup data  
0000  
Type  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette  
4-way Air Discharge Cassette  
2-way Air Discharge Cassette  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette (Compact type)  
Concealed Duct Standard  
Slim Duct  
Abbreviated Model name  
MMU-AP XXX SH  
MMU-AP XXX H  
0001  
0002  
MMU-AP XXX WH  
MMU-AP XXXYH  
MMD-AP XXX BH  
MMD-AP XXX SPH, SH  
MMD-AP XXX H  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
Concealed Duct High Static Pressure  
Under Ceiling  
0007  
MMC-AP XXX H  
0008  
High Wall  
MMK-AP XXX H  
0010  
Floor Standing Cabinet  
Floor Standing Concealed  
Floor Standing  
MML-AP XXX H  
0011  
MML-AP XXX BH  
MMF-AP XXX H  
0013  
—
~
Indoor unit capacity  
Item code [11]  
Setup data  
0001  
0003  
0005  
0007  
0009  
0011  
0012  
0013  
0015  
0017  
0018  
0021  
0023  
Model  
007  
009  
012  
015  
018  
024  
027  
030  
036  
048  
056  
072  
096  
—
~
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1-2. How to Set Up the Cooling Only Indoor Unit  
When connecting an indoor unit for use in cooling only. A flow selector unit is not connected.  
It is necessary to setup the unit.  
Perform setup as per the following procedure.  
Setup of the indoor unit is performed by use of a wired remote controller.  
If a wired remote controller is not used, for setup purposes a wired controller must be temporarily connected.  
When using the air conditioner with a wireless remote controller, select “Cooling Only” on the wireless remote  
controller after the below setup.  
Use of the wireless remote controller can be referred to in the manual supplied with the wireless remote controller.  
Change the setup during off status.  
CODE No.  
UNIT No.  
R.C.  
No.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
3
2
5
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
4
1
6
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
Procedure  
Description  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more and  
CODE No.  
display part will flashes as shown in the figure.  
SETTING  
UNIT No.  
Check that the displayed item code is [10].  
R.C.  
No.  
TEST  
1
• If the item code displayed is not [10], push  
button to  
erase the display and restart the operation from the first step.  
TEST  
(After pushing the  
button, the operation of the remote  
controller will not function for a short period.)  
(* The display changes according to the indoor unit model.)  
In group control, the firstly displayed indoor unit No. becomes the header unit.  
Each pushing of the [UNIT] button, changes the indoor unit number within the group.  
Select the indoor unit that requires setup.  
2
3
4
The indoor unit selected can be confirmed at this time as the louver and fan will operate.  
Use  
Use  
and  
and  
buttons of the set temperature to specify the item code [0F].  
buttons on the timer time to select the setup data [0001].  
CODE No.  
UNIT No.  
Setup data  
Cooling Only setup  
0000  
0001  
∗∗ ∗∗  
R.C.  
No.  
Heat pump  
Cooling Only  
SET  
Push  
button at this time, if the display changes from flashing to lit this confirms setup is complete.  
• To change the setup of a different indoor unit other than the selected unit restart operation from Procedure 2 .  
• In a group control, setup change of all the indoor units in the group is necessary.  
5
6
To change the setup of the group other than the selected one, restart operation from Procedure 2 .  
CAUTION  
Cooling Only and Heat pump cannot be connected in the same group.  
CL  
• Pushing  
button clears the set up contents which has been previously set.  
• In this case, restart from Procedure 2 .  
TEST  
When the setup has completed, push  
button. (The setup is determined.)  
TEST  
Pushing the  
button deletes the display and returns to the normal stop  
TEST  
status. (For some time after  
button has been pushed, the operation of  
the remote controller will not function for a short period.)  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1-3. Setting When Connecting Multiple Indoor Units to a FS unit  
Cautions to connection of indoor unit  
• When connecting multiple indoor units to a single FS unit, it is necessary to set up the Item code.  
This should be done after the addressing of the units.  
• When connecting multiple indoor units to a single FS unit, only group control is available.  
Remote controllers cannot be connected to individual units.  
FS unit  
Piping  
Indoor unit  
Control wiring between  
indoor unit and FS unit  
Remote controller  
Group control  
n Usage/Features  
It is not possible to group control indoor units that  
are connected to more than one FS unit.  
Indoor units off of a single FS unit cannot be indi-  
vidually controlled.  
FS unit  
Piping  
FS unit  
Piping  
FS unit  
Piping  
Indoor  
unit  
Indoor  
unit  
Control wiring  
Control wiring  
between  
indoor unit  
and FS unit  
between  
indoor unit  
and FS unit  
NG  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Group control  
NG  
How to set up Item code  
VENT  
TEST  
1
Push  
4 seconds or more.  
+
buttons simultaneously for  
•
is displayed in the UNIT No. window.  
CODE No.  
• At this time, the fans of all the indoor units in  
SET DATA SETTING  
UNIT No.  
the group control start the fan operation.  
R.C.  
No.  
2
3
Using the set temperature buttons  
/
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
, select the Item code “0E ”.  
2
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
1
3
Change SET DATA to “01 ” using the timer  
buttons  
/
.
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
SET  
4
5
Push  
button.  
5
4
TEST  
Push  
button.  
This confirms the setup has finished.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n In case of not setting 01 to Item code “0E”  
When more than one indoor unit has been set up as a group to one FS unit and you have forgotten to set 01  
on Item code “0E” on all the indoor units, the following may occur:  
1) When AUTO operation is selected on the remote controller and cooling operation and heating operation  
are required, hot air may be discharged from the cooling operation unit or cool air may be discharged  
from the heating operation unit (or fan stops).  
However in case of 2 , “L18” error code is output and the air conditioner stops.  
1
High-pressure gas  
High-pressure gas  
High-pressure gas  
FS unit  
Suction  
High-  
pressure  
gas  
gas pipe  
SVS  
High-  
pressure  
gas  
High-  
High-  
SVSS  
pressure  
pressure  
SVDD  
Discharge  
gas pipe  
gas  
gas  
Liquid  
Liquid  
Liquid  
SVD  
Liquid pipe  
Liquid  
Indoor unit  
Heating operation  
Hot air  
Cooling operation  
Cooling operation  
Control wiring between  
indoor unit and FS unit  
SVD  
SVDD OFF  
SVS OFF  
SVSS OFF  
ON  
Hot air  
Hot air  
2
FS unit  
Low-pressure gas  
Low-pressure gas  
Low-pressure gas  
Suction  
gas pipe  
Low-  
SVS  
pressure  
gas  
SVSS  
SVDD  
Discharge  
gas pipe  
Liquid  
Liquid  
Liquid  
SVD  
Liquid pipe  
Liquid  
Indoor unit  
Cooling operation  
Heating operation  
Heating operation  
Control wiring between  
indoor unit and FS unit  
SVD  
OFF  
SVDD OFF  
Cool  
air  
Cool  
air  
Cool  
air  
SVS  
ON  
ON  
SVSS  
2) When the cooling thermostat of the indoor unit that is connected to the FS unit has been off, the refriger-  
ant will not flow and cooling air may not discharge evenly if the thermostats of the other cooling operation  
units are on.  
3
FS unit  
Suction  
gas pipe  
SVS  
SVSS  
SVDD  
Discharge  
gas pipe  
SVD  
Liquid pipe  
Indoor unit  
Cooling operation  
Thermo OFF  
Cooling operation  
Thermo ON  
Cooling operation  
Thermo ON  
Control wiring between  
indoor unit and FS unit  
SVD  
OFF  
SVDD OFF  
SVS  
OFF  
ON  
SVSS  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1-4. Applied Control in Indoor Unit  
n Remote location ON/OFF control box (TCB-IFCB-4E)  
[Wiring and setup]  
• Use the exclusive connector for connection with the indoor control P.C. board.  
• In a group control, the system can operate when connecting with any indoor unit (Control P.C. board) in the  
group. However when taking out the operation/error signal from the other unit, it is necessary to take out from  
each unit individually.  
(1) Control items  
1) Start/Stop input signal : Operation start/stop in unit  
2) Operation signal  
3) Error signal  
: Output during normal operation  
: Output during alarm  
(Serial communication error or indoor/outdoor protective device) operation  
(2) Wiring diagram using remote control interface (TCB-IFCB-4E)  
Input  
IFCB-4E : No voltage ON/OFF serial signal  
No voltage contact for operation, error display  
Contact capacity: Below Max. AC240V 0.5A  
Output  
Remote location ON/OFF control box  
(TCB-IFCB-4E)  
Indoor control P.C. board  
Start/Stop input  
COM (GND)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
ON/OFF serial  
signal input  
Remote controller prohibition/clear input  
Operation signal output  
COM (+12V)  
COM  
CN06  
Error signal output  
1
2
CN61  
T10  
(YEL)  
3
4
5
6
CN13  
Operation signal output  
Error signal output  
Power supply 220–240V, ~50Hz  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Ventilating fan control from remote controller  
[Function]  
• The start/stop operation can be operated from the wired remote controller when air to air heat exchanger or  
ventilating fan is installed in the system.  
• The fan can be operated even if the indoor unit is not operating.  
• Use a fan which can receive the no-voltage A contact as an outside input signal.  
• In a group control, the units are collectively operated and they can not be individually operated.  
(1) Operation  
Handle a wired remote controller in the following procedure.  
∗ Use the wired remote controller during stop of the system.  
∗ Be sure to set up the wired remote controller to the header unit. (Same in group control)  
∗ In a group control, if the wired remote controller is set up to the header unit, both header and follower units  
are simultaneously operable.  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
1
2
Push concurrently  
+
+
buttons for 4 seconds or more.  
The unit No. displayed firstly indicates the header indoor unit address in the group control.  
In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit turns on.  
UNIT  
Every pushing  
sively.  
button, the indoor unit numbers in group control are displayed succes-  
In this time, the fan of the selected indoor unit only turns on.  
3
4
Using the setup temp  
Using the timer time  
or  
button, specify the item code 31.  
or  
button, select the setup data. (At shipment: 0000 )  
The setup data are as follows:  
Setup data  
0000  
Handling of operation of air to air heat exchanger or ventilating fan  
Unavailable (At shipment)  
Available  
0001  
SET  
5
6
Push  
button. (OK if display goes on.)  
2
).  
• To change the item to be set up, go to the procedure  
• To change the selected indoor unit, go to the procedu3re  
).  
TEST  
Pushing  
returns the status to the usual stop status.  
(2) Wiring  
4-way Air Discharge Cassette type  
Relay (DC12V, procured locally)  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette type (2 series)  
Concealed Duct Standard type  
Slim Duct type  
Outside control  
input of fan  
CN32  
FAN DRIVE  
(2P WHI)  
1
2
1
2
model :  
To terminal  
Under Ceiling type  
High Wall type  
Corresponds up to a relay in which rated current of the  
operation coil is approx. 75mA  
Indoor control  
P.C. board  
Note) Determine the cable length between the  
indoor control P.C. board and the relay within 2m.  
Other type models:  
Correspond up to a relay in which rated current of the  
operation coil is approx. 16mA (Does not correspond  
to a terminal block type relay on the market.)  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Leaving-ON prevention control  
[Function]  
• This function controls the indoor units individually. It is connected with cable to the control P.C. board of the  
indoor unit.  
• In a group control, it is connected with cable to the indoor unit (Control P.C. board), and the item code 2E is  
set to the connected indoor unit.  
• It is used when the start operation from outside if unnecessary but the stop operation is necessary.  
• Using a card switch box, card lock, etc, the forgotten-OFF of the indoor unit can be protected.  
• When inserting a card, start/stop operation from the remote controller is allowed.  
• When taking out a card, the system stops if the indoor unit is operating and start/stop operation from the  
remote controller is forbidden.  
(1) Control items  
1) Outside contact ON : The start/stop operation from the remote controller is allowed.  
(Status that card is inserted in the card switch box)  
2) Outside contact OFF : If the indoor unit is operating, it is stopped forcedly.  
(Start/Stop prohibited to remote controller)  
(Status that card is taken out from the card switch box)  
∗ When the card switch box does not perform the above contact operation, convert it using a relay with b  
contact.  
(2) Operation  
Handle the wired remote controller switch in the following procedure.  
∗ Use the wired remote controller switch during stop of the system.  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
1
2
3
4
5
Push concurrently  
+
+
buttons for 4 seconds or more.  
Using the setup temp  
or  
button, specify the item code 2E .  
Using the timer time  
or  
button, set 0001 to the setup data.  
SET  
Push  
Push  
button.  
TEST  
button. (The status returns to the usual stop status.)  
(3) Wiring  
Relay (procured locally)  
CN61  
1 1  
T10  
2 2  
(YEL)  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
* In the figure, the contact indicates  
a status that the card is taken out.  
Indoor control P.C. board  
Power supply  
Outside contact (Card switch box, etc: Procured locally)  
Note) Determine the cable length between the indoor control P.C. board and the relay within 2m.  
n Demand control from indoor unit  
When the relay is turned on, a forced thermostat-OFF operation starts.  
• Wiring example  
Relay (procured locally)  
CN73  
Note) Determine the cable length between the indoor or  
outdoor control P.C. board and the relay within 2m.  
1
2
1
2
EXCT  
(2P plug: RED)  
Relay coil signal  
Indoor control P.C. board  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2. Outdoor Unit  
7-2-1. Applied Control in Outdoor Unit  
The following functions become available by setting the switches on the outdoor interface P.C. board.  
No.  
Function  
Switch No.  
Bit  
1
Outdoor fan high static pressure shift  
SW10  
2
Interface P.C. board of outdoor unit  
Switch position detail  
SW10  
For setup of outdoor fan high static pressure shift  
Bit 2  
7-2-1-1. Outdoor fan High Static Pressure Shift  
n Usage/Features  
This function is set when connecting a duct to the discharge port of the outdoor unit.  
n Setup  
Tur n “Bit 2” of the dip switch [SW10] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to ON.  
n Specifications  
The outdoor fan high static pressure shift function increases the fan speed on the outdoor unit to enable a  
discharge duct to be installed on the discharge port - the design of the ducting should be such that a static  
pressure of 35 Pa is not exceeded.  
This function should be executed where the discharge ducting static pressure exceeds 15 Pa.  
45Pa or more : For detail of adjustment, consult with the sales subsidiary.  
The discharged air volume from each outdoor unit is shown in the table below:  
Capacity rank (MMY-MAP)  
0801 type  
165  
1001, 1201 type  
175  
Standard air volume of outdoor unit (m³/min.)  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2-2. Applied Control in Outdoor Unit  
The following functions are available by using a separately supplied P.C. board.  
Set up the switches on the outdoor unit (U1).  
No.  
1
Function  
Switch No.  
Bit  
1
Connector No.  
CN513  
Used control P.C. board  
TCB-PCDM2E  
Power peak-cut control (Standard)  
Power peak-cut control (Expansion)  
Snowfall fan control  
SW07  
SW07  
—
2
1,2  
—
—
—
—
CN513  
TCB-PCDM2E  
3
CN509  
TCB-PCMO2E  
TCB-PCMO2E  
TCB-PCMO2E  
TCB-PCMO2E  
4
External master ON/OFF control  
Night operation control  
—
CN512  
5
—
CN508  
6
Operation mode selection control  
—
CN510  
Outdoor unit interface P.C. board  
Connector position detail  
CN508 CN509 CN510 CN513  
Red  
Black  
White  
Blue  
CN511  
Green  
Switch position detail  
SW07  
For power peak-cut control selection  
Bit 1  
Bit 2  
For power peak-cut control (expansion) selection  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2-2-1. Power Peak-cut Control (Standard)  
Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board  
Operation  
SW07  
Set up Bit 1.  
The upper limit capacity of the outdoor unit is restricted  
based on the demand request signal from outside.  
L1 : Display lamp during power peak-cut control  
(Setup  
CN513 (BLU)  
to header  
SW1 : Power peak-cut ON switch  
(ON during demand, OFF in normal time) ∗1  
SW2 : Power peak-cut OFF switch  
unit only)  
Connection cable  
(OFF during demand, ON in normal time) ∗1  
Power peak-cut  
control board  
PJ17 (4P WHI)  
*1  
Input signals of SW1 and SW2 are acceptable even if they  
are longer then pulse input (100mm.sec.) or serially made.  
DC  
1.2V  
However do not turn on SW1 and SW2 simultaneously.  
∗ Be sure to prepare a contact for each terminal.  
Operation  
OFF  
SW2  
ON  
Relay contact capacity of “operation” port  
Below AC240V 0.5A (COSØ = 100%)  
SW1  
Display  
Below DC24V 1A (Non-inductive load)  
Note) When connecting non-inductive load such as relay  
coil to L1 load, insert the noise surge absorber CR  
(In case of AC) or counter electromotive-proof diode  
(In case of DC) into the bypass circuit.  
L1  
In case of serial signal  
In case of pulse signal  
Power  
supply  
Power peak-cut control board: TCB-PCDM2E  
Procured  
locally  
Max. AC240V  
Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the  
header outdoor unit (U1).  
Setup when Power peak-cut control requested  
Outdoor unit interface P.C. board  
Power peak-cut control board  
SW1  
SW2  
L1  
(TCB-PCDM2E)  
SW07: Bit 1 OFF  
SW07: Bit 1 ON  
Power peak-cut ON signal is input.  
Power peak-cut OFF signal is input.  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
0% (Forced stop)  
Capacity 60% (Upper limit restriction)  
OFF  
OFF 100% (Normal operation)  
100% (Normal operation)  
Setup positions of header outdoor unit  
interface P.C. board  
Connector position detail  
CN513  
Blue  
Switch position detail  
Operation stop to 100%  
ON 60% to 100%  
OFF  
ON  
Bit 1  
SW07  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2-2-2. Power Peak-cut Control (Expansion)  
Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board  
Operation  
SW07  
Set up Bit 1.  
ON Bit 2.  
The upper limit capacity of the outdoor unit is restricted  
based on the demand request signal from outside.  
L1 : Display lamp during Power peak-cut control  
(Setup to  
Header  
unit only)  
CN513 (BLU)  
SW1 : Power peak-cut ON switch ∗1  
SW2 : Power peak-cut OFF switch ∗1  
Connection cable  
PJ17 (4P WHI)  
*1  
Power peak-cut  
control board  
Input signals of SW1 and SW2 are acceptable even if they  
are upper than pulse input (100mm. sec.) or serially made.  
∗ Be sure to prepare a contact for each terminal.  
DC  
1.2V  
Relay contact capacity of “operation” port  
Below AC240V 1A (COSØ = 100%)  
Operation  
OFF  
SW2  
ON  
Below DC24V 2A (Non-inductive load)  
Note) When connecting non-inductive load such as relay  
coil to L1 load, insert the noise surge absorber CR  
(In case of AC) or counter electromotive-proof diode  
(In case of DC) into the bypass circuit.  
SW1  
Display  
L1  
Power peak-cut control board: TCB-PCDM2E  
Power  
supply  
MAX AC240V  
Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the  
header outdoor unit (U1).  
Procured locally  
Setup at power peak-cut control (expansion) request  
Power Peak-cut request  
Outside power  
Display lamp  
peak-cut request  
Outdoor wire interface P.C. board (SW07/ Bit 2 ON)  
SW1  
OFF  
ON  
SW2  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
L1  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SW07 : Bit 1 OFF  
100% (Normal operation)  
80% (Upper limit restriction)  
60% (Upper limit restriction)  
0% (Forced stop)  
SW07 : Bit 1 ON  
100% (Normal operation)  
85% (Upper limit restriction)  
75% (Upper limit restriction)  
60% (Upper limit restriction)  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
Setup positions of header outdoor  
unit interface P.C. board  
Connector position detail  
CN513  
Blue  
Switch position detail  
Operation stop to 60%, 80%, 100%  
ON 60% to 60%, 75%, 85%, 100%  
Power peak-cut (expansion) ON  
OFF  
Bit 1  
ON  
SW07  
Bit 2 ON  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2-2-3. Snowfall Fan Control  
Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board  
Operation  
The outdoor unit fan operates when a Snowfall signal is received.  
Terminal  
Input signal  
Operation  
CN509 (4P BLK)  
Connection cable  
ON  
Snowfall fan control  
(Operates outdoor unit fan.)  
OFF  
External master  
ON/OFF  
control board  
PJ17  
COOL  
(SMC)  
(4P WHI)  
ON  
Usual operation  
(Releases control.)  
OFF  
The control contents are accepted during leading and trailing of  
the input signal.  
(The status of leading and trailing should be held for 100mm. sec.  
or more.)  
HEAT COOL  
COM  
External master ON/OFF control board : TCB-PCMO 2E  
SMC  
Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header  
outdoor unit (U1).  
SMC: Snowfall detection switch  
Procured locally (Snow sensor)  
7-2-2-4. External master ON/OFF control  
Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board  
Operation  
The outdoor unit starts or stops the system.  
Terminal  
Input signal  
Operation  
CN512 (4P BLU)  
Connection cable  
ON  
COOL  
(SMC)  
Starts collectively indoor units.  
OFF  
External master  
ON/OFF  
control board  
PJ17  
(4P WHI)  
ON  
Heat  
(SMH)  
Stops collectively indoor units.  
OFF  
The control contents are accepted during trailing of the input signal.  
(The status of trailing should be held for 100mm. sec. or more.)  
HEAT COOL  
COM  
NOTES  
1) Do not turn on COOL and HEAT terminals concurrently.  
2) Be sure to prepare a contact for each terminal.  
Outside signal: No voltage pulse contact  
SMC  
External master ON/OFF control board : TCB-PCMO 2E  
SMH  
Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header  
outdoor unit (U1).  
SMC: Input signal for start.  
SMH: Input signal for stop.  
Procured locally  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2-2-5. Night Operation Control  
Operation  
Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board  
Reduce emitted noise during night by resting the compressor and  
fan speed.  
Terminal  
Input signal  
Operation  
CN508 (4P RED)  
Connection cable  
ON  
Night (sound reduction)  
operation control  
OFF  
COOL  
(SMC)  
External master  
ON/OFF  
PJ17  
(4P WHI)  
ON  
control board  
Usual operation  
OFF  
The control contents are accepted during leading and trailing of  
the input signal.  
(The status of leading and trailing should be held for 100mm. sec.  
or more.)  
Capacity criterion during night operation control  
Capacity during control indicates values as described in the  
following table.  
HEAT COOL  
COM  
Capacity  
Night operation sound  
reduction dB (A)  
SMC  
COOL  
HEAT  
1201 type  
1001 type  
0801 type  
50  
50  
50  
Approx. 55%  
Approx. 65%  
Approx. 80%  
Approx. 45%  
Approx. 55%  
Approx. 70%  
Procured locally  
(Against Max. capacity)  
SMC : Input signal for night operation.  
External master ON/OFF control board : TCB-PCMO 2E  
Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header outdoor unit (U1).  
7-2-2-6. Operation Mode Selection Control  
Header outdoor unit interface P.C. board  
Operation  
This control can be operated with the operation mode which is  
permitted by SMC or SMH.  
The indoor unit operating by operation mode without permission  
is as follows:  
CN510 (4P WHI)  
Connection cable  
1) Display on remote controller  
“
(Mode select controlled)” goes on.  
2) Indoor fan  
In FAN mode: Fan normally operates.  
External master  
ON/OFF  
control board  
PJ17  
(4P WHI)  
In COOL mode: Fan normally operates.  
In HEAT mode: Fan operates with ultra low speed.  
* Be sure to prepare a contact for each contact terminal.  
Outside signal: No voltage serial contact  
HEAT COOL  
COM  
SMC: COOL mode designated input switch  
SMH: HEAT mode designated input switch  
SMC  
External master ON/OFF control board : TCB-PCMO 2E  
Outdoor unit destination to be connected becomes the header  
outdoor unit (U1).  
SMH  
Procured locally  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. In case that a central control system is connected (Before address setup)  
8. TEST OPERATION  
8-1. Procedure and Summary ofTest Operation  
A test operation is executed in the following procedure. When a trouble or an error occurs in each step, remove  
causes of a trouble or an error referring to the section “9.Troubleshooting”.  
Central control units  
Check the basic items, mainly the installation work.  
Be sure to enter the check results in the check list 1 and 2.  
U1 U2  
Check before test operation  
4
U3 U4  
2
5
Other refrigerant line  
3
Other refrigerant line  
Header unit (A)  
Follower unit (B)  
Follower unit (C)  
Check the main power supply  
is turned on.  
It is the check after the power has been turned on.  
Check the refrigerant circuit system is normally turned on.  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
Outdoor unit  
1
Start the address setup in the outdoor/indoor units.  
(NOTE) The operation does not start by only power-ON.  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
Set up the addresses.  
Test operation  
END  
Earth  
To indoor unit  
Carry out a test operation.  
Check air blowing and cooling/heating operation in the indoor unit.  
3-phase  
380-415V  
Leak interception  
6
6
Main switch  
8-2. Check Items beforeTest Operation  
Prior to the test operation, check the following items so that there is no trouble in the installation work.  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
Indoor unit  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Main check items for electric wiring  
2
4
1-phase 230V  
Leak interception  
3
The communication system differs from  
that of R22 or R407 refrigerant  
“Modular Multi system”  
Main switch  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Header unit (A)  
Follower unit (B)  
Follower unit (C)  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
1
air conditioner.  
Outdoor  
unit  
Check again cautious points on wiring.  
No.  
Main check items  
Check  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
1. In case that a center control  
system is not connected:  
Are indoor and outdoor communication lines of the header unit connected to U1/U2  
terminals?  
Earth  

Is the relay connector between U1/U2 terminal and U3/U4 terminal removed?  
‚
ƒ
3-phase  
(Set up at shipment from the factory) (Before address setup, remove the relay connector.)  
5
5
380-415V  
Leak interception  
Main switch  
Is the communication line between outdoor and indoor units connected to U5/U6 terminal?  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
Indoor  
unit  
Is the communication line of the central control system connected to the header unit U3/U4  
terminals of each refrigerant line?  
(The communication line of the central control system may be connected to the communi-  
cation lines of the indoor/outdoor communication lines.)  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
„
1-phase 230V  
Leak interception  
Main switch  
Is the terminal resistance (SW30-2) on the interface P.C. board of the header unit turned on?  
(Set up at shipment from the factory)  
(After address setup, turn off SW30-2 of the header unit except the smallest unit after  
check of trial operation.)  
Remote controller  
ꢀ
†
No.  
Main check items  
Check  
Are indoor and outdoor communication lines of the header unit connected to U1/U2  
terminals?  

Is the end terminal of the shield cable grounded?  
Is the relay connector between U1/U2 terminal and U3/U4 terminal removed?  
(Set up at shipment from the factory)  
When the refrigerant line and the central control system of the custom air conditioner are  
connected:  
‚
ƒ
„
ꢀ
‡
Is the communication line between each outdoor units connected to U5/U6 terminal?  
→ Are TCC-LINK adaptors correctly connected?  
→ When the digital inverter air conditioner operates with group operation, twin, or triple  
Is the terminal resistance (SW30-2) on the interface P.C. board of the header unit  
turned on? (Set up at shipment from the factory)  
operation, are the adopters connected to the header unit of the indoor unit?  
Is the end terminal of the shield cable grounded?  
Note) The above figure does not show all the electric cables.  
For details, refer to the installation manuals for outdoor unit, indoor unit, remote controller, or optional  
devices.  
Note) The above figure does not show all the electric cables.  
For details, refer to the installation manuals for outdoor unit, indoor unit, remote controller, or optional devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Connection check between Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit) and indoor unit  
Check list 2  
Calculate the additional amount of refrigerant from the following:  
1
Additional amount Actual liquid  
Additional amount of  
refrigerant per liquid pipe 1m  
Corrective amount of  
refrigerant by system capacity  
Remote  
Remote  
Remote  
=
×
×
+
Indoor unit  
Indoor unit  
Indoor unit  
1.3  
controller  
controller  
controller  
of refrigerant (B)  
pipe length  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
U1/U2  
Earth terminal  
U1/U2  
Earth terminal  
U1/U2  
Earth terminal  
(A)  
(B)  
Control  
wiring  
Control  
wiring  
Control  
wiring  
FS unit  
FS unit  
FS unit  
Firstly enter the total length for each liquid pipe in the following table and then calculate the additional amount of  
refrigerant by pipe length.  
CN81  
CN81  
CN81  
CN02  
CN01  
CN02  
CN01  
CN02  
CN01  
L
N
L
N
L
N
Power  
line  
Power  
line  
Power  
line  
Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length  
Earth  
terminal  
Earth  
terminal  
Earth  
terminal  
Earth terminal  
Earth terminal  
Earth terminal  
3
Pipe dia at Standard amount of refrigerant  
Additional amount of refrigerant pipe  
dia at each liquid side kg  
Total pipe length at each liquid side  
liquid side  
kg/m  
Power supply  
Single phase  
Ø6.4  
0.025 ×  
=
=
=
=
=
=
kg  
kg  
kg  
kg  
kg  
kg  
220-240V, 50Hz  
Earth leakage Pull  
Pull  
Box  
breaker  
Box  
Ø9.5  
0.055 ×  
0.105 ×  
0.160 ×  
0.250 ×  
0.350 ×  
2
4
Power switch  
Ø12.7  
Ø15.9  
Ø19.0  
Ø22.2  
No.  

‚
ƒ
„
Main check items  
Check  
Are indoor/outdoor communication lines connected to U1/U2 terminals?  
Is the signal line of the FS unit connected to connector CN81?  
Is the power supply cable of the FS unit connected to R (L) and S (N) terminals?  
Is the power supply cable of the FS unit connected to the closed end connector?  
When the indoor unit is a Wall type (1 Series) or Concealed Duct High Static Pressure type?  
Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe  
length (A)  
kg  
Note) The above figure does not cover all the electric wirings.  
For details, refer to the Installation Manual of Flow selector unit.  
Next, refer to the following table for the corrective amount of refrigerant (B) by system capacity.  
Corrective amount of refrigerant by system capacity  
Check list 1  
• Using the “Check list 1”, check there is no trouble in the installation work.  
Normal type  
System horse power HP  
Is capacity of the leak  
breaker appropriate?  
Outdoor total capacity XXXX  
A
Header unit (A)  
Follower unit (B) XXXX  
Follower unit (C) XXXX  
XXXX  
A
A
A
Indoor unit XXXX  
A
Unit 1  
8
Unit 2  
Unit 3  
Corrective amount of refrigerant (B) kg  
8
10  
12  
16  
18  
20  
24  
26  
28  
30  
2.0  
2.5  
3.0  
–1.5  
0
Is the diameter of the power cable correctly wired?  
Is the control communication line correctly wired?  
Header unit (A)  
Follower unit (B) XXXX mm²  
Follower unit (C) XXXX mm²  
XXXX mm²  
Indoor unit XXXX mm²  
10  
12  
8
Indoor –outdoor connection terminals (U1, U2)  
Outdoor–outdoor connection terminals (U5, U6)  
Central control system connection terminals (U3, U4) XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
8
8
10  
10  
8
Is the power of the indoor units supplied collectively?  
Is the earth grounded  
10  
8
2.0  
–4.5  
–3.0  
–1.5  
0
8
8
Is the insulation good? (10MΩ or more)  
Is the main power voltage correct? (Within 200V ± 10%)  
Is the diameter of the connecting pipe correct?  
Is the branch kit correct?  
XXXX MΩ or more  
10  
10  
10  
8
XXXX  
V
10  
10  
8
10  
Finally add the additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length (A) to the corrective amount of refrigerant by  
system capacity (B). This is the final additional amount of refrigerant.  
Does the indoor unit condensate drain adequately?  
Is the thermal insulation of pipes good? (Connecting pipes, Branch kit)  
If the result is indicated as a negative, do not add any refrigerant. Do not add the refrigerant (= 0kg).  
For both indoor and outdoor units, ensure air is not short-circuited from discharge to inlet ports.  
After pressure test, check that the pipework and indoor units have been vacuumed and the correct amount of additional gas has been charged.  
Additional amount of refrigerant  
Are valves of all the outdoor units fully opened?  
Header unit (A)  
Suction gas side  
XXXX  
Discharge gas side  
XXXX  
Liquid side  
XXXX  
XXXX  
Balance side  
XXXX  
XXXX  
Additional amount of refrigerant by pipe length (A)  
Corrective amount of refrigerant by system HP (B)  
Additional amount of refrigerant  
kg  
kg  
kg  
Follower unit (B)  
Follower unit (C)  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
XXXX  
• Check the additional amount of refrigerant.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3. Check at Main Power-ON  
8-4. Address Setup  
After turning on the main power of the indoor units and outdoor unit in the refrigerant line to be executed with a  
test operation, check the following items in outdoor and each indoor unit.  
After power-ON, set up the indoor address from the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
(The address setup operation cannot be performed by power-ON only.)  
(After turning on the main power, be sure to check in order of indoor unit → outdoor unit.)  
If the power supply of the outdoor unit has been firstly turned on, [E19] appears on the 7-segment display on  
the interface P.C. board until the power supply of the indoor unit is turned on. However it is not an error.  
8-4-1. Cautions  
1. It requires approx. 5 minutes usually for 1 line to automatically set up address.  
However in some cases, it may require maximum 10 minutes.  
Check on outdoor unit  
1. Check that all the rotary switches, SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit  
are set up to “1”.  
2. It is unnecessary to operate the air conditioner for address setup.  
3. Manual address setup is also available besides automatic setup.  
Automatic address: Setup from SW15 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit  
2. If other error code is displayed on 7-segment [B], remove the cause of trouble referring to  
“9.Troubleshooting”.  
Manual address: Setup from the weird remote controller.  
(For details, refer to section “8-4-3. Address setup procedure”)  
3. Check that [L08] is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
(L08: Indoor address unset up)  
(If the address setup operation has already finished in service time, etc, the above check code is not dis-  
played, and only [U1] is displayed on 7-segment display [A].)  
8-4-2. Address Setup and Check Procedure  
7-segment display [A]  
7-segment display [B]  
Procedure  
Item  
Operation and check contents  
Interface P.C. board  
1
2
Indoor unit power-ON  
Turn on power of indoor unit in refrigerant line to which address is set up.  
Outdoor unit power-ON Turn on power of all the outdoor units in refrigerant line to which address is set up.  
7-segment display  
check  
Check that [L08] is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the interface P.C. board of the  
outdoor unit in the system to which address is set up.  
3
Confirm the corresponding items in “8-4-3 Address setup procedure”, and then set up address  
according to the operation procedure.  
(Be sure that the setup operation may differ in group control or central control.)  
Note) Address cannot be set up if switches are not operated.  
4
Address setup start  
• After address setup, [U1] [ ] are displayed in 7-segment display section.  
Display check after  
setup  
5
6
• If an error code is displayed in 7-segment display [B], remove the cause of trouble referring to  
“9. Troubleshooting”.  
Using 7-segment display function, check the system information of the scheduled system.  
(This check is executed on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.)  
SW01 SW02  
SW03  
Rotary switch setup  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
7-segment display  
Check on indoor unit  
1. Display check on remote controller (In case of wired remote controller)  
[A]  
[B]  
System information  
check after setup  
System capacity  
1
1
1
2
3
4
3
3
3
[No. of HP]  
[HP]  
Check that a frame as shown in the following left figure is displayed on LC display section of the remote  
controller.  
No. of connected outdoor unit  
No. of connected indoor units  
[Connected No. of units]  
[Connected No. of units]  
[
P]  
After the above checks, return rotary switches SW01, SW02, SW03 to 1/1/1.  
NO  
GOOD  
GOOD  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
7-segment  
display [A]  
Push-switch  
SW04  
Push-switch  
SW05  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
Interface P.C. board  
Push-switch  
SW15  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
SET CL  
7-segment  
display [B]  
Normal status  
(Power and operation stop)  
Abnormal status  
(Power is not normally turned on.)  
If a frame is not displayed as shown in the above right figure, the power of the remote controller is not normally  
turned on.Therefore check the following items.  
• Check power supply of indoor unit.  
• Check wiring between indoor unit and remote controller.  
• Check whether there is cutoff of cable around the indoor control P.C. board or not, and check connection  
failure of connectors.  
• Check failure of transformer for the indoor microcomputer.  
• Check indoor control P.C. board failure.  
SW01  
SW02  
SW03  
Rotary switches  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4-3. Address Setup Procedure  
In this air conditioner, it is required to set up address to the indoor unit before starting opera-  
tion. Set up the address according to the following setup procedure.  
REQUIREMENT  
Group control over  
multiple refrigerant lines  
(Example)  
• When a group control is performed over the  
multiple refrigerant lines, be sure to turn on the  
power supplies of all the indoor units connected  
in a group at the time of address setup.  
Cabling  
systematic  
diagram  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
CAUTION  
• If turning on the power for each refrigerant line  
to set up address, a header indoor unit is set for  
each line.Therefore, an alarm code “L03”  
(Duplicated header indoor units) is output in  
operation after address setup. In this case,  
change the group address from the wired  
remote controller for only one header unit is set  
up.  
1. Set up address after wiring work.  
2. It requires maximum 10 minutes (Usually, approx. 5 minutes) to set up automatically an address to 1 line.  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
3. To set up an address automatically, the setup at outdoor side is necessary.  
(Address setup cannot be performed by power-ON only.)  
4. To set up an address, it is unnecessary to operate the air conditioner.  
5. Manual address setup is also available besides automatic setup.  
Remote  
controller  
Automatic address : Setup from SW15 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit  
Manual address  
: Setup from the wired remote controller  
∗ It is temporarily necessary to set the indoor unit and wired to 1 : 1.  
(In group operation and in time without remote controller)  
Header unit interface P.C. board  
Address setup procedure 2  
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
1. Using SW13 and 14 on the interface P.C. board of the  
outdoor unit in each system, set up the address for each  
system. (At shipment from factory: Set to Address 1)  
SW11  
SW12  
SW13  
ON ON  
SW14  
ON  
ON  
1
ON  
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Note) Be careful not to duplicate addresses with the other  
Automatic Address Setup  
refrigerant line.  
SW06  
SW07 SW08 SW09  
SW10  
Without central control :To the address setup procedure 1  
With central control  
:To the address setup procedure 2  
(However, go to the procedure 1 when the central control is performed in a single refrigerant line.)  
Line address switch on outdoor interface P.C. board  
(¡: Switch ON, × : Switch OFF)  
SW13  
SW14  
SW13  
SW14  
Line  
Line  
address  
address  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
(Example)  
In case of central control in a single refrigerant line  
To procedure 1  
In case of central control over refrigerant lines  
To procedure 2  
1
2
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
×
×
¡
¡
¡
×
¡
¡
×
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
Address setup procedure  
Cable systematic diagram  
3
×
¡
×
×
×
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
¡
×
¡
¡
×
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
4
×
×
×
×
5
×
×
×
×
¡
¡
×
Outdoor  
Indoor  
Outdoor  
Indoor  
Outdoor  
Indoor  
Outdoor  
Indoor  
Central  
Central  
Central  
remote controller  
remote controller  
remote controller  
6
×
×
×
¡
¡
7
×
¡
×
×
×
¡
×
×
¡
¡
×
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
8
×
×
×
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
9
×
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
×
¡
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
×
×
¡
¡
×
¡
×
×
¡
×
¡
¡
×
¡
¡
¡
¡
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
×
×
×
×
¡
¡
¡
¡
Header unit interface P.C. board  
Address setup procedure 1  
: Is not used for setup of system address. (Do not change setup.)  
1. Turn on power of indoor/outdoor units.  
(In order of indoor → Outdoor)  
2. After approx. 1 minute, check that U. 1. L08 (U. 1. flash)  
is displayed in 7-segment display section on the interface  
P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
3
SW04 SW05 SW15  
2. Check that the relay connectors between [U1, U2] and  
[U3, U4] terminals are not connected in all the outdoor  
units to which the central control is connected.  
2, 4  
D600 D601 D602 D603 D604  
(At shipment from factory: Connector not connected)  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
1
1
1
3. Turn on power of indoor/outdoor.  
(In order of indoor → outdoor)  
4. After approx. 1 minute, check that 7-segment display is  
3. Push SW15 to start the setup of the automatic addressing.  
(Max. 10 minutes for 1 line (Usually, approx. 5 minutes))  
4. When the count Auto 1 → Auto 2 → Auto 3 is displayed  
in 7-segment display section, and it changes from  
U.1.L08 (U.1. flash) on the interface P.C. board of the  
outdoor unit.  
U. 1. - - - (U. 1. flash) to U. 1. - - - (U. 1. light) , the setup  
finished.  
5. Push SW15 to start the setup of automatic addressing.  
(Max. 10 minutes for 1 line (Usually, approx. 5 minutes))  
5. When performing an automatic address setup on a  
single refrigerant line with central control, connect  
relay connected between [U1, U2] and [U3, U4]  
terminals in the header unit.  
2
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
U5 U6  
5
6. When the count Auto 1 → Auto 2 → Auto 3 is displayed  
in 7-segment display section, and it changes from  
For internal  
wiring between  
indoor and  
outdoor  
For internal  
For wiring of  
central control  
system  
wiring between  
outdoor units  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
U5 U6  
U. 1. - - - (U. 1. flash) to U. 1. - - - (U. 1. light) , the  
setup finished.  
For internal  
For internal  
For wiring of  
central control  
system  
wiring between  
indoor and  
outdoor  
wiring between  
outdoor units  
7. Procedure 4. to 6. are repeated in other refrigerant lines.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. How to set up the terminal resistance  
Manual address setup from remote controller  
Header unit interface P.C. board  
When all the address setups have finished in the same refriger-  
ant circuit system, put the terminal resistance in the same  
central control line into one.  
In case to decide an address of the indoor unit prior to finish of indoor wiring work and unpracticed outdoor  
wiring work (Manual setup from remote controller)  
ON  
1
2
SW30  
• Remain only SW30-2 of the header outdoor unit with address  
1 as ON. (With end terminal resistance)  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
SW30  
Arrange one indoor unit and one remote  
controller set to 1 by 1.  
1
Push simultaneously  
+
+
buttons  
for 4 seconds or more.  
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
ON  
1
• Set up SW30-2 of the other header outdoor units to OFF.  
(Without terminal resistance)  
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
LCD changes to flashing.  
Turn on the power.  
(Line address)  
SW11  
SW12  
SW13  
ON ON  
SW14  
ON  
9. Connect the relay connector between [U1, U2] and [U3, U4] of  
the header unit for each refrigerant line.  
ON  
1
ON  
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
2
3
Using the setup temp.  
set 12 to the item code.  
/
buttons,  
10. Then set up the central control address.  
(For the central control address setup, refer to the Installation  
manual of the central control devices.)  
(Wiring example in 2 lines)  
SW06  
SW07 SW08 SW09  
SW10  
#1  
#2  
Using the timer time  
the line address.  
/
buttons, set up  
Outdoor  
Outdoor  
1
2
3
(Match it with the line address on the interface  
P.C. board of the outdoor unit in the identical  
refrigerant line.)  
Header  
unit  
U3 U4  
Follower unit  
U3 U4  
Header unit Follower unit  
Header unit  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor  
SET  
4
Push  
button.  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
Line address  
Indoor address  
Group address  
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
3
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
(OK when display goes on.)  
Before address setup  
During setup of address  
Relay  
Relay  
connector  
connector  
(Indoor address)  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
Remote  
Follower  
controller  
Header  
5
6
7
Using the setup temp.  
set 13 to the item code.  
/
buttons,  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Using the timer time  
the indoor address.  
/
buttons, set up  
Individual  
Group  
In the above example, under condition of  
no inter-unit wire of the remote controller,  
set the address after individual connect-  
ing of the wired remote controller.  
Header  
unit  
Follower unit  
U3 U4  
Header unit Follower unit  
Header unit  
SET  
Push  
button.  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SW30  
SW30  
SW30  
SW30  
SW30  
(OK when display goes on.)  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Group address  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
(Group address)  
Individual  
: 0000  
Relay  
connector  
Relay  
connector  
Relay  
connector  
After address setup  
Header unit : 0001  
Follower unit : 0002  
8
9
Using the setup temp.  
set 14 to the item code.  
/
buttons,  
} In case of group control  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Using the timer time  
Individual = 0000 , Header unit = 0001 ,  
Follower unit = 0002 .  
/
buttons, set  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Individual  
Group  
SET  
Outdoor interface  
P.C. board  
Setup at shipment  
from factory  
10  
11  
Push  
button.  
Header unit  
Follower unit  
Header unit  
Follower unit  
Header unit  
3
(OK when display goes on.)  
(Setup is  
unnecessary.)  
(Setup is  
unnecessary.)  
SW13, 14  
(Refrigerant line address)  
1
2
1
Operation procedure  
TEST  
Push  
button.  
SW30-2  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
7 8 9 10 11 End  
Terminal-end resistance  
of indoor/outdoor communi  
cation line/central control  
communication line  
Setup operation finished.  
(Status returns to normal stop status.)  
(Setup is  
OFF after  
(Setup is  
OFF after  
ON  
ON  
unnecessary.) address setup unnecessary.) address setup  
Connect short  
after  
address setup  
Connect short  
after  
address setup  
Connect short  
after  
address setup  
Relay connector  
Open  
Open  
Open  
CODE No.  
SET DATA SETTING  
UNIT No.  
Indoor side (Automatic setup)  
R.C.  
No.  
Data  
Item code  
Refrigerant line address  
Indoor unit address  
Group address  
1
1
0
1
2
0
2
1
1
2
2
2
3
1
0
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
2, 5, 8  
3, 6, 9  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
4, 7, 10  
11  
TIME  
Note  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
Never connect a relay connector until address setup for all the refrigerant lines has been completed ;  
otherwise address cannot be correctly set up.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• To confirm all the unit numbers from an arbitrary wired remote controller;  
Note 1)  
<Procedure> (Operation while the air conditioner stops)  
When setting the line address from the remote controller, do not use address 29 and 30.  
The indoor unit No. and position in the same refrigerant line can be confirmed.  
An outdoor unit is selected, the indoor unit numbers in the same refrigerant line are successively displayed,  
and then its indoor unit fan is turned on.  
The address 29 and 30 cannot be set up in the outdoor unit. Therefore if they are incorrectly set up, a check  
code [E04] (Indoor/outdoor communication circuit error) is output.  
TEST  
1
2
3
Push the timer time  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.  
Firstly, the line 1, item code AC (Address Change) is displayed. (Select outdoor unit.)  
Confirmation of indoor unit address and position by using the remote controller  
[Confirmation of indoor unit address and the position]  
UNIT  
SWING/FIX  
Using  
+
buttons, select the line  
address.  
CODE No.  
SET  
1. When you want to know the indoor address though position of the indoor unit itself can be  
recognized;  
SET DATA SETTING  
Using  
button, determine the selected line  
UNIT No.  
R.C.  
No.  
address.  
<Procedure> (Operation while the air conditioner operates)  
• The indoor unit address, which is connected to the  
refrigerant pipe of the selected outdoor unit is dis-  
played and the fan is turned on.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
ON / OFF  
1
2
If it stops, push  
button.  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
CODE No.  
UNIT  
UNIT  
Push  
button.  
4
Every pushing  
button, the indoor unit  
TIME  
UNIT No.  
1
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
numbers in the identical pipe are successively  
displayed.  
The unit No. 1-1 is displayed on the LCD.  
(Disappears after several seconds) The displayed  
unit No indicates the line address and indoor  
address. (If there is other indoor unit connected  
to the same remote controller (Group control  
unit), other unit No. is displayed every pushing  
SET CL  
2
4
5
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
• Only fan of the selected indoor unit operates.  
6
3
1
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
MODE  
VENT  
[To select another line address]  
Operate  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
CL  
5
Push  
button to return to procedure  
2
).  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
Operation procedure  
1 2 3  
4 5 6 End  
SET CL  
UNIT  
button.)  
• The indoor address of another line can be succes-  
sively confirmed.  
TEST  
2
6
Push  
button to finish the procedure.  
Operation procedure  
Change of indoor address from remote controller  
Change of indoor address from wired remote controller  
1 2  
• To change the indoor address in individual operation (Wired remote controller : Indoor unit = 1 : 1) or  
group control (When the setup operation with automatic address has finished, this change is available.)  
2. When you want to know position of the indoor unit using the address  
• To confirm the unit numbers in a group control;  
<Procedure> (Operation while air conditioner stops)  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
1
2
3
4
Push simultaneously  
+
+
buttons for 4 seconds or more.  
<Procedure> (Operation while the air conditioner stops)  
(The firstly displayed unit No. indicates the header unit in group control.)  
The indoor unit numbers in a group control are successively displayed, and the corresponding indoor fan is  
turned on. (Operation while the air conditioner stops)  
UNIT  
In group control, select an indoor unit No. to be changed by  
button.  
VENT  
TEST  
(The fan of the selected indoor unit is turned on.)  
1
Push  
4 seconds or more.  
+
buttons simultaneously for  
CODE No.  
Using the setup temp.  
to the item code.  
/
buttons, set 13  
SET DATA SETTING  
UNIT No.  
CODE No.  
SET DATA SETTING  
R.C.  
No.  
• Unit No.  
is displayed.  
UNIT No.  
R.C.  
No.  
• The fans of all the indoor units in a group  
control are turned on.  
Using the timer time  
/
buttons, change the  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
displayed setup data to a data which you want  
to change.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
1
UNIT  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
2
Every pushing  
button, the indoor unit  
3
5
8
1
4
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
SET  
TIME  
numbers in the group control are succes-  
sively displayed.  
5
6
Push  
button.  
3
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
UNIT  
End  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
Using the  
button, select the unit No. to be  
SET CL  
• The firstly displayed unit No. indicates the  
address of the header unit.  
changed at the next time. Repeat the procedure  
to and change the indoor address so that it  
2,  
6,  
7
4
6
2
• Only fan of the selected indoor unit is turned  
on.  
is not duplicated.  
Operation procedure  
UNIT  
7
8
After the above change, push  
confirm the changed contents.  
TEST  
If it is acceptable, push  
confirmation.  
button to  
TEST  
3
Push  
button to finish the procedure.  
1 2 3 End  
Operation procedure  
All the indoor units in group control stop.  
button to finish  
1 2 3 4  
5 6 7 8 End  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• To change all the indoor addresses from an arbitrary wired remote controller;  
(When the setup operation with automatic address has finished, this change is available.)  
Clearance of address (Return to status (Address undecided) at shipment from factory)  
Contents : Using an arbitrary wired remote controller, the indoor unit address can be changed for each same  
Method 1  
refrigerant line  
An address is individually cleared from a wired remote controller.  
“0099” is set up to line address, indoor address, and group address data from the remote controller.  
(For the setup procedure, refer to the abovementioned address setup from the remote controller.)  
∗ Change the address in the address check/change mode.  
<Procedure> (Operation while air conditioner stops)  
TEST  
1
Push the timer time  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.  
Method 2  
Firstly, the line 1, item code AC (Address Change) is displayed.  
Clear the indoor addresses in the same refrigerant line from the outdoor unit.  
UNIT  
SWING/FIX  
1. Turn off the power of the refrigerant line to be returned to the status at shipment, and change the header unit  
to the following status.  
2
3
Using  
Push  
+
buttons, select the line address.  
SET  
button.  
1) Remove the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4].  
(If it has been already removed, leave it as it is.)  
• The indoor unit address, which is connected to the refrigerant pipe of the selected outdoor unit is dis-  
played and the fan is turned on.  
2) Turn on SW30-2 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit if it is OFF.  
(If it has been already ON, leave it as it is.)  
First the current indoor address is displayed on the setup data. (Line address is not displayed.)  
4
The indoor address of the setup data moves up/down by the timer time  
/
buttons.  
Change the setup data to a new address.  
Central control  
device  
SET  
5
6
Push  
button to determine the setup data.  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
UNIT  
Every pushing  
displayed. Only fan of the selected indoor unit operates.  
button, the indoor unit numbers in the identical pipe are successively  
Header unit  
U3 U4  
Follower unit  
HCeeandteerr uunniitt  
U3 U4  
Follower unit  
HCeeandteerr uunniitt  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
Repeat the procedure  
4
to  
6
and change all the indoor addresses so that they are not duplicated.  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
SET  
7
8
Push  
button.  
(All the displays on LCD go on.)  
TEST  
Push  
button to finish the procedure.  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Unit of which address is to be returned to the initial status  
CODE No.  
CODE No.  
SET DATA SETTING  
SET DATA SETTING  
UNIT No.  
UNIT No.  
R.C.  
No.  
R.C.  
No.  
2. Turn on the indoor/outdoor power of which address is to be cleared. After approx. 1 minute, check that  
“U.1. - - -” is displayed, and then execute the following operation on the interface P.C. board of the header unit  
of which address is to be cleared in the refrigerant line.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
TIMER SET  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
TIME  
TIME  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
SW04  
Address which can be cleared  
4
8
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
1
SET CL  
SET CL  
2
After checking that “A.d.buS” is displayed on 7-degment  
display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.  
6
2
2
1
2
2
2
Line + Indoor + Group address  
3
Cancel of line selection  
After checking that “A.d.nEt” is displayed on 7-degment  
display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.  
Central address  
5, 7  
To finish the set  
3. After “A.d. c.L.” has been displayed on 7-degment display, return SW01/SW02/SW03 to 1/1/1.  
Operation procedure  
Here, if the unit No is not called up, the outdoor unit in  
this line does not exist.  
4. When the address clearing has correctly finished, “U.1.L08” is displayed on 7-degment display after a while.  
If “A.d. n.G.” is displayed on 7-degment display, there is a possibility which is connected with the other  
refrigerant line. Check again the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4] terminals.  
1 2 3 4  
5 6 7 8 End  
CL  
Push  
button, and then select a line according to  
procedure 2.  
NOTE) Be careful that the other refrigerant line address may be also cleared if clearing operation is not  
correctly executed.  
5. After clearing of the address, set up an address again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4-4. Check after Address SetupWhen Central Control System is Connected  
In case of increase the address-undefined indoor units (Extension, etc.)  
When the central control system is connected, check the following setup has finished after address setup.  
If set up the indoor address of which address is undefined accompanied with extension of indoor units, replace-  
ment of P.C. board, etc, follow to the methods below.  
Method 1  
Set up an address individually from a wired remote controller.  
(Line address, Indoor address, Group address, Central address)  
For the setup method, refer to the above “Manual address setup from remote controller”.  
Central control units  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
3
Other refrigerant line  
2
Method 2  
5
Line address = 2  
Line address = 1  
Set up an address from the outdoor unit.  
Other refrigerant line  
CHenattdeerruunnitit((AA))  
Header unit (A)  
Follower unit (B)  
Follower unit (C)  
∗ Leave the address of the unit of which address has been already set up as it is.  
Set up an address only to the unit of which address is undefined.  
4
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
1
The addresses are allocated from the low number.  
Outdoor unit  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
U1 U2  
U5 U6  
Setup procedure  
Earth  
Arrange the outdoor header units in the refrigerant line to which indoor units are added. (Figure below)  
1. Remove the relay connector between [U1U2] and [U3U4].  
2. Turn on SW30-2 on the interface P.C. board at outdoor header unit side if it is OFF.  
∗ Turn off the power, and then execute the operation.  
3-phase 380–415V, 50Hz  
Leak interception  
5
Main switch  
Central control  
device  
U1 U2  
U3 U4  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
Header unit  
U3 U4  
Follower unit  
HCeeandteerr uunniitt  
U3 U4  
Follower unit  
HCeeandteerr uunniitt  
U3 U4  
Indoor unit  
U3 U4  
U3 U4  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
U1 U2 U5 U6  
1-phase 220–240V, 50Hz  
Leak interception  
Main switch  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Main check items  
Check  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
Remote  
controller  
1) Is relay connector of the header unit connected after address setup?  
2) Is relay connector of the follower unit removed?  
Relay connector  
Added indoor unit  
3) Is the end resistance (SW30-2) of the header unit with the least refriger-  
ant line address number (in the central control line) turned on?  
(Setup is unnecessary for follower unit.)  
3. Turn on the indoor/outdoor power of which address is to be set up. After approx. 1 minute, check that  
“U.1. - - -” is displayed on 7-segment display.  
Terminal  
resistance  
4. Execute the following operation on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.  
4) Are the terminal resistance (SW30-2) of the header units except for the  
line of which central control refrigerant line address is the smallest,  
turned off? (Setup is unnecessary for follower unit.)  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
14  
SW04  
After checking that “  
” is displayed on 7-segment  
display, and then push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.  
5) Are not addresses in the line address (SW13, SW14) duplicated in each  
refrigerant line?  
2
2
Line address  
…
“AUTO1” → “AUTO2” → “AUTO3” →  
→ “AUTO9” … is counted and displayed on 7-degment display.  
Note) The above table does not describe all the electric cablings. For details, refer to each installation manual  
for outdoor unit, indoor unit, remote controller, and optional devices.  
• Return the SW01, 02, 03 setup as before.  
5. When “U.1. - - -” is displayed on 7-segment display, the setup operation finished.  
Turn off the indoor/outdoor power.  
6. Return the following setup as before.  
• Relay connector  
• SW30-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5. Troubleshooting inTest Operation  
If the phenomena appear, such as a check code is output or the remote controller is not accepted in power-ON  
after cabling work or in address setup operation, the following causes are considered.  
8-5-1. A check Code is Displayed on the Remote Controller  
Check code  
displayed on  
remote controller  
Outdoorunit  
7-segment  
display  
Cause  
Countermeasures  
E04  
E19-00  
Outdoor power is formerly turned on.  
Turn on the power again.  
(In order of Indoor → Outdoor)  
There is none of outdoor terminator resistor, or there Check SW30 bit 2 of the outdoor unit.  
are two or more resistances.  
(After address setup)  
No connection between multiple refrigerant lines:  
SW30 bit 20N  
Connection between multiple refrigerant lines:  
SW30 bit 2 of the connected outdoor unit is turned  
on only in one line.  
ON  
1
2
After address was decided, all the  
indoor units do not correctly response  
after power-ON in outdoor unit.  
Check and modifies disconnection of indoor/outdoor  
communication line.(Communication line between  
outdoor unit and the leading indoor unit)  
Check influence of communication noise.  
SW30  
L08  
Address setup error  
Set up address again.  
• Only line addresses of the connected indoor units  
are undefined.  
• The outdoor line address and the line addresses in  
all indoor units do not match.  
• The indoor addresses are duplicated.  
(Units except those displaying E04 are duplicated.)  
• A header unit is not set up in a group.  
(Except group displaying E04)  
E08-XX  
E07  
Duplication of indoor addresses.  
(Address No in which sub-code of the check code  
are duplicated)  
Set up address again.  
There is none of outdoor terminal  
Check SW30 bit 2 of the outdoor unit.  
ON  
1
resistance, or there are two or more  
No connection between multiple refrigerant lines:  
SW30 bit 20N  
2
resistances.  
(After address setup, when terminal  
resistance setup is changed after  
power-ON.)  
Connection between multiple refrigerant lines:  
SW30 bit 2 of the connected outdoor unit is turned  
on only in one line.  
SW30  
Transmission circuit error at interface side  
(P.C. board failure)  
Replace the interface P.C. board.  
E06  
After address setup, communication from all the  
indoor units interrupted under condition that a  
normal operation can be performed.  
Check and correct disconnection of indoor/outdoor  
communication line.(Communication line between  
outdoor unit and the leading indoor unit)  
Check influence of communication noise.  
E16  
E25  
L04  
E16-XX  
E25  
Exceeded No of connected indoor units or  
exceeded capacity.  
Adjust No of connected indoor units or capacity.  
Duplication of outdoor addresses.  
(Only when outdoor address was manually set up)  
Do not use a manual setup for outdoor address.  
L04  
Duplication of outdoor line addresses  
Modify line address setup of the outdoor unit  
between lines. (Set up SW 13 and 14 on the  
interface P.C. board.)  
• Line address setup error, occurred after connec-  
tion between U1, U2 and U3, U4 connectors  
L05 (∗)  
L06  
L08  
Duplicated of indoor units with priority  
The Heat Recovery Multi is not set up on priority.  
L06 (∗)  
There are two or more indoor units set up with  
priority.  
L08  
Address setup error  
Set up address again.  
• Only indoor addresses of all the connected indoor  
units are undefined.  
(∗) [L05]: Displayed on the indoor unit set up with priority  
[L06]: Displayed on the indoor unit except one set up with priority  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5-2. Operation from remote controller is not accepted and a check code is dis-  
played on 7-segment display of the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
7-segment  
Remote  
controller status  
display of  
Cause  
Countermeasures  
Set up addresses.  
outdoor unit  
No response  
L08  
Line addresses and indoor addresses of all the connected  
indoor units are unset.  
There is no outdoor unit of group control.  
Indoor unit power is not turned on.  
Set up group address.  
E19-00  
Turn on the power again.  
(In order of indoor → outdoor)  
Indoor/outdoor communication line is not correctly connected Correct wiring.  
to the outdoor unit. (Fig. 1)  
(Indoor/outdoor cannot communicate before address setup.)  
There is none of outdoor terminator resistor,  
or there are two or more resistances.  
(Before address setup)  
Check SW30 bit 2 of the outdoor unit.  
No connection between multiple refrigerant lines:  
SW30 bit 2 0N  
ON  
1
2
Connection between multiple refrigerant lines:  
SW30 bit 2 of the connected outdoor unit is  
turned on only in one line.  
SW30  
E20-01  
Address setup is performed with connecting indoor/outdoor  
communication line between outdoor units. (Fig. 3)  
Correct wiring.  
Address setup is performed under condition of connecting  
between multiple refrigerant lines. (Fig. 3)  
Correct wiring.  
8-5-3. There is no display of a check code on 7-segment display on the interface  
P.C. board of the outdoor unit though there is indoor unit which does not  
accept the operation from the remote controller.  
7-segment  
Remote  
controller status  
display of  
Cause  
Countermeasures  
outdoor unit  
No response  
None  
Communication line is not connected between indoor and  
outdoor.  
Modify wiring.  
Line and indoor addresses are unset.  
(Unit which does not response to remote controller)  
Set up address.  
The power of the header unit of the group is not turned on in  
indoor group control.  
(Unit which does not response to remote controller)  
Turn on the power.  
Group address is set up to follower unit in the individual  
control. (Unit which does not response to remote controller)  
Set [0] to group address in case of individual  
control.  
No display on  
remote controller  
(No line is output.)  
None  
The power is not turned on.  
Turn on the power.  
Correct wiring.  
Correct wiring.  
(Unit which is not displayed on remote controller)  
Remote controller is not connected with cable.  
(Unit which is not displayed on remote controller)  
Miscabling of remote controller  
(Unit which is not displayed on remote controller)  
Remote controller communication circuit error  
Remove FASTON terminal connected to remote  
controller terminals (A/B), and check the voltage.  
If voltage is not applied, replace P.C. board.  
(15 to 18V usually)  
(Unit which is not displayed on remote controller)  
If 230V is incorrectly applied to the remote controller terminal,  
the remote controller communication circuit fails.  
8-5-4. In check for No. of connected outdoor units and connected Indoor units  
after address setup, diminished No. of connected units displayed.  
(There are outdoor/indoor units which do not operate in a test operation.)  
Status  
Number of  
Cause  
Countermeasures  
Miswiring of communication line between  
After modification of wiring, set up address again and check No. of the  
connected outdoor units.  
connected outdoor outdoor units or unconnected cable (Fig. 4)  
units is short.  
(Address setup operation has finished  
without recognition of miswired follower unit.)  
Number of  
connected indoor  
units is short.  
Miswiring of communication line between  
indoor units or unconnected cable (Fig. 5)  
(Address setup operation has finished  
without recognition of miswired indoor unit.)  
After modification of wiring, set up address again and check No. of the  
connected indoor units.  
Number of outdoor Remote controller is not connected with wire. Using the main remote controller connected to a group, start a test operation,  
units connected to Miscabling of remote controller  
group is short in  
specify the unit which does not operate (Unit unconnected to group), and then  
check wiring.  
group operation  
Remote controller communication circuit  
from remote  
Using the main remote controller connected to a group, start a test operation,  
specify the unit which does not operate (Unit unconnected to group).  
Remove Fasten receptacle connected to remote controller terminals (A/B),  
and check the voltage. If voltage is not applied, replace P.C. board.  
(15 to18V in normal time)  
error  
controller.  
If 230V is incorrectly applied to the remote  
controller terminal, the remote controller  
communication circuit fails.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Incorrect wiring example  
(Fig. 1)  
Remote  
controller status  
Header unit  
7-segment display  
Incorrect example  
No response  
E19-00  
Header  
unit  
Header  
unit  
U3/U4  
U5/U6  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
(Fig. 2)  
Remote  
controller status  
Header unit  
7-segment display  
Incorrect example  
No response  
E19-02  
U5/U6  
Header  
unit  
Follower  
unit  
U1/U2  
Indoorunit  
(Fig. 3)  
Remote  
controller status  
Header unit  
7-segment display  
Incorrect example  
No response  
E20-01  
Header  
unit  
Follower  
unit  
Header  
unit  
Follower  
unit  
Header  
unit  
Follower  
unit  
U1/U2  
U1/U2  
U1/U2  
U5/U6  
Line 1  
Line 2  
U1/U2  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
(Fig. 4)  
Status  
Incorrect example  
Number of connected outdoor units is short.  
Header  
unit  
Follower  
unit  
Header  
unit  
Follower  
unit  
Header  
unit  
Follower  
unit  
U1/U2  
U3/U4  
U3/U4  
U5/U6  
U1/U2  
U1/U2  
U1/U2  
U3/U4  
U5/U6  
U1/U2  
U3/U4  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
(Fig. 5)  
Status  
Incorrect example  
Number of connected outdoor units is short.  
Header  
unit  
Header  
unit  
U1/U2  
U1/U2  
A/B  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
Indoorunit  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6. Test Operation Check  
8-6-1. Fan Operation Check  
START  
Push [START/STOP] button.  
When an error code has been displayed on the remote  
controller, refer to Section 8-5-1.  
Select the operation mode [FAN].  
NO  
Is air discharged from the  
Check indoor fan, fan motor and fan circuit.  
discharge port of the indoor unit?  
(Ensure power has been isolated before removing any covers.)  
YES  
NO  
Check for items in contact with fan.  
(Ensure power has been isolated before removing any covers.)  
Is there any abnormal noise?  
YES  
Normal  
Check all indoor units in turn.  
8-6-2. Cooling/Heating Test Operation Check  
The cooling/heating test operation check can be performed on both remote controller and outdoor interface P.C.  
board.  
1. Test operation start/stop operation  
Test operation from remote controller  
Wired remote controller  
TEST  
1
When pushing  
button for 4 seconds or more,  
2,  
4
[TEST] is displayed in the display section and the  
mode enters the test operation mode.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
1,  
5
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
TEST  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
ON / OFF  
2
3
Push  
button.  
3
MODE  
Using  
button, select an operation mode either [COOL] or [HEAT].  
• Do not use any other operation modes, only [COOL] or [HEAT].  
• Temperature adjustment is unavailable during test operation.  
• Errors are detected as usual.  
TEST  
ON / OFF  
4
5
When the test operation has finished, push  
button to stop the operation.  
The same display as that in procedure 1 appears.  
TEST  
Push  
button to clear the test operation mode.  
[TEST] display disappears and the status returns to the normal stop status.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wireless remote controller  
(Except 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type, Under Ceiling type and 1-way Air Discharge Cassette type (2 Series))  
1
Remove the screw which fixes the name plate to the receiver part on the wireless remote controller.  
Remove the nameplate of the receiver section by inserting a minus screwdriver, into the notch at the bottom  
of the plate, and set the Dip switch to [TEST RUN ON].  
ON / OFF  
2
Execute a test operation with  
button on the wireless remote controller.  
•
,
, and LED flash during test operation.  
• Under status of [TEST RUN ON], the temperature adjustment from the wireless remote controller is not  
available.  
Ensure that this is not used for normal operation as equipment damage may occur.  
3
4
Use either COOL or HEAT operation mode for a test operation.  
Receiver unit  
Note) The outdoor unit does not operate for approx. 3 minutes.  
Spacer  
After power-ON and after operation has stopped.  
M4 × 25 screw  
(2 pieces)  
After the test operation finished, stop the  
air conditioner using the wireless remote  
controller, and return the Dip switch to its  
original setting.  
(A 60-minute timing function is designed into  
the sensor section in order to prevent a  
continuous test operation.)  
Nameplate  
Notch  
Small screw  
Wireless remote controller (4-way Air Discharge Cassette type)  
1
Turn OFF the power to the air conditioner.  
Remove the adjust corner cap and the attached with sensor section from the ceiling panel. For removal  
method, follow to the installation instructions attached to the ceiling panel.  
(Be careful to handling the sensor section because cables are connected to the sensor.)  
Remove the sensor cover from the adjust corner cap. (1 screw)  
2
3
Change Bit [1:TEST] of the switch [S003] on the sensor P.C. board from OFF to ON.  
Mount the sensor cover and attach the adjust corner cap with sensors to the ceiling panel.  
Turn on power of the air conditioner.  
ON / OFF  
Push  
button of the wireless remote controller, and select an operation mode [COOL]  
MODE  
or [HEAT] with  
button. (All the display lamps of the wireless remote controller sensor  
section flash during the test operation.)  
• Do not use operation mode other than [COOL] or [HEAT].  
• Errors are detected as usual.  
Bit 1 : OFF  
ON  
S003  
ON / OFF  
4
3
2
1
4
5
When the test operation has finished, push  
button to stop the operation.  
ON  
Turn off the power to the air conditioner.  
Sensor cover  
Change Bit [1] of the switch [S003] on the  
sensor P.C. board from ON to OFF.  
Sensor P.C. board  
Adjust corner cap  
Attach the adjust corner cap with  
sensors to the ceiling panel.  
Test operation from outdoor unit  
Refer to “8-7-2. Function of Start/Stop the Indoor Unit from Outdoor Unit” in “8-7. Service Support Function”.  
NOTE) The test operation returns to normal operation after 60 minutes have passed.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of wireless remote controller  
(for Under Ceiling type and 1-way Air Discharge Cassette type (2 Series))  
Procedure  
Description  
Turn on power of the air conditioner.  
1
The operation is not accepted for 5 minutes when power has been turned on at first time after installa-  
tion, and 1 minute when power has been turned on at the next time and after. After the specified time  
has passed, perform a test operation.  
Push [Start/Stop] button and change the operation mode to [COOL] or [HEAT] with [Mode] button.  
Then change the fan speed to [High] using [Fan] button.  
2
3
Test cooling operation  
Test heating operation  
Set temperature to [18°C] using [Temperature set]  
button.  
Set temperature to [30°C] using [Temperature set]  
button.  
After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately  
push [Temperature set] button to set to [19°C] push [Temperature set] button to set to [29°C].  
4
5
After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately  
push [Temperature set] button to set to [18°C]. push [Temperature set] button to set to [30°C].  
Then repeat the procedure  
4
→
5
→
4
→
5
.
After approx. 10 seconds, all the display lamps on the sensor part of wireless remote controller, [Opera-  
6
7
tion] (Green), [Timer] (Green), and [Ready] (Yellow) flash and the air conditioner starts operation.  
If the lamps do not flash, repeat the procedure  
2
and after.  
After the test operation, push [Start/Stop] button to stop the operation.  
Outline of test operation from the wireless remote controller  
Test cooling operation:  
Start → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → (Test operation) → Stop  
Test heating operation:  
Start → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → (Test operation) → Stop  
Be sure to set the  
air speed to [High]  
2
3, 4, 5, 6  
2, 7  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Test operation  
START  
Refer to “Test operation procedure” of  
indoor remote controller.  
Test operation for one indoor unit  
YES  
NO  
The operation does not start approx. 3 minutes  
after power-ON or after operation stopped.  
Operation start  
YES  
(NOTE)  
After power-ON, it may require Max. 10 minutes  
to start the operation due to the initial  
communication of the system.  
Is cold air or hot air discharged?  
YES  
Check operation status of the compressor.  
Check direction of the louver.  
Is air circulation good?  
YES  
Test operation for  
all units in turn  
Execute a test operation using  
“Function of start/stop the indoor unit from  
outdoor unit” in “Service support function”.  
Operate all the indoor units at once.  
(NOTE 1)  
NO  
NO  
Is the temperature difference  
between suction and discharge good?  
YES  
• Check power voltage of the  
main power supply.  
• Check cable size of the  
power supply.  
Is the operating voltage correct?  
(Rated voltage ±10%)  
YES  
(NOTE 2)  
NO  
NO  
• Check temperature load of the indoor room/  
outdoor ambient.  
• Check pipe length and refrigerant charge amount.  
• Check operating Hz of compressor.  
• Check abnormal sound in the outdoor unit.  
(Abnormal sound, etc of compressor and others)  
Is the operating current normal?  
YES  
(NOTE 3)  
Is the operating pressure normal?  
YES  
Normal  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(NOTE 1) Criteria for judging difference between suction and discharge temperature  
1. Cooling  
After operation for a minimum of 30 minutes in [COOL] mode, check the dry bulb temperature difference.  
Temperature difference: 8°C or more between suction and discharge air of the indoor unit.  
(In Max-Hz operation)  
2. Heating  
After operation for a minimum of 30 minutes in [HEAT] mode, check the dry bulb temperature difference.  
Temperature difference: 15°C or more between suction and discharge air of the indoor unit.  
(In Max-Hz operation)  
∗ The temperature difference may diminish in cases of systems in which the connected indoor capacity  
exceeds 100%, or with long pipe length, etc.  
(NOTE 2) Criteria for operating current  
For a test operation (with all the indoor units operating), normal operating current is shown in the  
following table.  
Outdoor unit  
Current value  
8HP  
18  
10HP  
21  
12HP  
22  
(Unit: A)  
(NOTE 3) Criteria for cycle status  
1. Refrigerating cycle under standard condition  
The refrigerating cycle under standard cooling and heating condition is as follows:  
10HP  
MMY-MAP1002FT8  
Cool standard  
3.1  
Heat standard  
High  
(Pd)  
(Ps)  
(TD)  
(TS1)  
(TC)  
(TE1)  
(TL)  
1
2.9  
0.7  
90  
3
Pressure  
(MPa)  
(°C)  
Low  
0.8  
86  
Discharge  
Suction  
6
Pipe surface temp  
Indoor heat exchanger  
Outdoor heat exchanger  
Liquid temp  
Compressor  
Compressor  
Indoor  
8
46  
1
43  
36  
36  
75  
75  
20/–  
7/6  
79  
Number of compressor  
rotations  
(rps)  
2
79  
27/19  
35/–  
Air temp condition  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Outdoor  
∗ This compressor is driven with 4-pole motor. The value of the compressor frequency (Hz) measured by a clamp meter is  
two times the rotation count (rps) of the compressor.  
∗ This data is the cycle data under condition of standard pipe length and two 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type air  
conditioners connected.  
Data changes according to installed pipe length, combination of indoor units or connected indoor capacity.  
∗ For a compressor, the left side is 1 and the right side is 2 viewed front the front of the unit.  
Even if two compressors operate, the frequency difference may set as a measures against resonance.  
∗ The temperature of indoor heat exchanger (TC) indicates TCJ sensor temperature in cooling time, and TC2 sensor  
temperature in heating time respectively.  
2. Criteria for operating pressure  
General criteria is as follows:  
High pressure : 2.0 to 3.2MPa  
Low pressure : 0.5 to 0.9MPa  
High pressure : 2.5 to 3.3MPa  
Low pressure : 0.5 to 0.7MPa  
Indoor :18 to 32°C  
Outdoor :25 to 35°C  
Indoor :15 to 25°C  
Outdoor : 5 to 10°C  
All cooling operaton  
All heating operation  
When all the units operate in cooling mode  
When all the units operate in heating mode  
Using the rotary switch on the outdoor unit I/F, the operating pressure, cycle temperature, and compressor rotation  
count can be checked on the 7-segment display.  
Refer to “Outdoor refrigerant circuit system data display” and “Indoor cycle data display” in Section 9.Troubleshooting.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7. Service Support Function  
8-7-1. Function to Start/Stop (ON/OFF) Indoor Unit from Outdoor Unit  
The following functions enables the start and stop of the indoor units using the switches on the interface P.C.  
board of the header unit.  
No.  
Function  
Outline  
Setup/Release  
7-segment display  
1
All cooling  
Changes the mode of all the connected indoor [Setup]  
Section A  
[C  
Section B  
–C]  
test operation units collectively to cooling test operation.  
Push SW04 for 2 seconds or more  
with SW01”2”, SW02”5”, SW03”1”.  
]
[
Note) Control operation same as test  
operation for remote controller.  
[Release]  
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.  
2
3
All heating  
Changes the mode of all the connected indoor [Setup]  
Section A  
[H  
Section B  
–H]  
test operation units collectively to heating test operation.  
Push SW04 for 2 seconds or more  
with SW01”2”, SW02”6”, SW03”1”.  
]
[
Note) Control operation same as test  
operation for remote controller.  
[Release]  
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.  
Batch start  
Batch stop  
Starts all the connected indoor units collec-  
tively.  
[Setup]  
Section A  
[CH]  
Section B  
11]  
Push SW04 for 2 seconds or more  
with SW01”2”, SW02”7”, SW03”1”.  
[
Note) The contents follow the setup of remote  
controller.  
[
11] is displayed on  
Section B for 5 seconds.  
[Release]  
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.  
Stops all the connected indoor units collec-  
tively.  
[Setup]  
Section A  
[CH]  
Section B  
00]  
Push SW05 for 2 seconds or more  
with SW01”2”, SW02”7”, SW03”1”.  
[
[
00] is displayed on  
Section B for 5 seconds.  
[Release]  
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.  
4
Individual  
start  
Starts the specified indoor unit.  
Notes)  
[Setup]  
Section A  
Section B  
Push SW04 for 2 seconds or more set  
SW01 “16” and set SW02 and SW03  
to address No. (1 to 64) to be started.  
[
]
[
]
Section A:  
Displays the corresponding  
indoor address.  
• Control operation same as test.  
• The other indoor units keep existing status.  
[Release]  
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.  
Section B:  
Displays [ 11] for 5 seconds  
from operation-ON.  
Individual  
stop  
Stops the specified indoor unit.  
[Setup]  
Section A  
Section B  
Push SW05 for 2 seconds or more set  
SW01 “16” and set SW02 and SW03  
to address No. (1 to 64) to be stopped.  
[
]
[
]
Note) The other indoor units keep existing  
status.  
Section A:  
Displays the corresponding  
indoor address.  
[Release]  
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.  
Section B:  
Displays [ 00] for 5 seconds  
from operation-OFF.  
Individual test Operates the specified indoor unit.  
[Setup]  
Section A  
Section B  
operation  
Push SW04 for 10 seconds or more  
set SW01 “16” and set SW02 and  
SW03 to address No. (1 to 64) to be  
operated.  
[
]
[
]
Note) The other indoor units keep existing  
status.  
Section A:  
Displays the corresponding  
indoor address.  
[Release]  
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 to “1”.  
Section B:  
Displays [ FF] for 5 seconds  
from test operation-ON.  
NOTE 1) This start/stop function only sends  
the command signals from the  
Interface P.C. board  
7-segment display [A]  
SW04  
7-segment display [B]  
SW05  
outdoor unit to the indoor unit, such  
as start, stop, operation mode, etc.  
Once it does not resend the signals  
even if the indoor unit does not follow  
the sent signals.  
NOTE 2) The above controls are not available  
when an error has caused the system  
to stop.  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
Rotary switch  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. All cooling test operation function  
This function is provided to change collectively the mode of all the indoor units connected to the same  
system for cooling test operation mode, using switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.  
Operation procedure  
Be sure to turn on power at the indoor side before power-ON of outdoor unit.  
Power ON  
Set SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to [2],  
Sw02 to [5], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([C ] is displayed on the 7-segment display [A].)  
Start  
Push SW04 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
[TEST] is displayed on the remote controller of the indoor unit to be operated.  
Check that “ – C ” is displayed on the 7-segment display  
Operation check  
[A]  
[B]  
–C]  
[B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
[C  
]
[
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [1], [1], [1]  
respectively or push the push-switch SW05 for 2 seconds or more.  
Stop/End  
2. All heating test operation function  
This function is provided to change collectively the mode of all the indoor units connected to the same  
system for heating test operation mode, using switches on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
Operation procedure  
Be sure to turn on power at the indoor side before power-ON of outdoor unit.  
Power ON  
Set SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to [2],  
Sw02 to [6], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([H ] is displayed on the 7-segment display [A].)  
Start  
Push SW04 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
[TEST] is displayed on the remote controller of the indoor unit to be operated.  
Check that “ – H ” is displayed on the 7-segment display  
Operation check  
[A]  
[ H  
[B]  
–H]  
[B] on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
]
[
Return SW01, SW02, SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit to [1], [1], [1]  
respectively or push the push-switch SW05 for 2 seconds or more.  
Stop/End  
Interface P.C. board  
7-segment display [A]  
SW04  
7-segment display [B]  
SW05  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
Rotary switch  
NOTE) The test operation returns to normal operation after 60 minutes.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Batch start/stop (ON/OFF) function  
This function is provided to start/stop collectively all the indoor units connected to the same system by using  
switches on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit.  
Operation procedure  
Power ON  
Be sure to turn on power at the indoor side before power-ON of outdoor unit.  
If an error is already displayed under condition of  
SW01 [1], SW02 [1], SW03 [1], resolve the problem  
using the troubleshooting guide and then execute the  
test operation.  
If the operation is set “heat”, indoor unit which is set to  
Set up the operation mode of the remote controller.  
(If it is not set up, the operation continues in the current mode.)  
(FAN/COOL/HEAT)  
“cool priority” will not operate  
If the operation is set to “cool”, indoor unit which is set to  
“heat priority” will not operate or will be displayed.  
or will be displayed.  
Set on the interface P.C. board of the header unit SW01 to [2],  
Sw02 to [7], and SW03 to [1] respectively. ([CH ] is displayed  
on 7-segment display [A].)  
Push SW04 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit for  
2 seconds or more.  
Start  
The indoor unit to be started operates.  
Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface P.C. board of the  
header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
Stop  
End  
After test operation, return the rotary switches SW01, SW02,  
and SW03 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to  
[1], [1], [1] respectively.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Individual start/stop (ON/OFF) individual test operation function  
This function is provided to start/stop (ON/OFF) individually each indoor unit connected to the same system  
by using switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.  
Set SW01 [16] and set SW02, SW03 to indoor address No. (1 to 64) to be started (Refer to the following  
table ) - only the setup indoor unit starts operation.  
∗
(In the rotary switches of the indoor unit which operates in a group by the remote controller, the follower unit  
cannot be individually started or stopped. In this case, [ – – ] is displayed on 7-segment display [B] on the  
interface P.C. board of the header unit.)  
Operation procedure  
Power ON  
Be sure to turn on power at the indoor side before power-ON of outdoor unit.  
If an error is already displayed under condition of SW01 [1],  
SW02 [1], SW03 [1], return the status to normal one according  
to troubleshooting and then execute a test operation.  
The unit which is not given with priority by heating priority control,  
cooling priority control, and selection of cooling or heating mode  
Set up the operation mode of the remote controller.  
(If it is not set up, the operation starts with the current mode.)  
is not operated. In this case,  
remote controller.  
or  
is displayed on the  
Match the rotary switch on the interface P.C. board of the  
header unit  
*
with in the following table.  
(7-segment display)  
[A]  
[B]  
[
]
[
]
Address display of  
[
00] is displayed for  
corresponding indoor unit 5 seconds after operation-ON.  
(7-segment display)  
Push the push-switch SW04 on the interface  
P.C. board of the header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
(If pushing this switch continuously for 10 seconds  
or more, the operation changes to the individual  
[A]  
[B]  
[
]
[
]
Start  
Address display of  
[
11] is displayed for  
test operation.)  
corresponding indoor unit 5 seconds after operation-ON.  
(For individual test operation,[ FF] is displayed.)  
The indoor unit to be started operates.  
SW01  
SW02  
SW03  
Units to be operated  
*
Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface  
P.C. board of the header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
Address 1  
16  
1 to 16  
1
to  
individually  
individually  
individually  
individually  
(7-segment display)  
}
}
}
}
Address 16  
[A]  
[B]  
[
]
[
]
Address 17  
to  
Address 32  
In individual  
start/stop  
Address display of  
[
00] is displayed for  
16  
16  
16  
1 to 16  
1 to 16  
1 to 16  
2
3
4
corresponding indoor unit 5 seconds after operation-ON.  
Address 33  
to  
Address 48  
After test operation, return the display select  
switches SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface  
P.C. board of the header unit to [1], [1], [1] respectively.  
Address 49  
to  
Address 64  
End  
NOTE) The individual test operation returns to the normal operation after 60 minutes.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-2. Error Clearing Function  
1. Clearing from the main remote controller  
[Error clearing in outdoor unit]  
Error of the outdoor unit is cleared by the unit of one refrigerant circuit system to which the indoor units oper-  
ated by the remote controller. (Error of the indoor unit is not cleared.)  
For clearing errors, the service monitor function of the remote controller is used.  
<Method>  
CL  
TEST  
1
2
Change the mode to service monitor mode by pushing  
seconds or more.  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4  
Using  
/
buttons, set “FF” to item code.  
The display in Section A in the following figure is counted with interval of 5 seconds as  
“0005 ” → “0004 ” → “0003 ” → “0002 ” → “0001 ” → “0000 ”.  
When the count arrives “0000 ”, the error is cleared.  
∗ However, counting from “0005 ” is repeated on the display.  
TEST  
3
When  
button is pushed, the status returns to the normal status.  
Operation procedure  
1 2 3  
The status returns to the normal status.  
CODE No.  
UNIT No.  
Section A  
R.C.  
No.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
2
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
3
1
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
[Error clearing in indoor unit]  
ON / OFF  
Error in the indoor unit is cleared by  
button on the remote controller.  
(Only error of the indoor unit connected with operating remote controller is cleared.)  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Clearing from the interface P.C. board  
Using the switches on the interface P.C. board, this function is to clear the currently detected error for each  
refrigerant circuit system without resetting the power supply.  
(→ Restart of error detection)  
Errors in both outdoor and indoor units are once cleared.  
(7-segment display)  
Set the rotary switches on the interface P.C. board of the  
header unit to the following setting.  
[A]  
E
[B]  
[
]
[
]
SW01=[2] SW02=[16] SW03=[1]  
Push the push-switch SW04 on the interface P.C. board of  
the header unit for 5 seconds or more.  
(7-segment display)  
[
C L] is displayed in 7-segment display [B] on the P.C. board  
(for 5 seconds), and the error is completely cleared.  
[A]  
[B]  
[
E
]
[
C L ]  
7-segment display [A]  
Interface P.C. board  
7-segment display [B]  
Push  
switch  
SW04  
Push  
switch  
SW05  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
<Rotary switch>  
3. Clearing of error check code by power reset  
This function is provided to clear error in a refrigerant circuit system by resetting the power of all the outdoor  
and the indoor units.  
(→ Restart of error detection)  
As same as the clearing method on the interface P.C. board, errors of both the outdoor and the indoor units  
are once cleared.  
Method  
1. Be sure to reset power of both the outdoor and the indoor units.  
NOTE) After power reset, it requires usually 3 minutes to power-on due to the initial communication of the  
system. In same cases, it requires Max. 10 minutes.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-3. Remote Controller Distinction Function  
This function is provided to distinguish the remote controller connected from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit  
for a refrigerant circuit system using switches on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.  
Distinction procedure  
Be sure turn on the power of the indoor unit prior  
to the power of the outdoor unit.  
Power ON  
Set the display select switches on the interface P.C. board of  
the header unit as follows:  
(7-segment display)  
[A]  
[B]  
SW01  
SW02  
SW03  
[2]  
[4]  
[1]  
[
A 1  
]
[
]
Operation  
Push the push-switch SW04 on the interface P.C. board of the  
header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
(7-segment display)  
[A]  
[A]  
FF ]  
[
A 1  
]
[
TEST  
display of the connected remote controller flashes.  
Check the connected remote controller.  
Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface P.C. board of the  
header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
End  
Other end conditions:  
1. 10 minutes passed for sending operation  
2. SW01, SW02, or SW03 changed to other position.  
Interface P.C. board  
7-segment display [A]  
SW04  
7-segment display [B]  
SW05  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
Rotary switch  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-4. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) Forced Open/Close Function in Indoor Unit  
This function is provided to fully open or close forcibly the PMV for 2 minutes in all indoor units, using the switch  
operation on the interface P.C. board of the header unit.  
This function is also used to open the PMV fully when turning off the power and executing an operation, for  
example, vacuuming.  
Operation  
[Open fully]  
Set the switch SW01 on the interface P.C. board of the header unit to [2], SW02 to [3], SW03 to [1] and push  
SW04 for 2 seconds or more.  
(Display shown on 7-segment display for 2 minutes as follows.) [P ] [ FF]  
[Close fully]  
Set the switch on the interface P.C. board of the header unit SW01 to [2], SW02 to [3], SW03 to [1] and push  
SW05 for 2 seconds or more.  
(Display shown on 7-segment display for one minute as follows.) [P ] [ 00]  
[Clear]  
After 2 minutes (1 minutes for “Close fully”) have passed when setup has finished, the PMV automatically  
returns to the normal operation.  
8-7-5. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) Forced Open Fully/Close fully Function in  
Outdoor Unit  
This function is provided to fully open or close fully the P.M.V. (PMV1/PMV2/PMV3) used in the outdoor unit for 2  
minutes.  
[Open fully]  
[Operating method]  
Short-circuit CN30 on the interface P.C. board  
of the header unit.  
Select one of PMV1 or PMV2 to open.Turn SW12  
bit 1 to OFF when handling (PMV1/PMV2), and turn  
it to ON when selecting PMV3.  
[Close fully]  
Enlarged diagram of switch position  
Short-circuit CN31 on the interface P.C. board  
of the header unit.  
[Clear]  
After 2 minutes, the opening returns to the  
normal operation.  
Be sure to remove the short circuit after confir-  
mation.  
SW12  
OFF PMV1, PMV2  
Bit 1  
I/F P.C. board  
ON PMV3  
Check connector  
CN30  
Check connector  
CN31  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-6. Solenoid Valve Forced Open/Close Function in Outdoor Unit  
This function is provided to forcibly open/close each solenoid valve mounted in the outdoor unit by use of the  
switches provided on the outdoor unit interface P.C. board.This function confirms the operation of each solenoid  
valve.  
[Operation]  
1. On the interface P.C. board set SW01 to [2], SW02 to [1] and SW03 to [3].  
2. Confirm [H, ] is displayed on the 7-segment display [B]. Push switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more.  
3. Confirm [2] is displayed on the 7-segment display - this indicates that solenoid SV2 has been switched on.  
4. Each solenoid can be operated by selecting the appropriate SW02 position as shown in the table below.  
(ON/OFF output pattern of each solenoid valve is as below.)  
NOTE 1) Be aware that there is a 5 second delay in the operation of the selected solenoid valve after SW02  
has been set.  
NOTE 2) The mark [ ] in the table indicates the selected solenoid valve is forced on.  
¡
NOTE 3) The mark [—] in the table indicates the selected solenoid mode will depend on the specifications  
of the air conditioner.  
NOTE 4) The mark [ ] in the table indicates the selected solenoid valve has been turned off.  
×
NOTE 5) The case heater relay output operates both compressor and accumulator heaters.  
Operation pattern of solenoid valve  
7-segment display  
[B]  
Case  
heater  
SW02  
SV2 SV5 SV6 SV11 SV12 SV41 SV42 SV3A SV3B SV3C SV3D SV3E  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
...  
1
2
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
2
5
6
]
]
]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
¡
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3
—
¡
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
1 1 ]  
1 2 ]  
4 1 ]  
4 2 ]  
¡
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
¡
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
¡
7
—
¡
¡
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
4
—
]
¡
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
9
3 A ]  
3 b ]  
3 C ]  
3 d ]  
3 E ]  
¡
—
—
—
—
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
¡
—
—
—
¡
—
—
¡
—
—
—
3
—
]
]
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
... ... ...  
—
—
—
[ A L L ]  
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
[Clear]  
Return settings on SW01, SW02, and SW03 to (1/1/1) on the Interface P.C. board.  
NOTE) Ensure this function is cleared to return the air conditioner to normal operation.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-7. Fan Operation Check in Outdoor Unit  
This function is provided to check the fan operation on the interface P.C. board in the outdoor unit.The frequency  
of the fan speed can be controlled.  
Therefore utilize this function to check the operation or abnormal sound in the fan system.  
NOTE) Do not use this function during operation of the compressor. It may damage the compressor.  
[Operation]  
1. Set the switch on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit SW01 to [2], SW02 to [1], SW03 to [4].  
2. When [F. d] is displayed in 7-segment display [A], keep pushing the switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more.  
3. From when fan step [ 31] is displayed in 7-segment display [B], the fan starts operation. (Max. step operation)  
4. After then, 7-segment display [B] and the fan step are changed by changing the setup number of the  
switches SW02 and SW03.  
(Output pattern of the fan is as follows.)  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
7-segment display [B]  
Fan step  
31  
SW01 SW02 SW03 7-segment display [B]  
Fan step  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
1
2
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
30  
29  
3
28  
4
27  
5
26  
6
25  
7
24  
8
8
8
2
4
2
5
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
23  
9
7
7
22  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
6
6
21  
5
5
20  
4
4
19  
3
3
18  
2
2
17  
1
1
16  
0
0
[Clear]  
This function is cleared by one of the following operations.  
1. When SW01 setting number was changed to other number.  
2. Push-switch SW05 was pushed for 2 seconds or more.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-8. Abnormal Outdoor Unit Discrimination Method  
<By Fan Operating Function>  
This function is provided to forcedly operate the fan of the outdoor unit in which an error occurred or the fan of  
the normal outdoor unit by the switch operation on the interface P.C. board in the header unit.  
To specify which one of the follower units connected to the system was faulty, use this function for the system  
stop due to a follower unit fault (Check code [E28]).  
[Operation]  
In case to operate the fan in the erroneous outdoor unit only  
1. Check all the switches, SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board in the header unit are set to [1].  
7-segment display  
[A]  
[B]  
Outdoor unit No.  
Error code display  
2. Push the push-switch SW04 for 2 seconds or more.  
3. “E 1” is displayed on 7-segment display [A].  
4. The fan of the outdoor unit in which error occurred starts operation within approx. 10 seconds when “E 1”  
was displayed.  
In case to operate the fans in all the normal outdoor units  
1. Check all the switches, SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board are set to [1/1/1].  
2. Push the push-switches SW04 and SW05 at the same time for 2 seconds or more.  
3. “E 0” is displayed on 7-segment display [A].  
4. The fans of all the normal outdoor units start operation with the Max. fan speed within approx. 10 seconds  
when “E 0” was displayed.  
[Release]  
Push the push-switch SW05 on the interface P.C. board in the header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
The outdoor fan which was operated stops.  
* Check [U. 1] is displayed on 7-segment display [A], and then finish the work.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-9. Manual Adjustment Function of Outside Temp (TO) Sensor  
This function is provided to fix TO sensor value manually by the switch operation on the interface P.C. board in  
the outdoor unit. When the unit stops abnormally due to TO sensor failure, etc, an emergent operation is avail-  
able by set up the value manually to position near the current outside temperature.  
[Operation]  
1. Set the rotary switches on the interface P.C. board to numbers as follows.  
• SW01 [2] / SW02 [1] / SW03 [15]  
• 7-segment display: [t o]  
2. Keep pushing the push-switch SW04 on the interface P.C. board for 1 second or more.  
The mode changes to the TO sensor value fix manual mode.  
3. As shown in the following table, TO sensor value can be fixed by setting the rotary switch SW02 on the  
interface P.C. board.  
SW01 SW02 SW03 7-segment display [B] TO sensor value SW01 SW02 SW03 7-segment display [B] TO sensor value  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
10  
15  
20  
25  
30  
35  
40  
43  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
10°C  
15°C  
20°C  
25°C  
30°C  
35°C  
40°C  
43°C  
9
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
45  
– 15  
– 10  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
45°C  
–15°C  
–10°C  
–5°C  
0°C  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
–
5
0
2
5
7
2
15  
2
15  
2°C  
5°C  
7°C  
NOTE) Emergent operation should be restricted to one day or so on. If operating TO sensor fixed with this  
function, the system control operation of the air conditioner may not become one based upon the  
specification of the product.Therefore an emergent operation should be restricted to a day or so on.  
[Clear]  
Return numbers of SW01, SW02, and SW03 on the interface P.C. board in the header unit to [1/1/1] each.  
Service support function list  
SW01 SW02 SW03 7-segment display [A]  
Function contents  
Refrigerant circuit and control communication line check function (Cooling operation)  
Refrigerant circuit and control communication line check function (Heating operation)  
Indoor PMV forced full open function  
1
2
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
J
J
C
H
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
3
P
A
C
H
C
E
4
1
Indoor remote controller discriminating function  
Cooling test operation function  
2
1
5
6
Heating test operation function  
7
H
r
Indoor collective start/stop (ON/OFF) function  
Error clear function  
16  
3
[
[
[
H
F
t
r
]
]
]
Solenoid valve forced open/close function  
Fan forced operation function  
2
1 to 16 4 to 5  
15  
d
o
Outside temp sensor manual adjustment function  
1
2
[ 0 1 ] to [ 1 6 ]  
[ 1 7 ] to [ 3 2 ]  
[ 3 3 ] to [ 4 8 ]  
[ 4 9 ] to [ 6 4 ]  
Indoor No. 1 to 16 unit  
Indoor No.17 to 32 unit  
Indoor individual start/stop (ON/OFF) function  
Indoor No.33 to 48 unit  
16 1 to 16  
3
4
Indoor No.49 to 64 unit  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-10. Indoor Fan Operation Check Function  
This function is provided to check operation of single indoor unit without using communication with the remote  
controller or outdoor unit.This function can be used regardless operating or stopping of the system.  
However, if this function is used for a long time, a trouble of the air conditioner may be caused.Therefore using  
of this function should be restricted to several minutes.  
[Operation]  
1. Short-circuit CHK pin (CN71 on the indoor P.C. board).  
If short-circuiting DISP pin (CN72 on the indoor P.C. board) while short-circuiting CHK pin (CN71 on the  
indoor P.C. board), the indoor PMV only becomes the minimum opening (30 pulse). When opening DISP pin,  
it becomes the maximum opening again.  
[Clear]  
Open CHK pin. If the system is operating, it stops once but automatically restart after several minutes.  
∗ For the details of CHK pin (CN71 on indoor P.C. board) and DISP pin (CN72 on indoor P.C. board), refer to  
11. Control circuit configuration, Indoor unit 2, Indoor P.C. board MCC-1402 and MCC-1403.  
8-7-11. Indoor Fan Only Operating Mode  
When operating an air conditioner with indoor units and remote controller only in fan operation etc., this function  
can be used. A group operation is also available.  
[Operation]  
1) Short circuit DISP pin (CN72 on the indoor P.C. board). However, if CHK pin (CN71 on the indoor P.C. board)  
has been previously short circuited, this function is unavailable.  
2) In a group operation, set up a group as usual.  
3) While DISP pin is short circuited, all the sensor error judgment operation and communication with the  
outdoor unit are not performed. PMV is fixed to the Max. opening.  
[Clear]  
Open DISP pin.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7-12. Monitor Function of Remote Controller Switch  
When using a remote controller with the model name RBC-ATM21E, the following monitor  
functions can be used.  
Calling of display screen  
[Contents]  
The temperature or the operation status of the remote controller, indoor unit, or each sensor of the outdoor unit  
can be known by calling up the service monitor mode from the remote controller.  
[Procedure]  
CL  
TEST  
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds  
CODE No.  
or more to call up the service monitor mode.The  
service monitor goes on, and temperature of the  
item code 00 is firstly displayed.  
UNIT No.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
2
3
Push the temperature setup  
select the item number (Item code) to be monitored.  
/
buttons to  
2
3
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
MODE  
VENT  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
4
1
For displayed codes, refer to the table below.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
UNIT  
Push  
button to change the item to one to be  
monitored.Then monitor the indoor unit and sensor  
temperature or operation status in the correspond-  
ing refrigerant line.  
Operation procedure  
1 2 3 4  
TEST  
4
Pushing  
display.  
button returns the display to the normal  
Returns to the normal display  
Item  
code  
Display  
format  
Item  
code  
Display  
format  
Data name  
Unit  
Data name  
Unit  
10  
Compressor 1 discharge temp (Td1)  
Compressor 2 discharge temp (Td2)  
°C  
°C  
× 1  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
08  
0A  
0b  
0C  
0d  
Room temp (During control)  
Room temp (Remote controller)  
Indoor suction temp (TA)  
°C  
°C  
11  
× 1  
High-pressure sensor detention  
pressure (Pd)  
12  
13  
MPa  
MPa  
× 100  
× 100  
°C  
× 1  
× 1  
Low-pressure sensor detention  
pressure (Ps)  
Indoor coil temp (TCJ)  
°C  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1b  
1d  
1E  
1F  
Suction temp (TS)  
°C  
°C  
°C  
°C  
°C  
A
× 1  
× 1  
Indoor coil temp (TC2)  
°C  
× 1  
Outdoor heat exchanger temp (TE)  
Temp at liquid side (TL)  
Outside ambient temp (TO)  
Low-pressure saturation temp (TU)  
Compressor 1 current (I1)  
Compressor 2 current (I2)  
PMV1 + 2 opening  
Indoor coil temp (TC1)  
°C  
× 1  
× 1  
× 1  
Indoor discharge temp (Tf) (NOTE 1)  
Indoor PMV opening  
°C  
× 1  
× 1  
pulse  
unit  
HP  
unit  
HP  
× 1/10  
× 10  
× 10  
× 1/10  
(NOTE 3)  
0 to 31  
× 1  
No. of connected indoor units  
Total HP of connected indoor units  
No. of connected indoor units  
Total HP of outdoor units  
A
pulse  
—
× 10  
× 10  
Compressor 1, 2 ON/OFF  
Outdoor fan mode  
—
Outdoor unit HP  
HP  
(NOTE 1) Only a part of indoor unit types is installed with the discharge temperature sensor. This temperature is not  
displayed for other types.  
(NOTE 2) When the units are connected to a group, data of the header indoor unit only can be displayed.  
(NOTE 3) 01 : Compressor 1 only is ON.  
10 : Compressor 2 only is ON.  
11 : Both compressor 1 and 2 are ON.  
(NOTE 4) The item codes are described as the example of the header unit.  
(NOTE 5) The upper digit of an item code represents the outdoor unit number.  
1 : Header unit (A)  
2 : Follower unit (B)  
3 : Follower unit (C)  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. TROUBLESHOOTING  
9-1. Troubleshooting Summary  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Applied models  
Super Heat Recovery Multi type models  
(Indoor unit: MMX-APXXX, Outdoor unit: MMY-MAPXXXFT8)  
2) Required tools / measuring devices  
• Screwdrivers (Philips, Flat), spanner, longnose pliers, nipper, push pin for reset switch, etc.  
• Digital multimeter, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
3) Confirmation before check (The following items are not troubles.)  
No.  
Operation  
Check items  
1
Compressor does not operate.  
• Is it delayed for 3 minutes? (3 minutes after compressor-OFF)  
• Is thermostat OFF?  
• Is the fan operating or timer?  
• Is the system initially communicating?  
Heating operation cannot be performed under the condition that the outside  
temperature is 21°C or higher.  
Cooling operation cannot be performed under the condition that the outside  
temperature is –5°C or lower.  
2
3
Indoor fan does not work.  
• Is cold draft prevention control operating at heating mode?  
Outdoor fan does not rotate, or • Is it in low ambient cooling control?  
fan speed changes.  
• Is a defrost operation being performed?  
4
5
Indoor fan does not stop.  
• Is the fan operating to remove residual heat after heating operation?  
Start/stop operation on remote  
controller is unavailable.  
• Is an auxiliary unit or remote controller being operated?  
6
None  
• Are the wire connections on the indoor units and remote controllers correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
When a fault has occurred, follow the procedure detailed below.  
Check the check display  
on the interface P.C. board  
of the header unit.  
Check position or part in  
which trouble occurred.  
Trouble  
NOTE) A malfunction of the microprocessor may be caused by power supply inconsistencies and external  
noise. If there are any noise sources, move remote controller and signal wires away from the noise  
sources or shield them.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2. Check Method  
If an trouble occurs, the error code can be retrieved from the main remote controller/central remote controller (LCD  
display) or the header unit interface P.C. board (7-segment display). Using this self diagnostic function, the trouble  
can be identified using the table below.  
Check code list  
The following list shows all fault codes.  
• If check code is from indoor remote controller: See “Main remote controller display” in the list.  
• If check code is from outdoor unit: See “Outdoor 7-segment display” in the list.  
• If check code is from AI-NET central control remote controller: See “AI-NET central control display” in the list.  
• If check code is from indoor unit with wireless remote controller: See “Sensor display of receiving unit” in the list.  
IPDU: Intelligent Power Drive Unit  
¡ : Lighting, : Flashing, : Goes off  
l
¤
ALT.: Flashing is alternately when there are two flashing LED.  
SIM: Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED  
Check code  
Wireless remote controller  
Sensor block display  
of receiving unit  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Main  
remote  
controller  
display  
Check code name  
Detecting device  
AI-NET central  
control display  
Operation Timer Ready  
Flash  
Auxiliary code  
Communication error between indoor and remote  
controller (Detected at remote controller side)  
E01  
E02  
E03  
—
—
—
—
—
—
97  
Remote controller  
Remote controller  
Indoor  
l
l
l
l
l
l
¤
¤
¤
l
—
—
Remote controller transmission error  
Communication error between indoor and remote  
controller (Detected at indoor side)  
Communication circuit error between indoor/outdoor  
(Detected at indoor side)  
E04  
E06  
—
—
—
04  
04  
—
Indoor  
I/F  
l
l
l
¤
¤
¤
l
l
l
No. of indoor units in which  
E06 sensor has been normally  
received  
Decrease of No. of indoor units  
l
l
Communication circuit error between indoor/outdoor  
(Detected at outdoor side)  
E07  
—
I/F  
E08  
E09  
E10  
E08 Duplicated indoor addresses  
96  
99  
CF  
Duplicated indoor addresses  
Indoor / I/F  
Remote controller  
Indoor  
l
l
l
¤
¤
¤
—
—
—
—
Duplicated main remote controllers  
Communication error between indoor MCU  
01: Indoor/Outdoor  
communication  
E12  
E12  
42  
Automatic address start error  
I/F  
l
l
¤
l
02: Communication between  
outdoor units  
E15  
E16  
E18  
E19  
E15  
E16  
—
—
42  
89  
Indoor is nothing during automatic addressing  
Capacity over / No. of connected indoor units  
Communication error between indoor units  
Outdoor header units quantity error  
I/F  
I/F  
l
l
l
l
¤
00: Capacity over  
l
¤
01 ~: No. of connected units  
—
97, 99  
96  
Indoor  
I/F  
l
¤
00: Header is nothing  
E19  
l
¤
¤
02: Two or more header units  
01: Outdoor of other line  
connected  
E20  
E20  
42  
Other line connected during automatic address  
I/F  
l
l
02: Indoor of other line  
connected  
E23  
E25  
E23  
E25  
—
—
15  
15  
Sending error in communication between outdoor units  
Duplicated follower outdoor addresses  
I/F  
I/F  
l
l
l
l
¤
¤
No. of outdoor units which  
received signal normally  
E26  
E28  
E26  
15  
d2  
Decrease of No. of connected outdoor units  
Follower outdoor unit error  
I/F  
I/F  
l
l
l
l
¤
¤
E28 Detected outdoor unit number  
01: IPDU1 error  
02: IPDU2 error  
03: IPDU1, 2 error  
E31  
E31 04: Fan IPDU error  
05: IPDU + Fan IPDU error  
06: IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error  
07: All IPDU error  
CF  
IPDU communication error  
I/F  
l
l
¤
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Wireless remote controller  
Sensor block display  
of receiving unit  
Main  
remote  
controller  
display  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name  
Detecting device  
AI-NET central  
control display  
Operation Timer Ready  
Flash  
Auxiliary code  
F01  
F02  
F03  
F04  
F05  
F06  
F07  
F08  
F10  
F12  
—
—
—
—
—
—
0F  
0d  
93  
19  
A1  
18  
18  
1b  
OC  
A2  
ALT Indoor TCJ sensor error  
ALT Indoor TC2 sensor error  
Indoor  
Indoor  
Indoor  
I/F  
l
l
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
ALT Indoor TC1 sensor error  
ALT TD1 sensor error  
ALT TD2 sensor error  
ALT TE1 sensor error  
ALT TL sensor error  
F04  
F05  
F06  
F07  
F08  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
I/F  
I/F  
I/F  
ALT TO sensor error  
I/F  
ALT Indoor TA sensor error  
ALT TS1 sensor error  
Indoor  
I/F  
F12  
01: Comp. 1 side  
02: Comp. 2 side  
F13  
F13  
43  
ALT TH sensor error  
IPDU  
¡
¤ ¤  
F15  
F16  
F23  
F24  
F29  
F31  
F15  
F16  
F23  
F24  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
18  
43  
43  
43  
12  
1C  
ALT Outdoor temp. sensor miscabling (TE, TL)  
ALT Outdoor pressure sensor miscabling (Pd, Ps)  
ALT Ps sensor error  
I/F  
I/F  
¡
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
I/F  
ALT Pd sensor error  
I/F  
SIM Indoor other error  
Indoor  
I/F  
F31  
SIM Indoor EEPROM error  
01: Comp. 1 side  
02: Comp. 2 side  
H01  
H02  
H03  
H01  
H02  
H03  
IF  
1d  
17  
Compressor break down  
IPDU  
l
l
l
l
¤
Magnet switch error  
Overcurrent relay operation  
Compressor trouble (lock)  
MG-SW  
Overcurrent relay  
IPDU  
01: Comp. 1 side  
02: Comp. 2 side  
l
¤
01: Comp. 1 side  
02: Comp. 2 side  
Current detect circuit system error  
IPDU  
l
¤
H04  
H06  
H07  
H04  
H06  
H07  
—
—
—
44  
20  
d7  
Comp 1 case thermo operation  
Low pressure protective operation  
Oil level down detective protection  
I/F  
I/F  
I/F  
l
l
l
l
¤
l
¤
l
¤
01: TK1 sensor error  
02: TK2 sensor error  
03: TK3 sensor error  
04: TK4 sensor error  
H08  
H14  
H16  
H08  
H14  
H16  
d4  
44  
d7  
Oil level detective temp sensor error  
Comp 2 case thermo operation  
I/F  
I/F  
l
l
l
l
¤
—
l
¤
01: TK1 oil circuit system error  
02: TK2 oil circuit system error  
03: TK3 oil circuit system error  
04: TK4 oil circuit system error  
Oil level detective circuit error  
Magnet switch error  
Overcurrent relay operation  
I/F  
MG-SW  
Overcurrent relay  
l
¤
l
L03  
L04  
—
—
—
96  
96  
SIM Indoor center unit duplicated  
SIM Outdoor line address duplicated  
Indoor  
I/F  
¤
¤
¤
L04  
¡
¤
Duplicated indoor units with priority  
SIM  
L05  
L06  
—
—
96  
96  
I/F  
I/F  
l
(Displayed in indoor unit with priority)  
¤
¤
¤
Duplicated indoor units with priority  
SIM  
L06 No. of indoor units with priority  
l
(Displayed in unit other than indoor unit with priority)  
¤
L07  
L08  
L09  
L10  
L17  
L18  
L20  
L28  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
99  
99  
46  
88  
46  
8A  
98  
46  
SIM Group line in individual indoor unit  
SIM Indoor group/Address unset  
SIM Indoor capacity unset  
Indoor  
Indoor, I/F  
Indoor  
l
¤
¤
¤
¤
¤
¤
L08  
—
l
¤
l
¤
L10  
L17  
L18  
L20  
L28  
SIM Outdoor capacity unset  
I/F  
¡
¤
SIM Inconsistency error of outdoor units  
SIM FS unit error  
I/F  
¡
¤
FS unit  
AI-NET, Indoor  
I/F  
¤ ¤ ¤  
SIM Duplicated central control addresses  
SIM Over No. of connected outdoor units  
¡
¤
¤
¤
¤
¡
01: IPDU1 error  
02: IPDU2 error  
03: IPDU3 error  
L29  
L29 04: Fan IPDU error  
05: IPDU1 + Fan IPDU error  
06: IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error  
07: All IPDU error  
CF  
SIM No. of IPDU error  
I/F  
¡
¤
¤
¤
¤
L30  
—
L30 Detected indoor address  
b6  
—
SIM Indoor outside interlock  
Extended I/C error  
Indoor  
I/F  
¡
L31  
—
—
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Wireless remote controller  
Sensor block display  
of receiving unit  
Main  
remote  
controller  
display  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name  
Detecting device  
AI-NET central  
control display  
Operation Timer Ready  
Flash  
Auxiliary code  
P01  
P03  
—
—
11  
ALT Indoor fan motor error  
Indoor  
I/F  
l
¤ ¤  
P03  
P04  
—
1E  
ALT Discharge temp. TD1 error  
l
¤
¤
01: Comp. 1 side  
02: Comp. 2 side  
P04  
P05  
P07  
21  
AF  
IC  
ALT High-pressure SW system operation  
ALT Phase-missing detection /Phase error  
ALT Heat sink overheat error  
IPDU  
I/F  
l
¤
¤
¤
¤
01: Phase-missing detection  
02: Phase error  
P05  
P07  
l
¤
01: Comp. 1 side  
02: Comp. 2 side  
IPDU, I/F  
l
¤
P10  
P12  
P13  
P10 Detected indoor address  
Ob  
11  
ALT Indoor overflow error  
Indoor  
Indoor  
I/F  
l
l
l
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
¤ ¤  
—
—
—
ALT Indoor fan motor error  
P13  
47  
ALT Outdoor liquid back detection error  
01: TS condition  
02: TD condition  
P15  
P15  
AE  
ALT Gas leak detection  
I/F  
l
¤
¤
¤
¤
¤
P17  
P19  
P20  
P17  
—
bb  
O8  
22  
ALT Discharge temp. TD2 error  
ALT 4-way valve inverse error  
I/F  
I/F  
I/F  
l
¤
P19 Detected outdoor unit number  
l
¤
P20  
—
ALT High-pressure protective operation  
l
¤
0
1
3
C
: IGBT short  
: Fan motor position  
detective circuit error  
: Fan motor trouble  
P22  
P22  
1A  
ALT Outdoor fan IPDU error  
IPDU  
l
¤
¤
: TH sensor temp. error  
(Heat sink overheat)  
D
E
: TH sensor error  
: Vdc output error  
01: Comp. 1 side  
02: Comp. 2 side  
P26  
P29  
P26  
P29  
14  
16  
ALT G-TR short protection error  
IPDU  
IPDU  
l
¤
¤
¤
¤
¤
¤
01: Comp. 1 side  
02: Comp. 2 side  
ALT Comp position detective circuit system error  
l
P31  
—
P31  
—
—
—
—
—
47  
b7  
97  
99  
ALT Other indoor unit error (Group terminal unit error)  
ALT Error in indoor group  
Indoor  
AI-NET  
AI-NET  
AI-NET  
l
By alarm device  
—
—
—
—
AI-NET communication system error  
Duplicated network adapters  
—
—
Error detected by TCC-LINK central control device  
Check code  
Wireless remote controller  
Sensor block display  
Central  
control  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
of receiving unit  
Check code name  
Detecting device  
AI-NET central  
control display  
device  
Operation Timer Ready  
indication  
Flash  
Auxiliary code  
Sending error in TCC-LINK central control  
device  
C05  
C06  
C12  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
TCC-LINK  
TCC-LINK  
Receiving error in TCC-LINK central control  
device  
Batch alarm of general-purpose equipment General-purpose equipment  
control interface  
I/F  
Differs according to error contents of unit with occurrence of alarm  
(L20 is displayed.)  
Group control branching unit error  
Duplicated central control addresses  
P30  
TCC-LINK  
—
—
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
New check code  
1. Difference between the TCC LINK and AI-NET check code  
The displaying method of the check code changes in this model and onwards.  
AI-NET check code  
TCC Link  
Used characters  
Hexadecimal notation, 2 digits  
Alphabet + Decimal notation, 2 digits  
|
|
Characteristics of code Few classification of communication/  
classification  
Many classification of communication/incorrect setup system  
|
|
incorrect setup system  
|
Block display  
Indoor P.C. board, Outdoor P.C.  
board, Cycle, Communication  
Communication/Incorrect setup (4 ways), Indoor protection,  
Outdoor protection, Sensor, Compressor protection, etc.  
|
|
|
|
Display  
Classification  
→
Display in wired remote controller  
A
C
E
F
H
J
Unused  
• [ ] is displayed.  
Central control system error  
Communication system error  
Each sensor error (Failure)  
Compressor protective system error  
Unused  
• [UNIT No.] + Check code + Operation lamp (Green) flash  
Display on sensor part in wireless remote controller  
• Block display of combination of [ ] [ ] [  
]
Display on 7-segment in outdoor unit  
• Unit No. and check code are displayed.  
L
Setup error, Other errors  
Protective device operation  
• In a case of error with auxiliary code, the check code and the  
auxiliary code are displayed alternately.  
P
2. Special mention  
1) If this model is connected to AI-NET by network adaptor, the different check codes are displayed on the  
main remote controller and AI-NET central control remote controller.  
Example) Indoor TA sensor error  
AI-NETWORK BUS  
Network adaptor  
Indoorunit  
OC  
F10  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
Wired remote controller  
2) The check code of the remote controller is displayed only while the air conditioner is operating (remote  
controller start button ON).  
When the air conditioner has stopped and the error has been cleared, the check code display on the  
remote controller also disappears.  
However, if the error continues after the unit has stopped, the check code is immediately displayed when  
the unit is restarted.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3. Troubleshooting by Check Display on Remote Controller  
In case of wired remote controller (RBC-AMT31E)  
1. Confirmation and check  
CODE No.  
When a trouble occurs in the air conditioner, the  
check code and the indoor unit No. are displayed  
UNIT No.  
on the of the remote controller.  
R.C.  
No.  
The check code is displayed while the air condi-  
tioner operates.  
If the display has disappeared, operate the air  
conditioner and check the error based upon the  
following “Confirmation of error history”.  
Check code  
Indoor unit No. in which  
an error occurred  
2. Confirmation of error history  
If a trouble occurs in the air conditioner, the error  
history can be found with the following procedure.  
(Up to 4 error histories are stored in the  
memory.)  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
2
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
This history can be confirmed from either operat-  
ing status or stop status.  
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
1
3
Procedure  
Description  
SET  
TEST  
When pushing  
and  
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more, the below display appears.  
If [Service Check] is displayed, the mode enters the error history mode.  
• [01: Error history order] is displayed in code number window.  
• [Check Code] is displayed in code number window.  
CODE No.  
1
UNIT No.  
• [Indoor unit address with error] is displayed in UNIT No.  
R.C.  
No.  
Each successive push of the temp. set  
displayed in order.  
/
buttons, the error histories stored in the memory are  
The numbers in item code indicates item code [01] (most recent) to [04] (Oldest).  
2
3
CAUTION  
If [CL] button is pushed all of the error histories of the indoor unit will be deleted.  
TEST  
After confirmation, push  
button to return to the usual display.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of central remote controller (TCB-SC642TLE)  
ZONE  
ALL  
ZONE  
GROUP  
CODE  
No.  
1234  
TEST  
UNIT No.  
SET DATA  
SETTING  
R.C.  
No.  
GROUP  
SELECT  
ZONE  
CL SET  
1. Confirmation and check  
When a trouble occurred on the air conditioner, the check code and the indoor unit No. are displayed on the  
display section of the remote controller.  
The check code is displayed while the air conditioner operates.  
If the display disappeared, operate the air conditioner and check the error based upon the following “Confir-  
mation of error history”.  
Unit No display  
UNIT No.  
Alarm display  
Alternate flashing display  
R.C  
No.  
2. Confirmation of error history  
When a trouble occurred on the air conditioner, the error history can be confirmed with the following proce-  
dure. (Up to 4 error histories are stored in memory.)  
This history can be confirmed from either operating or stop.  
1) Push  
and  
buttons in succession for 4 seconds or more.  
goes on and Item code 01 goes on.  
SET  
2) SERVICE CHECK  
3) When selecting (flash) the group number if there is the alarm history, the UNIT number and the latest  
alarm history are displayed alternately.  
* In this time, the temperature cannot be set up.  
4) To confirm the alarm history other than the latest one, push temp. set  
code (01 to 04).  
/
to select Item  
GROUP  
ZONE  
5) To confirm the alarm in the other group, push  
and  
to select the group number  
Do not push CL button because all the alarm histories of the currently selected group are deleted.  
6) To finish the service check, push  
button.  
Unit No display  
UNIT No.  
Alarm display  
Alternate flashing display  
R.C  
No.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of AI-NET central remote controller  
1. Operation for CHECK display  
When pushing the CHECK switch, the indoor unit No. (Network address No.) including the check data is  
displayed in the UNIT No. display section, and the check code is displayed in the set up temp. display section.  
CHECK switch  
ON  
MONITOR ZONE  
SET ALL  
ON  
CENTER AUX.TYPE  
STANDBY  
FILTER  
Push for 0.5 seconds to display CHECK code.  
UNIT  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
OFF LOCKED TIMER No.  
MODE FAN TEMP. CHECK  
FAN ONLY AUTO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Push for 3 seconds to reset indoor microprocessor.  
(While indoor microprocessor is locked by ALL STOP alarm)  
1
2
˚C  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64  
COOL HIGH  
DRY MED.  
HEAT LOW  
AUTO FIX  
LOUVER  
MANUAL  
Push for 10 seconds to clear check data.  
MONITOR/SET ALL/ZONE  
ZONE SET/ENTER SELECT  
ZONE  
UNIT  
ON  
CENTER/LOCKED  
FILTER RESET CHECK  
LOUVER  
MODE TEMP.  
OFF  
TIMER ON FAN  
RESET switch  
Push the switch in the hole with pin.  
The remote controller resets initialized.  
(All data is cleared.)  
2. Reading of CHECK monitor display  
7 segment display  
Hexadecimal  
notation  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
Decimal notation  
Display on CHECK monitor  
Unit line No. (Network address No.)  
MONITOR ZONE  
SET ALL  
ON  
CENTER AUX.TYPE  
STANDBY  
FILTER  
UNIT  
OFF LOCKED TIMER No.  
MODE FAN TEMP. CHECK  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64  
FAN ONLY AUTO  
COOL HIGH  
DRY MED.  
HEAT LOW  
AUTO FIX  
1
2
˚C  
LOUVER  
MANUAL  
(Example)  
There is no check data.  
Check code detected at first  
Check code detected at last  
UNIT  
TEMP. CHECK  
CHECK data  
(Example)  
In No.1 unit, first the interconnection wire (bus communication line) of indoor/outdoor has failed.  
Next, the room temp. sensor is defective.  
For No.16 unit, the high pressure switch at the inverter unit side operates.  
UNIT  
UNIT  
UNIT  
TEMP. CHECK  
1
TEMP. CHECK  
2
TEMP. CHECK  
1
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4. Check Code and Check Position Displayed on the Remote Controller and Outdoor Unit  
(7-Segment Display of Interface)  
Check code  
Detected  
position  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
E01  
—
—
—
Remote Communication error between  
controller indoor and remote controller  
(Detected at remote controller side)  
Corresponding Communication interrupted  
unit only stops. between indoor P.C. board  
and remote controller.  
• Check remote controller inter-unit cable (A/B).  
• Check disconnection, connector contact error.  
• Check indoor power supply.  
• Check indoor P.C. board error.  
• Check remote controller address setup.  
(When two remote controllers operate)  
• Check remote controller P.C. board.  
E02  
E03  
—
—
—
—
—
97  
Remote Remote controller sending error  
controller  
Corresponding Signal could not be sent from • Check the communication wire of remote controller: Exchange remote  
unit only stops. remote controller to indoor  
unit.  
controller.  
Indoor unit Communication error between  
indoor and remote controller  
Corresponding No communication from  
unit only stops. remote controller (including  
wireless) and communication  
adapter.  
• Check remote controller and communication adapter wiring.  
(Detected at indoor side)  
E04  
E06  
—
—
4
4
Indoor unit Indoor/outdoor communication  
circuit error  
Corresponding Indoor unit does not receive • Check power-ON order of indoor/outdoor.  
unit only stops. communication from outdoor  
unit.  
• Check indoor address setup.  
• Check inter-unit cabling between indoor and outdoor.  
• Check outdoor end terminal resistance setup (SW30-2).  
(Detected at indoor side)  
E06  
No. of indoor  
units which  
received signal  
normally  
I/F  
Decreased number of indoor units  
All stop  
When signal is not sent for a • Check the power supply of indoor unit. (Power-ON)  
certain period from the indoor  
unit which has been used to  
send signals, [E06] is  
• Check connection of communication line between indoor and outdoor.  
• Check connector connection for communication in indoor P.C. board.  
• Check connector connection for communication in outdoor P.C. board.  
• Check indoor P.C. board failure.  
normally displayed.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) failure.  
—
E07  
E08  
—
—
96  
I/F  
Indoor/outdoor communication  
circuit error  
(Detected at outdoor side)  
All stop  
All stop  
Transmission from outdoor to • Check outdoor terminator resistor setup (SW30-2).  
indoor cannot continue for 30  
seconds.  
• Check the communication connection between indoor and outdoor.  
E08  
Duplicated  
indoor  
addresses  
Indoor Duplicated indoor addresses  
I/F  
Multiple indoor unit address  
setup are duplicated.  
• Check indoor address.  
• Check the change of remote controller connection (Group / individual)  
after setup of indoor address.  
E09  
E10  
—
—
—
99  
Remote Duplicated master remote  
controller controllers  
Corresponding In 2-remote controller control • Check remote controller setup.  
unit only stops. (including wireless), both are  
setup as master  
• Check remote controller P.C. board.  
(Header indoor unit stops and  
other indoor unit is operating.)  
—
CF  
Indoor unit Communication error between  
indoor P.C. board assembly  
Corresponding There is any trouble in power • Indoor P.C. board failure  
unit only stops. line.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected  
position  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
remote  
controller Check code  
Sub-code  
E12  
E12  
01: Indoor/outdoor  
communication  
02: Between outdoors  
communication  
42  
I/F  
Automatic address start  
error  
All stop  
• When indoor automatic address started, other  
refrigerant circuit system was setting automatic  
address.  
• When outdoor automatic address started, indoor  
automatic address was executed.  
• Setup the address again after disconnecting communication  
connection with other refrigerant circuit system.  
E15  
E15  
—
42  
I/F  
No corresponding indoor  
unit during automatic  
address  
All stop  
All stop  
Indoor unit is not found when indoor automatic address • Check the communication line connection between indoor and  
start was set up.  
outdoor.  
• Check the electric power line error in indoor.  
• Check the noise of surrounding devices.  
• Power failure  
• Check indoor P.C. board error.  
E16  
E16  
00: Capacity over  
01 to: No. of connected  
units  
89  
I/F  
No. of connected indoor  
units / Capacity over  
• Total capacity of indoor units exceeded 135% of total • Check the connection capacity of indoor unit.  
outdoor capacity.  
• No. of connected indoor units are more than 48 units.  
• Check the HP capacity of indoor unit.  
• Check the indoor/outdoor capacity setup  
• Check the No. of connected indoor units.  
• Check the outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
[Note]  
If this code appears after backup setup of outdoor unit  
trouble, set up “No. capacity-over detection”.  
Setup method of “No. capacity-over detection”  
Turn on SW09/Bit 2 on I/F P.C. board of outdoor header  
unit.  
E18  
E19  
—
—
97, 99  
96  
Indoor Communication error  
Corresponding Regular communication between indoor header and  
• Check cable of the remote controller.  
• Check power cabling of indoor.  
• Check P.C. board of indoor.  
unit  
between indoor header unit only stops. follower units  
and follower units  
E19  
00: No header unit  
02: Two or more header  
units  
I/F  
Outdoor unit quantity  
error  
All stop  
• There are multiple outdoor units in 1 line.  
• There is none of outdoor unit in 1 line.  
The outdoor unit connected with communication cable between  
indoor and outdoor (U1.U2) is the outdoor unit.  
• Check connection of communication line between indoor and  
outdoor.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board(I/F) error.  
E20  
E23  
E20  
E23  
01: Connection of  
outdoor of other line  
02: Connection of indoor  
of other line  
42  
15  
I/F  
I/F  
Other line unit  
connected during  
automatic address  
All stop  
All stop  
Unit of other line was connected when indoor automatic Separate the cable between lines according to automatic  
address started. address setup method in “Address setup”.  
—
Communication sending  
error between outdoor  
units  
Transmission of other outdoor unit was unavailable for In this model, only one outdoor unit is provided to one refrigerant  
30 seconds or more.  
line. Be sure to check there is no communication connection  
with outdoor unit in the other refrigerant line.  
E25  
E26  
E25  
E26  
—
15  
15  
I/F  
I/F  
Duplicated outdoor  
follower address setup  
All stop  
All stop  
Outdoor addresses manually set up are duplicated.  
Note)  
Do not set up the outdoor address manually.  
No. of normally received  
outdoor units  
Decreased number of  
connected outdoor units  
The signal was not returned for constant from the  
outdoor unit which was receiving signal.  
In this model, only one outdoor unit is provided to one refrigerant  
line. Be sure to check there is no communication connection  
with outdoor unit in the other refrigerant line.  
E28  
E28  
No. of detected outdoor  
units  
d2  
I/F  
Outdoor follower unit  
error  
All stop  
Outdoor header unit received error code from outdoor • Check the check code of outdoor follower unit.  
follower unit.  
Convenient functions  
When pushing SW04 for 1 second or more under condition that [E28] is displayed on 7-segment display of  
outdoor header unit, the fan of outdoor unit which stopped abnormally starts rotating.  
If pushing SW04 and SW05 simultaneously, the fan of normal outdoor unit operates.  
When pushing SW05 singly, the operation of fan is cleared.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Sub-code  
Detected Check code  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
position  
name  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
E31  
E31  
01: IPDU1 error  
02: IPDU2 error  
03: IPDU1, 2 errors  
04: Fan IPDU error  
CF  
I/F  
IPDU  
communication  
error  
All stop  
Communication of each IPDU • Check connection of communication connector and  
(P.C. board) in inverter box  
interrupted.  
disconnection between IPDU and I/F P.C. board.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F, IPDU, Fan IPDU) error.  
• Check external noise.  
• Check power supply P.C. board for fan error.  
05: IPDU1 + Fan IPDU error  
06: IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error  
07: All IPDU error or communication error  
between IPDU and I/F P.C. board or  
outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
F01  
F02  
F03  
F04  
F05  
F06  
F07  
F08  
F10  
F12  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
OF  
Od  
93  
Indoor unit Indoor TCJ  
sensor error  
Corresponding • Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection/cabling of TCJ sensor connector.  
unit only stops infinite or zero. (Open/Short)  
• Check characteristics of TCJ sensor resistance value.  
• Check indoor P.C. board error.  
Indoor unit Indoor TC2  
sensor error  
Corresponding • Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection/cabling of TC2 sensor connector.  
unit only stops. infinite or zero (Open/Short).  
• Check characteristics of TC2 sensor resistance value.  
• Check indoor P.C. board error.  
—
Indoor unit Indoor TC1  
sensor error  
Corresponding • Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection/cabling of TC1 sensor connector.  
unit only stops. infinite or zero (Open/Short).  
• Check characteristics of TC1 sensor resistance value.  
• Check indoor P.C. board error.  
F04  
F05  
F06  
F07  
F08  
—
19  
I/F  
I/F  
I/F  
I/F  
I/F  
TD1 sensor  
error  
All stop  
All stop  
All stop  
All stop  
All stop  
• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TD1 sensor connector.  
infinite or zero (Open/Short)  
• Check characteristics of TD1 sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
A1  
18  
TD2 sensor  
error  
• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TD2 sensor connector.  
infinite or zero (Open/Short)  
• Check characteristics of TD2 sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
TE1 sensor  
error  
• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TE1 sensor connector.  
infinite or zero (Open/Short).  
• Check characteristics of TE1 sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
18  
TL sensor error  
• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TL sensor connector.  
infinite or zero (Open/Short).  
• Check characteristics of TL sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
1b  
TO sensor  
error  
• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TO sensor connector.  
infinite or zero (Open/Short).  
• Check characteristics of TO sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
OC  
A2  
Indoor Indoor TA  
sensor error  
Corresponding • Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection/cabling of TA sensor connector.  
unit only stops. infinite or zero (Open/Short).  
• Check characteristics of TA sensor resistance value.  
• Check indoor P.C. board error.  
F12  
01: TS1  
02: TS2  
I/F  
TS1, TS2  
sensor error  
All stop  
• Resistance value of sensor is • Check connection of TS1 or TS2 sensor connector.  
infinite or zero (Open/Short).  
• Check characteristics of TS1, TS2 sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected  
position  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
F13  
F15  
F13  
01: Compressor 1 side  
02: Compressor 2 side  
43  
18  
IPDU  
I/F  
TH sensor error  
All stop  
All stop  
• Resistance value of sensor is • IGBT built-in temp sensor error  
infinite or zero (Open/Short).  
→ Exchange IPDU P.C. board.  
F15  
—
Outdoor temp sensor  
miscabling (TE1, TL)  
During operation of  
• Check installation of TE1 sensor and TL sensor.  
• Check characteristics of TE1 and TL sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
compressor in HEAT mode, the  
TE1 detection temp was higher  
than that of TL by the specified  
value continued for 3 minutes  
or more.  
F16  
F23  
F16  
F23  
—
—
43  
43  
I/F  
I/F  
Outdoor pressure  
sensor miscabling  
(Pd, Ps)  
All stop  
All stop  
High-pressure Pd sensor and • Check connection of high-pressure Pd sensor connector.  
low-pressure Ps sensor were  
exchanged, or output voltages  
of both sensors are zero.  
• Check connection of low-pressure Ps sensor connector.  
• Check pressure sensors Pd and Ps error.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
• Check compression error of compressor.  
Ps sensor error  
Output voltage of Ps sensor  
was zero.  
• Misconnection of Ps sensor and Pd sensor connectors  
• Check connection of Ps sensor connector.  
• Check Ps sensor error.  
• Check compression error of compressor.  
• Check 4-way valve error.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
• Check SV4 circuit error.  
F24  
F24  
—
43  
I/F  
Pd sensor error  
All stop  
Output voltage of Pd sensor • Check connection of Pd sensor connector.  
was zero. (Sensor Open)  
• Check Pd sensor error.  
Pd > 4.15MPa during stop of  
compressor  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
F29  
F31  
—
—
—
12  
Indoor Indoor other error  
Corresponding Indoor P.C. board did not  
unit only stops. operate normally.  
• Check indoor P.C. board error (EEPROM error).  
F31  
1C  
I/F  
Outdoor EEPROM error All stop (*1) Outdoor P.C. board (I/F) did not • Check power voltage.  
operate normally.  
• Check power noise.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
H01  
H02  
H01  
H02  
01: Compressor 1 side  
02: Compressor 2 side  
1F  
1d  
IPDU  
Compressor breakdown  
All stop  
All stop  
Inverter current detection circuit • Check power voltage. (AC220–240V ± 10%).  
detected over-current and  
stopped.  
• Check compressor error.  
• Check cause of abnormal overload operation.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (IPDU) error.  
01: Compressor 1 side  
02: Compressor 2 side  
IPDU  
Compressor error (lock)  
MG-SW error  
OCR operation  
Over-current was detected  
several seconds after header  
compressor had started.  
• Check compressor error.  
• Check power voltage. (AC380–10%, 415V +10%).  
• Check cable of compressor and phase-missing.  
• Check connector/terminal connection on IPDU P.C. board.  
• Check conduction of case heater.  
(Check activation error due to liquid stagnation in compressor.)  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (IPDU) error.  
• Check outdoor MG-SW or OCR.  
(*1) All stop only in case of the header unit The follower unit continues operation.  
MG-SW : Magnet Switch, OCR : Over-current Relay  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected  
position  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
H03  
H04  
H03  
01: Compressor 1 side  
02: Compressor 2 side  
17  
IPDU  
I/F  
Current detection  
circuit system error  
All stop While header compressor  
stopped, current flowed more  
than the specified amount.  
• Check cabling of current detection circuit system.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (IPDU) error.  
H04  
—
44  
Compressor 1 case All stop Compressor 1 case thermostat • Check compressor 1 case thermo circuit. (Connector, cable, P.C. board)  
thermo operation  
performed protective operation.  
• Check full opening of service valve. (Gas and liquid side)  
• Check outdoor PMV clogging. (PMV1, 2, 3)  
• Check SV41 circuit leakage.  
• Check miscabling/misinstallation of SV41 and SV42.  
• Check valve open status of indoor PMV.  
• Check 4-way valve error.  
• Check refrigerant shortage.  
• Check SV5 leak.  
• Check SV11 circuit. (Wiring, OFF at one side only)  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve.  
(Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.)  
Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas),  
wiring between FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors.  
Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.  
H06  
H06  
—
20  
I/F  
Low-pressure  
protective operation  
All stop Low-pressure Ps detected  
operation lower than 0.02MPa.  
• Check full opening of service valve.  
(Discharge gas, suction gas and liquid side)  
• Check outdoor PMV clogging. (PMV1, 2)  
• Check SV2 circuit and SV4 circuit error.  
• Check low-pressure Ps sensor error.  
• Check indoor air filter clogging.  
• Check valve open of indoor PMV.  
• Check refrigerant pipe clogging.  
• Check outdoor fan operation.  
(All heating, mainly heating, part cooling operation)  
• Check refrigerant shortage.  
• Check clogging of circuit at auxiliary heat exchanger side.  
(PMV3, SV12, check valve)  
• Check 4-way valve error. (Reversal error)  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
Check miswiring of discharge gas/suction gas pipe to FS unit.  
Check wiring between FS unit and indoor unit.  
Check miswiring of SVD/SVS valves, misinstallation of coil.  
Check opened status of SVS valve.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected  
position  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name Status Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
H07  
H07  
—
d7  
I/F  
Protection for oil  
level drop detection  
All stop The operating compressor Check all the outdoor units in the corresponding line.  
detected oil shortage  
• Check full opening of service valve of balance pipe.  
• Check connection and installation of TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 sensors.  
• Check characteristics of TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 resistance values.  
• Check gas leak and oil leak in the same line.  
continuously for 2 hours.  
• Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor.  
• Check error of SV3A, SV3B, SV3C, SV3D, and SV3E valves.  
• Check clogging of oil separator oil return circuit.  
• Check clogging of oil-equation circuit.  
<Check clogging of oil equation pipe between compressors.>  
• Check TS1, TS2 sensors (Miswiring and misinstallation of TS1 and TS2)  
• Check leakage of SV6 circuit.  
• Check FS unit.  
Leakage of check valve of bypass between liquid pipe and discharge gas pipe  
Mispiping of discharge/suction gas connection  
Miswiring of SVD/SVS valve/Misinstallation of coil  
• Check whether there is no setup missing of indoor unit in all cooling operation mode  
01: TK1 sensor error  
02: TK2 sensor error  
03: TK3 sensor error  
04: TK4 sensor error  
H08  
H08  
d4  
I/F  
Oil level detective  
temp sensor error  
All stop • Resistance value of  
sensor is infinite or zero.  
(Open/Short)  
• Check connection of TK1 sensor connector.  
• Check characteristics of TK1 sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
All stop • Resistance value of  
sensor is infinite or zero.  
(Open/Short)  
• Check connection of TK2 sensor connector.  
• Check characteristics of TK2 sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
All stop • Resistance value of  
sensor is infinite or zero.  
(Open/Short)  
• Check connection of TK3 sensor connector.  
• Check characteristics of TK3 sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
All stop • Resistance value of  
sensor is infinite or zero.  
(Open/Short)  
• Check connection of TK4 sensor connector.  
• Check characteristics of TK4 sensor resistance value.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
H14  
H14  
—
44  
I/F  
Compressor 2  
case thermo  
operation  
All stop Compressor 2 case  
thermostat operated.  
• Check compressor 2 case thermo circuit. (Connector, cable, P.C. board)  
• Check full opening of service valve. (Gas and liquid side)  
• Check outdoor PMV clogging. (PMV1, 2)  
• Check SV42 valve leak.  
• Check miscabling/misinstallation of SV41 and SV42.  
• Check valve opening of indoor PMV.  
• Check 4-way valve error.  
• Check refrigerant shortage.  
• Check SV11 circuit. (Wiring, OFF at one side only)  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.)  
Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between  
FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors.  
Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected  
position  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
H16  
H16  
01:TK1 oil circuit system error  
02:TK2 oil circuit system error  
03:TK3 oil circuit system error  
04:TK4 oil circuit system error  
d7  
I/F  
Oil level detective circuit system error  
MG-SW error  
OCR operation  
All stop  
Temperature change of TK1 • Check TK1 sensor coming-off.  
could not be detected after  
compressor 1 started  
operation.  
• Check characteristics of TK1 sensor resistance value.  
• Check TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 misconnection.  
• Check operation error of SV3E valve.  
• Check capillary clogging of oil-equation circuit and  
operation error of stop valve.  
• Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor.  
• Check MG-SW or OCR.  
Temperature change of TK2 • Check TK2 sensor coming-off.  
could not be detected after  
compressor 2 started  
operation.  
• Check characteristics of TK2 sensor resistance value.  
• Check TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 misconnection.  
• Check SV3E valve operation.  
• Check capillary clogging of oil equalization circuit and  
check stop valve operation.  
• Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell.  
• Check MG-SW or OCR.  
Temperature change of TK3 • Check TK3 sensor coming-off.  
could not be detected after  
compressor started  
operation.  
• Check characteristics of TK3 sensor resistance value.  
• Check TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 misconnection.  
• Check SV3E valve operation.  
• Check capillary clogging of oil-equalization circuit and  
check valve operation.  
• Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell.  
• Check MG-SW or OCR.  
Temperature change of TK4 • Check TK4 sensor coming-off.  
could not be detected after  
compressor started  
operation, or the difference  
from other TK sensor  
changed for a constant time  
only within the specified  
range.  
• Check characteristics of TK4 sensor resistance value.  
• Check TK1, TK2, TK3, and TK4 misconnection.  
• Check SV3E valve operation.  
• Check capillary clogging of oil-equalization circuit and  
check valve operation.  
• Check refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell.  
• Check MG-SW or OCR.  
L03  
L04  
—
—
—
96  
96  
Indoor Duplicated indoor center units  
Corresponding There are multiple header  
unit only stops. units in a group.  
• Check indoor address.  
• Check the change of remote controller connection  
(Group/individual) after indoor address setup.  
L04  
I/F  
I/F  
Duplicated outdoor line address  
All stop  
All stop  
Line address setup is  
duplicated against the  
outdoor unit in different  
refrigerant pipe system.  
• Check line address.  
L05  
—
—
96  
Duplicated indoor units with priority  
(Displayed on indoor unit with priority)  
Indoor units with priority were • Check display of indoor unit with priority.  
duplicated.  
MG-SW : Magnet Switch, OCR : Over-current Relay  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Sub-code  
Detected  
position  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
Check code name  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
L06  
L06  
No. of indoor units with priority  
96  
I/F  
Duplicated indoor units with  
priority  
All stop  
Indoor units with priority were  
duplicated.  
• Check display of indoor unit with priority and outdoor unit.  
(Displayed on the unit other  
than indoor unit with priority)  
L07  
L08  
—
—
—
99  
99  
Indoor Group line in individual  
indoor unit.  
Corresponding At least one indoor unit connected • Check indoor address.  
unit only stops. to a group existed in the individual  
indoor units.  
L08  
Indoor Indoor group / address  
unset  
Corresponding Address was not yet set up.  
unit only stops.  
• Check indoor address.  
Note)  
After installation, this code is displayed when the power is first  
turned on.  
L09  
L10  
—
—
—
46  
88  
Indoor Indoor capacity unset  
Corresponding Indoor unit capacity was unset.  
unit only stops.  
Set up indoor capacity. (DN=11)  
L10  
I/F  
Outdoor capacity unset  
All stop  
On the I/F P.C. board for service,  
jumper line was not cut according to  
the model.  
Check model setup on outdoor I/F P.C. board A’ssy for service.  
L17  
L18  
L17  
L18  
—
I/F  
I/F  
Inconsistent models of  
outdoor units  
1 and 2 series outdoor units have  
been mixed.  
• Check outdoor units.  
Corresponding indoor address  
8A  
FS unit system error  
Corresponding An indoor unit which is not  
unit only stops. connected with a FS unit is  
operating without setup of cooling  
only mode.  
• Check setup of remote controller (DN=[OFF]).  
• Check FS unit.  
Check pipe connection to FS unit.  
(Mispiping between discharge gas and suction gas)  
Check miswiring/misinstallation of SVS/SVD valves.  
L20  
L28  
—
—
—
98  
46  
AI-NET, Duplicated central control  
Indoor addresses  
All stop  
All stop  
Duplicated central control  
addresses  
• Check central control address.  
• Check network adaptor P.C. board. (In case of AI-NET)  
L28  
I/F  
Quantity over of connected  
outdoor units  
There were more than four outdoor • Check No. of connected outdoor units.  
units.  
(Max. 4 units per 1 system)  
• Check communication line between outdoor units.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
L29  
L29  
01: IPDU1 error  
02: IPDU2 error  
CF  
I/F  
IPDU quantity error  
All stop  
No. of IPDU units detected when  
power was turned on were less.  
• Check model setup for outdoor I/F service P.C. board.  
• Check connection of UART communication connector.  
03: IPDU1, 2 errors  
04: Fan IPDU error  
05: IPDU1 + Fan IPDU error  
06: IPDU2 + Fan IPDU error  
• Check IPDU, fan IPDU, and I/F P.C. board error.  
Note)  
UART: Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter  
07: All IPDU error or communication error  
between IPDU and I/F P.C. board, or  
outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
L30  
—
L30  
L31  
Detected indoor address  
b6  
—
Indoor Interlock in indoor unit from Corresponding • Outside error input terminal  
n Outside device is connected to connector (CN80):  
1) Check outside device error.  
2) Check indoor P.C. board error.  
outside  
unit only stops.  
Detected signal to (CN80) for  
more than 1 minute  
n Outside device is not connected to connector (CN80):  
1) Check indoor P.C. board error.  
—
I/F  
Extended IC (Integrated  
Circuit) error  
Operation  
continues.  
P.C. board (I/F) parts error  
Check indoor (I/F) P.C. board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected Check code  
position name  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
P01  
P03  
—
—
11  
Indoor Indoor fan  
motor error  
Corresponding  
unit only stops.  
• Check the lock of fan motor (AC fan).  
• Check cabling.  
P03  
—
1E  
I/F  
Discharge  
temp TD1  
error  
All stop  
Discharge temp (TD1)  
exceeded 115°C.  
• Check full opening of outdoor service valves (Gas side, Liquid side).  
• Check clogging of outdoor PMV. (PMV1,2)  
• Check characteristics of TD1 sensor resistance value.  
• Check refrigerant shortage.  
• Check 4-way valve error.  
• Check leakage of SV41 circuit.  
• Check SV4 circuit. (Miswiring and misinstallation of SV41 and SV42)  
• Check leakage of SV5 circuit.  
• Check leakage of SV6 circuit. (Capillary clogging, valve operation error)  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve.  
(Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.)  
Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring  
between FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors.  
Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.  
P04  
P04  
01: Compressor 1 side  
02: Compressor 2 side  
21  
I/F  
Actuation of  
high-pressure  
SW  
All stop  
High-pressure SW actuated. • Check Pd pressure sensor error.  
• Check full opening of outdoor service valves (Gas side, Liquid side).  
• Check outdoor fan error.  
• Check outdoor fan motor error.  
• Check clogging of outdoor PMV. (PMV1,2)  
• Check clogging of indoor/outdoor heat exchangers.  
• Check short-circuiting of outdoor suction/discharge air.  
• Check clogging of SV2 circuit.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
• Check indoor fan system error. (Cause of air volume decrease)  
• Check opening of indoor PMV.  
• Check miscabling of communication line between indoor and outdoor.  
• Check operation error of check valve of discharge pipe.  
• Check SV4 valve circuit.  
• Check SV5 valve circuit.  
• Check refrigerant overcharge.  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check circuit clogging at auxiliary heat exchanger side. (PMV3, SV12, check valve)  
• Check FS unit.  
Check clogging of SVD valve and operation error.  
Check wiring inside of FS unit. (SVD/SVS coil miswiring, etc.)  
Check wiring between FS unit and indoor unit.  
(Miswiring, Disconnection, Wiring missing)  
P05  
P05  
01: Power supply  
missing phase  
AF  
I/F  
Phase missing  
or reversed  
phase order  
All stop  
• Missing phase was detected • Check outdoor power line.  
when the power turned on.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
02: Power supply  
phase order  
• Reversed phase was  
detected when the power  
turned on.  
(reversed phase)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected Check code  
position name  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
remote  
controller Check code  
Sub-code  
P07  
P10  
P12  
P07  
P10  
—
01: Compressor  
1 side  
02: Compressor  
2 side  
1C  
Ob  
11  
IPDU Heat sink  
All stop  
IGBT built-in temp sensor (TH) • Check power voltage.  
I/F  
overheat error  
was overheated.  
• Check outdoor fan system error.  
• Check clogging of heat sink cooling duct.  
• Check fixation between IGBT and heat sink. (Check screwing and contact.)  
• Check IPDU error.(IGBT built-in temp sensor (TH) error).  
Indoor address  
with trouble  
Indoor Indoor  
All stop  
• Float switch operated.  
• Check the float switch connector.  
• Check operation of drain pump unit.  
• Check the drain pump circuit.  
• Check clogging of drain pipe.  
• Check indoor P.C. board error.  
overflow error  
• Float switch circuit  
disconnected or the  
connector came off.  
—
Indoor Indoor fan  
motor error  
Corresponding • The value of motor speed  
unit only stops. deviated from target value  
was detected for certain time.  
• Check connection of fan connector and wiring.  
• Check fan motor error.  
• Check indoor P.C. board error.  
• Check influence of outside air control.  
• Check indoor type code (DN=10) and the capacity code (DN=11).  
The standard ducted unit air conditioner utilizes a direct current (DC) indoor fan motor that features current  
limiting protection. In the event power is not isolated prior to service, the protective control circuit will activate  
and stop the unit operating.The check code “P12”will be displayed on the remote controller-once service work  
has been completed, this code can be cleared by switching off then on the electrical isolation device of the  
indoor unit and pressing the operation stop button on the remote controller to reset the system  
• Over-current protection  
operated.  
P13  
P13  
—
47  
I/F  
I/F  
Outdoor liquid  
back  
All stop  
In heating  
• Check full close operation of outdoor PMV (1, 2).  
While the system is operating • Check Pd and Ps sensor error.  
detection  
error  
in HEAT mode, outdoor PMV of  
which opening degree was 100  
pulse or less for a certain time.  
• Check clogging of SV2 circuit.  
• Check clogging of 4-way valve error circuit.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
• Check capillary clogging of oil return circuit from oil separator.  
• Check TS1, TS2 sensor error.  
P15  
P15  
01: TS condition  
AE  
Gas leak  
detection  
(TS1  
All stop  
Suction temp exceeded the  
judgment standard temp for 10  
minutes or more.  
• Check refrigerant shortage.  
• Check full open of outdoor service valves (gas side, liquid side).  
• Check outdoor PMV clogging (PMV1, 2).  
• Check characteristics of TS1 sensor resistance value.  
• Check 4-way valve error.  
condition)  
TS error judgment standard  
temperature  
• Check leakage of SV4 circuit.  
• Check leakage of SV5 circuit.  
In cooling operation: 60°C or  
higher  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
In heating operation: 40°C or  
higher  
Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.)  
Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between  
FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors.  
Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.  
02: TD condition  
AE  
I/F  
Gas leak  
All stop  
Discharge temperature TD1 or • Check refrigerant shortage.  
detection  
TD2 was continuously 108°C  
or higher for 10 minutes.  
• Check outdoor PMV clogging (PMV1, 2).  
• Check characteristics of TD1, TD2 sensor resistance value.  
• Check indoor air filter clogging.  
(TD condition)  
• Check pipe clogging.  
• Check SV4 circuit (Valve leakage, misinstallation)  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.)  
Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between  
FS unit and indoor unit, and connection of connectors.  
Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected Check code  
Error detection  
condition  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Status  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
position  
name  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
P17  
P17  
—
bb  
I/F  
Discharge  
temp TD2 error  
All stop Discharge temperature • Check full opening of outdoor service valves (gas side, liquid side).  
(TD2) exceeded 115°C.  
• Check clogging of outdoor PMV (PMV1, 2).  
• Check characteristics of TD2 sensor resistance value.  
• Check 4-way valve error.  
• Check leakage of SV42 circuit.  
• Check SV4 circuit. (Miscabling and misinstallation of SV41 and SV42)  
• Check leakage of SV5 valve circuit.  
• Check SV6 circuit. (Clogging, Valve operation error)  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.)  
Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas), wiring between FS unit  
and indoor unit, and connection of connectors.  
Check miswiring of SVS/SVD valves.  
P19  
P19  
Detected outdoor  
unit No.  
8
I/F  
4-way valve  
operation error  
All stop When abnormal  
• Error of 4-way valve error  
refrigerating cycle data  
was detected in heating  
• Check coil error and connector connection of 4-way valve.  
• Check characteristics of TS1/TE1 sensor resistance value.  
• Check characteristics of Pd, Ps pressure sensor output voltage.  
• Check misconnection of TE1 and TL sensors.  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
Check leakage of SVD valve and SVS valve. (Check leakage of SVDD valve and SVSS.)  
Check mispiping of FS unit connecting pipe (Suction gas/Discharge gas).  
P20  
P20  
—
22  
I/F  
High-pressure All stop Pd sensor detected  
protective  
operation  
• Check Pd pressure sensor error.  
• Check full opening of service valves (Gas side, Liquid side).  
• Check outdoor fan error.  
3.6MPa or more.  
• Check outdoor fan motor error.  
• Check clogging of outdoor PMV. (PMV1,2)  
• Check clogging of indoor/outdoor heat exchangers.  
• Check air short-circuiting in outdoor unit.  
• Check clogging of SV2 circuit.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error.  
• Check indoor fan system error. (Cause of air volume decrease)  
• Check valve opening of indoor PMV.  
• Check miscabling of communication line between indoor and outdoor.  
• Check operation error of check valve of discharge pipe.  
• Check circuit of gas balance SV4 valve.  
• Check mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas main pipe.  
• Check operation error of check valve of discharge gas pipe.  
• Check circuit of SV11 valve. (Clogging, OFF at one side only)  
• Check clogging of circuit at auxiliary heat exchanger side. (Miswiring, Disconnection, Wiring missing)  
• Check Flow selector unit.  
Check leakage of SVD valve and operation error.  
Check wiring inside of FS unit. (SVD/SVS coil miswiring, etc.)  
Check wiring between FS unit and indoor unit. (Miswiring, Disconnection, Wiring missing)  
• Check circuit of SV5 valve.  
• Check refrigerant overcharge.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Detected  
position  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Check code name  
Status  
Error detection condition  
Check item (position)  
Main  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
P22  
P22  
0: IGBT shortage  
1: Position detection  
circuit error  
1A  
FAN-IPDU Outdoor fan IPDU  
error  
All stop  
(Sub-code: 0)  
• Short-circuit current was detected at start  
time.  
• Check fan motor. (Interphase short-circuit)  
• Check fan IPDU error.  
3: Motor lock error  
4: Motor current error  
detection  
C: TH sensor temp.  
error  
D: TH sensor error  
E: Vdc error  
• Short-circuit current was detected when  
checking IGBT short-circuit before start time.  
All stop  
All stop  
(Sub-code: 1)  
• The standard value of detection circuit of fan  
IPDU current fluctuated at start time.  
• Check fan IPDU error.  
(Sub-code: 3)  
• Check fan motor. (Lock, phase missing)  
• Abnormal current was detected within 30  
seconds after start time.  
• Check cause of abnormal overload at start time.  
• Check connection of connector to fan motor.  
All stop  
All stop  
(Sub-code: 4)  
• Short-circuit current was detected when 2  
seconds or more passed after start time.  
• Over-current was detected when 30 seconds  
or more passed after start time.  
• Check power supply voltage.  
• Check fan IPDU error.  
(Sub-code: C)  
• Check outdoor fan system.  
• Heat sink sensor (TH) of fan IPDU detected • Check fan IPDU error.  
95°C error.  
• Check fixation between fan IPDU and heat sink.  
All stop  
All stop  
(Sub-code: D)  
• Heat sink sensor (TH) of fan IPDU detected  
short-circuiting or open.  
• Check fan IPDU error.  
(Sub-code: E)  
• Input power supply voltage of the fan IPDU  
over the setup value was detected.  
• Check input power supply voltage of the fan IPDU.  
• Check power supply P.C. board error of the fan IPDU.  
• Check error of external electrolytic condenser.  
• Input power supply terminal of the fan IPDU  
was unconnected.  
• Power supply P.C. board error of the fan IPDU  
P26  
P29  
P31  
P26  
P29  
—
01: Compressor 1 side  
02: Compressor 2 side  
14  
16  
47  
IPDU  
IPDU  
G-Tr short-circuit  
protection error  
All stop  
All stop  
Instantaneous over-current was detected when • Check connector connection and wiring on IPDU P.C. board.  
compressor started.  
• Check compressor error and defect of compressor coil.  
• Check outdoor P.C. board (IPDU) error.  
01: Compressor 1 side  
02: Compressor 2 side  
Compressor  
position detection  
circuit error  
Position detected was not normal.  
• Check connector connection and wiring.  
• Check compressor error and defect of compressor coil.  
• Check P.C. board (IPDU) error.  
—
Indoor Other indoor error  
Corresponding E07/L07/L03/L08 was detected when other  
• Check indoor P.C. board.  
(Group follower unit unit only stops. indoor unit in the group was defective.  
error)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error detected byTCC-LINK central control device  
Check code  
Error detection  
condition  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Detected position  
Check code name  
Status  
Check item (position)  
Display on  
central control  
device  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
C05  
—
—
—
TCC-LINK  
TCC-LINK central control Operation Signal is not transmit from • Check central control device error.  
device transmission error continued. central control device.  
• Check communication line error of central control device.  
• Check setup of terminator resistor.  
C06  
—
TCC-LINK central control Operation Signal is not received from • Check central control device error.  
device receiving error  
continued. central control device.  
• Check communication line error of central control device.  
• Check setup of terminator resistor.  
• Check the power of connecting destination connected device.  
• Check P.C. board error of the connected device.  
C12  
P30  
—
—
HA control interface Interface batch alarm of  
HA control interface  
Operation Error was input in HA  
continued. control interface  
• Check error input.  
TCC-LINK  
Follower unit error of  
group control  
Operation An error occurred in  
continued. follower unit of the group  
control.  
• Check the error code of the unit with alarm.  
Differs according to error contents of the with alarm  
([P30] is displayed only on  
the central remote  
controller.)  
(L20 is displayed.)  
Duplicated central control Operation Central control addresses • Check the address setup.  
address continued. were duplicated.  
Error detected by AI-NET central control device  
Check code  
Error detection  
condition  
Outdoor 7-segment display  
Detected position  
Check code name  
Status  
Check item (position)  
AI-NET  
central control  
remote controller  
Main remote  
controller  
Check code  
Sub-code  
—
—
—
97  
99  
AI-NET  
AI-NET communication  
system error  
Operation E07/L07/L03/L08 was  
continued. detected when other  
indoor unit in the group  
• Check multiple network adapters.  
• Check wire and miscabling of remote controller: Only one network  
adapter can be connected to communication line of remote controller.  
was defective.  
—
—
—
AI-NET  
Duplicated network  
adapters  
Operation Multiple network adapters • Check communication line, miscabling, and power of indoor unit.  
continued. were connected to  
communication line of  
remote controller.  
• Check communication. (X,Y terminals)  
• Check network adapter P.C. board.  
• Check the central controller (Central control remote controller, etc.)  
(Detected at central  
controller side)  
—
—
—
b7  
AI-NET  
Error in indoor group  
Operation Error of follower unit in the • Check follower unit in the group.  
continued. group  
* These errors are concerned to communication of remote controllers (A, B) and central system [AI-NET X, Y], and the main remote controller displays [E01], [E02], [E03], [E09],  
or [E18] in some cases and displays none in other cases according to the error.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cautions when servicing for compressor  
1. Removing wires of both compressors check output of the inverter as described below.  
How to check inverter output  
1. Turn off the power supply.  
2. Remove the compressor lead cables from the compressors.  
(Be sure to remove lead cables of both compressors.)  
3. Turn on the power supply and start cooling or heating operation.  
In this time, pay attention to touch the fasten receptacle terminal lug of the compressor leads so that they do  
not contact with other fasten receptacle terminal lug or other position (unit cabinet, etc.).  
4. Check output voltage of compressor lead cable at inverter side.  
When the output voltage does not satisfy the criteria in the following table, replace IPDU P.C. board.  
No.  
1
Measured position  
Between Red and White  
Between White and Black  
Between Black and Red  
Criteria  
400 V to 650 V  
400 V to 650 V  
400 V to 650 V  
2
3
∗ After checking the output, when connecting the compressor lead again to the compressor terminal, check  
surely there is no distortion on the fasten terminal lug. If it is loosened, caulk it with pinchers, etc and then  
connect lead to the terminal.  
How to check resistance of compressor winding  
1. Turn off the power supply.  
2. Remove the compressor lead cables from the compressors.  
In each compressor, check the winding resistance between phases and resistance of the outdoor cabinet  
using a tester.  
• Is not it earthed?  
→ Normal if 10MΩ or more are measured  
• Is not shorted between windings?  
→ Normal if 0.7Ω to 0.9Ω are measured (Use a precise digital tester.)  
How to check the outdoor fan motor  
1. Turn off the power supply.  
2. Take off three connectors (U.V.W) from the fan IPDU P.C. board.  
3. Turn the fan with hands. If the fan does not turn, it is a fan motor error (Lock). Replace the fan motor.  
If the fan turns, measure the winding resistance between the phases of the connector (Motor winding) with a  
tester. If 13 to 33Ω are measured, it is normal. (Use a digital tester.)  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-5. Diagnosis Procedure for Each Check Code  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[E03] / [97]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Communication error between  
indoor and remote controller  
(Detected at indoor side)  
No communication from remote controller and  
communication adaptor  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[E01] / [–]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Communication error between  
indoor and remote controller  
1. Remote controller interconnecting cable  
error  
(Detected at remote controller side)  
2. Indoor power supply error  
This error is detected when the indoor unit cannot receive a signal from the remote controller.  
Check communication wiring of the remote controllers A and B.  
As communication is impossible, this fault code [E03] is not displayed on the main remote controller.  
It is displayed on TCC-LINK central controller.  
3. Indoor P.C. board error  
4. Remote controller address setup error  
5. Remote controller P.C. board error  
NO  
Is the interconnection cable of  
remote controllers (A/B) normal?  
Correct interconnection cable of  
remote controller.  
YES  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Is there no disconnection or  
connector contact error on harness out  
of terminal block of indoor unit?  
YES  
Correct connection  
and check circuit cabling.  
[E04] / [04]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
communication circuit error  
(Detected at indoor side)  
1. Power of outdoor unit was firstly turned on.  
2. Connection error of communication line  
between indoor and outdoor  
NO  
3. Terminal resistance setup error on outdoor  
header unit.  
NO  
Is a group control operation?  
YES  
4. Address setup error  
NO  
Check power connection status of  
indoor unit. (Turn on power again.)  
NO  
Is power of each indoor unit turned on?  
YES  
Was power turned on in order  
Turn on power again in order of  
of indoor unit  
outdoor unit?  
indoor unit  
outdoor unit.  
YES  
NO  
Is power applied to remote controller?  
AB terminals: Approx. DC18V  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
NO  
Is connection (U1/U2 terminals) of  
indoor/outdoor interconnection cable normal?  
Defect  
Replace  
Correct interconnection cable.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Are two remote controllers used  
without the correct identification?  
Change one to main/other to sub.  
(Remote controller address connector)  
NO  
NO  
Is the end terminal resistance  
setup of outdoor unit normal?  
Correct the end terminal resistance setup.  
Set up address again.  
NO  
YES  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
Is address setup correct?  
YES  
Check connection of interconnection cable  
between indoor and outdoor is correct, and  
then connect communication line connector  
on indoor P.C. board (CN40) to CN44 (EMG).  
NO  
Is power applied to fuse (F03)  
on indoor P.C. board?  
Check code  
[E02] / [–]  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
YES  
Remote controller sending error Signal could not be sent to indoor unit.  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Check the communication wire of the remote  
controller.  
YES  
Is there no noise, etc?  
NO  
Check noise etc. and eliminate it if any.  
* It is not displayed on 7-segment display of the central control controller.  
NO  
Is communication wiring between  
remote controller and indoor unit correct?  
Correct the communication wiring.  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
For details, refer to “Troubleshooting in test operation”.  
YES  
Sending circuit error of the remote controller  
Replace remote controller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[E06] / [04]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Decreased number of indoor units 1. Communication lines (U1, U2) connection  
[E07] / [–]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
communication circuit error  
(Detected at outdoor side)  
1. Outdoor communication terminal resistance  
setup error  
error between indoor and outdoor  
2. Connector connection error of communica-  
tion for indoor P.C. board  
2. Indoor/outdoor communication connection  
error  
3. Connector connection error of communica-  
tion for outdoor I/F P.C. board  
NO  
4. Power supply of indoor unit  
(Is power turned on?)  
Is setup of terminal resistance  
of outdoor unit normal?  
YES  
Sub-code: No. of indoor units which received signals normally  
Correct setup of  
terminal resistance.  
Is interconnection cable  
(U1, U2) between indoor and  
outdoor short-circuited?  
YES  
Is there no mis-wiring/  
disconnection on communication line  
betweenindoor and outdoor?  
YES  
Correct communication line.  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is connection of interconnection cable  
between indoor and outdoor correct?  
Correct short-circuit.  
NO  
Is connection of CN40 connector  
on indoor P.C. board normal?  
YES  
YES  
Correct  
communication line.  
NO  
NO  
Is connection of CN01 connector  
on outdoor I/F P.C. board normal?  
Correct wiring of the connector.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Is there an error on  
power cable to an outdoor unit?  
Is F400 (fuse) on  
I/F P.C. board failed?  
Is power of indoor turned on?  
YES  
Turn on power of indoor unit.  
Clear the fault code.  
NO  
YES  
* Check conduction  
with tester.  
Correct power cable.  
YES  
NO  
Did a power failure occur?  
YES  
Turn on power to  
start operation.  
Is there noise source?  
NO  
YES  
Is there no noise, etc?  
NO  
Check noise etc. and eliminate it if any.  
Eliminate noise.  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
(NOTE)  
Defect  
Replace  
1. When signal is not sent for a certain period from the indoor unit  
which has been sending signals normally, [E06] is displayed.  
I/F P.C. board failure  
However an emergent operation  
is available by inserting connector  
from CN01 to CN33.  
Outdoor I/F P.C. board failure  
Replace  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[E08] / [96]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Duplicated indoor addresses  
Indoor addresses are duplicated.  
[E12] / [42]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Automatic address start error  
1. When indoor automatic address started,  
other refrigerant circuit system was setting  
automatic address. (Sub code : 01)  
2. When outdoor automatic address started,  
the indoor automatic address was being  
set. (Sub-code: 02)  
Sub-code: Duplicated indoor address  
Using a main remote controller (RBC-AMT21E), check the setup item codes (DN code) 12, 13, and 14.  
When there is no address duplication, check to the following flowchart.  
Sub-code: 01: Communication between indoor and outdoor 02: Communication between outdoor units  
NO  
Are U1, U2, U3, and U4  
connectors connected?  
NO  
Is cable connection to  
communication line normal?  
Correct cable connection.  
YES  
YES  
Turn on power of  
Disconnect relay connector  
of U1, U2, U3, and U4.  
Set up address again.  
YES  
NO  
Is communication line connected  
to the different outdoor unit?  
outdoor unit again.  
(Refer to “Address setup procedure”.)  
NO  
Is indoor unit quantity connected  
to outdoor unit correct?  
Correct communication line.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[E15] / [42]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
No corresponding indoor unit  
during automatic address  
1. Communication line connection error  
between indoor and outdoor.  
YES  
2. Indoor power system error  
3. Noise from surrounding devices  
4. Power failure  
Set up indoor address again.  
5. Indoor P.C. board error  
NO  
NO  
Is communication line between  
indoor and outdoor normal?  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Correct communication line.  
Correct connection.  
[E09] / [99]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Duplicated master  
remote controller  
Setup of master remote controller is dupli-  
cated.  
YES  
Is connection of CN40 connector  
on indoor P.C. board correct?  
YES  
Are two remote controllers set up  
as two master remote controllers?  
Correct setup of remote controllers one as a master, and  
the other as sub (remote controller address connector).  
YES  
NO  
Is connection of CN01  
connector on I/F P.C. board of  
header outdoor unit correct?  
NO  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Correct connection.  
Correct power cable.  
Failure  
Replace  
YES  
YES  
Is there any connection  
error of power cable?  
NO  
Check code  
[E10] / [CF]  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
YES  
YES  
Set up address again after  
resetting power supply.  
Communication error  
in indoor P.C. board assembly  
Indoor P.C. board error failure  
Did a power failure occur?  
NO  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
YES  
Check power voltage on line.  
Eliminate noise, etc.  
Eliminate noise.  
Is there a noise source?  
NO  
Is there any fault on power line?  
NO  
Set up address again  
after resetting power supply.  
Check indoor control P.C. board.  
Failure  
Replace  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[E16] / [89]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Connected indoor units  
capacity over  
1. There are 48 or more connected indoor units.  
2. Capacity over of total connected indoor units.  
3. Incorrect setup of indoor/outdoor capacity  
[E18] / [97/99]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Communication error between  
indoor header and follower  
Regular communication between indoor header  
and follower is unavailable.  
NO  
Are remote controller  
interconnection wires (A/B) normal?  
Correct remote controller  
interconnection wires.  
Sub-code: 00 : Capacity over 01 : ~ : Number of connected indoor units  
YES  
YES  
Perform setup of no detection  
for over capacity.  
Is backup operation of outdoor unit being set up?  
Is there any disconnection of  
connector or wiring from terminal block  
of indoor unit?  
YES  
Correct connection.  
Check circuit wire.  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Excessive indoor units are connected.  
Correct miswiring.  
NO  
Is No. of connected indoor units correct?  
Is a group control operation?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Check power connection status  
of indoor unit.  
Is the power of  
all indoor units turned on?  
Is setup of indoor unit HP correct?  
Correct HP setup.  
YES  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
NO  
Check indoor address.  
Is total capacity of connected  
indoor units within 135%? ( 1)  
Ensure capacity of connected  
indoor units within 135% of outdoor units.  
Failure  
Replace  
YES  
Correct indoor address.  
OK  
For a service P.C. board, check outdoor HP setup.  
Set up outdoor HP.  
(Refer “How to exchange interface P.C. board”.)  
(Set up jumper 9, 10, 11, and 12.)  
NG  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check outdoor interface P.C. board.  
(∗1) When capacity of the outdoor unit is 12HP,  
up to a maximum capacity 120% of indoor  
units can be connected.  
[E19] / [96]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Header outdoor units quantity error 1. Misconnection of interconnection cable  
between indoor and outdoor  
2. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
Sub-code: 00: No header unit 02: Two or more header units  
Are communication lines (U1, U2)  
between indoor and outdoor connected  
to multiple outdoor units?  
YES  
NO  
Connect communication line between indoor  
and outdoor to one unit per 1 system.  
NO  
Connect communication line between indoor  
and outdoor.  
Is communication line between indoor and  
outdoor connected to one unit per 1 system?  
YES  
Check I/F P.C. board.  
Reference)  
When the power supply of the outdoor unit is first turned  
on, the check code [E19 00] is displayed until the power  
supply of the indoor units are turned on. However is not  
an error. When the power supply of the indoor units are  
this turned on, the check code is automatically reset.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[E20] / [42]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Unit connected to other line  
during automatic address  
When starting automatic indoor address, a  
device in another refrigerant system is  
connected.  
[E25] / [15]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Duplicated address setup of termi- Addresses are duplicated by manual setting of  
outdoor address  
nal outdoor units  
Never set up the outdoor address manually.  
Sub-code: 01: Connection of outdoor of another system 02: Connection of indoor unit of another system  
Separate the wire between systems according to address setup method.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[E26] / [15]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Decrease of connected  
outdoor units  
1. Outdoor unit backup setup  
2. Outdoor power error  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
3. Communication line connection error between  
outdoor units  
[E23] / [15]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Communication sending error  
between outdoor units  
1. Interconnection cable error between outdoor  
unit  
4. Connector error for communication  
5. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
2. Communication error between outdoor units,  
I/F P.C. board error  
3. Terminal resistance setup error between  
outdoor units  
Sub-code: No. of outdoor units which received signals normally  
YES  
Is there miscabling or  
YES  
Is outdoor unit setting backup?  
Clear the error and then start operation. ( 1)  
Turn on the main power supply.  
disconnection on communication line  
between outdoor units?  
Correct communication line.  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is main power of follower unit turned on?  
YES  
NO  
Is connection of CN03 connector  
on outdoor I/F P.C. board normal?  
Correct wiring of cable connector.  
Turn on main power of outdoor unit.  
NO  
Is communication line between  
outdoor units connected normally?  
Correct connection of communication line.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
YES  
Is communication connector (CN03)  
between follower outdoor units connected?  
Correct connection.  
(Communication connector: CN03)  
Is main power of  
outdoor unit turned off?  
YES  
NO  
Check I/F P.C. board.  
(∗1) How to clear the error  
Set SW01/SW02/SW03 on I/F P.C. board of header unit to 2/16/1, and  
push SW04 for 5 seconds or more. (7-segment display: [Er.] [CL])  
Is the terminal resistance  
between outdoor units turned on?  
(SW30 Bit 1)  
NO  
Turn the terminal resistance to ON.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Did power failure occur?  
NO  
Clear fault code.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Terminal outdoor unit error  
Cause of operation  
Terminal unit error  
[E28] / [d2]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Is there no noise source, etc?  
NO  
Check and eliminate noise, etc  
Sub-code: Detected outdoor unit number  
An error occurred on the terminal unit. Confirm the check code of the terminal unit using 7-segment display on the  
I/F P.C. board of the terminal unit and check it according to the diagnostic procedure for each fault code.  
How to identify the terminal outdoor unit on which error occurred  
Check outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
Under condition that [E28] is displayed on the 7-segment display on the header unit, when pushing SW04 for 1  
second or more, the fan on the faulty outdoor unit will rotate. Pushing SW05 alone, stops the fan rotation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
TCJ sensor Open/Short  
[E31] / [CF]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
IPDU communication error  
1. Connection error of communication line  
between IPDU and I/F P.C. board  
[F01] / [0F]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
IndoorTCJ sensor error  
2. I/F P.C. board error  
3. IPDU P.C. board error  
4. External noise  
NO  
Is TCJ sensor connector (CN102: Red)  
on indoor P.C. board normally connected?  
Correct connection.  
YES  
Sub-code:  
01: IPDU1 error  
03: IPDU1, 2 error  
05: IPDU1, fan IPDU error  
02: IPDU2 error  
04: Fan IPDU error  
06: IPDU2, fan IPDU error  
NO  
Are characteristics of TCJ sensor  
resistance value normal? ∗  
Replace TCJ sensor.  
07: All IPDU error or communication line error between IPDU-I/F P.C. boards, or outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
YES  
Indoor unit temperature sensor characteristics  
See Characteristics-2.  
∗ If the fan IPDU is abnormal, be sure to check the voltage output on the fan power P.C. board.  
Check indoor main P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
NO  
Is jumper lead setup on the outdoor I/F P.C. board correct?  
Connect the jumper lead.  
(Jumper 7, 8, 9 ON)  
YES  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
TC2 sensor Open/Short  
Are communication connectors  
between I/F fan power P.C. board,  
and IPDU connected?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
[F02] / [0d]  
IndoorTC2 sensor error  
Correct connection.  
Connect the communication line.  
I/F P.C. board error  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
NO  
NO  
Is TC2 sensor connector (CN101: Black)  
on indoor P.C. board normally connected?  
Correct connection.  
Is there disconnection on communication line  
between IPDU and I/F P.C. board?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Are characteristics of TC2 sensor  
resistance value normal?  
Is there voltage between pin 4 and  
pin 5 of CN600 on I/F P.C. board?  
(Measure with tester: DC0 to 5 V)  
Replace TC2 sensor.  
YES  
Indoor unit temperature sensor characteristics  
See Characteristics-2.  
YES  
Check indoor main P.C. board.  
Is there voltage deflection between  
pin 3 and pin 5 of CN600 on I/F P.C. board?  
(Measure with tester: DC 0 to 5V, 5 pin GND)  
NO  
NO  
Defect  
Replace  
IPDU P.C. board error  
YES  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
TC1 sensor Open/Short  
On the fan power supply P.C. board,  
1) CN503: Between pins 1 and 5  
2) CN503: Between pins 2 and 5  
12V  
7V  
Replace fan power P.C. board.  
[F03] / [93]  
IndoorTC1 sensor error  
3) Between +5V and GND of CN505: 5V  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
YES  
NO  
Is TC1 sensor connector (CN100: Brown)  
on indoor P.C. board normally connected?  
P.C. board to be replaced  
IPDU1  
Auxiliary code  
Correct connection.  
Replace P.C. board according to auxiliary code.  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
YES  
IPDU2  
IPDU1, 2  
NO  
Are characteristics of TC1 sensor  
resistance value normal?  
Fan IPDU  
Replace TC1 sensor.  
IPDU1, fan IPDU  
IPDU2, fan IPDU  
IPDU1, 2, fan IPDU, I/F  
YES  
Indoor unit temperature sensor characteristics  
See Characteristics-2.  
Check indoor main P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
TD1 sensor error  
Cause of operation  
TD1 sensor Open/Short  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
TA sensor Open/Short  
[F04] / [19]  
[F10] / [0C]  
IndoorTA sensor error  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
This check code means detection of Open/Short of TA sensor.  
This check code means detection of Open/Short of TD1 sensor.  
Check disconnection of connector (TA sensor: CN104, Yellow) and characteristics of sensor resistance value. (Refer  
to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.)  
Check disconnection of connector (TD1 sensor: CN502, White) and characteristics of sensor resistance value.  
(Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.)  
If sensor is normal, replace indoor P.C. board.  
If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Check code  
Check code name  
TD2 sensor error  
Cause of operation  
TD2 sensor Open/Short  
Check code  
Check code name  
TS sensor error  
Cause of operation  
TS1, TS2 sensor Open/Short  
[F05] / [A1]  
[F12] / [A2]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Sub-code: 01: TS1 sensor 02 : TS2 sensor  
This check code means detection of Open/Short of TD2 sensor.  
Check disconnection of connector (TD2 sensor: CN503, Pink) and characteristics of sensor resistance value.  
(Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.)  
This check code means detection of Open/Short of TS sensor.  
If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Check disconnection of connector (TS1 sensor: CN504, White TS2 sensor: CN522, Black) and characteristics of  
sensor resistance value. (Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.)  
If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Check code  
Check code name  
TE1 sensor error  
Cause of operation  
TE1 sensor Open/Short  
[F06] / [18]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Check code  
Check code name  
TH sensor error  
Cause of operation  
[F13] / [43]  
IGBT built-in sensor error in A3-IPDU  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
This check code means detection of Open/Short of TE1 sensor.  
Check disconnection of connector (TE1 sensor: CN505, Green) and characteristics of sensor resistance value.  
(Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.)  
If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side  
This check code means IGBT built-in temperature sensor error.  
Check connection of connectors CN06 on IPDU P.C. board and CN600 on I/F P.C. board.  
If sensor is normal, replace IPDU P.C. board.  
Check code  
Check code name  
TL sensor error  
Cause of operation  
TL sensor Open/Short  
[F07] / [18]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
This check code means detection of Open/Short of TL sensor.  
Check disconnection of connector (TL sensor: CN521, White) and characteristics of sensor resistance value.  
(Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.)  
If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Check code  
Check code name  
TO sensor error  
Cause of operation  
TO sensor Open/Short  
[F08] / [1b]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
This check code means detection of Open/Short of TO sensor.  
Check disconnection of connector (TO sensor: CN507, Yellow) and characteristics of sensor resistance value.  
(Refer to Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics.)  
If sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Ps sensor error  
Cause of operation  
[F15] / [18]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Outdoor temp sensor miscabling 1. Misinstallation and misconnection of TE1  
[F23] / [43]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Output voltage error of Ps sensor  
sensor and TL sensor  
(TE1,TL)  
2. Resistance characteristics error of TE1  
sensor and TL sensor  
NO  
3. Outdoor P.C. board (I/F) error  
Is connection of Ps sensor  
connector correct?  
Correct connection.  
Connector: CN500, White  
NO  
NO  
YES  
Are installed positions of  
Correct installed positions of  
TE1 sensor and TL sensor.  
TE1 sensor and TL sensor correct?  
Outdoor I/F P.C. board  
TE1 sensor : CN505, Green  
TL sensor : CN521, White  
Are output voltage characteristics  
of Ps sensor normal?  
Sensor error  
YES  
YES  
NO  
1 Pressure (Check joint) by pressure gauge  
2 Pressure display on 7-segment display  
3 Output voltage of I/F P.C. board  
Are connection of TE1 sensor connector  
and TL sensor connector normal?  
Correct connection.  
If 1 and 2, 3 are different, an error of pressure sensor itself is considered.  
If 2 and 3 are different, check interface P.C. board.  
YES  
NO  
Are resistance characteristics of  
Is not refrigerant by  
passed from discharge to  
suction of 4-way valve?  
NO  
NO  
Correct connection.  
Is there no leakage  
from SV4 valve?  
TL sensor and TE1 sensor normal?  
Check compressor.  
YES  
Outdoor unit temperature sensor characteristics  
YES  
YES  
See TE1 sensor : Characteristics-5.  
See TL sensor : Characteristics-3.  
Replace SV4 valve.  
Check 4-way valve.  
Check outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
TE1 sensor : Outdoor heat exchanger temp sensor  
TL sensor : Temp sensor between liquid tanks of outdoor P.M.V. 1/2  
Check code  
Check code name  
Pd sensor error  
Cause of operation  
Output voltage error of Pd sensor  
[F24] / [43]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[F16] / [43]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Outdoor pressure sensor miscabling 1. High-pressure Pd sensor and low-  
It is output voltage error of Pd sensor. Check disconnection of connection of connector (Pd sensor: CN501) circuit  
and output voltage of sensor.  
pressure sensor Ps are exchanged.  
(Pd, Ps)  
2. Output voltage of each sensor is zero.  
If the sensor is normal, replace outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
NO  
NO  
Correct connection of connectors.  
Pd sensor: CN501, Red  
Are connection of Pd sensor and  
Ps sensor connectors correct?  
Ps sensor: CN500, White  
Check code  
Check code name  
Indoor other error  
Cause of operation  
YES  
[F29] / [12]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Indoor P.C. board error  
EEROM error  
Are output voltage characteristics of  
Pd sensor and Ps sensor normal?  
Sensor error  
Replace  
YES  
1 Pressure (Check joint) by pressure gauge  
2 Pressure display on 7-segment display  
3 Output voltage of I/F P.C. board  
This error is detected during operation of air conditioner of IC10 non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on indoor unit P.C.  
board. Replace service P.C. board.  
If 1 and 2, 3 are different, an error of pressure sensor itself is considered.  
If 2 and 3 are different, check interface P.C. board.  
∗ If EEPROM was not inserted when power was turned on or it is absolutely impossible to read/write EEPROM data,  
the automatic address mode is repeated. In this case, [97 error] is displayed on AI-NET central controller.  
NO  
Are Pd/Ps output values Pd > Ps  
during compressor operation?  
Check compressor.  
(Approx. 3 minutes)  
(Approx. 1 minute)  
(Power ON) [SET DATA] is displayed  
[SET DATA]  
disappears.  
LED (D02) 1Hz flashes  
for approx. 10 seconds  
on indoor unit P.C. board.  
Reboot  
(Reset)  
YES  
* Value can be confirmed by 7-segment display function on outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
on main remote controller.  
Pd SW01/02/03=1/1/2  
Ps SW01/02/03=1/2/2  
(Repetition)  
Check outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[F31] / [1C]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Outdoor EEPROM error  
1. Outdoor unit power error (Voltage, noise, etc.)  
2. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
[H02] / [1d]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Compressor error (Lock)  
1. Outdoor unit power line error  
2. Compressor circuit system error  
3. Compressor error  
4. Refrigerant stagnation in compressor shell  
5. IPDU P.C. board error  
Check power voltage and line.  
Correct power line.  
Check external noise, etc.  
YES  
Is there any trouble of  
outdoor unit power supply?  
NO  
Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side  
Check I/F P.C. board.  
NO  
Is power voltage of  
outdoor unit normal?  
1
1 380 – 415V ± 10%  
YES  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
YES  
Does voltage drop occur  
Correct power line.  
when other compressor starts?  
[H01] / [1F]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Compressor breakdown  
1. Outdoor unit power line error  
2. Compressor circuit system error  
3. Compressor error  
NO  
Does OCR of MG-SW operate?  
NO  
YES  
NO  
Reset OCR manually.  
3
4. Cause of abnormal overload operation  
5. IPDU P.C. board error  
Is wiring or connector connection  
on IPDU P.C. board normal?  
Correct connector connection  
or wiring.  
Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side  
YES  
Is not it an abnormal overload?  
NO  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Correct cause of overload.  
Is power voltage of outdoor unit normal?  
380 – 415V ± 10%  
YES  
YES  
Is there no refrigerant stagnation  
in compressor shell?  
Correct refrigerant stagnation  
in compressor shell.  
YES  
NO  
Is case heater output normal?  
NO  
Does voltage drop occur  
when other compressor starts?  
Correct power line.  
NO  
NO  
Operation starts.  
Check case heater.  
Is connection of wiring or connection of  
connector on IPDU P.C. board normal?  
Correct connector connection or wiring.  
NO  
Is compressor normal?  
YES  
2
Compressor error  
YES  
2 Check the following items mainly.  
1. Existence of abnormal sound and abnormal vibration during operation or starting  
2. Abnormal overheat of case during operation or stop time (Never touch with hands.)  
3. Current of compressor lead during operation or starting time  
(No varied change of current) change  
Is winding resistance  
between phases of corresponding  
compressor normal? (Note 1)  
NO  
Compressor error  
(Motor burning, etc.)  
Check IPDU P.C. board.  
3 If OCR operates even after manual reset of OCR, check whether the wiring to the  
current sensor (T02) of Comp-IPDU is correct or not.  
YES  
YES  
Is not it an abnormal overload?  
NO  
Correct cause of overload.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Take off lead cable of compressor.  
1. Check resistance between windings:  
[H03] / [17]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Current detective  
circuit system error  
1. Cabling or connector connection error on IPDU P.C. board  
2. IPDU P.C. board error  
It is normal if there are 0.7 to 0.9  
.
C
S
2. Check insulation between outdoor  
cabinet and terminal:  
It is normal if there are 10M or more.  
Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side  
Check IPDU P.C. board.  
NO  
Note 1  
Wiring or connector connection  
R
Correct connector connection or cabling.  
Check IPDU P.C. board.  
on IPDU P.C. board normal?  
* After checking the output, when connecting the compressor  
lead again to the compressor terminal, check surely there is  
no distortion on the Fasten receptacle terminal.  
If it is loosened, caulk it with pinchers, etc and then connect  
lead to the terminal firmly.  
YES  
Details of compressor  
power connecting section  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
1. Service valve close  
[H04] / [44]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Compressor 1 case thermo operation 1. Case thermo circuit error  
2. I/F P.C. board error  
[H06] / [20]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Low-pressure protective operation  
2. Ps sensor error  
3. Service valve closed  
3. SV2, SV4 circuit error  
[H14] / [44]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Compressor 2 case thermo operation  
4. Outdoor PMV clogging  
4. Miscabling of communication between  
indoor and outdoor  
5. SV4 valve leak, Coil misinstallation  
5. Indoor/outdoor fan and condenser error  
6. Indoor/outdoor PMV clogging  
7. Indoor/outdoor heat exchanger clogging  
8. Refrigerant shortage  
6. 4-way valve error  
7. Compressor error  
8. Refrigerant shortage  
Is case thermo circuit normal?  
1. Connector connection  
2. Wiring  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Are service valves of gas and  
Open service valves fully.  
Repair case thermo circuit.  
Open service valves fully.  
Repair outdoor PMV.  
liquid pipe of outdoor unit fully opened?  
(Note 1)  
3. I/F P.C. board (Note 1)  
YES  
1. Case thermo is usually closed.  
2. Operation temperature of case thermo is 120˚C.  
Exchange low-pressure sensor.  
YES  
Are characteristics of low-pressure sensor normal?  
YES  
1 Pressure by pressure gauge (Check joint)  
2 Pressure display on 7-segment display  
3 Output voltage of I/F P.C. board  
If 1 and 2, 3 are different, an error of pressure sensor error is considered.  
If 2 and 3 are different, check I/F P.C. board.  
NO  
Are service valves of  
gas pipe and liquid pipe of  
outdoor unit fully opened?  
NO  
Correct SV2 and SV4 circuits.  
Are SV2 and SV4 circuits normal?  
YES  
Check wiring, installation and  
connection.  
YES  
YES  
Are outdoor PMV1/2/3 normal?  
1. Connector connection  
Is there mispiping of discharge gas  
and suction gas main pipes?  
Correct piping.  
NO  
2. Wiring  
3. Coil  
Connector CN300, 301, White  
NO  
4. Valve body 5. I/F P.C. board  
YES  
Is indoor unit connected to different refrigerant systems?  
Correct cabling.  
(Check with miswiring check  
YES  
function of outdoor unit.)  
NO  
Is flow selector normal?  
YES  
NO  
Start operation.  
Check flow selector.  
In cooling season, go to (A), In heating season, go to (B)  
Are SV41 and SV42  
Valve circuits normal?  
1. Incorrect installation and  
connection of SV41 and SV42  
2. Leakage from SV41, 42 circuit  
(A) Cooling  
NO  
Correct SV4, SV5, SV11  
valve circuits.  
Are following items normal?  
SV4 valve: Connector CN311, Blue  
NO  
1. Connection  
2. Condenser  
3. Motor  
NO  
NO  
Does indoor fan operate  
normally in cooling season?  
Repair faulty parts.  
4. Fan  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Is there clogging of indoor  
air filter or heat exchanger?  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Cleaning  
Does not refrigerant  
bypass from discharge to  
suction through 4-way valve?  
YES  
Failure  
Replace  
Check 4-way valve.  
NO  
Is indoor PMV normal?  
YES  
NO  
Is connection  
or coil normal?  
Repair faulty parts.  
Replace PMV body.  
NO  
YES  
Is there clogging of the valve?  
NO  
YES  
NO  
Is not refrigerant bypassed  
from discharge to suction?  
YES  
Check piping.  
Refrigerant shortage or,  
clogging or pipe deformed  
NO  
(B) Heating  
Is compressor normal? (Note 2)  
Compressor error  
NO  
Check outdoor  
I/F P.C. board.  
Is indoor fan system normal?  
• Fan cracked  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Is outdoor fan operating  
(Note 2) Check the following items mainly.  
normally in heating season?  
1. Existence of abnormal sound and abnormal vibration during operation or when starting  
2. Abnormal overheat of case during operation or stop (Do not touch.)  
Failure  
Replace  
• Fan loose  
YES  
YES  
3. Current of compressor during operation or starting (No rapid current change)  
YES  
Is there clogging of  
outdoor heat exchanger?  
Cleaning  
YES  
Repair faulty parts.  
Is flow selector unit normal?  
NO  
Check flow selector unit.  
NO  
Is outdoor PMV normal?  
YES  
Refrigerant shortage,  
clogging, pipe breakage  
(After checking there is no slogging or pipe breakage, charge refrigerant again.)  
Refrigerant shortage,  
clogging, pipe deformed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
In some cases, it may be difficult to check for leakage or clogging of refrigerant in low ambient temperature condition.  
[H07] / [d7]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Low oil level protection  
1. Valves of balance pipes closed.  
In this case, it may take longer for the system to warm up before commencing checks.  
(Criteria: Discharge temperature of TD1 and TD2 are 60°C or higher)  
2. Miscabling or misinstallation of TK1 to TK4 sensors  
3. TK1 to TK4 sensor error  
(*1)  
4. Gas leak or oil leak of all outdoor units  
5. Refrigerant stagnation of compressor case  
6. SV3A, 3B, 3D, 3C, 3E valve error  
a) Leakage check for SV3A valve (for multiple outdoor unit system)  
• Turn off the power supply, take off connector of SV3A valve, and then start a test operation after power-ON.  
7. Clogging of oil return circuit from oil separator  
8. Clogging of oil-equation circuit system  
• Check the temperature change at secondary side of SV3A valve during operation  
(1 in the figure on the next page).  
• If temperature is increased, it is a leakage of SV3A valve.  
Replace SV3A valve.  
Are TK1, TK2, TK3, and  
NO  
NO  
Correct miswiring.  
TK4 sensors connected correctly?  
TK1: CN514, TK2: CN515  
b) Leakage check for SV3C valve  
(
)
Is sensor fitted correctly or mis-installed.  
TK3: CN516, TK4: CN523  
• Turn off the power supply, take off connector of SV3C valve, and then start a test operation after power-ON.  
YES  
• After operation for several minutes, check temperature at secondary side of SV3C valve  
(2 in the figure on the next page).  
Are TK1 and TK2 sensors connected correctly?  
Is sensor fitted correctly or mis-installed.  
Are sensor characteristics normal?  
Correct miswiring.  
• If temperature is high (equivalent to discharge temperature TD), it is a leakage of SV3C valve.  
(TS1: CN504, TS2: CN522)  
Sensor error  
Replace  
Characteristics-2  
Replace SV3C valve.  
(Even if there is leakage from SV3C valve does not occur, temperature of SV3C valve at secondary side  
rises during operation. When the checked temperature is equivalent to TD temperature, it is a leakage of  
SV3C valve. Replace SV3C valve.)  
YES  
Abnormal  
Abnormal  
Check leakage of SV6 circuit.  
Normal  
Replace defective parts.  
c) Clogging check for SV3B valve (for multiple outdoor unit system)  
Set up cooling only operation mode.  
Item code (DN) OF  
Cooling only operation mode: 0001  
• While outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] to 7-segment display [Hr], and push SW04  
for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [2] is displayed.  
Check setup of cooling only  
indoor units is correct.  
• Set up SW02 = [9], and turn on SV3A, SV3B, SV3C valves (7-segment display [Hr] [ 3-]).  
Normal  
• While outdoor unit is operating, check temperature change at secondary side of SV3B valve  
(3 in the figure on the next page).  
NO  
Are characteristics of TK1 to TK4 normal?  
YES  
Sensor error  
Replace  
Characteristics-4  
• If temperature does not rise (equivalent to suction temperature), it is a clogging of SV3B valve.  
Replace SV3B valve.  
Abnormal  
NO  
Determine position where  
gas leaked and repair.  
(Recharge, refill oil.)  
Check gas leak of outdoor unit.  
(Check oil leak at the outdoor unit.)  
d) Clogging check for SV3E valve  
• While the outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] the 7-segment display A displays [Hr],  
and push SW04 for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [ 2] is displayed.  
Normal  
Repair the flow selector unit.  
Replace defective parts  
Is the flow selector unit normal?  
YES  
• Set up SW02 = [10], and turn on SV3E valve (7-segment displays [Hr] [ ]).  
• After operating for several minutes, check the pipe temperature at the secondary side of the SV3E valve.  
If it is the equivalent to the outside temperature, SV3E valve may be clogged.  
Replace SV3E valve.  
( 1) Check leakage of  
NO  
YES  
Check accumulation of  
solenoid valve. (SV3C)  
Check clogging.  
(SV3E)  
refrigerant in compressor case.  
• Note: If SV3E valve is clogged, the temperature of all TK1 to TK4 sensors do not change.  
Refrigerant accumulation  
No leakage or clogging  
(*2) Clogging check for SV3D valve of oil return circuit from oil separator  
a) Oil return circuit  
Correct accumulation of  
refrigerant in compressor case,  
reset power supply and  
start operation.  
( 2) Check clogging in oil  
YES  
• While outdoor unit is operating, check temperature (secondary side of capillary) on oil return circuit  
(5 in the figure on the next page).  
recovery circuit of the oil separator.  
(Capillary, Strainer)  
Replace defective parts  
Check clogging of SV3D valve.  
If temperature is equivalent to suction temperature, a clogging of strainer of oil return circuit or capillary is  
considered.  
Check oil level judgment  
of each compressor.  
No clogging  
Repair the clogged part.  
SW01/02/03=1/16/1 are  
displayed on 7-segment display.  
b) Clogging check for SV3D valve  
• While outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] to 7-segment display [Hr], and push SW04  
for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [2] is displayed.  
Are all the oil levels appropriate?  
YES  
NO  
• Set up SW02 = [7], and turn on SV3D valve (7-segment display [Hr] [ 3d]).  
Clogging  
• If temperature is low at secondary side of the valve or it does not change, clogging of valve, capillary, or  
strainer is considered ( 6 in the figure on the next page).  
Check clogging of  
oil-equalization circuit.  
( 3)  
Replace defective parts  
Eliminate cause of stagnation.  
Indoor/outdoor PMV error  
(Cause of refrigerant stagnation)  
Discharge check valve error, etc.  
(Note) When refrigerant stagnates in compressor shell, there may appear to be a low oil level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
(*3) Check for solenoid valve of outdoor unit (for multiple outdoor unit system)  
a) Clogging check for SV3A valve  
[H08] / [d4]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Oil level detective  
temperature sensor error  
TK1 to TK4 sensor Open/Short  
• While outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] to 7-segment display [Hr], and push SW04  
for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [2] is displayed.  
• Set up SW02 = [4], and turn on SV3A valve (7-segment display [Hr] [ 3A]).  
Sub-code: 01: TK1 sensor error 02: TK2 sensor error 03: TK3 sensor error 04: TK4 sensor error  
• If temperature is low at secondary side of the valve or it does not change, clogging of valve or check valve  
is considered (1 in the figure).  
This error is an oil level temperature sensor error.  
Check for disconnection of the wiring and resistance value of the sensor.  
If the sensors are normal, replace the outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Circuit  
Connector  
b) Clogging check for SV3C valve  
TK1  
TK2  
TK3  
TK4  
CN514 (Black)  
CN515 (Green)  
CN516 (Red)  
• While outdoor unit is operating, set up SW01/02/03 = [2] [1] [3] to 7-segment display [Hr], and push SW04  
for 2 seconds or more, [Hr] [2] is displayed.  
• Set up SW02 = [6], and turn on SV3C valve (7-segment display [Hr] [ 3C]).  
• If temperature does not increase, clogging of valve or strainer is considered (2 in the figure).  
CN523 (Yellow)  
(*4)  
a) Clogging check for oil-equalization circuit  
• Operate the outdoor unit (drive both compressors in the unit).  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
• After operating for 10 minutes, check temperature of TK1 and TK2 sensors and temperature of oil equal-  
ization circuit capillary (7 in the figure) have increased.  
[H16] / [d7]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
TK1 temperature detective circuit error 1. Connection of TK1 sensor. Error in  
resistance value of TK1 sensor  
(Sub-code: 01)  
(Criteria)  
2. Oil-equalization circuit error  
(Check valve, capillary clogging,  
strainer clogging)  
TK1, TK2=Td1, Td2 temperature - Approx. 10 to 30°C  
Oil-equalization capillary tubes should be significantly higher than outside air temperature and suction  
temperature.  
3. Refrigerant stagnation in case of  
compressor shell  
• If temperature is low, a malfunction of capillary, strainer, or check valve is to be considered.  
Repair the defective parts.  
High-pressure  
sensor  
YES  
YES  
Has TK1 sensor become detached?  
NO  
Correct installation of sensor.  
5
Check joint  
(SV2)  
Oil  
separator  
Correct wiring/installation.  
TK1: CN514  
Is there incorrect wiring or installation  
on TK1/TK2/TK3/TK4 sensors?  
TK2: CN515  
TK3: CN516  
TK4: CN523  
(
)
* Characteristics-4  
(SV3D)  
NO  
Solenoid valve  
Solenoid valve  
(SV41)  
(SV42)  
NO  
Are characteristics of TK1 sensor  
resistance value normal?  
Sensor error  
6
* Outdoor unit temp sensor characteristics-4  
High-pressure  
SW  
High-pressure  
SW  
YES  
Error  
Sensor  
(TD2)  
(TD1)  
Start a test operation in COOL or HEAT mode.  
Replace clogged part.  
2
TK1 sensor temp is displayed on 7-segment display with SW01/02/03=[1] [11] [2].  
Sensor  
(TK3)  
Check TK1 sensor temp. approx. 10 minutes after compressor 1 has operated.  
If low temperature continues (approximately outside ambient temp.) or  
temperature does not change, a clogging of strainer of oil-equalization circuit,  
clogging of capillary tube, or malfunction of check valve is to be considered.  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Compressor 1  
Strainer  
No error  
(TK1)  
(TK2)  
Oil tank  
Capillary tube  
TK1  
(TK4)  
(SV3E)  
7
4
Oil tank  
Error  
Check the clogging of SV3E valve.  
7
(Note 1)  
(SV3A)  
(Note 1) Refer to item [H07] error.  
1
No error  
Solenoid  
valve  
Strainer  
(SV3B)  
Check I/F P.C. board  
Replace SV3E valve.  
Balance pipe  
Packed valve  
Check  
valve  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[H16] / [d7]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
TK2 detective circuit system error  
(Sub-code: 02)  
1. Connection of TK2 sensor.  
[H16] / [d7]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
TK3 temperature detective circuit error 1. Connection of TK3 sensor.  
(Sub-code: 03)  
2. Error in resistance value of TK2 sensor  
(see 9-7 Sensor characteristics).  
2. Error in resistance value of TK3 sensor  
(see 9-7 Sensor characteristics).  
3. Oil-equalization circuit error  
(check valve, capillary clogging,  
strainer clogging).  
3. Error of SV3C valve circuit periphery  
(check capillary clogging, strainer  
clogging).  
4. Refrigerant stagnation in case of  
compressor shell.  
4. Refrigerant stagnation in case of  
compressor shell.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Has TK2 sensor become detached?  
NO  
Correct installation of sensor.  
Has TK3 sensor become detached?  
NO  
Correct installation of sensor.  
Correct wiring/installation.  
TK1: CN514  
Correct wiring/installation.  
TK1: CN514  
Is there incorrect wiring or installation  
on TK1/TK2/TK3/TK4 sensors?  
Is there incorrect wiring or installation  
on TK1/TK2/TK3/TK4 sensors?  
TK2: CN515  
TK3: CN516  
TK4: CN523  
TK2: CN515  
TK3: CN516  
TK4: CN523  
(
)
(
)
NO  
NO  
NO  
Outdoor unit temp sensor characteristics-4  
NO  
Are characteristics of TK2 sensor  
resistance value normal?  
Are characteristics of TK3 sensor  
resistance value normal?  
Sensor error  
Sensor error  
Replace  
* Outdoor unit temp sensor characteristics-4  
YES  
YES  
After power reset,  
check capillary choke of SV3C valve bypass.  
YES  
Does OCR of MG-SW operate?  
Reset OCR manually.( 2)  
Replace clogging part.  
Error  
Start a test operation in COOL or HEAT mode.  
Replace clogged part (Capillary).  
NO  
TK3 sensor temp is displayed on 7-segment display with SW01/02/03=[1] [13] [2].  
After power reset  
Check TK3 sensor temp. approx. 10 minutes after compressor 2 has operated.  
If low temperature continues (approximately outside ambient temp.) or  
temperature does not change, a clogging of parallel capillary is considered.  
Error  
Strainer  
Start a test operation in COOL or HEAT mode.  
TK2 sensor temp is displayed on 7-segment display with SW01/02/03=[1] [12] [2].  
No error  
Check TK2 sensor temp approx. 10 minutes after compressor 2 has operated.  
If low temperature continues (approximately outside temp) or temperature  
does not change, a clogging of strainer of oil-equalization circuit,  
clogging of capillary or malfunction of check valve is considered.  
SV3E valve  
Compressor 2  
Strainer  
TK3  
No error  
Error  
Check the clogging of SV3E valve.  
Replace SV3E valve.  
(Note 1)  
Capillary tube  
(Note 1) Refer to item [H07] error.  
No error  
TK2  
Error  
Oil tank  
Check the clogging of SV3E valve.  
Check I/F P.C. board  
(*1)  
1
Refer to item [H07] error.  
No error  
Check I/F P.C. board  
Replace SV3E valve.  
2
If OCR operates even after manual reset of OCR, check whether the wiring to the  
current sensor (T02) of Comp-IPDU is correct or not.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[H16] / [d7]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
TK4 temperature detective circuit error 1. Connection of TK4 sensor.  
[L04] / [96]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Duplicated setup of outdoor line address Outdoor line addresses are duplicated.  
(Sub-code: 04)  
2. Error in resistance value of TK4 sensor  
(see 9-7 Sensor characteristics).  
3. Check clogging and malfunction of  
SV3E valve circuit.  
YES  
Are there duplicate line address setups?  
NO  
Correct the line address setup.  
Correct the wire connection.  
4. Oil-equalization circuit error (check  
capillary clogging, strainer clogging).  
5. Refrigerant stagnation in case of  
compressor shell.  
NO  
Are communication wire connections of  
[U1.U2], [U3.U4], and [U5, U6] normal?  
YES  
YES  
Has TK4 sensor become detached?  
NO  
Correct installation of sensor.  
YES  
Check outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
Repeat the address setup.  
(Refer to “Address setup”.)  
Correct wiring/installation.  
TK1: CN514  
Failure  
Replace  
Is there incorrect wiring or installation  
on TK1/TK2/TK3/TK4 sensors?  
TK2: CN515  
TK3: CN516  
TK4: CN523  
(
)
NO  
NO  
Are characteristics of TK4 sensor  
resistance value normal?  
Sensor error  
Replace  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
YES  
[L05] / [96]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Duplicated indoor units with priority  
(Displayed on indoor unit with priority)  
1. Two or more prior indoor units exist.  
YES  
Does OCR of MG-SW operate?  
NO  
Reset OCR manually.( 2)  
This check code is displayed on the set indoor unit when setup of indoor unit with priority is duplicated.  
• Priority setup with two or more units is not available. Choose one prior unit in one refrigerant circuit system.  
No error  
Check the clogging of SV3E valve.  
( 1)  
Check I/F P.C. board  
1
2
Refer to item [H07] error.  
Error  
If OCR operates even after manual reset of OCR, check whether the wiring to the  
current sensor (T02) of Comp-IPDU is correct or not.  
Replace SV3E valve.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check the clogging of SV3E valve.  
[L06] / [96]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Duplicated indoor units with priority  
(Displayed on the indoor unit other than  
one with priority and on the outdoor unit)  
Two or more indoor units with priority  
are duplicated.  
Sub-code: No. of indoor units with priority  
Check code  
Check code name  
Duplicated indoor header units  
Cause of operation  
[L03] / [96]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
There were two or more indoor header  
units within the same remote controller  
group.  
When indoor unit with priority is duplicated, this fault code is displayed on the unit other than the setup indoor unit  
and outdoor unit.  
• As only one indoor unit with priority is valid, change the setup.  
1) Check the connection of the remote controller after the connection has been changed.  
2) If the group configuration and address are normal when power has been turned on, the mode automatically shifts  
to address setup mode. (Re-setup of address) → Refer to “Address setup”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[L07] / [99]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Group line in individual indoor unit  
The group line is connected in the  
individual indoor unit.  
[L10] / [88]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Outdoor capacity unset  
The model selection jumper of the outdoor I/F  
P.C. board does not match the model.  
Item code (D1) 12: Line address  
Item code (D2) 13: Indoor address  
Item code (D3) 14: Group address  
YES  
Check setup item code  
DN 12, 13, and 14 addresses.  
Is there group wiring?  
NO  
Service I/F P.C. board for the outdoor unit is common to all outdoor units.  
The service I/F P.C. board will need to be set up for the correct model based upon the faulty I/F P.C. board, which it is  
replacing. Set up the model based upon the I/F P.C. board assembly change procedure.  
YES  
Is there an individual indoor unit.  
NO  
Correct indoor group address.  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Failure  
Replace  
[L17] / [46]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Inconsistent models of  
outdoor units  
There are outdoor units on the communication  
line other than Super Module Multi Flex type  
such as Super Module Multi or Super Module  
Multi ice regenerative type  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[L08] / [99]*  
Indoor group / address unset  
Indoor address unset  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Are the connected outdoor  
units those for flex on 1 system?  
(Check model name.)  
NO  
NO  
Replace outdoor units of other models  
with specified models  
NO  
Is the power on all the  
indoor units turned on?  
Turn on the power of indoor units.  
YES  
YES  
Is the check code [L17]  
displayed even if turning power on  
again of all the connected outdoor  
units on 1 system alone?  
Disconnect connectors between  
[U1, U2] and [U3, U4].  
Correct communication line between  
outdoor units.  
Turn on the power of outdoor unit again.  
YES  
Clear addresses.  
(Refer to “Address clear”.)  
Are all the connected  
NO  
Change the incorrectly built-in outdoor  
I/F P.C. board's with I/F P.C. board's for  
Super Module Multi Flex.  
outdoor I/F P.C. board's on 1 system  
P.C. board's of outdoor units for  
Super Module Multi Flex?  
Re-execute address setup.  
(Refer to “Address setup”.)  
YES  
Check again whether there is any  
other outdoor unit or not on the  
communication line in 1 system.  
If any, turn off power of the  
corresponding outdoor unit and  
then check once more.  
Note) This code is displayed when the power is turned on at the first time after installation.  
(Because the address is not yet set up)  
∗ Using 7-segment on I/F P.C. board, check the model name on each outdoor unit.  
For check, when putting the rotary switch on SW01/02/03=16/16/16, it is an  
outdoor I/F P.C. board, for Super Module Multi Flex if “F” is displayed at the left  
side of 7-segment [A] part.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Indoor capacity unset  
[L09] / [46]  
Indoor capacity unset  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
YES  
Are capacity setups  
of indoor units unset?  
Set up capacity data of indoor unit.  
(Setup item code (DN) = 11)  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[L18] / [8A]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Flow selector unit system error  
An indoor unit which has been operated in  
cooling only mode is operated in heating mode  
without setup for cooling only mode.  
[L29] / [CF]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
IPDU quantity error  
1. Incorrect model setup in service for I/F P.C.  
board  
2. Communication error between IPDU, fan  
IPDU and I/F  
3. IPDU, fan IPDU, I/F P.C. board error  
NO  
Set up All cooling mode.  
Item code (DN)=OF  
Cooling only operation mode=0001  
Is every indoor unit been  
set up for cooling only mode?  
Sub-code:  
YES  
01: IPDU1 error  
02: IPDU2 error  
03: IPDU1, 2 error  
05: IPDU1, fan IPDU error  
04: Fan IPDU error  
06: IPDU2, fan IPDU error  
Check flow selector unit.  
07: All IPDU error or disconnection of communication line between IPDU-I/F P.C. board or outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
NO  
Is jumper setup of outdoor I/F P.C. board correct?  
Correct connection.  
(Jumpers 7, 8, 9 ON)  
YES  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
YES  
Is communication connector between  
Correct connection.  
[L20] / [98]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Duplicated central  
control addresses  
Central control addresses are duplicated.  
IPDU and I/F P.C. board connected?  
NO  
Are two or more  
central control system with identical  
network addresses connected?  
YES  
YES  
Is the communication line between  
IPDU and I/F P.C. board disconnected?  
Correct the network address  
of the central control system.  
Reconnect communication line.  
NO  
NO  
Is there voltage fluctuation between  
pin 4 and pin 5 of CN600 on I/F P.C. board  
(measure by tester: DC 0 to 5 V).  
NO  
NO  
Check the network adaptor  
on the indoor P.C. board.  
I/F P.C. board error  
YES  
Is there voltage fluctuation between  
pin 3 and pin 5 of CN600 on I/F P.C. board  
(measure by tester: DC 0 to 5 V).  
IPDU P.C. board error  
Check code  
[L28] / [46]  
Check code name  
Quantity over of  
Cause of operation  
1. Quantity over of connected outdoor units  
YES  
Both IPDU (No.1, No.2) and fan IPDU  
did not return the communication.  
connected outdoor units  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
2. Connection error of communication line  
between outdoor units  
3. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
On the fan power supply P.C. board,  
NO  
1) CN503: Between 1 and 5 pins  
2) CN503: Between 2 and 5 pins  
12V  
7V  
Replace fan power supply on P.C. board.  
NO  
NO  
Is No. of connected  
3) Between +5V and GND at the side of CN505: 5V  
Max. 3 units are allowed for flex system.  
outdoor units below 3 units?  
YES  
YES  
P.C. board to be replaced  
IPDU1  
Auxiliary code  
Replace IPDU P.C. board with trouble.  
Is the communication line  
between outdoor units correct?  
Correct connection of the communication line.  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
IPDU2  
YES  
IPDU1, 2  
Fan IPDU  
Check outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
IPDU1, fan IPDU  
IPDU2, fan IPDU  
IPDU1, 2, fan IPDU, I/F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Outside error was input.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[L30] / [b6]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Interlock in indoor unit  
from outside  
[P03] / [1E]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Discharge tempTD1 error  
1. Service valve of outdoor unit closed.  
2. Outdoor PMV1, 2 error  
3. TD sensor error  
4. Refrigerant short, clogging in pipe  
5. 4-way valve error  
NO  
NO  
Is outside device connected  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Failure Replace  
to connector CN80?  
6. SV4 circuit leakage, misinstallation  
7. SV5 circuit leakage  
YES  
8. SV6 circuit clogging  
9. Discharge gas/Suction gas pipes mispiping  
10. Flow selector unit error  
Check outside device.  
Does outside device correctly operate?  
YES  
Failure  
Replace  
Are service valves of  
NO  
Check cause of the operation.  
outdoor discharge gas, suction gas,  
and liquid pipe fully opened?  
Open service valves fully.  
Repair outdoor PMV.  
YES  
Are outdoor PMV1 and PMV2 normal?  
1. Connector connection  
2. Wiring  
NO  
* Connector CN300, 301 White  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
3. Coil  
4. Valve itself  
[L31] / [–]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Extended IC error  
1. Outdoor unit power error  
2. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
5. Outdoor P.C. board  
YES  
NO  
Is resistance characteristic  
of TD1 sensor normal?  
Replace TD1.  
YES  
Are there any faults with the  
outdoor unit power supply?  
Check power voltage and line.  
Check auxiliaty noise, etc.  
Refer to Outdoor unit temperature  
sensor characteristics-4.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is there any refrigerant leakage on  
Check 4-way valve.  
discharge gas to suction side on the 4-way valve?  
Check outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
YES  
SV4 circuit  
1. Are not coils of SV41 and  
SV42 valves mounted reversely?  
2. Is no leakage from SV41?  
Correct mounting of valve coils  
or replace SV41 valve.  
YES  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Abnormal  
Abnormal  
Replace defective parts.  
Replace defective parts.  
Check leakage of SV5 circuit.  
Normal  
[P01] / [11]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Indoor fan motor error  
1. Cabling error  
2. Check fan motor.  
Check clogging of SV6 circuit.  
Normal  
∗ For the models installed with AC fan motor only  
YES  
YES  
Is there a connection error or  
Correct cabling circuit for  
the connector connection.  
Abnormal  
NO  
disconnection of CN076 connector?  
Check mispiping of discharge gas /  
suction gas main pipes.  
Correct piping.  
Repair flow selector unit.  
Correct wiring.  
NO  
Normal  
Is not there mechanical lock of fan motor?  
NO  
Replace fan motor.  
Is the flow selector unit normal?  
YES  
NO  
Is not indoor unit in other  
refrigerant line connected?  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Failure  
Replace  
YES  
(Check there is no pipe breakage, and then recharge refrigerant.)  
Refrigerant short, clogging, pipe breakage  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
1. High-pressure SW error  
A
C All heating operation  
All heating operation  
[P04] / [21]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Actuation of  
high-pressure SW  
Repair SV4 circuit.  
Coil error, clogging,  
2. Service valve closed  
NO  
Is SV4 circuit normal?  
YES  
3. Pd sensor error  
(
)
disconnection of wiring, etc.  
4. Indoor/outdoor fan error  
5. Indoor/outdoor PMV choke  
6. Indoor/outdoor heat exchanger clogging, air short circuit  
7. SV2 circuit error  
Refrigerant overcharge,  
clogging,pipe breakage,  
abnormal overload condition  
YES  
NO  
8. SV4 circuit error  
Does heating indoor fan  
normally operate?  
9. SV5 circuit error  
10. Discharge line check valve malfunction  
11. Refrigerant overcharge  
NO  
Is connector  
connection,  
coil normal?  
NO  
Is indoor  
PMV normal?  
YES  
Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side  
Note) High-pressure SW is normally closed.  
YES  
(B contact)  
Repair  
faulty parts.  
Are there any  
NO  
NO  
obstructions in the operation  
of the indoor heat exchanger?  
1 Air filter clogging  
Does high-pressure SW operate?  
Is circuit cabling normal?  
YES  
Check and correct cabling.  
Check I/F P.C. board.  
YES  
YES  
2 Heat exchanger clogging  
3 Air short circuit  
Are connector connection, NO  
heat exchanger, fan, and  
fan motor normal?  
Failure  
Replace  
NO  
NO  
Check parts.  
YES  
Are parts of high-pressure SW normal?  
Eliminate the  
interfered causes.  
Failure  
Replace  
Repair  
YES  
faulty parts.  
NO  
Is service valve fully opened?  
Open service valve fully.  
Correct piping.  
NO  
Is 4-way valve normal?  
YES  
YES  
Are characteristics of TC2  
and TCJ sensor resistance  
value normal?  
NO  
Abnormal  
Check for mispiping of  
discharge/suction gas main pipes.  
Replace 4-way valve.  
NO  
Normal  
Abnormal  
YES  
Check operation of PMV3 SV12 valve.  
Replace defective parts.  
Replace TC2  
or TCJ sensor.  
Is SV11 circuit normal?  
YES  
Normal  
Abnormal  
Is the flow selector normal?  
Repair the flow selector unit.  
Repair faulty position.  
NO  
Is there clogging  
of the valve?  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Failure  
Normal  
Replace  
All cooling operation To  
All heating operation To  
B
C
Reset power supply, and start a test  
operation corresponding to the season.  
YES  
NO  
Replace PMV body.  
Are indoor units of different  
refrigerant circuit connected?  
Are characteristics of  
high-pressure sensor normal?  
Replace the high-pressure sensor.  
Check with miscabling check  
function of outdoor unit.  
YES  
(
)
Check and  
correct the cabling.  
Refrigerant overcharge, clogging,  
pipe breakage, abnormal overload condition  
B
All cooling operation  
NO  
NO  
Is there no crack or  
coming-off of fan?  
Does cooling outdoor fan normally operate?  
YES  
Repair faulty parts.  
Connector connection,  
fan IPDU, fan motor, wiring  
YES  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Are there any obstructions in the operation of the indoor heat exchanger?  
YES  
1. Air filter clogging  
Eliminate the interfered causes.  
2. Heat exchanger clogging  
3. Air short circuit  
[P05] / [AF]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Open phase, negative phase  
1. Power supply open phase  
2. Power supply negative phase  
NO  
NO  
Is SV2 circuit normal?  
Repair SV2 circuit.  
Coil error, clogging,  
• Check the phase power line of outdoor unit.  
• Check error of outdoor I/F P.C. board.  
• Check there is no looseness, etc of terminal.  
YES  
A
(
)
disconnection of wiring, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
1. Power voltage error  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[P07] / [1C]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Heat sink overheat error  
[P12] / [11]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Indoor fan motor error  
1. Cabling error of fan motor connector  
2. Fan motor error  
2. Outdoor fan system error  
3. Heat sink installation error  
3. Indoor P.C. board error  
4. Clogging of hear sink cooling duct  
5. IPDU P.C. board error (TH sensor error)  
Detectable only in models with DC fan motor  
Turn off power supply.  
4-way Air Discharge Cassette, or Concealed Duct Standard type  
Under Ceiling, or High Wall type  
Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side  
(
)
NO  
Is power voltage normal?*  
Correct power line.  
Correct wiring such as cable to compressor.  
Check fan and fan motor.  
Tighten screws.  
Is there connection error or  
disconnection on connector CN333, CN334  
of indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402)?  
YES  
* 380–415V ± 10%  
Correct connector connection.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Is wiring of IPDU normal?  
YES  
Remove connectors CN333 and CN334  
on indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402).  
NO  
Is indoor fan normal?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
YES  
Does fan turn without trouble  
when turning it with hands?  
Is fixing between IPDU and heat sink loose?  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
NO  
YES  
YES  
Is there blocking of heat sink cooling duct?  
Clear blocking.  
Is resistance value between each phase  
NO  
at motor side of fan motor connector CN333 on  
indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402) correct?  
1
Check IPDU P.C. board.  
YES  
1
• Is not winding 1 (Red lead) to 3 (White lead), 3 (White lead) to 5 (Black lead),  
5 (Black lead) to 1 (Red lead) opened/shorted?  
Resistance value should satisfy the follows.  
[4-way Air Discharge Cassette type]  
MMU-AP0091H, AP0301  
MMU-AP0361H, AP0561  
Approx. 70 to 100  
Approx. 35 to 50  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[Concealed Duct Standard, Under Ceiling, High Wall type]  
15 to 35  
[P10] / [0b]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Indoor overflow error  
1. Float SW operation error  
2. Drain pump operation error  
3. Clogging of drain pipe  
4. Indoor P.C. board error  
•
Check insulation resistance between the cabinet and 1, 3, 5? Should be 10 or more  
Is resistance value at motor side of  
NO  
fan motor connector CN334 on indoor P.C. board  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
(MCC-1402) correct?  
2
YES  
2
Sub-code: Indoor address with trouble  
Check insulation resistance value of fan motor position detective circuit.  
• Is winding 1 (Yellow lead) to 4 (Pink lead) opened/shorted?  
Resistance should be 5 to 20k  
Is float SW connector  
(Indoor control P.C. board CN34)  
connected normally?  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Correct  
Is output of indoor fan motor position  
detective signal correct?  
connector connection.  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
3
YES  
YES  
3
NO  
Check fan motor position detective signal.  
Check and correct wiring.  
Does float SW operate?  
YES  
Is wiring normal?  
YES  
• Measure voltage with tester between CN334 1 and 5 on indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402)  
under condition of CN333 and CN334 installed and power-ON.  
Turn fan slowly with hands so that pin voltage fluctuates between 0 and 5V.  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Failure Replace  
CN333  
• Between 4 and 5: 5V  
NO  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402).  
Failure Replace  
Is power supply to  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Does drain pump operate?  
YES  
drain pump normal?  
Failure  
Replace  
YES  
Replace drain pump,  
and check cabling.  
•
Check there is 220–240 V voltage of  
1-3 pin of CN68 on indoor P.C. board.  
Check drain pipe, etc.  
CN334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[P13] / [47]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Outdoor liquid back detection error 1. PMV1/PMV2 error  
2. Pd sensor, Ps sensor error  
[P15] / [AE]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Gas leak detection  
1. Outdoor unit service valve closed  
2. Outdoor PMV error  
TS condition (Sub-code: 01)  
3. Clogging of SV2 circuit  
3. TS1 sensor error  
4. Clogging of SV3B circuit, balance pipe  
5. Leakage on main discharge pipe  
6. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
4. Refrigerant shortage, clogging refrigerant  
circuit  
5. 4-way valve error  
6. SV4 circuit error  
NO  
NO  
Are connections of outdoor  
Correct connector connection.  
(CN300, CN301)  
NO  
NO  
Are service valves at gas and  
liquid side fully opened?  
PMV1/PMV2 connectors correct?  
Open service valves fully.  
Repair outdoor PMV.  
Replace TS2 sensor.  
YES  
YES  
Are operations of outdoor  
PMV1/PMV2 normal?  
PMV error  
Is outdoor PMV1, 2 normal?  
1. Connector connection  
2. Wiring  
YES  
3. Coil  
Connectors CN300, 301 White  
4. Valve body  
5. Outdoor I/F P.C. board  
NO  
NO  
Are characteristics of Pd sensor/Ps sensor  
output voltage normal?  
Pd sensor/Ps sensor error  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Refer to outdoor unit temperature  
Are characteristics of  
TS2 sensor resistance normal?  
Correct connector connection.  
(CV2: CN302)  
Is SV2 valve coil correctly connected?  
YES  
sensor characteristics-3.  
YES  
Does not discharge  
refrigerant gas bypass to suction side  
through 4-way valve?  
YES  
YES  
Is there any miswiring or  
misinstallation on TS1 and TS2 sensors?  
Check and replace 4-way valve and coil.  
Correct miswiring/installation  
NO  
NO  
Check I/F P.C. board.  
NO  
Is there no leakage of  
Repair SV41 and SV42 circuits.  
Coil, valve body,  
SV41 and 42 valve circuits?  
YES  
(
)
disconnection of cable, etc  
Abnormal  
Abnormal  
Check mispiping of discharge gas/  
suction gas main pipes.  
Correct piping.  
Normal  
Is the flow selector unit normal?  
Normal  
Repair the flow selector unit.  
Refrigerant shortage,  
clogging, pipe breakage.  
(Check there is no clogging and pipe breakage, and then recharge refrigerant.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[P15] / [AE]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Gas leak detection  
1. Outdoor unit service valve closed  
2. Outdoor PMV error  
3. TD sensor error  
[P17] / [bb]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Discharge tempTD2 error  
1. Outdoor unit service valve closed  
2. Outdoor PMV error  
TD condition (Sub-code: 02)  
3. TD sensor error  
4. SV4 circuit error  
4. Refrigerant shortage, clogging of refrigerant circuit  
5. 4-way valve error  
5. Refrigerant shortage, clogging refrigerant  
circuit  
6. SV4 circuit leakage, misinstallation  
7. SV5 circuit leakage  
8. SV6 circuit clogging  
NO  
Are service valves on gas  
and the liquid sides fully opened?  
Open the service valves fully.  
9. Mispiping of discharge gas/suction gas pipes  
10. Flow selector unit error  
YES  
NO  
Are service valves of gas and  
liquid sides fully opened?  
Open service valves fully.  
Repair outdoor PMV.  
Is outdoor PMV1, 2 normal?  
1. Connector connection  
2. Cabling  
NO  
Connectors CN300, 301 White  
Repair outdoor PMV.  
YES  
3. Coil  
4. Valve body  
5. Outdoor I/F P.C. board  
Is outdoor PMV normal?  
1. Connector connection  
2. Cabling  
NO  
* Connectors CN300, 301 White  
YES  
3. Coil  
4. Valve body  
5. Outdoor I/F P.C. board  
NO  
Refer to outdoor unit temperature  
Are characteristics of  
TD1, TD2 sensor resistance normal?  
Replace TD1 or TD2 sensor.  
YES  
sensor characteristics-4.  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TD2 sensor resistance normal?  
Replace TD2 sensor.  
Check 4-way valve.  
* Refer to outdoor unit  
temperature sensor  
characteristics-4.  
NO  
Is SV4 valve circuit normal?  
(Coil misinstallation, valve leakage)  
YES  
Repair SV41 and SV42 circuits.  
NO  
Does not discharge refrigerant gas by  
pass to suction sidethrough 4-way valve?  
Coil, valve body, coil installation,  
disconnection of cable, etc.  
YES  
(
)
YES  
NO  
Are there indoor units connected  
in different refrigerant circuit?  
SV4 circuit  
Correct cabling.  
1. Are not SV41 and SV42 valve  
coils installed reversely?  
2. Is there no leakage through  
SV42 circuit?  
NO  
Correct installation of valve coil.  
Replace SV42 valve.  
YES  
Abnormal  
YES  
Check leakage of SV5 circuit.  
YES  
Check leakage of  
Replace defective parts.  
SV5 and SV11 circuits.  
NO  
NO  
Replace defective parts.  
Replace defective parts.  
Normal  
Abnormal  
Abnormal  
Check for mispiping of discharge  
gas/suction gas main pipes.  
Check clogging of SV6 circuit.  
YES  
Correct piping.  
Normal  
NO  
NO  
Check mispiping of discharge gas/  
suction gas main pipes.  
Correct piping.  
Repair the flow selector unit.  
Correct cabling.  
Is the flow selector unit normal?  
Normal  
Repair the flow selector unit.  
YES  
Is the flow selector unit normal?  
YES  
Refrigerant shortage,  
clogging, pipe breakage.  
(Check there is no clogging and pipe breakage and then recharge refrigerant.)  
NO  
Are there indoor units connected  
in different refrigerant circuit?  
Use the mis-wiring check  
(
(
)
function of outdoor unit.  
YES  
Check there is no clogging and pipe leakage,  
and then recharge with refrigerant.  
Refrigerant shortage, clogging, pipe breakage.  
)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
1. 4-way valve error  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[P19] / [08]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
4-way valve operation error  
[P20] / [22]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
High-pressure protective operation 1. Pd sensor error  
2. Service valve closed.  
2. TS1 sensor/TE1 sensor error  
3. Pd sensor/Ps sensor error  
3. Indoor/outdoor fan error  
4. TE sensor/TL sensor misconnection  
4. Indoor/outdoor PMV clogging  
5. Indoor/outdoor heat exchanger clogging  
6. SV2 circuit error  
Sub-code: Detected outdoor unit No.  
7. SV4 circuit error  
8. SV5 circuit error  
9. Outdoor I/F P.C. board error  
NO  
Is 4-way valve coil  
connector connected?  
Correct connector connection.  
(4-way valve coil: CN317)  
10. Operation error of check valve of main  
discharge pipe  
YES  
11. Refrigerant overcharge  
Correct connector connection.  
TS1 sensor: CN504  
TE1 sensor: CN505  
Pd sensor: CN501  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Are TS1, TE1, Pd, Ps sensor  
connectors connected?  
Are service valves fully opened?  
YES  
Open service valves fully.  
Check parts.  
Ps sensor: CN500  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
high-pressure sensor normal?  
Failure  
Replace  
Are characteristics of resistance value  
of TS1 and TE1 sensors normal?  
YES  
Replace sensor.  
Replace sensor.  
Abnormal  
Check mispiping of discharge gas/  
suction gas main pipes.  
Correct piping.  
YES  
Normal  
Check operation of PMV3 SV12.  
Normal  
Abnormal  
Abnormal  
Replace defective parts.  
Are output voltage characteristics  
of Pd and Ps sensors normal?  
Is the flow selector unit normal?  
Normal  
Repair the flow selector unit.  
YES  
All cooling operation To  
All heating operation To  
B
C
Reset power supply, and start a test  
operation corresponded to the season.  
Are connection and installation  
of TE1 and TL sensors correct?  
Correct connection  
and installation.  
1. Pressure by pressure gauge (Check joint)  
2. Pressure display on 7-segment display  
3. Output voltage of I/F P.C. board  
YES  
B
All cooling operation  
If 1 and 2, 3 are different, an error of pressure sensor is considered.  
If 2 and 3 are different, check I/F P.C. board.  
Reset the power supply and  
start heating test operation.  
NO  
Does cooling outdoor fan normally operate?  
Correct faulty parts.  
YES  
Is there no fan crack or coming-off?  
NO  
YES  
Correct faulty parts.  
NO  
Is the flow selector unit normal?  
YES  
Replace the FS unit.  
(Connector connection, fan IPDU, fan motor, wiring)  
NO  
Is outdoor PMV1, 2 normal?  
YES  
Correct faulty position.  
(Connector connection wiring, coil mounting, valve clogging, etc)  
Does refrigerant gas  
discharge to suction side  
If an error did not occur  
in test operation,  
restart the operation.  
YES  
NO  
Are there any obstructions to the  
operation of the heat exchanger?  
1. Blocked heat exchanger  
2. Air short circuit  
Does 4-way valve operate?  
NO  
YES  
through 4-way valve?  
1
Eliminate the interfered causes.  
YES  
NO  
Is SV2 circuit normal?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Repair SV2 circuit.  
4-way valve error  
Check 4-way valve.  
(Coil error, clogging, disconnection of cable, etc.)  
Is SV4 circuit normal?  
YES  
Repair SV4 circuit.  
1 Check TS and TE temperature of the outdoor unit which compressors is operated.  
(Coil error, clogging, disconnection of cable, etc.)  
(I/F) SW01=[1], SW02=[6], SW03=[2]  
SW01=[1], SW02=[7], SW03=[2]  
TS sensor temperature  
TE sensor temperature  
NO  
Does the check valve of the main  
discharge pipe operate normally?  
Repair check valve. Replace  
Judgment criteria  
YES  
TE sensor: Normal if TE ≤ 20˚C except summer season (Outside temp 20˚C or lower)  
TS sensor: Normal if TS ≤ 40˚C except summer season (Outside temp 20˚C or lower)  
Refrigerant overcharge, clogging,  
pipe breakage, abnormal overload condition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
C
[P22] / [1A]  
Outdoor fan IPDU error  
1. Fan lock  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
2. Fan IPDU P.C. board error  
3. Overload  
All heating operation  
4. External cause such as power surge  
5. Fan IPDU power P.C. board error  
Is connector  
NO  
NO  
NO  
connection of indoor  
heat exchanger fan or  
fan motor normal?  
Does heating indoor fan  
normally operate?  
Sub-code:  
0 ∗ : IGBT short circuit  
1 ∗ : Position detect circuit error  
4 ∗ : Motor current error detected  
D∗ : TH sensor error  
3 ∗ : Motor lock error  
YES  
YES  
C∗ : TH sensor error (Heat sink overheat)  
E∗ : Vdc error  
Is indoor PMV normal?  
YES  
Repair faulty parts.  
NO  
NO  
Are wire connections on the fan IPDU  
and the power P.C. board assembly normal?  
Correct cable connector connection.  
Are characteristics  
of sensor TC2 and TCJ  
resistance normal?  
NO  
Is connector connection  
coil normal?  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Is the outdoor fan motor locked?  
NO  
Repair faulty parts.  
NO  
Replace TC2 or TCJ sensor.  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Is there a clogging?  
YES  
Faulty  
Replace  
Is winding resistance of the motor correct?  
13 to 33 (Between R and S, R and T, S and T)  
Replace motor.  
YES  
Replace PMV body  
.
Repair check valve. Replace  
Repair check valve. Replace  
YES  
YES  
Is the fan IPDU firmly attached to the heat sink.  
YES  
Retightening of screws, etc.  
Replace fan IPDU.  
NO  
Is check valve of main  
discharge pipe normal?  
YES  
Is sub-code of outdoor I/F P.C. board [0d]?  
NO  
Are there  
any obstructions to the  
YES  
operation of the heat exchanger?  
1. Air filter clogging  
Eliminate the interfered causes.  
YES  
Is there no problem such as stuffing or  
blast blowing to discharge port of outdoor fan?  
2. Blocked heat exchanger  
3. Air short circuit  
Correct cause of overload.  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Is SV5 circuit normal?  
Repair SV5 circuit.  
Coil error, choke,  
Check fan IPDU.  
(
)
disconnection of cable, etc.  
YES  
Abnormal  
Abnormal  
Check operation of 4-way valve.  
Normal  
Replace 4-way valve.  
Check clogging of SV11 circuit.  
Normal  
Replace defective parts.  
NO  
Are there indoor units connected  
to different refrigerant circuits?  
Check and correct cabling.  
Use the mis-wiring check function  
of outdoor unit.  
(
)
YES  
Refrigerant overcharge,  
clogging, pipe breakage,  
abnormal overload condition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
1. Wire connection error.  
[P26] / [14]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
G-Tr short-circuit protection error 1. Outdoor unit power error  
2. IPDU error/Cable connection error  
[P29] / [16]  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
Compressor position  
detective circuit error  
2. Compressor error  
3. Compressor error  
3. IPDU P.C. board error  
4. IPDU P.C. board error  
Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side  
Sub-code: 01: Compressor 1 side 02: Compressor 2 side  
NO  
Are the connectors and wiring  
to the compressor normal?  
Check and correct circuit and  
wires, i.e. to the compressor, etc.  
NO  
Is the power supply voltage  
to the outdoor unit normal?  
Correct power line.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Is it grounded?  
Compressor error  
Compressor error  
Compressor error  
Replace  
Replace  
Replace  
NO  
Is wire connector connection  
Correct the wire connections.  
Replace compressor.  
on the IPDU P.C. board normal?  
NO  
YES  
YES  
Is there a winding short?  
(Is winding resistance 0.1 to 0.3 ?)  
NO  
Is compressor operation normal?  
NO  
YES  
YES  
Is the winding open circuit?  
NO  
Is smoothing condenser normal?  
Check capacity valve  
external appearance.  
(1500µF, 350V)  
NO  
YES  
Check IPDU P.C. board.  
Failure  
Replace  
Replace IPDU P.C. board.  
Check code  
[P31] / [47]  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
Other indoor error  
(Group follower unit error)  
Other indoor unit in the group has a error.  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
When the header unit of the group detects [E03, L03, L07, L08 error], the follower unit(s) in the group display [P31]  
error and stop. There are no check code displays or alarm record on the main remote controller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check code  
Check code name  
Cause of operation  
[–] / [97]  
AI-NET communication line error AI-NET communication line error  
(TCC-L / AI-NET)  
NO  
Are AI-NET X and Y  
communication lines normal?  
Correct communication line.  
YES  
Are connections of CN01,  
CN02, and CN03 connectors  
on network adaptor P.C. board  
(MCC-1401) and CN309  
and CN41 connectors on  
indoor P.C. board normal?  
NO  
Correct connection of connectors.  
YES  
Are remote controller  
communication lines  
(A, B) normal?  
NO  
Check connection of A, B terminal.  
Correct communication line of remote controller.  
YES  
YES  
Is there no connection error  
on the power line?  
Correct power line.  
NO  
YES  
Is not main power supply  
turned on?  
Turn on the main power supply.  
NO  
YES  
Did a block-out occur?  
NO  
Clear check code.  
Is the network  
address changed by the main  
remote controller?  
YES  
NO  
YES  
Is there any noise etc.?  
NO  
Eliminate noise, etc.  
Can other indoor units  
be controlled from AI-NET  
central remote controller,  
or is the operation status  
of indoor unit the same?  
Unavailable (Others are same.)  
Check central controller.  
Failure  
Replace  
YES  
Can the  
NO  
NO  
Does the network adaptor  
P.C. board LED (D01) turn on?  
indoor unit be  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Failure Replace  
controlled from the main  
remote controller?  
YES  
YES  
Check power transformer of the  
network adaptor P.C. board (MCC-1401).  
Failure  
Replace  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-6. 7-Segment Display Function  
n 7-segment display on the outdoor unit (Interface P.C. board)  
On the interface control P.C. board, a 7-segment LED is provided to check the operating status.  
The displayed contents are changed by combining the setup numbers of the rotary switches (SW01, SW02  
and SW03) on the I/F P.C. board.  
Interface P.C. board  
SW06  
SW07  
SW08  
SW09  
7-segment  
display A  
7-segment  
display B  
CN30 CN31  
SW05  
SW15  
SW06  
SW07  
SW08  
SW09  
CN32 SW04  
D600 D601 D602 D603 D604  
CN30 CN31  
SW05  
SW15  
CN32 SW04  
D600 D601 D602 D603 D604  
Display  
A
Display A  
Display  
B
SW01 SW02 SW03  
2nd.  
place  
1st.  
place  
3rd.  
place  
2nd.  
place  
1st.  
place  
Display B  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
u Check procedure when the system has stopped due to an trouble  
When the system has stopped due to an trouble in the outdoor unit, execute the follow-  
ing check procedure.  
1. Open the panels of the outdoor unit, and then check the 7-segment display.  
The check code is shown on the right side of 7-segment display B.  
[U1] [¡¡¡] ([¡¡¡]: Check code)  
∗ Rotary switch setup for confirming the check code: SW01 [1], SW02 [1], SW03 [1].  
However the check code [OOO] is displayed for 3 seconds and the sub-code [OOO] for 1 second  
are alternately displayed if a sub-code is provided.  
2. Confirm the check code, and then follow the check procedure detailed for the diagnosis of the fault.  
3. [U1] [E28] on the 7-segment display means an error on the follower unit. change.  
Push and hold switch SW04 on the header unit for 2 seconds or more.  
Only the fan of the outdoor unit with a fault will operate. Open the panel of the corresponding unit, and  
then confirm the ceck code shown on the 7-segment display.  
4. Perform the check procedure based on each check code diagnosis.  
How to read the check display  
7-segment display  
0
a
1
c
2
e
3
4
h
5
i
6
n
7
o
8
r
9
A
t
b
C
y
d
–
E
u
F
H
J
L
P
G
S
V
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Data display of system information (Displayed on the header outdoor unit only)  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
Display contents  
Displays refrigerant name.  
Model with refrigerant R410A  
Model with refrigerant R407C  
1
1
3
Refrigerant name  
A
B
r4  
r4  
10A  
07C  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
System capacity  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
[ 5] to [48]  
[HP]  
: 5 to 48HP  
No. of outdoor units  
[ 1] to [ 4]  
[ P]  
: 1 to 4 units  
No. of connected indoor units/  
No. of units with cooling thermo ON  
[ 0] to [48]  
: 0 to 48 units (No. of connected units)  
[C0] to [C48] : 0 to 48 units (No. of units with cooling thermo ON)  
[ 0] to [48] : 0 to 48 units (No. of connected units)  
No. of connected indoor units/  
No. of units with heating thermo ON  
[H0] to [H48] : 0 to 48 units (No. of units with heating thermo ON)  
Data is displayed with hexadecimal notation  
Compressor command  
correction amount  
Release control  
Normal time : [ r], During release control: [r1]  
—
Oil-equalization control  
Oil-equalization request  
Normal time : [oiL-0]  
During oil equation : [oiL-1]  
Displays with segment LED lighting pattern  
Display A  
A
Display B  
F in the left figure goes on:  
F
E
B
C
G
Header requests oil equalization.  
C in the left figure goes on:  
Follower requests oil-equalization.  
(Outdoor unit number)  
D Dp  
U2  
U3  
U4  
10  
Refrigerant/oil recovery operation  
A
B
During sending of cooling refrigerant oil recovery signal : [C1].  
Normal time : [C ]  
During sending of heating refrigerant oil recovery signal : [H1].  
Normal time : [H ]  
11  
12  
Automatic address  
Demand operation  
A
B
A
B
[Ad]  
Automatic addressing : [FF], Normal time : [ ]  
[dU]  
Normal time : [ ]. In 50% to 90% : [ 50 to 90]  
When controlling by communication line input : [E50 to E90]  
13  
Optional control (P.C. board input) Displays optioned control status  
Operation mode selection : In heating with priority (Normal)  
A
B
h.∗  
c.∗  
∗.∗.∗.  
∗.∗.∗.  
Priority on cooling  
Heating only  
H.∗ ∗.∗.∗.  
Cooling only  
C.∗ ∗.∗.∗.  
Priority on No. of operating indoor units  
Priority on specific indoor unit  
Batch start/stop : Normal  
Start input  
n.∗  
∗.∗.∗.  
∗.∗.∗.  
∗.∗.∗.  
U.∗  
…
∗.  
.
∗.1. ∗.∗.∗.  
Stop input  
∗.0. ∗.∗.∗.  
…
Night low-noise operation : Normal  
Operation input  
∗.∗.  
.∗.∗.  
∗.∗. 1.∗.∗.  
…
Snow fan operation : Normal  
Operation input  
∗.∗. ∗. .∗.  
∗.∗. ∗.1.∗.  
14  
15  
16  
Option control (BUS line input)  
Same as above  
Unused  
—
A
B
—
—
∗ mark: Indicates none on display  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Data display of outdoor unit information (Displayed on each outdoor unit)  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
Display contents  
1
1
1
Error data  
A
B
Displays outdoor unit number: [U1] to [U4]  
Displays check code (Latest code only is displayed.)  
There is no check code: [– – –]  
There is sub-code: Check code [∗ ∗ ∗] for 3 seconds,  
sub-code [– ∗ ∗] for 1 second alternately  
<SW04> push function  
: Fan of unit with error only drives. 7-segment A: [E1]  
<SW04 + SW05> push function : Fan of normal unit only drives. 7-segment A: [E0]  
<SW05> push function  
: Interruption of fan operation function  
2
3
—
A
B
—
—
Operation mode  
Outdoor unit HP  
A
Stop: [ ]  
Normal cooling: [ C], Normal heating: [ H], Normal defrost: [ J]  
B
A
B
A
—
5HP: [ 5], 6HP: [ 6], 8HP: [ 8], 10HP: [10], 12HP: [12]  
[HP]  
4
5
Compressor operation command  
No.1 compressor operation command is displayed.  
Data display with Hexadecimal notation: [00 to FF]  
B
No.2 compressor operation command is displayed.  
Data display with Hexadecimal notation: [00 to FF]  
<SW04> push function  
7-segment display (A/B)  
: Inverter frequency is exchanged to decimal notation.  
: [∗ ∗ ] [∗ ∗ H] (Normal display by pushing <SW05>)  
6
7
Outdoor fan step  
A
B
A
[FP]  
Step 0 to 31: [ 0 to 31]  
Compressor backup  
Displays No.1 compressor setup status  
Normal: [ ], Backup setup: [C1]  
B
Displays No.2 compressor setup status  
Normal: [ ], Backup setup: [C2]  
8
9
—
A
B
—
—
Control valve output data  
Displays control output status of solenoid valve  
A
B
… … …  
4-way valve: ON  
H. 1  
H. 0  
2. 1  
2. 0  
3. 1  
3. 0  
3. 0  
3. 0  
… … …  
4-way valve: OFF  
…
10  
11  
SV2: ON / SV5: OFF  
5. 0  
…
SV2: OFF / SV5: ON  
5. 1  
SV3A: ON / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: OFF  
0 0 0  
1 0 0  
0 1 0  
0 0 1  
SV3A: OFF / SV3B: ON / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: OFF  
SV3A: OFF / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: ON /SV3D: OFF  
SV3A: OFF / SV3B: OFF / SV3C: OFF /SV3D: ON  
…
…
12  
13  
SV41: ON / SV42: OFF  
4.  
1 0  
…
…
SV41: OFF / SV42: ON  
4.  
0 1  
… … … … …  
… … … … …  
—
—
14  
15  
16  
PMV1 /PMV2 opening  
—
Displays opening data (Decimal) (Total opening)  
∗ ∗  
∗ ∗. P  
…
—
∗
∗ ∗. P  
Oil level judgment status  
A
B
[oL]  
[SW05] push SW function: The following data is displayed for 2 seconds.  
* During oil shortage in compressor 1: [L ],  
during oil shortage in compressor 2: [ L]  
…
…
… … …  
Initial display: [  
Judgment result of compressor 1 in [#], compressor 2 in [∗]  
(0: Normal, 1, 2: Shortage) is displayed.  
], Oil level judgment result: [A. #. ∗]  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Data display of outdoor cycle (Displayed on each outdoor unit)  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
Display contents  
1
1
2
Pd pressure data  
Ps pressure data  
Pd pressure (MPaG) is displayed with decimal data.  
(MPaG: Approx. 1/10 value of kg/cm2G data)  
A
B
P d. ∗. ∗ ∗  
P S. ∗. ∗ ∗  
P L. ∗. ∗ ∗  
t d  
∗
2
3
4
Ps pressure (MPaG) is displayed with decimal data.  
PL pressure conversion data Estimated pressure of liquid line (MPaG) is displayed with decimal data.  
TD1 sensor data  
TD2 sensor data  
TS1 sensor data  
TS2 sensor data  
TE sensor data  
TL sensor data  
TO sensor data  
TK1 sensor data  
TK2 sensor data  
TK3 sensor data  
TK4 sensor data  
—
Temperature sensor data (°C) is displayed  
with decimal notation.  
Symbol  
Data  
1 1 1  
∗ ∗. ∗  
2 1 1  
∗ ∗. ∗  
1 1 1  
∗ ∗. ∗  
2 1 1  
∗ ∗. ∗  
—
• Symbol display for 1 sec. and data display for 3 sec. are  
alternately displayed.  
5
6
Symbol  
Data  
t d  
∗
• Data is displayed in [∗].  
Symbol  
Data  
t S  
∗
tS  
∗
• Negative data is displayed as [– ∗ ∗ ∗ ∗].  
7
Symbol  
Data  
8
Symbol  
Data  
tE  
—
t L  
∗
t o  
∗
—
9
Symbol  
Data  
∗ ∗. ∗  
∗ ∗. ∗  
∗ ∗. ∗  
∗ ∗. ∗  
∗ ∗. ∗  
∗ ∗. ∗  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Symbol  
Data  
Symbol F 1  
Data  
Symbol F 2  
Data  
Symbol F 3  
Data  
Symbol F 4  
∗
∗
∗
Data  
∗
A
B
A
B
—
—
—
—
4. Data display of indoor unit information (Displayed on the header unit only)  
SW01 SW02 SW03  
Display contents  
… …  
… … …  
4
1 to 16 1 to 3 Receiving status of  
B
Receiving time: [  
1], Not received: [  
]
indoor BUS communication  
5
6
Indoor check code  
B
B
No check code: [– – –]  
…
…
…
…
…
Indoor capacity  
(HP) horse power  
0. 2, 0. 5, 0. 8,  
1, 1. 2, 1. 7,  
2, 2. 5,  
3, 3. 2,  
4,  
5,  
…
…
6,  
8, 1 0, 1 6, 2 0  
… … … …  
7
Indoor request command  
(S code)  
B
Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation [  
0 to  
F] : Heating  
8
Indoor PMV opening data  
Indoor TA sensor data  
Indoor TF sensor data  
Indoor TCJ sensor data  
Indoor TC1 sensor data  
Indoor TC2 sensor data  
B
B
B
B
B
B
Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation  
Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation  
Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation  
Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation  
Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation  
Data is displayed with Hexadecimal notation  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
NOTE) Indoor address No. is chosen by changing SW02 and SW03.  
SW03 SW02  
Indoor address  
7-segment display A  
[01] to [16]  
1
2
3
1 to 16 SW02 setup number  
1 to 16 SW02 setup number + 16  
1 to 16 SW02 setup number + 32  
[17] to [32]  
[33] to [48]  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Outdoor EEPROM check code display (Displayed on the header unit only)  
∗ The latest check code written in EEPROM on each outdoor unit is displayed.  
(It is used when confirming the check code after power supply has been reset.)  
Set SW01 to 03 as shown in the following table and the push SW04 for 5 seconds or more to display an check code.  
7-segment display  
W01 SW02 SW03  
Display contents  
A
B
1
1
2
3
16  
The latest check code of the header unit 1 (U1)  
The latest check code of the follower unit 1 (U2)  
The latest check code of the follower unit 2 (U3)  
E. r  
E. r  
E. r  
1. – –  
2. – –  
3. – –  
Display A  
Display B  
n 7-segment display A, B  
D600  
D601  
D602  
D603  
D604  
9-7. Sensor Characteristics  
9-7-1. Outdoor Unit  
Characteristic-3  
40  
Outdoor TS1, TS2, TO, TL sensors  
n Temperature sensor  
30  
characteristics  
20  
10  
0
-10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70  
Temperature [˚C]  
Characteristic-4  
200  
150  
100  
50  
10  
Outdoor TD1, TD2, TK1, TK2,  
TK3, TK4 sensors  
5
0
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150  
Temperature [˚C]  
Characteristic-5  
200  
20  
Outdoor TE1 sensor  
150  
100  
50  
15  
10  
5
0
0
-30 -20 -10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100  
Temperature [˚C]  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Pressure sensor characteristics  
• I/O cable connection table  
High pressure side (Pd)  
Low pressure side (Ps)  
Input/Output name Lead wire color  
Pin No.  
Input/Output name  
Lead wire color  
1
2
3
4
OUTPUT  
—
White  
—
—
—
OUTPUT  
GND  
White  
Black  
Red  
GND  
+5V  
Black  
Red  
+5V  
• Output voltage — Pressure  
High pressure side (Pd)  
0.5 to 3.9 V DC  
Low pressure side (Ps)  
0.5 to 3.5 V DC  
0 to 3.33 MPa  
0 to 0.98 MPa  
5
5
3.9  
3.5  
0.5  
0.5  
0
0
3.33  
4.41 5.1  
0.98 1.47  
5.1  
Pressure (MPa)  
Pressure (MPa)  
9-7-2. Indoor Unit  
n Temperature sensor characteristics  
Characteristic-1  
200  
150  
100  
50  
20  
40  
30  
20  
10  
Indoor TA sensor  
Indoor TC1, TC2, TCJ sensors  
Characteristic-2  
15  
10  
5
0
0
0
10 20 30 40 50  
-30 -20 -10  
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100  
Temperature [˚C]  
Temperature [˚C]  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-8. Pressure Sensor Output Check  
9-8-1. Outdoor Unit  
n Pd sensor characteristics  
0 to 4.41MPa (0.5 to 5V output with 0 to 4.41MPa)  
Voltage check between CN501  
and  
pins on the outdoor unit I/F P.C. board (Tester rod at  
pin side)  
‚
ƒ
ƒ
Pd  
Pd  
Pd  
Pd  
Pd  
Pd  
Pd  
Pd  
Pd  
Pd  
VOLT  
VOLT  
VOLT  
VOLT  
VOLT  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
0.00 0.00  
0.02 0.00  
0.04 0.00  
0.06 0.00  
0.08 0.00  
0.10 0.00  
0.12 0.00  
0.14 0.00  
0.16 0.00  
0.18 0.00  
0.20 0.00  
0.22 0.00  
0.23 0.00  
0.25 0.00  
0.27 0.00  
0.29 0.00  
0.31 0.00  
0.33 0.00  
0.35 0.00  
0.37 0.00  
0.39 0.00  
0.41 0.00  
0.43 0.00  
0.45 0.00  
0.47 0.00  
0.49 0.00  
0.51 0.01  
0.53 0.03  
0.55 0.05  
0.57 0.07  
0.59 0.08  
0.61 0.10  
0.63 0.12  
0.65 0.14  
0.66 0.16  
0.68 0.18  
0.70 0.20  
0.72 0.22  
0.74 0.24  
0.76 0.26  
0.78 0.28  
0.80 0.30  
0.82 0.31  
0.84 0.33  
0.86 0.35  
0.88 0.37  
0.90 0.39  
0.92 0.41  
0.94 0.43  
0.96 0.45  
0.98 0.47  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.1  
0.3  
0.5  
0.7  
0.9  
1.1  
1.3  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2.0  
2.2  
2.4  
2.6  
2.8  
3.0  
3.2  
3.4  
3.6  
3.8  
4.0  
4.2  
4.4  
4.6  
4.8  
1.00 0.49  
1.02 0.51  
1.04 0.53  
1.06 0.54  
1.07 0.56  
1.09 0.58  
1.11 0.60  
1.13 0.62  
1.15 0.64  
1.17 0.66  
1.19 0.68  
1.21 0.70  
1.23 0.72  
1.25 0.74  
1.27 0.76  
1.29 0.77  
1.31 0.79  
1.33 0.81  
1.35 0.83  
1.37 0.85  
1.39 0.87  
1.41 0.89  
1.43 0.91  
1.45 0.93  
1.47 0.95  
1.48 0.97  
1.50 0.99  
1.52 1.00  
1.54 1.02  
1.56 1.04  
1.58 1.06  
1.60 1.08  
1.62 1.10  
1.64 1.12  
1.66 1.14  
1.68 1.16  
1.70 1.18  
1.72 1.20  
1.74 1.21  
1.76 1.23  
1.78 1.25  
1.80 1.27  
1.82 1.29  
1.84 1.31  
1.86 1.33  
1.88 1.35  
1.90 1.37  
1.91 1.39  
1.93 1.41  
1.95 1.43  
1.97 1.44  
5.0  
5.2  
5.4  
5.5  
5.7  
5.9  
6.1  
6.3  
6.5  
6.7  
6.9  
7.1  
7.3  
7.5  
7.7  
7.9  
8.1  
8.3  
8.5  
8.7  
8.9  
9.1  
9.3  
9.5  
9.6  
1.99 1.46  
2.01 1.48  
2.03 1.50  
2.05 1.52  
2.07 1.54  
2.09 1.56  
2.11 1.58  
2.13 1.60  
2.15 1.62  
2.17 1.64  
2.19 1.66  
2.21 1.67  
2.23 1.69  
2.25 1.71  
2.27 1.73  
2.29 1.75  
2.31 1.77  
2.32 1.79  
2.34 1.81  
2.36 1.83  
2.38 1.85  
2.40 1.87  
2.42 1.89  
2.44 1.90  
2.46 1.92  
2.48 1.94  
2.50 1.96  
2.52 1.98  
2.54 2.00  
2.56 2.02  
2.58 2.04  
2.60 2.06  
2.62 2.08  
2.64 1.10  
2.66 2.12  
2.68 2.13  
2.70 2.15  
2.72 2.17  
2.73 2.19  
2.75 2.21  
2.77 2.23  
2.79 2.25  
2.81 2.27  
2.83 2.29  
2.85 2.31  
2.87 2.33  
2.89 2.35  
2.91 2.36  
2.93 2.38  
2.95 2.40  
2.97 2.42  
14.9  
15.1  
15.3  
15.5  
15.7  
15.9  
16.1  
16.3  
16.5  
16.7  
16.9  
17.1  
17.3  
17.5  
17.7  
17.9  
18.0  
18.2  
18.4  
18.6  
18.8  
19.0  
19.2  
19.4  
19.6  
19.8  
20.0  
20.2  
20.4  
20.6  
20.8  
21.0  
21.2  
21.4  
21.6  
21.8  
22.0  
22.2  
22.3  
22.5  
22.7  
22.9  
23.1  
23.3  
23.5  
23.7  
23.9  
24.1  
24.3  
24.5  
24.7  
2.99 2.44  
3.01 2.46  
3.03 2.48  
3.05 2.50  
3.07 2.52  
3.09 2.54  
3.11 2.56  
3.13 2.57  
3.15 2.59  
3.16 2.61  
3.18 2.63  
3.20 2.65  
3.22 2.67  
3.24 2.69  
3.26 2.71  
3.28 2.73  
3.30 2.75  
3.32 2.77  
3.34 2.79  
3.36 2.80  
3.38 2.82  
3.40 2.84  
3.42 2.86  
3.44 2.88  
3.46 2.90  
3.48 2.92  
3.50 2.94  
3.52 2.96  
3.54 2.98  
3.56 3.00  
3.57 3.02  
3.59 3.03  
3.61 3.05  
3.63 3.07  
3.65 3.09  
3.67 3.11  
3.69 3.13  
3.71 3.15  
3.73 3.17  
3.75 3.19  
3.77 3.21  
3.79 3.23  
3.81 3.25  
3.83 3.26  
3.85 3.28  
3.87 3.30  
3.89 3.32  
3.91 3.34  
3.93 3.36  
3.95 3.38  
3.97 3.40  
24.9  
25.1  
25.3  
25.5  
25.7  
25.9  
26.1  
26.3  
26.4  
26.6  
26.8  
27.0  
27.2  
27.4  
27.6  
27.8  
28.0  
28.2  
28.4  
28.6  
28.8  
29.0  
29.2  
29.4  
29.6  
29.8  
30.0  
30.2  
3.04  
30.5  
30.7  
30.9  
31.1  
31.3  
31.5  
31.7  
31.9  
32.1  
32.3  
32.5  
32.7  
32.9  
33.1  
33.3  
33.5  
33.7  
33.9  
34.1  
34.3  
34.5  
34.7  
3.98 3.42  
4.00 3.44  
4.02 3.45  
4.04 5.48  
4.06 3.49  
4.08 3.51  
4.10 3.53  
4.12 3.55  
4.14 3.57  
4.16 3.59  
4.18 3.61  
4.20 3.63  
4.22 3.65  
4.24 3.67  
4.26 3.69  
4.28 3.70  
4.30 3.72  
4.32 3.74  
4.24 3.76  
4.36 3.78  
4.38 3.80  
4.40 3.82  
4.41 3.84  
4.43 3.86  
4.45 3.88  
4.47 3.90  
4.49 3.92  
4.51 3.93  
4.53 3.95  
4.55 3.97  
4.57 3.99  
4.59 4.01  
4.61 4.03  
4.63 4.05  
4.65 4.07  
4.67 4.09  
4.69 4.11  
4.71 4.13  
4.73 4.15  
4.75 4.16  
4.77 4.18  
4.79 4.20  
4.81 4.22  
4.82 4.24  
4.84 4.26  
4.86 4.28  
4.88 4.30  
4.90 4.32  
4.92 4.34  
4.94 4.36  
4.96 4.38  
4.98 4.39  
34.8  
35.0  
35.2  
35.4  
35.6  
35.8  
36.0  
36.2  
36.4  
36.6  
36.8  
37.0  
37.2  
37.4  
37.6  
37.8  
38.0  
38.2  
38.4  
38.6  
38.8  
38.9  
39.1  
39.3  
39.5  
39.7  
39.9  
40.1  
40.3  
40.5  
40.7  
40.9  
41.1  
41.3  
41.5  
41.7  
41.9  
42.1  
42.3  
42.5  
42.7  
42.9  
43.0  
43.2  
43.4  
43.6  
43.8  
44.0  
44.2  
44.4  
44.6  
44.8  
9.8  
10.0  
10.2  
10.4  
10.6  
10.8  
11.0  
11.2  
11.4  
11.6  
11.8  
12.0  
12.2  
12.4  
12.6  
12.8  
13.0  
13.2  
13.4  
13.6  
13.8  
13.9  
14.1  
14.3  
14.5  
14.7  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
n Ps sensor characteristics  
0 to 1.48MPa (0.5 to 5V output with 0 to 1.48MPa)  
Voltage check between CN500  
and  
pins on the outdoor unit I/F P.C. board (Tester rod at  
pin side)  
‚
ƒ
ƒ
Ps  
Ps  
Ps  
Ps  
Ps  
Ps  
Ps  
Ps  
Ps  
Ps  
VOLT  
VOLT  
VOLT  
VOLT  
VOLT  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
(MPa) (kg/cm²)  
0.00 0.00  
0.02 0.00  
0.04 0.00  
0.06 0.00  
0.08 0.00  
0.10 0.00  
0.12 0.00  
0.14 0.00  
0.16 0.00  
0.18 0.00  
0.20 0.00  
0.22 0.00  
0.23 0.00  
0.25 0.00  
0.27 0.00  
0.29 0.00  
0.31 0.00  
0.33 0.00  
0.35 0.00  
0.37 0.00  
0.39 0.00  
0.41 0.00  
0.43 0.00  
0.45 0.00  
0.47 0.00  
0.49 0.00  
0.51 0.00  
0.53 0.01  
0.55 0.02  
0.57 0.02  
0.59 0.03  
0.61 0.03  
0.63 0.04  
0.65 0.05  
0.66 0.05  
0.68 0.06  
0.70 0.07  
0.72 0.07  
0.74 0.08  
0.76 0.09  
0.78 0.09  
0.80 0.10  
0.82 0.11  
0.84 0.11  
0.86 0.12  
0.88 0.12  
0.90 0.13  
0.92 0.14  
0.94 0.14  
0.96 0.15  
0.98 0.16  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.1  
0.3  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.4  
0.5  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
0.9  
1.0  
1.1  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.3  
1.4  
1.5  
1.5  
1.6  
1.00 0.16  
1.02 0.17  
1.04 0.18  
1.06 0.18  
1.07 0.19  
1.09 0.19  
1.11 0.20  
1.13 0.21  
1.15 0.21  
1.17 0.22  
1.19 0.23  
1.21 0.23  
1.23 0.24  
1.25 0.25  
1.27 0.25  
1.29 0.26  
1.31 0.26  
1.33 0.27  
1.35 0.28  
1.37 0.28  
1.39 0.29  
1.41 0.30  
1.43 0.30  
1.45 0.31  
1.47 0.32  
1.48 0.32  
1.50 0.33  
1.52 0.34  
1.54 0.34  
1.56 0.35  
1.58 0.35  
1.60 0.36  
1.62 0.37  
1.64 0.37  
1.66 0.38  
1.68 0.39  
1.70 0.39  
1.72 0.40  
1.74 0.41  
1.76 0.41  
1.78 0.42  
1.80 0.42  
1.82 0.43  
1.84 0.44  
1.86 0.44  
1.88 0.45  
1.90 0.46  
1.91 0.46  
1.93 0.47  
1.95 0.48  
1.97 0.48  
1.7  
1.7  
1.8  
1.8  
1.9  
2.0  
2.0  
2.1  
2.2  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.4  
2.5  
2.6  
2.6  
2.7  
2.8  
2.8  
2.9  
3.0  
3.0  
3.1  
3.2  
3.2  
3.3  
3.3  
3.4  
3.5  
3.5  
3.6  
3.7  
3.7  
3.8  
3.9  
3.9  
4.0  
4.1  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.5  
4.6  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
4.8  
4.9  
1.99 0.49  
2.01 0.49  
2.03 0.50  
2.05 0.51  
2.07 0.51  
2.09 0.52  
2.11 0.53  
2.13 0.53  
2.15 0.54  
2.17 0.55  
2.19 0.55  
2.21 0.56  
2.23 0.56  
2.25 0.57  
2.27 0.58  
2.29 0.58  
2.31 0.59  
2.32 0.60  
2.34 0.60  
2.36 0.61  
2.38 0.62  
2.40 0.62  
2.42 0.63  
2.44 0.64  
2.46 0.64  
2.48 0.65  
2.50 0.65  
2.52 0.66  
2.54 0.67  
2.56 0.67  
2.58 0.68  
2.60 0.69  
2.62 0.69  
2.64 0.70  
2.66 0.71  
2.68 0.71  
2.70 0.72  
2.72 0.72  
2.73 0.73  
2.75 0.74  
2.77 0.74  
2.79 0.75  
2.81 0.76  
2.83 0.76  
2.85 0.77  
2.87 0.78  
2.89 0.78  
2.91 0.79  
2.93 0.79  
2.95 0.80  
2.97 0.81  
5.0  
5.0  
5.1  
5.2  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
5.4  
5.5  
5.6  
5.6  
5.7  
5.8  
5.8  
5.9  
6.0  
6.0  
6.1  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.3  
6.4  
6.5  
6.5  
6.6  
6.7  
6.7  
6.8  
6.9  
6.9  
7.0  
7.1  
7.1  
7.2  
7.3  
7.3  
7.4  
7.4  
7.5  
7.6  
7.6  
7.7  
7.8  
7.8  
7.9  
8.0  
8.0  
8.1  
8.2  
8.2  
2.99 0.81  
3.01 0.82  
3.03 0.83  
3.05 0.83  
3.07 0.84  
3.09 0.85  
3.11 0.85  
3.13 0.86  
3.15 0.86  
3.16 0.87  
3.18 0.88  
3.20 0.88  
3.22 0.89  
3.24 0.90  
3.26 0.90  
3.28 0.91  
3.30 0.92  
3.32 0.92  
3.34 0.93  
3.36 0.94  
3.38 0.94  
3.40 0.95  
3.42 0.95  
3.44 0.96  
3.46 0.97  
3.48 0.97  
3.50 0.98  
3.52 0.99  
3.54 0.99  
3.56 1.00  
3.57 1.01  
3.59 1.01  
3.61 1.02  
3.63 1.02  
3.65 1.03  
3.67 1.04  
3.69 1.04  
3.71 1.05  
3.73 1.06  
3.75 1.06  
3.77 1.07  
3.79 1.08  
3.81 1.08  
3.83 1.09  
3.85 1.09  
3.89 1.10  
3.89 1.11  
3.91 1.11  
3.93 1.12  
3.95 1.13  
3.97 1.13  
8.3  
8.4  
8.4  
8.5  
8.6  
8.6  
8.7  
8.8  
8.8  
8.9  
8.9  
9.0  
9.1  
9.1  
9.2  
9.3  
9.3  
9.4  
9.5  
9.5  
9.6  
9.7  
9.7  
9.8  
9.9  
3.98 1.14  
4.00 1.15  
4.02 1.15  
4.04 1.16  
4.06 1.17  
4.08 1.17  
4.10 1.18  
4.12 1.18  
4.14 1.19  
4.16 1.20  
4.18 1.20  
4.20 1.21  
4.22 1.22  
4.24 1.22  
4.26 1.23  
4.28 1.24  
4.30 1.24  
4.32 1.25  
4.34 1.25  
4.36 1.26  
4.38 1.27  
4.40 1.27  
4.41 1.28  
4.43 1.29  
4.45 1.29  
4.47 1.30  
4.49 1.31  
4.51 1.31  
4.53 1.32  
4.55 1.32  
4.57 1.33  
4.59 1.34  
4.61 1.34  
4.63 1.35  
4.65 1.36  
4.67 1.36  
4.69 1.37  
4.71 1.38  
4.73 1.38  
4.75 1.39  
4.77 1.39  
4.79 1.40  
4.81 1.41  
4.82 1.41  
4.84 1.42  
4.86 1.43  
4.88 1.43  
4.90 1.44  
4.92 1.45  
4.94 1.45  
4.96 1.46  
4.98 1.47  
11.6  
11.7  
11.7  
11.8  
11.9  
11.9  
12.0  
12.1  
12.1  
12.2  
12.3  
12.3  
12.4  
12.5  
12.5  
12.6  
12.7  
12.7  
12.8  
12.9  
12.9  
13.0  
13.0  
13.1  
13.2  
13.2  
13.3  
13.4  
13.4  
13.5  
13.6  
13.6  
13.7  
13.8  
13.8  
13.9  
14.0  
14.0  
14.1  
14.2  
14.2  
14.3  
14.3  
14.4  
14.5  
14.5  
14.6  
14.7  
14.7  
14.8  
14.9  
14.9  
9.9  
10.0  
10.1  
10.1  
10.2  
10.2  
10.3  
10.4  
10.4  
10.5  
10.6  
10.6  
10.7  
10.8  
10.8  
10.9  
11.0  
11.0  
11.1  
11.2  
11.2  
11.3  
11.4  
11.4  
11.5  
11.5  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-8-2. Flow Selector Unit (FS Unit)  
Leakage of SVD valve or SVS valve, etc; Positions to be checked and check code when a trouble such as miswiring occurred.  
Phenomenon which appears as result  
(Corresponding indoor unit or flow selector unit)  
Correspon  
Example of  
refrigerant  
flow  
Trouble  
mode  
l Abnormal  
Part name  
Operation mode  
ding indoor  
unit  
Judgment and position to be checked  
May become  
almost normal  
capacity  
cooling sound  
¡ Circulating  
Not  
Not  
Detection of  
check code  
cooled heated  
sound  
All heating operation  
All  
• TC1 is lower than normal indoor unit.  
Clogging  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation Heating unit  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation Heating unit  
¡
• Temperature of suction gas pipe at indoor side of the flow selector  
unit is lower than that of normal FS unit.  
• Compared with normal indoor unit, TCJ is higher.  
• Suction gas pipe at outdoor side of the flow selector unit is hot.  
• Refrigerant circulating sound is heard in bypass from SVD valve  
to SVS valve.  
All cooling operation (SV11 ON)  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit  
All  
¡ SVD circuit –  
SVS circuit  
Leakage  
¡
A
• Refrigerant circulating sound is heard from SVD valve circuit.  
• TCJ is high and SH is little. (Liquid pack)  
All cooling operation (SV11 OFF)  
All  
¡
¡ SVD circuit  
SVD valve  
• Temperature of TCJ and TC1 become high similar to heating. (All  
heating circuit)  
• Discharge gas pipe at outdoor unit side of the flow selector unit is  
rather hot.  
• Refrigerant circulating sound is not heard from SVS valve, but it is  
heard from SVD valve.  
All  
All cooling operation (SV11 ON)  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation  
Miswiring/  
Misinstallation  
of coil  
SVD ↔ SVS  
Cooling unit  
Cooling unit  
¡
¡ SVD circuit  
B
C
• Gas pipe at indoor side of the flow selector unit is cold. (Cooling  
circuit, Liquid pack)  
• Refrigerant circulating sound is not heard from SVD valve, but it is  
heard from SVS valve.  
All  
All heating operation  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation  
L18 “Flow  
selector unit  
error”  
Heating unit  
Heating unit  
¡
¡ SVS circuit  
All cooling operation  
All  
• TCJ is higher than normal indoor unit.  
Clogging  
Leakage  
Clogging  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation Cooling unit  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation Cooling unit  
¡
¡ SVSS circuit  
• Gas pipe at indoor side of the flow selector unit is not cold.  
• Refrigerant circulating sound is heard from SVSS valve.  
P19 “4-way  
valve reversal  
error”  
SVS valve  
• Compared with normal indoor unit, TCJ is low.  
• Temperature of suction gas pipe at outdoor side of the flow  
selector unit is higher than that of normal flow selector unit.  
All heating operation  
All  
¡
¡ SVS circuit  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation Heating unit  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation Heating unit  
• Refrigerant circulating sound is heard from SVS valve circuit.  
All heating operation  
All  
l Indoor unit,  
flow selector unit  
• In start time, when exchanging mode from cooling to heating after  
defrost operation, refrigerant shock sound may be heard.  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation Heating unit  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation Heating unit  
¡
¡
¡
¡
• Refrigerant circulating sound may be heard from SVDD valve  
circuit.  
• Suction gas pipe at outdoor unit side of the flow selector unit may  
be hot.  
All  
All cooling operation (SV11 ON)  
Cooling unit  
Cooling unit  
¡ SVDD circuit  
¡ SVDD circuit  
¡ SVDD circuit  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation  
Leakage  
All heating operation  
All  
• Refrigerant circulating sound may be heard from SVDD valve  
circuit.  
SVDD  
valve  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation Heating unit  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation Heating unit  
Miswiring/  
Misinstallation  
of coil  
SVD ↔ SVS  
• Refrigerant circulating sound may be heard from SVDD valve  
circuit.  
• Suction gas pipe at outdoor unit side of the flow selector unit may  
be hot.  
All  
All cooling operation (SV11 ON)  
Cooling unit  
Cooling unit  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation  
All heating operation  
Mainly cooling, part heating operation  
Mainly heating, part cooling operation  
All  
l Indoor unit,  
flow selector unit  
• In start time, when exchanging mode from cooling to heating after  
defrost operation, refrigerant shock sound may be heard.  
Heating unit  
Heating unit  
¡
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Phenomenon which appears as result  
(Corresponding indoor unit or flow selector unit)  
Correspon  
ding indoor  
unit  
Example of  
refrigerant  
flow  
l Abnormal  
cooling sound  
¡ Circulating  
sound  
Part name  
Trouble mode  
Operation mode  
Judgment and position to be checked  
May become  
almost normal  
capacity  
Not  
Not  
Detection of  
check code  
cooled heated  
Single cooling  
Simultaneous cooling (Indoor cooling)  
Simultaneous heating (Indoor cooling)  
l Indoor unit,  
Selector unit  
• Operation is changed from heating to cooling.  
• Refrigerant impact sound is heard at defrost time.  
¡
¡
Clogging  
Leakage  
Single heating  
Simultaneous cooling (Indoor heating)  
Simultaneous heating (Indoor heating)  
l Indoor unit,  
Selector unit  
SVSS valve  
• Refrigerant sound may be heard from SVSS valve  
circuit.  
• Temperature of suction gas pipe at outdoor side of the  
selector unit is higher than that of normal selector unit.  
Single heating  
Simultaneous cooling (Indoor heating)  
Simultaneous heating (Indoor heating)  
¡
¡ SVSS circuit  
Single cooling (SV11 ON)  
Simultaneous cooling (Indoor cooling)  
Simultaneous heating (Indoor cooling)  
¡
• Gas short is observed and PD and PS may be lower  
than those in normal time.  
P15  
[Gas leak  
detection]  
Check valve  
Capillary clogging  
Discharge–Liquid  
bypass capillary,  
Check valve  
Single heating  
Simultaneous cooling (Indoor heating)  
Simultaneous heating (Indoor heating)  
• TD and TS may be higher than those in normal time.  
¡
• Refrigerant sound may be heard from check valve.  
• Discharge gas pipe is cold or it may be frozen.  
¡ Check valve  
Check valve  
leakage  
Single cooling (SV11 OFF)  
¡
¡
circuit  
Piping  
• TCJ and TC1 are heated same as heating.  
(Heating circuit)  
• Discharge gas pipe at outdoor side of selector unit is  
fairly heated.  
Incorrect piping  
Discharge pipe ↔  
Suction gas pipe  
Single cooling  
Simultaneous cooling (Indoor cooling)  
Simultaneous heating (Indoor cooling)  
Discharge pipe  
Liquid pipe  
Gas pipe  
Disconnection  
Contact error  
Miswiring  
Signal line  
Power supply line  
In some cases, phenomena such as above occur.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Suction gas pipe  
Suction gas pipe  
Suction gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Discharge gas pipe  
Liquid pipe  
Liquid pipe  
Liquid pipe  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
PMV  
TC2  
TC1  
TC1  
TC1  
TCJ  
TCJ  
TCJ  
A
B
C
• SV11 ON  
• SVD leakage  
• SVS ON  
• SVD ON  
• SV11 ON  
• SVS ON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wired remote controller  
(Up to 2 units)  
Weekly timer  
Display  
LCD  
Display  
LCD  
LCD  
driver  
Function setup  
Display  
LED  
CPU  
Function setup  
Key switch  
Key switch  
CPU  
CN2 CN1  
DC5V  
3
*
Remote  
controller  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
Power Secondary  
circuit battery  
communication  
circuit  
Indoor unit  
#1  
A
B
#2  
A
B
#3  
A
B
Network adaptor (Option)  
Max. 8 units are connectable. *1  
Network  
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1402)  
Remote  
controller  
adaptor  
Remote  
EEPROM  
*1 However in a case that the  
network adaptor is installed  
when 2 remote controllers  
are connected, maximum  
7 units are connectable.  
P.C. board  
(MCC-1401)  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
communication  
circuit  
DC20V  
DC12V  
Central control  
remote controller  
(Option)  
X
Y
AI-NET  
communication  
circuit  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
CPU  
H8/3687  
TA sensor  
TCI sensor  
DC5V  
*2 The network adaptor is  
installed to only one unit.  
(In case of AI-NETWORK)  
CPU  
H8/3039  
Switch  
setup  
Same  
as left  
*2  
Same  
as left  
*2  
TC2 sensor  
Driver  
TCJ sensor  
*4  
Transformer  
*3 The weekly timer cannot be  
connected to the simple wired  
remote controller.  
PMV  
Float input  
HA  
*4 Nome for high wall spearate  
sold parts for under ceiling.  
Louver  
motor  
Outside  
output  
CPU  
TMP88CH  
47FG  
None for Concealed  
Duct type  
Start  
Alarm  
Ready  
Thermostat ON  
COOL  
HEAT  
FAN  
AC  
BUS  
communication  
circuit  
(TMP88PH  
47FG)  
synchronous  
signal input  
circuit  
*4  
Drain  
pump  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
Power  
circuit  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
Indoor  
L
N
L
N
fan motor  
DC280V  
Power  
supply  
Power  
supply  
L
N
U1  
U1  
U2  
U2  
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
Indoor/Outdoor  
communication  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1Ø220-240V, 50Hz  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wired remote controller  
(Up to 2 units)  
Weekly timer  
Display  
LCD  
Display  
LCD  
LCD  
driver  
Function setup  
Display  
LED  
CPU  
Function setup  
Key switch  
Key switch  
CPU  
CN2 CN1  
DC5V  
3
*
Remote  
controller  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
Power Secondary  
circuit battery  
communication  
circuit  
Indoor unit  
#1  
A
B
#2  
A
B
#3  
A
B
Network adaptor (Option)  
Max. 8 units are connectable. *1  
Network  
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1403)  
Remote  
controller  
adaptor  
Remote  
EEPROM  
*1 However in a case that the network  
adaptor is installed when 2 remote  
controllers are connected,  
P.C. board  
(MCC-1401)  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
communication  
circuit  
DC20V  
DC12V  
DC5V  
Central control  
remote controller  
(Option)  
X
Y
maximum 7 units are connectable.  
AI-NET  
communication  
circuit  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
CPU  
H8/3687  
TA sensor  
TCI sensor  
*2 The network adaptor is installed to only  
one unit.  
(In case of AI-NETWORK)  
CPU  
H8/3039  
Switch  
setup  
6
*
Same  
as left  
*2  
Same  
as left  
*2  
Power  
circuit  
TC2 sensor  
Driver  
*3 The weekly timer cannot be connected  
to the simple wired remote controller.  
TCJ sensor  
Transformer  
5
*
*4 Nome for concealed duct,  
Floor standing cabinet  
PMV  
Float input  
None for  
Concealed Duct  
Floor standing concealed  
Louver  
motor  
Outside  
output  
HA  
*5 Nome for concealed duct,  
Floor standing cabinet  
Floor standing concealed  
Floor standing  
4
*
Start  
Alarm  
Ready  
Thermostat ON  
COOL  
HEAT  
FAN  
AC  
BUS  
communication  
circuit  
synchronous  
signal input  
circuit  
Drain  
pump  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
5
*
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
L
N
L
N
*6 Nome for 1-way discharge  
cassette YH type.  
Indoor  
fan motor  
Power  
supply  
Power  
supply  
Transformer  
L
N
U1  
U1  
U2  
U2  
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
Indoor/Outdoor  
communication  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1Ø220-240V, 50Hz  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indoor unit  
#1  
A
B
#2  
A
B
#3  
A
B
Wireless remote  
controller kit  
Network adaptor (Option)  
Network  
Sensor P.C. board  
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1402)  
DC20V  
Remote  
controller  
adaptor  
Remote  
Remote  
EEPROM  
P.C. board  
(MCC-1401)  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
Emergent  
operation  
SW  
communication  
circuit  
Power  
circuit  
DC12V  
DC5V  
Central control  
remote controller  
(Option)  
X
Y
AI-NET  
communication  
circuit  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
CPU  
H8/3687  
TA sensor  
TCI sensor  
CPU  
Function  
setup SW  
Buzzer  
(In case of AI-NETWORK)  
CPU  
H8/3039  
Switch  
setup  
Same  
as left  
*2  
Same  
as left  
*2  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Driver  
Display  
LED  
Sensor  
circuit  
Transformer  
*3  
Float input  
None for  
Concealed Duct  
PMV  
HA  
Louver  
motor  
Outside  
output  
CPU  
TMP88CH  
47FG  
None for Concealed  
Duct type  
Start  
AC  
BUS  
communication  
circuit  
(TMP88PH  
47FG)  
Alarm  
Ready  
Thermostat ON  
COOL  
HEAT  
synchronous  
*3  
Drain  
signal input  
circuit  
pump  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
Power  
circuit  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
Indoor  
L
N
L
N
FAN  
fan motor  
DC280V  
Power  
supply  
Power  
supply  
L
N
U1  
U1  
U2  
U2  
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
Indoor/Outdoor  
communication  
Outdoor unit  
Max. 8 units are connectable. *1  
Power supply  
1Ø220-240V, 50Hz  
*1 However in a case that the network  
adaptor is installed when 2 wireless  
remote controller kits are connected,  
maximum 7 units are connectable.  
*2 The network adaptor is installed to only  
*3 Nome for high wall spearate  
sold parts for under ceiling.  
one unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indoor unit  
#1  
A
B
#2  
A
B
#3  
A
B
Network adaptor (Option)  
Network  
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1403)  
Remote  
controller  
adaptor  
Remote  
EEPROM  
TA sensor  
P.C. board  
(MCC-1401)  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
Wireless remote  
controller kit  
communication  
circuit  
DC20V  
DC12V  
DC5V  
Central control  
remote controller  
(Option)  
X
Y
AI-NET  
communication  
circuit  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
CPU  
Remote  
controller  
H8/3687  
communication  
circuit  
TCI sensor  
*5  
TC2 sensor  
(In case of AI-NETWORK)  
CPU  
H8/3039  
Switch  
setup  
Same  
as left  
*2  
Same  
as left  
*2  
Power  
circuit  
Driver  
Display  
section  
Sensors  
TCJ sensor  
*4  
Transformer  
Float input  
PMV  
None for  
Concealed Duct  
Louver  
motor  
Outside  
output  
HA  
*3  
Start  
AC  
BUS  
communication  
circuit  
Alarm  
Ready  
Thermostat ON  
COOL  
HEAT  
synchronous  
Drain  
pump  
signal input  
circuit  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
*4  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
L
N
L
N
FAN  
Indoor  
fan motor  
Power  
supply  
Power  
supply  
Transformer  
L
N
U1  
U1  
U2  
U2  
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
Indoor/Outdoor  
communication  
Outdoor unit  
Power supply  
1Ø220-240V, 50Hz  
Max. 8 units are connectable. *1  
*3 Nome for concealed duct,  
Floor standing cabinet  
*1 However in a case that the network  
adaptor is installed when 2 wireless  
remote controller kits are connected,  
maximum 7 units are connectable.  
Floor standing concealed  
*4 Nome for concealed duct,  
Floor standing cabinet  
Floor standing concealed  
Floor standing  
*2 The network adaptor is installed to only  
one unit.  
*5 Nome for 1-way discharge  
cassette YH type.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wired remote controller  
Weekly timer  
Display  
LCD  
Display  
LCD  
LCD  
driver  
Function setup  
Display  
LED  
CPU  
Function setup  
Key switch  
Key switch  
CPU  
CN2 CN1  
DC5V  
3
*
Remote  
controller  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
Power Secondary  
circuit battery  
communication  
circuit  
Indoor unit  
#1  
A
B
#2  
A
B
#3  
A
B
Wireless remote  
controller kit  
Network adaptor (Option)  
Network  
Sensor P.C. board  
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1402)  
Remote  
controller  
adaptor  
Remote  
Remote  
EEPROM  
P.C. board  
(MCC-1401)  
controller  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
communication  
circuit  
Emergent  
operation  
SW  
communication  
circuit  
Power  
circuit  
DC20V  
DC12V  
DC5V  
Central control  
remote controller  
(Option)  
X
Y
AI-NET  
communication  
circuit  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
CPU  
H8/3687  
DC5V  
TA sensor  
TCI sensor  
CPU  
Function  
setup SW  
Buzzer  
(In case of AI-NETWORK)  
CPU  
H8/3039  
Switch  
setup  
Same  
as left  
*2  
Same  
as left  
*2  
TC2 sensor  
Driver  
Display  
LED  
Sensor  
circuit  
TCJ sensor  
*4  
Transformer  
Float input  
None for  
Concealed Duct  
PMV  
HA  
Louver  
motor  
Outside  
output  
CPU  
TMP88CH  
47FG  
None for Concealed  
Duct type  
Start  
Alarm  
Ready  
Thermostat ON  
COOL  
HEAT  
AC  
BUS  
communication  
circuit  
(TMP88PH  
47FG)  
synchronous  
*4  
Drain  
signal input  
circuit  
pump  
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
Power  
circuit  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
Indoor  
L
N
L
N
FAN  
fan motor  
DC280V  
Power  
supply  
Power  
supply  
L
N
U1  
U1  
U2  
U2  
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
Indoor/Outdoor  
communication  
Max. 8 units are connectable. *1  
Outdoor unit  
*1 However in a case that the network adaptor is installed,  
maximum 7 units are connectable.  
*2 The network adaptor is installed to only one unit.  
Power supply  
1Ø220-240V, 50Hz  
*3 The weekly timer cannot be connected to the simple wired remote controller.  
*4 Nome for high wall spearate sold parts for under ceiling.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wired remote controller  
Weekly timer  
Display  
LCD  
Display  
LCD  
LCD  
driver  
Function setup  
Display  
LED  
CPU  
Function setup  
Key switch  
Key switch  
CPU  
CN2 CN1  
DC5V  
3
*
Remote  
controller  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
Power Secondary  
communication  
circuit  
circuit  
battery  
Indoor unit  
#1  
A
B
#2  
A
B
#3  
A
B
Network adaptor (Option)  
Network  
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1403)  
Remote  
controller  
adaptor  
Remote  
EEPROM  
TA sensor  
P.C. board  
(MCC-1401)  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
Wireless remote  
controller kit  
communication  
circuit  
DC20V  
DC12V  
DC5V  
Central control  
remote controller  
(Option)  
X
Y
AI-NET  
communication  
circuit  
DC5V  
Power  
circuit  
CPU  
Remote  
controller  
H8/3687  
communication  
circuit  
TCI sensor  
*6  
TC2 sensor  
(In case of AI-NETWORK)  
CPU  
H8/3039  
Switch  
setup  
Same  
as left  
*2  
Same  
as left  
*2  
Power  
circuit  
Driver  
Display  
section  
Sensors  
TCJ sensor  
*5  
Transformer  
Float input  
None for  
Concealed Duct  
PMV  
Louver  
motor  
HA  
Outside  
output  
4
*
Start  
Alarm  
Ready  
Thermostat ON  
COOL  
HEAT  
FAN  
AC  
BUS  
communication  
circuit  
synchronous  
Drain  
pump  
signal input  
circuit  
Fan motor  
control circuit  
5
*
U1 U2  
U1 U2  
L
N
L
N
Indoor  
fan motor  
Power  
supply  
Power  
supply  
Transformer  
L
N
U1  
U1  
U2  
U2  
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
Indoor/Outdoor  
communication  
Max. 8 units are connectable. *1  
*4 Nome for concealed duct,  
Floor standing cabinet  
Outdoor unit  
*1 However in a case that the network adaptor is installed,  
maximum 7 units are connectable.  
Floor standing concealed  
Power supply  
1Ø220-240V, 50Hz  
*5 Nome for concealed duct,  
Floor standing cabinet  
Floor standing concealed  
Floor standing  
*2 The network adaptor is installed to only one unit.  
*6 Nome for 1-way discharge  
cassette YH type.  
*3 The weekly timer cannot be connected to the simple wired remote controller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filter/Option error input  
Microcomputer operation LED  
EEPROM  
DC fan output  
Power supply  
Optional  
power supply  
PMV output  
Remote controller  
power supply LED  
DC fan return  
*1  
Drain pump output  
*1  
Float SW  
Fan output  
HA (T10)  
TCJ sensor  
EXCT  
Remote controller inter-unit cable  
TC1 sensor  
TA sensor  
Used for  
servicing  
DISP  
CHK  
Indoor/Outdoor communication  
(Also used for communication of the  
central control system)  
Optional output  
Flap  
*1  
TC2 sensor  
(Used only for 4-way Air  
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Spare)  
Discharge Cassette Type,Under ceiling type)  
*1 Nome for under ceiling, high wall  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power transformer (Secondary side)  
(AC11V, 14V, 20V)  
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Spare)  
Power supply  
PMV output  
EEPROM  
Indoor/Outdoor communication  
(Also used for communication of  
the central control system)  
Microcomputer  
operation LED  
Power transformer  
(Primary side)  
(AC200V)  
*1  
Flap  
Remote controller  
power supply LED  
HA (T10)  
Optional output  
Remote controller  
inter-unit wire  
Drain pump output  
Optional  
power supply  
TCI sensor  
TC2 sensor  
TCJ sensor  
EXCT  
Outside  
error input  
TA sensor  
AC fan output  
DISP  
CHK  
Used for  
servicing  
Filter/Option error input  
Float SW  
* Short plug is inserted in Concealed Duct  
High Static Pressure type, Floor standing cabinet type,  
Floor standing type, Floor stabding conceded type.  
*1 2-way Air discharge cassette,  
1-way Air discharge cassette,  
Floor standing only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MCC-1520  
2-way Air Discharge CassetteType, 1-way Air Discharge CassetteType (1 Series),  
Concealed Duct High Static PressureType, Floor Standing CabinetType,  
Floor Standing ConcealedType, Floor StandingType  
C90  
C03  
+
CN02  
I G O  
GND  
+15V  
MCC-1520-01  
COMPONENT SIDE  
Power supply trans side (Input)  
Control P.C. board side (Output)  
10-1-3. Flow Selector Unit P.C. Board  
MCC-1431-01  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-1-4. Optional Connector Specifications of Indoor P.C. Board  
Connector Pin  
Function  
Specifications  
DC12V  
Remarks  
No.  
No.  

‚

Humidifier output  
CN66  
In heating, thermo ON, Fan ON, Humidifier output ON  
* Humidifier provided, Drain pump ON is set up by CN70  
short-circuit or from remote controller. (DN=40)  
Output  
DC12V  
Fan output  
CN32  
CN61  
Shipment setup: ON with indoor unit operation and OFF  
with stop are linked.  
* Single operation by FAN button on remote controller is set  
up from remote controller (DN=31)  
Output  
‚

—
ON/OFF input  
HA ON/OFF input  
(J01:YES/NO=Pulse (At shipment) / Static input select)  
0V (COM)  
‚
ƒ
Main prohibition input Operation stop of main remote controller is permitted /  
prohibited by input.  
Operation output  
DC12V (COM)  
Alarm output  
ON during operation (Answerback of HA)  
„
ꢀ
†

‚
ƒ
„
ON during alarm output  
Option output  
CN60  
DC12V (COM)  
Defrost output  
Thermo ON output  
COOL output  
ON when outdoor unit is defrosted  
ON during Real thermostat ON (Compressor ON)  
ON when operation mode is cooling system  
(COOL, DRY, Cool/Heat Auto cooling)  
HEAT output  
Fan output  
ON when operation mode is heating system  
(HEAT, Cool/Heat Auto cooling)  
ꢀ
†
ON when indoor fan is ON  
(During use of air cleaner/Interlock cabling)  
Outside error input  
CN80  
DC12V (COM)  
DC12V (COM)  
Outside error input  
—
Generate check code “L30” (for 1 minute continuously) to  
stop forcedly the operation.  

‚
ƒ
—
—
CN20  
CN70  
CN71  
—
—
—
—
—
CHK operation check  
Check mode input  
Used for indoor operation check.  

‚
(Outdoor does not communicate with remote controller, and  
outputs specified operation such as indoor fan “H”, drain  
pump ON, etc.)  
0V  
DISP exhibition mode  
EXCT demand  
CN72  
CN73  
Display mode input  
Exhibition mode enables to communicate by indoor unit and  
remote controller only.  
(When power has been turned on.) Timer short (Usual)  

‚

‚
0V  
Demand input  
0V  
Indoor unit forced thermostat OFF operation  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2. Outdoor unit  
Positions to be checked on the interface P.C. board (MCC-1429)  
For outdoor unit cable  
between outdoor units  
CN03  
CN03 backup  
CN01  
For inter-unit cable between  
indoor and outdoor units  
Pressure sensor (Ps)  
Pressure sensor (Pd)  
CN01 backup  
Option input/output  
CN508,509,510,  
515,501,512  
UART  
communication  
CN600  
RMV  
CN300,301  
BUS terminal  
Terminator resistor  
select SW30  
Jumper select  
SV61  
CN309  
Sensor input  
TD1 ,CN502  
TD2 ,CN503  
TK1 ,CN514  
TK2 ,CN515  
TK3 ,CN516  
TK4 ,CN523  
TE1 ,CN505  
TL ,CN521  
TS1 ,CN504  
TO ,CN507  
TS2 ,CN522  
SW41/42  
CN311  
SV51  
CN310  
SV2  
CN312  
5V  
GND  
SV3A  
CN324  
12V  
SV3B  
CN313  
3.3V  
Connection of power  
supply transformer  
CN100  
SV3C  
CN314  
Option input/output  
CN511  
SV11  
CN322  
High pressure swith1  
High pressure swith2  
Dina-doctor  
connecting terminal  
CN800  
SV12  
CN319  
For transformer  
power supply  
CN401,402  
Case heater 1  
Case heater 2  
Accumulator  
heater  
For expansion BUS  
power supply  
CN325  
SV3D SV3E  
CN323  
L1, L2, L3, N-phase  
input CN400  
4-way valve  
CN317  
Comp. case  
thermo 2 input  
CN307  
SW06 to 14  
Comp. case thermo  
1 input  
CN305  
SW01,02,03  
SW04,05,15  
7-segment LED  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inverter P.C. board (MCC-1502) [IPDU1, IPDU2]  
Compressor output  
Power supply  
input  
(AC400V)  
+12V  
GND  
+5V  
Input current  
sensor  
(T02)  
Communication  
between I/F  
and Comp.  
IPDU  
Reactor 2  
(IPDU2 only is  
connected.)  
AC230V  
input  
DC330V output  
(IPDU1 only is  
connected.)  
Connection between  
IPDU1 and 2  
Electrolytic  
condenser (+, -)  
DC330V input  
Reactor 1  
(IPDU1 only is connected.)  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power supply P.C. board for fan (MCC-1439)  
Communication between  
I/F and fan IPDU  
+12V  
Judgement  
AC230V input  
+12V terminal 1 – 5  
+7V terminal 2 – 5  
(
)
Communication  
between fan IPDU  
GND  
+7V output  
DC330V output  
(For Comp. IPDU)  
Electrolytic condenser  
CN500  
DC330V output for fan IPDU  
(Judgemant : DC 180–370V)  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2-1. Outdoor Interface P.C. Board  
Dip switch function exchange setup list  
Initial setup  
at shipment  
Part type  
Exchange contents  
SW01 Rotary SW 4bit 16 step Display / Operation switch (1)  
SW02 Rotary SW 4bit 16 step Display / Operation switch (2)  
SW03 Rotary SW 4bit 16 step Display / Operation switch (3)  
For 7-segment display / service operation  
For 7-segment display / service operation  
For 7-segment display / service operation  
[Operation/Start] by pushing  
[1]  
[1]  
[1]  
SW04 Push SW  
SW05 Push SW  
For service [Operation/Start]  
For service [Stop/End]  
—
[Stop/End] by pushing  
—
Bit 1  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Bit 4  
Backup setup  
(Based on the following setup)  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Bit 4  
OFF  
—
Bit 3  
OFF  
—
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
SW06 SW 4bit  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF Normal  
ON  
No.1 COMP backup  
—
—
OFF No.2 COMP backup  
Bit 1 Power peak-cut control exchange  
Bit 2 Power peak-cut control exchange (Expansion) (For 4-steps exchange)  
OFF: 0 – 100%, ON: Middle – 100%  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
SW07 SW 4bit  
Bit 3  
—
—
—
—
Bit 4  
n Header unit  
Bit 1 Outdoor address setup exchange  
Bit 2 Judge indoor capacity over  
OFF: Auto setup (Normal), ON: Manual setup  
OFF: YES (Normal), ON: NO  
OFF  
OFF  
SW09 SW 4bit  
OFF: Normal, ON: Size UP  
(For outdoor expansion)  
Bit 3 Correction of installed pipe size  
OFF  
Bit 4 Judge abnormal No. of connected indoor units OFF: No error judgment, ON: Error  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Bit 1  
—
—
Bit 2 Outdoor fan high-static pressure shift  
OFF: Normal, ON: High-static pressure shift  
SW10 SW 4bit  
SW11 SW 4bit  
SW12 SW 4bit  
OFF: Normal,  
ON : INV frequency upper limit restriction  
Bit 3  
OFF  
Sound reduction control  
Bit 4  
OFF: Normal, ON: Fan rpm upper limit restriction  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
—
—
—
—
OFF: System stop,  
ON : System operation continues  
Bit 4 Operation when indoor overflow detected  
Bit 1 PMV manual operation selected  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF: PMV1, PMV2  
ON : PMV3  
Bit 2  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Bit 3  
Bit 4  
Bit 1  
Bit 2  
SW13 SW 4bit  
Bit 3  
Bit 4 Line address setup  
Bit 1, 2, 3, 4  
SW14 SW 4bit  
SW30 SW 2bit  
Line address setup  
Refer to item “Address setup procedure”  
OFF: No Terminator resistor  
ON : Exists  
Bit 2 Terminator resistor between outdoor units  
ON  
CN30 Check connector  
CN31 Check connector  
CN32 Check connector  
Manual full opening setup of PMV  
Manual full closing setup of PMV  
Check for assembly line in factory.  
Opened: Normal, Short: Opened fully  
Opened: Normal, Short: Opened fully  
Opened: Normal, Short: Check mode  
Open  
Open  
Open  
* The outdoor unit connected with indoor/outdoor communication line becomes automatically the master unit.  
No manual setting is necessary.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. BACKUP OPERATIONS (EMERGENCY OPERATION)  
When a trouble occurs in an outdoor unit or in one of the compressors in an outdoor unit, the malfunctioning  
unit or compressor stops and a backup operation (emergency operation) is available through the other function-  
ing outdoor units and compressors. A backup operation can be set up following the procedure below.  
11-1. Before Backup Operation  
The method of the backup operation will differ depending on the type of trouble. Refer to the following table.  
Trouble contents  
Backup operation method  
Compressor backup  
Setup procedure  
When a trouble occurs on one of the compressors  
in the same unit (Note 1)  
To item 2  
When a trouble occurs on the both compressors  
in the same unit  
Trouble of the compressor coil  
(Such as defect of compressor coil)  
Outdoor unit backup or outdoor unit  
backup during cooling season (Note 2)  
To item 3 or item 4  
When a trouble occurs on the refrigerating system  
parts, fan system parts, or electric system parts  
When a trouble occurs on the temperature sensor  
or pressure sensor  
(Note 1) When a trouble of the compressor coil etc has occurred, deterioration of the oil will be high.  
Therefore do not perform a backup operation, as other units within the system may be damaged.  
(Note 2) Only one outdoor unit within a given system can be subjected to the backup procedure.  
11-2. Compressor Backup Setup  
Outline  
When a trouble occurs on one of the two compressors, follow the procedure below. If it is necessary perform a  
backup operation on the other normal compressor.  
Procedure  
1. Turn off the main power supplies to all the units connected to the system.  
2. As shown below set up the switch SW06 on the interface P.C. board on the outdoor unit on which the com-  
pressor has failed.  
SW06  
Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4  
Initial setup at shipment from factory  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
No.1 compressor (Left side) is defective.  
No.2 compressor (Right front side) is defective.  
OFF  
3. Turn on the main power supplies of all of the units connected to the system.  
After the backup set up for the outdoor unit in cooling season is complete, check the system operates.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-3. Backup Setup for Outdoor Unit  
Outline  
In this model, setup of the backup operation is available in either the header unit or the follower unit in a situa-  
tion where the outdoor units are defective. In a system in which two or more outdoor units are connected, carry  
out the backup operation on the outdoor unit if the error modes described below occur.  
• Compressor error (Rare short error or when one compressor cannot operate, etc.)  
• Pressure sensor (Pd, Ps) / Temperature sensor (TD1, TD2, TS1, TE1, TK1, TK2, TK3, TK4, TL) error  
Note only one outdoor unit within a given system can be subjected to the backup procedure.  
Procedure  
1. Turn off the main power supplies to all the units connected to the system.  
[Set up procedure for the malfunctioning outdoor unit]  
(The following work is common to the header unit and follower units in the system.)  
2. Turn on both bit 1 and 2 of the SW06 on the interface P.C. board.  
3. Fully close the liquid service valve when the outdoor PMV is suspected to be leaking  
(i.e. when the PMV will not close fully).  
4. Turn on the main power supplies of all of the units connected to the system.  
If the fault is a compressor insulation error, remove the wiring to the compressor before turning the power  
supply on.  
After the backup set up for the outdoor unit in cooling season is complete, check the system operates.  
Turn on bit 1 and bit 2 of dip SW06.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. OIL LEVEL JUDGMENT DISPLAY  
The judgment result of the current oil level of the compressor can be confirmed by the switch setup on the  
interface P.C. board on the outdoor unit.  
Confirm the result using the following procedure.  
1. Operation procedure  
Interface P.C. board on the outdoor unit  
which displays oil level judgment  
1)  
Operation starts.  
3)  
Result of oil level  
judgment is displayed.  
2)  
4)  
Set SW01/SW02/SW03  
to 1/16/1.  
After confirmation, return  
SW01/SW02/SW03 to 1/1/1.  
1) Start the operation.  
2) Set the rotary switches SW01/02/03 on the interface P.C. board to 1/16/1.  
3) The result of the oil level judgement is displayed on the 7-segment display.  
7-segment display [oL] [A00]  
The right 3 digits indicate the judgment result.The judgment results of the oil level in compressor 1 and  
compressor 2 are displayed.  
(Example: A ¡ o = ¡ : Oil level result of compressor 1, o : Oil level result of compressor 2  
Display example  
7-segment display  
[oL] [A00] : Oil level is good in compressor 1 and 2.  
[oL] [A01] : Oil level is good in compressor 1 and short in compressor 2  
[oL] [A20] : Oil shortage in compressor 1 and good in compressor 2  
Judgment result in compressor 2  
Judgment result in compressor 1  
For the contents of judgment result, refer to the following table.)  
7-segment display oil level results  
7-segment display  
Judgment result  
Contents  
0
Appropriate  
Oil level inside of the compressor is appropriate.  
1
2
Shortage of oil level in the compressor (Both A1 and A2 indicate shortage.)  
If this judgment continues, the system stops for protection.  
Shortage  
TK1 circuit error is found.  
If this judgment continues, the system stops for protection.  
A
B
C
D
TK1 circuit error  
TK2 circuit error  
TK3 circuit error  
TK4 circuit error  
TK2 circuit error is found.  
If this judgment continues, the system stops for protection.  
TK3 circuit error is found.  
If this judgment continues, the system stops for protection.  
TK4 circuit error is found.  
If this judgment continues, the system stops for protection.  
4) After confirmation, return SW01/SW02/SW03 to (1/1/1).  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13. REFRIGERANT RECOVERY  
WHEN REPLACINGTHE COMPRESSOR  
13-1. Refrigerant Recovery in the Malfunctioning Outdoor Unit  
A pump-down function is available in this system. For multiple outdoor unit systems, execute pump-down by using  
the normal outdoor units and the refrigerant can be recovered from the outdoor unit, which is to be repaired.  
13-1-1. Before Refrigerant Recovery Operation  
Pay attention to the following items during pump-down operation.  
1. The refrigerant recovery rate changes with the outside temperature in the pump-down operation.  
When the pump-down operation has finished, recover the remaining gas using a recovery device and measure  
the amount of recovered refrigerant.  
2. Executing the pump-down operation when heating the accumulator of the malfunctioning outdoor unit improves  
refrigerant recovery rate.  
3. While both outdoor PMVs are closed the refrigerant in the heat exchanger cannot be recovered.  
If executing brazing after pump-down operation, recover the refrigerant in the heat exchanger before starting.  
13-1-2. Refrigerant Recovery Procedure  
(If no backup operation for the outdoor unit has been implemented)  
Procedure  
Turn on the power supply to the system, and ensure system operation is stopped. If the fault is an insulation error in  
the compressor, remove the wiring to the compressor before turning on the power supply.  
[Set up the malfunctioning outdoor unit as follows]  
1. Using a charge hose, connect the check joint of the liquid pipe and the check joint at the low pressure side, then  
purge the air in the hose (to recover refrigerant in the heat exchanger and the liquid tank).  
2. Fully close the service valve of the liquid pipe of the malfunctioning outdoor unit.  
Keep service valves of the gas pipe and the balance pipe open.  
3. If it is thought that the oil has deteriorated due to a faulty compressor, take off the SV3A valve connector of the  
malfunctioning outdoor unit, so that the oil does not flow in the other outdoor units.  
4. Set the rotary switches SW01/02/03 to 2/11/1 on the interface P.C. board of the malfunctioning outdoor unit, [rd] [  
] is displayed on the 7-segment display.  
5. Press SW04 for 5 seconds or more, [rd][ FF] is displayed on 7-segment display and then pump down starts.  
∗ When interrupting the operation, turn off the power supplies to all of the outdoor units or push SW05 on the  
interface P.C. board.  
1
Malfunctioning  
outdoor unit  
Connected with check joint of  
the liquid pipe and check joint at  
low pressure side by a charge  
hose and purge.  
3
If oil deteriorates due to  
a faulty compressor,  
remove SV3A connector.  
2
Close fully service valve at liquid side.  
(Keep gas and balance side opened.)  
4 Set rotary SW01/02/03 to 2/11/1.  
[rd] [ ] are displayed.  
P.C. board of the malfunctioning outdoor unit  
¯
Push the push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.  
5 [rd] [ FF] are displayed.  
Operation during pump down operation  
Outdoor unit  
Operation contents  
Compressor stops.  
Outdoor fan ON  
Outdoor unit with trouble  
Other outdoor units  
PMV1 and PMV2 open.  
SV3A/3B/3C/3D/3E ON  
Operates in test COOL operation  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Fully close the service valve in the gas pipe of the malfunctioning outdoor unit approximately 10 minutes after  
the system has started.  
7. Push SW04 of the malfunctioning outdoor unit, to display the pressure data (MPa).  
For each successive push of SW04, the data display changes as shown in the example below.  
Display Example  
[rd] [ 11]  
Initial display  
[Pd] [1.20]  
High pressure  
[Ps] [1.20]  
Low pressure  
[Select an outdoor unit for pressure adjustment as follows]  
8. When operating the pump down mode, the outdoor unit which has the lowest unit number is selected as the  
outdoor unit for the pressure adjustment.  
Unit No.  
When SW01/02/03 are set to 1/1/1, the number displayed on the 7-segment display indicates the  
unit number ([U#][---]: # indicates the unit number)  
[Set up all other outdoor units as follows]  
9. Fully close the service valves of all the other outdoor unit balance pipes. Only keep the service valves of the  
balance pipes of the unit in which the pressure adjustment will be made and the malfunctioning unit fully open.  
[Setup for outdoor unit for adjustment of pressure]  
10. Set up the rotary SW01/02/03 to 1/2/2 on the interface P.C. board of the outdoor unit in which the pressure  
adjustment will be made.  
11. The low pressure (Ps) data is displayed on the 7-segment display.  
Slowly close the service valve of the gas pipe and adjust so that a pressure of 0.12 MPa is displayed.  
12. When the low pressure (Ps) of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is almost the same as that of the unit in which  
the pressure adjustment has been made, fully close the service valve of the gas pipe in the unit which the  
pressure adjustment was made.  
[Set up the malfunctioning outdoor unit as follows]  
13. When the pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is below 0.1 MPa, fully close the service valve of the  
balance pipe and push SW05 on the interface P.C. board to finish the pump down operation.  
14. Turn off the power supplies to all of the outdoor units and use a refrigerant recovery device to recover the remaining  
refrigerant in the outdoor unit, in which the pump down operation has been completed. Be sure to measure the  
recovered refrigerant, as the same amount of refrigerant will be required to be recharged after the repair.  
9
6
Fully close the balance pipes of  
the outdoor units except the  
unit for pressure adjustment  
and unit with the malfunction.  
Fully close the service valve of  
the gas pipe approx. 10 minutes  
after the system has started.  
8
The lowest number  
outdoor unit is  
selected as the  
outdoor unit for  
pressure adjustment.  
Malfunctioning outdoor unit  
7
The low pressure  
is displayed by  
pushing SW04.  
[Ps] [###]  
10  
The low pressure is  
displayed by setting  
SW01/02/03 to 1/2/2.  
[Ps] [###]  
13  
11  
When low pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor  
unit is below 0.10 MPa, fully close the service valve  
of the balance pipe.  
Close service valve of the gas pipe gradually  
while checking the low pressure, and then  
adjust the pressure to 0.12 MPa.  
12  
When low pressure of the malfunctioning  
outdoor unit and low pressure of the outdoor  
unit for pressure adjustment becomes almost  
same, fully close the service valve of gas pipe  
on the outdoor unit for pressure adjustment  
14  
Turn off the power of all the outdoor units.  
Using a recovery device, reclaim the remaining  
refrigerant in the outdoor unit in which pump-down  
operation has finished and measure the amount.  
Return all rotary switches SW01/02/03 to 1/1/1.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(Refrigerant recovery procedure (backup))  
If the power of the malfunctioning unit cannot be turned on, the PMV cannot be opened, therefore the amount of  
recovered refrigerant decreases compared with the usual pump down operation.  
Using a refrigerant recovery device, recover the remaining gas in the unit and measure the recovered refrigerant, as  
the same amount of refrigerant will be required to be recharged after the repair.  
Procedure  
[Set up the malfunctioning outdoor unit as follows]  
1. Using a gauge manifold, connect the check joint of the liquid pipe and the low pressure side, and then purge air  
in the hose (to recover refrigerant in the heat exchanger and the liquid tank).  
2. Fully close the service valve of the liquid pipe in the malfunctioning outdoor unit (keep the service valves of the  
gas pipe and the balance pipe open).  
[Set up the unit selected as the header unit as follows]  
3. Set up the rotary SW01/02/03 to 2/5/1 on the interface P.C. board of the selected header outdoor unit, [C.] [ ] is  
displayed on 7-segment display.  
4. Push SW04 for 5 seconds or more, the system operates in the test cooling operation when [C.] [ C] is displayed  
on the 7-segment display.  
Set up the rotary SW01/02/03 to 1/2/2 on the interface P.C. board of the selected header outdoor unit to display  
the low pressure data (MPa) on the 7-segment display.  
5. Push the SW04 for 2 seconds, the low pressure (MPa) is displayed on 7-segment.  
Unit selected as  
the header unit  
Header unit  
with trouble  
1
Connect check joint of the liquid pipe and  
low pressure side by the gauge manifold,  
and then purge air inside of the hose.  
2
Close fully service valve of the liquid pipe.  
(Keep gas valve of pipe and balance pipe  
opened.)  
Interface P.C. board  
4 Set rotary SW01/02/03 to 2/5/1.  
[C. ] [ ] are displayed.  
Push SW04 for 5 seconds or more.  
5 [C. ] [ –C] are displayed (Test cooling operation starts.)  
6 Low pressure (MPa) is displayed by pushing the push SW04.  
Pd Ps Td1 Td2 TS TE C — C  
6. Fully close the service valve of the gas pipe on the malfunctioning outdoor unit approximately 10 minutes after  
the system has started.  
[Select an outdoor unit for pressure adjustment as follows]  
7. Select the header unit as the unit for pressure adjustment.  
[Set up all other outdoor units as follows]  
8. Fully close the service valves of the other outdoor unit balance pipes.  
Only keep the service valves of the balance pipes of the header unit and the malfunctioning unit fully open.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Setup for header unit]  
9. The low pressure (Ps) data is displayed on the 7-segment display.  
Slowly close the service valve of the gas pipe and adjust so that a pressure of 0.12 MPa is displayed.  
10. When the manifold gauge pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is almost the same as that of the header  
unit in which the pressure adjustment has been made, fully close the service valve of the gas pipe in the header  
unit.  
[Set up the malfunctioning outdoor unit as follows]  
11. When the manifold gauge pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit becomes below 0.1 MPa, fully close the  
packed valve of the balance pipe and then push SW05 on the interface P.C. board to finish the pump down  
operation.  
12. Turn off the power supplies of all of the outdoor units, and use a refrigerant recovery device to recover the  
remaining refrigerant in the outdoor unit, in which the pump down operation has been completed.  
Be sure to measure the recovered refrigerant, as the same amount of refrigerant will be required to be re-  
charged after the repair.  
8
6
Fully close the balance  
pipes of the outdoor units  
other than the master unit  
and the malfunctioning unit.  
Fully close the service valve  
of the gas pipe approx. 10  
minutes after the system has  
started.  
7
The header unit is  
selected as the  
outdoor unit for  
pressure adjustment.  
Outdoor unit with trouble  
11  
9
When the low pressure of the malfunctioning outdoor unit is below  
0.10 MPa, fully close the service valve of the balance pipe.  
Push the switch SW05 to finish the pump-down operation.  
Close service valve of the gas pipe while  
checking the low pressure, and then adjust  
the pressure to 0.12 MPa.  
12  
10  
When the pressure of the malfunctioning  
outdoor unit (manifold gauge) and  
pressure of the header unit become almost  
same, close valve of the gas pipe fully.  
Turn off the main power supplies of all the outdoor units.  
Using a recovery device, recover the remaining refrigerant in the outdoor  
unit in which pump-down operation has finished and measure the amount.  
Return all SW01/02/03 of the header unit to (1/1/1) to complete the work.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-2. How to Operate the System During Repair of the  
Malfunctioning Outdoor Unit  
Procedure  
1. Follow the aforementioned “13-1. Refrigerant Recovery in the Malfunctioning Outdoor Unit”.  
2. Recover the refrigerant in the system by using a recovery device.  
The refrigerant amount to be recovered is determined based upon the capacity of the malfunctioning outdoor  
unit (see the following table).  
Example) In a case of backup for 10 hp-outdoor unit in 30 hp system:  
in the original system hp (30 hp system) = 37.5 kg  
Refrigerant amount in system hp (20 hp system) after backup = 28.0 kg  
Refrigerant amount to be recovered = 37.5 – 28.0 = 9.5 kg  
3. For the unit which the refrigerant has been recovered, execute “Outdoor Unit Backup Setup” of another  
section.  
System  
HP  
Refrigerant amount  
(kg)  
Combination of outdoor units  
8
10  
12  
16  
18  
20  
24  
26  
28  
30  
8
10  
12  
8
13.5  
14.0  
14.5  
21.5  
23.0  
25.0  
30.0  
31.5  
33.0  
34.5  
8
8
10  
10  
8
10  
8
8
8
8
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
8
10  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-3. Process after Repair  
After completion of the repair work, perform vacuuming of the outdoor unit using the following procedure.  
Procedure  
1. Short CN30 on the interface P.C. board on the outdoor unit for which the repair work has been completed, to  
open the PMV fully. (Confirm that Bit 1 of SW12 is OFF.)  
Note) The PMV opening by using short CN30 returns the PMV to fully closed after 2 minutes.  
To continue to fully open status, turn off the power supply of the outdoor unit within 2 minutes after  
using short CN30.  
2. Be sure to perform vacuuming from the following three check joints.  
(Liquid pipe, discharge pipe, and suction pipe)  
Propeller fan  
FM  
Fan motor  
Sensor  
(TE1)  
(Right side)  
Sensor  
(TO)  
Strainer  
Main heat exchanger  
Pulse motor valve  
(Left side)  
Solenoid valve  
(SV12)  
Main heat exchanger  
(PMV1) (PMV2)  
Sub heat exchanger (Right side)  
Sub heat exchanger (Left side)  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
(PMV3)  
4-Way valve  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV11)  
Solenoid  
Capillary  
tube  
Low-  
pressure  
sensor  
valve  
Sensor  
(TS1)  
(SV5)  
Check  
valve  
Sensor  
(TS2)  
High-pressure  
sensor  
Check  
joint  
Solenoid valve  
(SV2)  
Capillary  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV6)  
Check joint  
Sensor  
(TL)  
tube  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Oil  
separator  
Capillary tube  
Solenoid valve  
(SV3D)  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Liquid  
tank  
Solenoid valve  
(SV42)  
Check  
valve  
Check  
valve  
Solenoid valve  
(SV41)  
High-  
pressure  
switch  
High-  
pressure  
switch  
Accumulator  
Check  
joint  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3C)  
Capillary  
tube  
Sensor  
(TD2)  
Sensor  
(TD1)  
Sensor  
(TK3)  
Strainer Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Check  
valve  
Capillary  
tube  
Capillary  
tube  
Sensor  
(TK1)  
Sensor  
(TK2)  
Oil tank  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3E)  
Sensor  
(TK4)  
Capillary tube  
Capillary tube  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3A)  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3B)  
Check  
valve  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Service Service Service  
Service  
valve of valve at valve at valve at  
balance liquid  
pipe side  
discharge suction  
gas side gas side  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. LEAKAGE/CLOGGING OF OIL-EQUALIZATION CIRCUIT  
Check code list for leakage, clogging of outdoor refrigerant circuit and oil circuit parts  
Trouble by clogging  
Position with trouble  
(See next page.)  
Unit issuing  
check code  
Phenomena  
(Corresponding unit)  
Part name  
Check code to be detected  
Outdoor PMV  
A
Corresponding unit High-pressure protective operation  
Low-pressure protective operation  
Discharge temp. error  
P20  
H06  
P03  
P17  
High-pressure up  
Low-pressure down  
Discharge temp. up  
Check valve of main discharge pipe  
collective section  
B
Corresponding unit High-pressure protective operation  
High-pressure SW system error  
P20  
P04-XX  
Abnormal high-pressure up  
Check valve of discharge pipe  
C
D
Corresponding unit High-pressure SW system error  
P04-XX Abnormal high-pressure up  
Check valve of oil-equalization circuit  
Corresponding unit Oil level detective circuit error  
Oil level down error  
H16-XX Oil-equalization circuit error or  
Capillary  
Strainer  
H07  
oil-shortage judgment  
SV3A valve  
SV3B valve  
SV3C valve  
E
F
Other connected unit Oil level down error  
Corresponding unit Oil level down error  
Other connected unit Oil level down error  
Corresponding unit Oil level down error  
H07  
H07  
H07  
H07  
Excessive oil amount  
Shortage of oil amount  
Excessive oil amount  
Shortage of oil amount  
G
H
SV3D valve  
SV3D valve circuit capillary  
Strainer  
SV3E valve  
I
Corresponding unit Oil level detective circuit error  
Oil level down error  
H16-04 Oil-equalization circuit error  
H07  
Judgment of shortage  
Shortage of oil amount  
Oil return capillary  
J
Corresponding unit Oil level down error  
H07  
Shortage of oil amount  
SV3C bypass capillary  
K
Corresponding unit Oil level detective circuit error  
H16-03 Oil-equalization circuit error  
Trouble by leakage  
Position with trouble  
(See next page.)  
Unit issuing  
Phenomena  
(Corresponding unit)  
Part name  
Check code to be detected  
check code  
Outdoor PMV  
A
B
Corresponding unit Outdoor liquid back error  
Oil level down error  
P13  
H07  
Refrigerant stagnation  
Refrigerant stagnation  
Check valve of main discharge pipe  
collective section  
Corresponding unit Oil level down error  
Compressor breakdown  
H07  
H01-XX  
H02-XX  
Compressor error (Lock)  
Check valve of discharge pipe  
C
D
Corresponding unit Oil level down error  
Compressor breakdown  
H07  
H01-XX  
H02-XX  
Refrigerant stagnation  
Compressor error (Lock)  
Check valve of oil-equalization circuit  
Corresponding unit Oil level down error  
H07  
Excessive oil amount  
(Leaked side)  
Shortage of oil amount  
(Normal side)  
SV3A valve  
SV3C valve  
E
Corresponding unit Oil level down error  
Corresponding unit Oil level down error  
H07  
H07  
Shortage of oil amount  
Judgment of oil shortage  
G
NOTE) XX: Error on sub-code  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Propeller fan  
FM  
Fan motor  
Sensor  
(TE1)  
(Right side)  
Sensor  
(TO)  
Strainer  
Main heat exchanger  
Pulse motor valve  
(Left side)  
Solenoid valve  
Main heat exchanger  
(SV12)  
(PMV1) (PMV2)  
Check  
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Right side)  
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Left side)  
Strainer  
A
H
(PMV3)  
4-Way valve  
valve  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
B
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV11)  
Solenoid  
Capillary  
tube  
Low-  
pressure  
sensor  
valve  
(SV5)  
Sensor  
(TS1)  
Check  
valve  
Sensor  
(TS2)  
High-pressure  
sensor  
Check  
joint  
Solenoid valve  
(SV2)  
Capillary  
tube  
Solenoid  
valve  
Check joint  
C
G
Sensor  
(TL)  
(SV6)  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Oil  
separator  
Capillary tube  
Solenoid valve  
(SV3D)  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Liquid  
tank  
Check  
valve  
Check  
valve  
Solenoid valve  
(SV42)  
Solenoid valve  
(SV41)  
K
I
High-  
pressure  
switch  
High-  
pressure  
switch  
Accumulator  
Capillary  
tube  
Check  
joint  
Solenoid  
valve  
Sensor  
(TD2)  
Sensor  
D
J
(TD1)  
(SV3C)  
Sensor  
(TK3)  
Strainer Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Check  
valve  
Capillary  
tube  
Capillary  
tube  
Sensor  
(TK1)  
Sensor  
(TK2)  
Oil tank  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3E)  
Sensor  
(TK4)  
E
F
Capillary tube  
Capillary tube  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3A)  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3B)  
Check  
valve  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Service Service Service  
Service  
valve of valve at valve at valve at  
balance liquid  
pipe side  
discharge suction  
gas side gas side  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. REPLACING COMPRESSOR  
15-1. Compressor Replacing Procedure (Outline)  
WARNING  
Never recover the refrigerant into outdoor unit.  
Be sure to use a refrigerant recovery device for refrigerant recovery for reinstallation or repair work.  
Recovery into the outdoor unit is unavailable; otherwise a serious accident such as rupture or ingury could  
occur.  
START  
NOTE) Full opening operation of PMV by CN30  
Recover refrigerant from outdoor unit,  
short-circuiting rwill return to fully closed  
after 2 minutes have passed.  
using a suitable device.  
To continue full-opening status, turn off  
power to the outdoor unit within 2 minutes.  
Turn off power to the troubled outdoor unit.  
Remove the troubled compressor.  
Measure oil amount in the troubled compressor.  
Check oil color of the troubled compressor.  
ASTM: Is 4 or more?  
Judge the oil status based on the oil color,  
and then decide to exchange the troubled  
compressor only or both compressors.  
NO  
Exchange the malfunctioning compressor only.  
(
)
YES  
Replace both the malfunctioning compressor  
and the normal compressor.  
Measure the oil amount in the normal compressor.  
Adjust oil amount based upon the measured oil amount.  
Install two compressors.  
* This flowchart is the standard for replacing compressors.  
Each case must be considered on individual circumstances.  
Replace the compressors based on the following conditions  
of judgement.  
1. Oil of 1900 cc is charged in a compressor for service.  
2. The amount of oil is 3800 cc in an outdoor unit at shipment.  
Check for leakage in the malfunctioning outdoor unit.  
Vacuum the malfunctioning outdoor unit.  
Charge the refrigerant.  
3. When a compressor is removed, it usually contains  
800 to 1400 cc of oil.  
Oil separator usually holds 0 to 1000 cc of oil.  
END  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-2. Replacing Compressor  
Exchanging a compressor  
When changing the compressor, extract oil from the defective compressor and based on the quality of the oil,  
make the decision of whether to change one or both compressors.  
If oil colour ASTM is 4.0 or more, both compressors should be replaced.  
CAUTION  
The compressor can weigh in excess of 20kg.  
One person should not attempt to lift it alone.  
M5 screws  
(2 positions)  
Removal of defective compressor  
• Turn off the power supply to the defective unit.  
• Remove the front panel. (M5 × 7)  
Claw for  
temporary hooking  
• Remove the cover on the electric parts box. (M4 × 2)  
• Remove the screws (M5 × 2) that fix the electric parts box to  
the outdoor unit.  
• Remove the tabs for temporary hooking the lower part of the  
electric parts box.  
Note) Due to the center of gravity of the electrical box, pay  
careful attention as the box may fall out.  
Hooks  
• Remove the tabs from the upper part of the electric parts box  
and move it to the valve side.  
Note) The electrical parts box may become unstable.  
If it does, disconnect all cables and completely remove  
the electrical parts box.  
• Remove the lower duct. (M4 × 4)  
• Remove the sound-insulation mat.  
• Remove the crank case heater.  
• Remove the terminal cover of the compressor, the wiring to the  
compressor and the case thermostat unit.  
WARNING  
Be aware that if oil is present when  
brazing a fire could occur.  
Note) Remove the cables from the compressor side only.  
Ensure the cable ends are insulated with electrical tape.  
• Remove the discharge pipe, suction pipe, and oil-equation pipe.  
• Remove the hexagonal bolts fixing the compressor. (One side of hexagon: 13mm × 2 pcs. a compressor)  
Note) Only two hexagonal bolts are provided per compressor.  
• Remove the compressor.  
Measurement of the quantity of oil in the defective compressor  
• Place the defective compressor on a scale, and use the  
weight to calculate the oil quantity.  
Oil amount in the defective compressor:  
A [cc] = (Removed compressor mass (kg) –23.5) × 1042  
(Specific gravity of oil: 1042 cc/kg)  
Note)  
Positions to be removed  
(3 positions)  
(In case of right side)  
*Left side is same  
as right side  
• When compressor holds no oil, mass is 23.5 kg.  
Lower duct  
M4 screws  
(4 positions)  
Compressor/  
Sound-insulation mat  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color check of oil in the defective compressor  
• Lay the defective compressor down, extract a little oil from the  
oil-equalization pipe and then check the oil colour based on the  
oil colour sample.  
• Determine the number of compressors to replace based on  
the oil colour:  
• ASTM below 4: Replace the defective compressor  
• ASTM above 4: Replace both compressors  
Compressor  
Oil-equation pipe  
When replacing only the defective compressor  
Adjustment of oil amount in the service compressor (Oil amount 1900cc at shipment)  
• Adjust the oil amount in the service compressor based on the amount of oil found in the defective compressor  
by following instructions below.  
1. If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is 0 < A < 1000  
1) Adjust the amount of oil in the service compressor to 1000 cc.  
Lay the service compressor down, and extract 900 cc of oil from the oil-equalization pipe.  
Note) Do not extract more than 900 cc as a compressor fault may be caused.  
• If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is below 500 cc, a fault in the oil-equalization circuit is  
possible.  
Check the compressor using “15-3. Procedure to Identify the Cause of Compressor Oil Shortage”.  
2. If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is 1000 < A < 1900  
1) Adjust the amount of oil in the service compressor to A cc.  
Lay the service compressor down and extract (1900 - A) cc of oil from the oil-equalization pipe.  
3. If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is 1900 < A  
1) Adjust the amount of oil in the service compressor to A cc.  
Insert a hose into the discharge pipe or oil equation pipe of the service compressor and then add (A -  
1900) cc of oil using a funnel.  
Compressor  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When replacing both the defective and normal compressors  
Removal of normal compressor  
• Remove the normal compressor in the same way as the defective compressor.  
Note)  
• Be sure to apply insulation to the removed cable terminals with insulating tape, etc.  
WARNING  
Be aware that if oil is present when brazing, a fire eruption could occur.  
Measurement of oil amount in the normal compressor  
• As with measurement of oil amount in the defective compressor, place the defective compressor on a scale,  
and use the weight to calculate the oil quantity.  
Oil amount of the normal compressor: B [cc] = (Removed compressor mass (kg) –23.5) × 1042  
(Specific gravity of oil: 1042 [cc/kg])  
Note)  
• When the compressor holds no oil, the compressor mass is 23.5kg.  
Adjustment of oil amount in the service compressor  
• Adjust the oil amount in the service compressors based on the amount of oil found in the defective compres-  
sor (A cc) and normal compressor (B cc) by following instructions below.  
1. If the total amount oil in both the compressors is 0 < (A + B) < 2000  
1) Adjust the amount of oil in the two service compressors to 1000 cc each.  
Lay the two service compressors down, and extract 900 cc of oil from each of the oil-equalization pipes.  
• If the amount of oil in the defective compressor is below 500 cc, a fault in the oil-equalization circuit is  
possible.  
Check the compressor using “15-3. Procedure to Identify the Cause of Compressor Oil Shortage”.  
2. If the total amount of oil in both the compressors is 2000 < (A + B) < 3800  
1) Adjust oil amount in the two service compressors to A + B [cc] each.  
2
• Lay the two service compressors down and extract  
3800 – (A + B)  
[cc] of oil from each oil-equalization pipe.  
2
3. If the total amount of oil in both the compressors is: 3800 < A  
1) Adjust the amount of oil in both the service compressors to A + B [cc] each.  
2
(Insert a hose into the discharge pipe or oil equation pipe of the service  
compressor and then add  
A + B  
2
– 1900 [cc] of oil using a funnel.)  
Compressor  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation of compressor  
• Install the compressor in the reverse procedure of removal.  
• When removing the compressor, the terminals may become loose.  
If this happens crimp them with pliers and then check there are no looseness.  
Note)  
• Only two hexagonal bolts are provided to fix the compressor.  
• The tightening torque of the hexagonal bolt to fix the compressor is 200kg/cm.  
• If oil has been extracted from the accumulator, braze the cutoff pipe after pinching.  
Vacuuming  
In case of single outdoor system  
• Connect vacuum pump to the valve charge ports on the liquid, gas pipes and the check joint on the high-  
pressure side and then vacuum.  
• Vacuum until the vacuum low-pressure gauge indicates 1 (mmHg).  
Note)  
• Before vacuuming, open PMV1, 2 fully.Vacuuming of the outdoor heat exchanger will not occur if PMV 1  
and 2 are closed.  
In case of multiple outdoor unit systems  
• In the case of conducting the refrigerant recovery at replacing the compressor, perform vacuuming as “13-3.  
Process after Repair ”.  
Full opening of PMV1, PMV2  
• Turn on the power to the outdoor unit.  
• Confirm that Bit 1 on SW12 is OFF.  
• Short CN30 on I/F P.C. board on the outdoor unit.  
• Turn off the power to the outdoor unit within 2 minutes of short-circuiting.  
Refrigerant charging  
• Add the same amount of refrigerant as the remaining refrigerant from charge port of the liquid service valve.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15-3. Procedure to Identify the Cause of Compressor Oil Shortage  
Correct miscabling or incorrect  
Is there any disconnection, mis-cabling,  
or incorrect installation of sensors on the unit  
of which the compressor has been replaced?  
installation of the sensors:  
TK1: CN514/TK2: CN515  
TK3: CN516/TK4: CN523  
NO  
YES  
NO  
Are the sensor characteristics of  
TK1, TK2, TK3 and TK4 sensors correct?  
Sensor error  
Exchange  
YES  
Check oil-equalization circuit in the following procedure  
once the compressor is removed.  
Check items and procedure for the oil-equalization circuit under when the compressor has  
been removed  
Check items  
Position  
Procedure  
Outdoor PMV1, 2, 3  
leakage  
A
B
1) Pressurize with nitrogen through check joint of liquid pipe and check for  
pressure at check joint of discharge pipe.  
Check valve leakage  
on main discharge pipe  
If pressure of check joint of discharge pipe is high, leakage from outdoor  
PMV 1,2, 3 and check valve of main discharge pipe are possible.  
Exchange the parts.  
2) If the pressure cannot be found, open outdoor PMV 1,2,3 fully and recheck  
pressure.  
If the pressure from the discharge check joint is high, leakage from check  
valve of main discharge pipe is possible. Exchange the parts.  
Check for  
refrigerant  
stagnation in  
compressor  
Check valve leakage of  
discharge pipe  
C
D
3) If gas leaks from the brazed discharge pipe where compressor has been  
removed, when pressurized with nitrogen from the check joint of the main  
discharge pipes, the discharge pipe check valves is possibly leaking.  
Exchange the parts.  
Check valve leakage of  
oil-equalization circuit  
4) If gas leaks from the brazed oil-equalization pipe where compressor has  
been removed, when pressurized with nitrogen from the check joint of the  
discharge pipe, the check valve of oil-equalization circuit is a possibly  
leaking. Exchange the parts.  
SV3A valve leakage  
SV3B valve clogging  
E
F
5) Pressurize with nitrogen with the check joint on the discharge pipe then open  
SV3B valve manually.  
If gas leaks from the brazed suction pipe where the compressor should be,  
there may be a leak in SV3A valve. Exchange the parts.  
SV3E valve clogging.  
Clogging of oil-return  
capillary  
G
H
6) Open SV3E valve manually while pressurizing with nitrogen using the check  
joint on the discharge pipe.  
If there is no leakage at the brazed suction pipe where the compressor was  
removed, the SV3E valve or oil return capillary may be clogged.  
Exchange the parts.  
Check for oil  
shortage in  
compressor  
SV3D valve capillary  
clogging.  
I
H
7) Open SV3E valve manually while pressurizing with nitrogen from the check  
joint of the discharge pipe.  
Clogging of oil-return  
capillary  
If there is no leakage at the brazed suction pipe where the compressor was  
removed, the SV3D valve/capillary or oil return capillary may be clogged.  
Exchange the parts.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Propeller fan  
FM  
Fan motor  
Sensor  
(TE1)  
(Right side)  
Sensor  
(TO)  
Strainer  
Main heat exchanger  
Pulse motor valve  
(Left side)  
Solenoid valve  
B
Main heat exchanger  
(SV12)  
(PMV1) (PMV2)  
Check  
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Right side)  
Auxiliary heat exchanger (Left side)  
Strainer  
A
(PMV3)  
4-Way valve  
valve  
Strainer  
Check  
valve  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV11)  
Solenoid  
Low-  
pressure  
sensor  
Capillary  
tube  
valve  
Sensor  
(TS1)  
(SV5)  
Check  
valve  
Sensor  
(TS2)  
High-pressure  
sensor  
Check  
joint  
Solenoid valve  
(SV2)  
Capillary  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV6)  
Check joint  
Sensor  
(TL)  
tube  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Oil  
separator  
Capillary tube  
Solenoid valve  
(SV3D)  
Nitrogen  
pressure  
Strainer  
Capillary tube  
Liquid  
tank  
Check  
valve  
Check  
valve  
Solenoid valve  
(SV42)  
Solenoid valve  
(SV41)  
High-  
pressure  
switch  
High-  
pressure  
switch  
I
Accumulator  
Capillary  
tube  
Check  
joint  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3C)  
Sensor  
(TD2)  
Sensor  
(TD1)  
C
D
Sensor  
(TK3)  
Strainer Strainer  
Nitrogen  
pressure  
Check  
valve  
Check  
valve  
Capillary  
tube  
Capillary  
tube  
Sensor  
(TK1)  
Sensor  
(TK2)  
Oil tank  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3E)  
Sensor  
(TK4)  
Capillary tube  
Capillary tube  
Strainer  
Strainer  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3A)  
Solenoid  
valve  
(SV3B)  
Check  
valve  
Strainer  
H
Check  
valve  
Service Service Service  
Service  
valve of valve at valve at valve at  
balance liquid  
pipe side  
discharge suction  
gas side gas side  
H
G
E
F
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. REPLACING PROCEDURE OF PARTS  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
Remarks  
1
Cabinet  
Discharge cabinet  
REQUIREMENT  
Wear protective clothing on your hands as  
other components may cause and injury etc.  
2)  
Disassembling  
1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the  
power supply to the unit.  
Screws (4 corners)  
2) Remove the screws on the discharge  
cabinet. (M5 × 16, 4 pcs.)  
5) Suction cabinet  
(Front and rear)  
3) Remove the screws (Front/rear at lower  
side) on the cabinet. (M5 × 10, 7 pcs. each)  
4) Remove the screws on the service panel.  
(M5 × 10, 3 pcs.)  
5) Remove the screws (Front/rear sides) on  
the suction cabinet.  
(M5 × 10, 4 pcs. each)  
(M4 × 10, 2 pcs. each)  
6) Remove the screws (Right/left sides) on the  
side panel. (M5 × 10, 4 pcs. each)  
3) Lower cabinet tab  
(Front and rear)  
6) Side board  
(Right and left)  
4) Service panel  
Reassembly  
Reassemble the cabinet in the reverse proce-  
dure ( 6) → 1) ) on the above “Disassembling  
Procedure”.  
However be sure to follow the following points  
when assembling the discharge cabinet.  
w Cautions when assembling the discharge  
cabinet  
The hooking tabs ∗ (6 positions) located on  
the inside edge of the discharge cabinet, are  
to be correctly fitted into the relevant slots on  
the right/left side panels.  
* Hooking tab  
2 × 3 positions each at  
(
)
longitudinal direction  
Failure to do so may result in unit vibration.  
2
Propeller fan  
motor  
REQUIREMENT  
Discharge cabinet  
Wear protective clothing on your hands as  
other components may cause and injury etc.  
2)  
Disassembling  
1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the  
power supply to the unit.  
2) Remove the screws on the discharge  
cabinet. (M5 × 16, 4 pcs.)  
Screws (4 corners)  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
Remarks  
2
Propeller fan  
motor  
3) Remove the flange nut fixing on the fan  
motor and propeller fan.  
3) Flange nut  
(To tighten the nut, turn it clockwise.)  
4) Remove the square washer.  
5) Remove the propeller fan.  
NOTE Gently pull the straight upwards.  
4) Squarre washer  
6) Remove the connectors (3 positions) from  
IPDU P.C. board on the inverter fan and then  
pull out the fan motor lead upwards.  
7) Remove the fixing screws (4 pcs.) on the fan  
motor.  
6)  
7) Screws  
(4 positions)  
Route of tthhee  
fan motor lead  
Remove the connector  
and pull it out upwards.  
Detailed photo  
of connector  
Signal line  
Power line  
w Cautions when exchange/reassembling the  
D-cut face of motor shaft  
fan motor  
1)  
1) Match the D-cut surface of the motor with the  
mark on the fan, insert the propeller fan.  
(If tightening the D-cut surface when out of  
position, the propeller fan will melt due to  
friction heat, which will cause the unit to  
malfunction.)  
2) Be sure to attach the square washer.  
(Failure to do so will result in abnormal sound  
and vibration being generated.)  
3) Tighten the flange nut with 15N•m  
(153kg•cm).  
4) Insert the hooking tabs on the discharge  
cabinet securely into the tab holes on the  
cabinet.  
(Refer to the photo in the previous page;  
3 positions each at front and rear sides, total  
6 positions)  
Fan  
mark  
Positioning to D-cut face of shaft  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
REQUIREMENT  
Remarks  
3
Heat  
exchanger  
2) Motor base  
Wear protective clothing on your hands as  
other components may cause and injury etc.  
Heat exchanger  
(Left)  
Before beginning the procedure, ensure the  
refrigerant has been reclaimed from the  
outdoor unit, using a suitable refrigerant  
recovery device.  
Heat exchanger  
(Right)  
3) Motor base bracket  
w Disassembling (Example):  
Heat exchanger (Right)  
5) Support  
1) Remove the cabinet.  
2) Remove the motor base. (M5 × 10, 4 pcs.)  
3) Remove the motor base bracket.  
(M5 × 10, 5 pcs.)  
4) Heat eexchanger  
fixing board  
4) Remove the screws on the heat exchanger  
fixing board. (M5 × 10, 6 pcs.)  
6) Waterproof board  
5) Remove the screws on the support.  
(M5 × 10, 3 pcs.)  
6) Remove the screws on waterproof board.  
(M4 × 10, 3 pcs.)  
7) Remove the brazing section on the con-  
nected pipe (8 positions).  
8) Remove the screws on the support at the  
rear side, and then pull out the heat ex-  
changer. (M5 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
7) Brazing section  
(4 positions at header side)  
7) Brazing section  
(4 positions at distributor side)  
8) Rearr side  
8) Support  
Draw it out it backwards.  
(Draw it out forwards in case of a left  
side heat exchanger.)  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
REQUIREMENT  
Remarks  
4
HeInverter  
assembly  
Wear protective clothing on your hands  
as other components may cause and  
injury etc.  
w Removal of box  
3) Screw  
3) Screw  
1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the  
power supply to the unit.  
2) Remove the inverter cover.  
(M4 × 10, 2 pcs.)  
4) Fixinng claw  
3) Remove the fixing screws on the box.  
(1 pc. each at upper and lower sides.)  
4) Lightly push down the fixing tab at the  
lower side to enable the box to be re-  
moved.  
5) Remove the hooking tab at the upper side  
while holding the ceiling board with both  
hands.  
5)  
Pull out toowardd you.  
Reassembly and cautions  
2)  
1) Hook the upper tab.  
2) Push in the lower part.  
Be sure to check there is no pinching of  
the cables at the corners on the rear side.  
3) Tighten the fixing screws on the upper  
and lower sides.  
(1 pc. each at upper/lower part)  
2) When pushing in the lower part,  
be sure to check that the cable  
is not be stretched.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
REQUIREMENT  
Remarks  
5
Inverter assembly  
w Removal of P.C.  
board and  
electric parts  
Wear protective clothing on your hands  
as other components may cause and  
injury etc.  
4. IPDU P.C. board for fan  
1. Noise filter  
P.C. boards  
2. Interface P.C. board  
(Control P.C. board)  
1. Noise filter P.C.  
board  
1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the  
power supply to the unit.  
2. Interface P.C.  
board  
2) Remove the cables and then the P.C.  
board from the board edge spacer at the  
corner.  
Exchange of service P.C. board  
For the interface P.C. board, it is necessary  
to set up the jumper links, etc for each  
model.  
3. IPDU P.C. board  
(For driving of compressor 1)  
Refer to “Exchange procedure of interface  
P.C. board”.  
3. PDU P.C. board  
(For driving of compressor 2)  
3. IPDU P.C.  
board  
1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the  
power supply to the unit.  
2) Remove the heat sink (Radiator plate)  
fixing screws.  
∗ (M4 × 16, 2 pcs.)  
3) Remove the cables.  
2) Screw  
4) Remove the P.C. board from the card  
edge spacer at the corners.  
∗ Heat sink fixing screw, compressor  
lead cables (U, V, W), etc, M4 screw  
tightening torque (1.47±0.1N•m)  
Exchange of service P.C. board  
For the IPDU P.C. board, it is necessary to  
set up the jumper links, etc for each model.  
Refer to “Exchange procedure of IPDU P.C.  
board”.  
4. IPDU P.C.  
board for fan  
1) Stop the unit operation and turn off the  
power supply to the unit.  
2) Remove the wires.  
3) Screw  
3) Remove the heat sink (Radiator plate)  
fixing screws.  
* (M4 × 8, 4 pcs.)  
∗ Tightening torque of screw for heat  
sink fixing board (1.47 ± 0.1N•m)  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
REQUIREMENT  
Remarks  
5
Inverter assembly  
w Removal of P.C.  
board and  
electric parts  
Wear protective clothing on your hands  
as other components may cause and  
injury etc.  
5. Reactor  
1) Stop operation, and then turn the power  
supply to the unit.  
6. Transformer  
7. Electrolytic  
capacitor  
2) Take off the screws (3 positions) on the  
terminal block installation board.  
3) Take off the fixing screws on each part  
Reactor, transformer and electrolytic  
condenseer are stoorred at the rrear side  
of thee termmiinal bllock.  
and then remove the cables. ∗  
∗ Caution when removing the electrolytic  
2) Screw  
2) Screw  
capacitor (No.7)  
1) Electrolytic capacitors will discharge  
over time.  
As the natural discharge by the electlytic  
capacitor may be unavailable and  
voltage may remain in some cases due  
to trouble conditions, be sure to confirm  
discharge of the capacitor.  
2) Screw  
Terminaal block  
installation board  
2) Use a suitable resistive load (100Ω/40W  
or equivalent) to discharge the capacitor  
or plug of the soldering iron, make  
continuity and discharge between  
and  
poles.  
Recommendation will check the voltage  
with a DC volt meter.  
NOTE  
Do not discharge using a tool (e.g. screw-  
driver) as the capacitor charge can cause  
an injury.  
3) Screw  
5. Reactor  
(2 pieces)  
6. Transformer  
3) Screw  
7. Electrolytic condenser  
Plug of soldering iron  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
Remarks  
6
Pressure  
sensor posi-  
tions of 2-way  
valve coil  
SV3B  
SV3A  
SV3C  
Rear side  
Oil tank  
Liquid tank  
SV3D  
SV2  
SV6  
Accumulator  
Oil separator  
PS sensor  
Compressor(2)  
SV11  
Compressor(1)  
SV41  
SV42  
PD sensor  
SV5  
Front side  
SV12  
7
Temperature  
sensor posi-  
tions and  
Front side of air conditioner  
identification  
Front side  
TS2 sensor  
TS1 sensor(Grasy)  
TD2 sensor(Red)  
TD1 sensor(Yellow)  
Accumulator  
Compressor(1)  
Compressor(2)  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
Rear side of air conditioner  
Remarks  
7
Temperature  
sensor positions  
and identification  
Accumulator  
Rear side  
TK3 sensor(White)  
TK1 sensor(Black)  
Accumulator side  
(Front side)  
Oil separator  
TK2 sensor(Blue)  
Rear side  
TK4 sensor(Green)  
Liquid tank  
Oil tank  
8
Attachment/  
detachment of  
This air conditioner has been designed so that vibration has  
been reduced to a minium by incorporating in the lower  
pipe fixing rubber section of the unit, the use of eyeglass rubber fixing brackets  
and SUS bands. Both of which greatly help to reduce  
vibration and improve unit reliability.  
Used positions of SUS fixing band:Total 5 positions  
Ø6.35  
Ø15.88 between  
SV3E valve and suction  
Ø8.0  
Ø25.4 between  
SV2 valve and discharge  
Ø6.35  
Ø15.88 between  
SV3C valve and discharge pipe  
Ø8.0  
Ø19.05 between  
SV42 valve and suction pipe  
Ø8.0  
Ø19.05 between  
SV41 valve and suction pipe  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
REQUIREMENT  
Remarks  
8
Attachment/  
detachment of  
pipe fixing  
rubber  
1)  
Wear protective clothing on your hands as  
other components may cause and injury  
etc.  
Disassembling  
Compress the rubber to release the cup.  
1) Squeeze the band either side of the clip to  
release.  
1)  
2) Pushing in the tab side of SUS band the tab  
comes off from square hole.  
Push in the band towards the arrow mark.  
Assembly  
Align the direction of the slits  
and then attach to each pipe.  
1) Individually fit each rubber bracket to the  
relevant pipe.  
1)  
2) For assembly align the tab side of the SUS  
band to the slit side of the rubber bracket.  
1)  
3) Attach the rubber band so that there is no  
gap between the SUS band and the the  
fixing rubber bracket. Pay special attention  
no to create a gap at the hair pin of the  
rubber band.  
Matching the tabs, the slide them.  
Align the tabs to the slit side of the rubber.  
2)  
4) Squeeze the rubber bracket and band so  
that the hook part of the band clips into the  
square hole.  
Slide it.  
Push the band against the  
rubber to eliminate any gaps.  
3)  
Slide the square hole side  
towards the arrow mark.  
4)  
Push the tab side up against the rubber.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
REQUIREMENT  
Remarks  
9
Exchange of  
accumulator  
Wear protective clothing on your hands as  
other components may cause and injury etc.  
Before beginning the procedure, ensure the  
refrigerant has been reclaimed from the  
outdoor unit, using a suitable refrigerant  
recovery device.  
1) Remove the lower cabinet (rear side).  
2) Remove the fixing screws (M6 × 3 pcs.)  
from the accumulator leg ⇔ base board.  
3) Remove the accumulator fixing board ∗ ⇔  
fixing screws on accumulator (M6 × 2 pcs.)  
∗ The accumulator fixing board is fixed to  
the middle partition board.  
(Take off only the screws, which fix the  
accumulator unit.)  
4) Remove the pipe (brazing part) connected  
to the SV2 valve.  
5) Remove the discharge cabinet fan and  
motor base.  
6) Remove the accumulator cover ⇔ fixing  
screws (M5 × 4 pcs.) of the middle partition  
board and then pull it upwards.  
7) Using a pipe cutter, cut off the entrance/exit  
pipe of accumulator at the specified posi-  
tion. (For the cut-off position, refer to the  
Manual attached to the repair parts.)  
6) Accumulator cover  
8) Pull the accumulator upwards.  
7) Cut pipe at  
entrance/exit ports.  
6)  
6) Two screws each  
at front and rear  
8)  
3) Accumulator  
fixing board  
Middlee partiition bboard  
4) SV2 valve  
3) Two screws  
Accumulator  
2) Three screws  
4) Brazing part with SV2 assembly  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part to be  
exchanged  
No.  
Work procedure  
REQUIREMENT  
Remarks  
10 Exchange of  
4-way valve  
Wear protective clothing on your hands as  
other components may cause and injury etc.  
Before beginning the procedure, ensure the  
refrigerant has been reclaimed from the  
outdoor unit, using a suitable refrigerant  
recovery device.  
1) Remove the lower cabinet (Front side).  
2) Remove the inverter box according to the  
item “How to remove the inverter box”.  
3) Remove the brazed sections on PMV  
assembly at 3 positions. (Refer to the figure  
below.)  
4) Remove the brazed sections on the 4-way  
valve at 4 positions.  
∗ When brazing, prepare a shield plate, etc.  
so that the brazing flames do not burn the  
wires.  
Remove brazed sections at  
2 positions on the strainer.  
Remove brazed sections at  
3 positions on the 4-way valve.  
PMV assembly  
4-way valve  
body  
Remove brazed sections at  
2 positions under PMV.  
Remove brazed sections at  
1 position under 4-way valve.  
After removal of  
PMV assembly  
Before removal of  
PMV assembly  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. P.C. BOARD  
17-1. Indoor Unit  
17-1-1. Exchange of P.C. Board for Indoor Service  
Part code  
Model type  
P.C. board model  
Label display on P.C. board  
03RD M01  
MMU-AP✻✻1WH series  
MMU-AP✻✻1YH series  
MMU-AP ✻✻1SH series  
MMD-AP✻✻1H series  
MML-AP✻✻1H series  
MMU-AP✻✻1BH series  
MMF-AP✻✻1H series  
431-6V-207  
MCC-1403  
431-6V-210  
431-6V-269  
MMD-AP✻✻1BH series  
MCC-1402  
MCC-1402  
03DD M02  
03DD M03  
MMU-AP✻✻1H series  
MMC-AP✻✻1H series  
MMK-AP✻✻1H series  
MMD-AP✻✻1SPH/SH series  
MMU-AP✻✻2SH series  
Requirement when exchanging the P.C. board assembly for indoor service  
The fixed memory (herein EEPROM, IC10) stores the model type and capacity code, which are set upon  
shipment from the factory.  
Data set upon installation (i.e. line/indoor/group addresses) are also stored in the EEPROM.  
Proceed with the exchange of the P.C. board as shown in the procedure below.  
After exchange, confirm the settings for master/sub, etc. are correct and carry out a test operation.  
Exchange procedure  
Method 1  
Before exchange, it is possible to turn on the power of the indoor unit and read out the setup  
contents from the wired remote controller.  
Readout of EEPROM data: Procedure 1  
ò
Exchange of P.C. board for service & power ON: Procedure 2  
ò
Programming the EEPROM data: Procedure 3  
ò
Power supply reset  
(All the indoor units connected to the remote controller are reset in case of group operation control)  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Method 2  
Before exchange, it is impossible to read out the setup contents due to EEPROM error.  
Exchange of P.C. board for service & power ON: Procedure 2  
ò
Writing-in of the setup data such as the model name, capacity code, indoor unit address high ceiling setup,  
connection setup of option,  
etc to EEPROM based upon customer’s information: Procedure 3  
ò
Power supply reset (All the indoor units connected to the remote controller in case of group operation control)  
Procedure 1 : Readout setup contents from EEPROM  
(Contents of EEPROM with setup changed at local site include setup at shipment from the factory are read out.)  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
1. Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.  
1
(Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.)  
∗ In a group operation control, the firstly displayed unit No. indicates the header indoor unit No.  
In this case, 10 is displayed in the item code (DN).The fan of the selected indoor unit operates, and also  
starts swinging in a model with flap.  
UNIT  
2. Every pushing  
, the indoor unit Nos. in the group control are displayed successively.  
2
(Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.)  
Specify the indoor unit No. to be exchanged.  
∗ The fan of the selected indoor unit operates, and also starts swinging in a model with flap.  
3. Using temperature setup buttons, the item code (DN) can be moved up/down one by one.  
(Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.)  
4. First change the item code (DN) from 10 → 01 . (Setup of filter sign lighting time)  
In this time, make a note of contents of the displayed setup data.  
/
3
5. In the next time, change the item code (DN) using  
/
buttons.  
Make a note of contents of the setup data as same as the above.  
6. Then repeat item 5., and make a note of contents of the important setup data as indicated in the attached  
table (Example).  
Item code necessary at minimum  
∗ The item code (DN) is consisted with 01 to AA .  
DN No. may jump on the way.  
7. When noting has finished, push TEST button to  
DN  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Contents  
Type  
Type and capacity of  
the indoor unit are  
necessary to set up  
the revolution  
Indoor unit capacity  
Line address  
return to the normal stop status.  
(Corresponds to number of the operation diagram  
of the remote controller in page 218.)  
6
Indoor address  
Group address  
frequency of the fan.  
(It requires approx. 1 minute to operate the remote  
controller.)  
<Remote controller operation diagram>  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
R.C.  
No.  
TEMP.  
ON / OFF  
3
5
6
1
TIMER SET  
TIME  
FAN  
SWING/FIX  
UNIT  
MODE  
VENT  
4
2
FILTER  
RESET TEST  
SET CL  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure 2 : Exchange of P.C. board for service  
1. Exchange P.C. board with a P.C. board for service.  
In this time, the jumper line (cut) setup or the (short-circuit) connecting connector setup on the previous P.C.  
board should be reflected on P.C. board for service. (See the blow figures.)  
(MCC-1402)  
JP1  
CN41  
(MCC-1403)  
JP001  
CN041  
CN34  
CN030  
From the left  
CN112,111,110  
When short-circuited plug is mounted to P.C. board before  
change, re-mount the short-circuited plug as previons.  
2. It is necessary to set Indoor unit to be exchanged : Remote controller = 1 : 1  
Based upon the system configuration, turn on power of the indoor unit with one of the following items.  
1) Single (Individual) operation  
Turn on power of the indoor units and proceed to Procedure 3.  
2) Group operation  
A) In case that power of the exchanged indoor unit only can be turned on  
Turn on power of the exchanged indoor unit only and proceed to Procedure 3.  
B) In case that power of the indoor units cannot be turned on individually (Case 1)  
a) Remove temporarily the group wire connected to the terminal blocks A and B of the exchanged  
indoor unit.  
b) After connecting the remote controller wire only to the removed terminal block, turn on power of the  
indoor units and proceed to Procedure 3.  
∗ When the above methods cannot be used, follow to the two cases below.  
C) In case that power of the indoor units cannot be turned on individually (Case 2)  
a) Remove all CN41 connectors of the indoor units in the same group except those of the exchanged  
indoor unit.  
b) Turn on power of the indoor units and proceed to Procedure 3.  
∗ After Procedure 3 operation has finished, be sure to return the temporarily removed group wire or  
CN41 connector to the original connection.  
Service P.C. board of  
the unit to be changed  
Indoorunit  
P.C. board  
Indoorunit  
P.C. board  
Indoorunit  
(Case 1)  
A B  
A B  
A B  
Remove the group wire of the  
terminal blocks A and B of the  
changed indoor unit, and then  
install the remote controller only.  
Group wire  
Remote  
controller  
Service P.C. board of  
the unit to be changed  
Indoorunit  
P.C. board  
Indoorunit  
P.C. board  
Indoorunit  
CN  
41  
(Case 2)  
A B  
A B  
A B  
Remove CN41 connectors  
of the indoor units other  
than the units to be changed  
in the same group.  
Group wire  
Remote  
controller  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Procedure 3 :Writing-in of setup contents to EEPROM  
(The EEPROM contents which are installed on the service P.C. board hav1e been set up at shipment from the factory.)  
SET  
CL  
TEST  
1. Push  
(Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.)  
is displayed in the UNIT No box.)  
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.  
(
In this time, 10 is displayed in the item code (DN).The fan of the indoor unit operates, and also starts  
swinging in a model with flap.  
2. Using temperature setup  
/
buttons, the item code (DN) can be moved one step up 1 or down one  
by one. (Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.)  
3
3. First set up the type and capacity code of the indoor unit.  
(The data at shipment from the factory is written in EEPROM by changing the type and capacity code.)  
1) Set 10 to the item code (DN). (As before)  
2) Using the timer time  
/
buttons, set up the type.  
4
(Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.)  
(For example, 0001 indicates 4-way Air Discharge Cassette type.): Refer to the attached table.  
SET  
3) Push  
button. (OK if display goes on.)  
5
(Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.)  
4) Using temperature setup buttons, set 11 to the item code (DN).  
5) Using the timer time buttons, set up the capacity code.  
/
/
(For example, 0012 indicates 027 type.): Refer to the attached table.  
SET  
6) Push  
button. (OK if display goes on.)  
TEST  
7) Push  
button to return to the normal stop status.  
4. In the next, the contents such as address setup, which were set up at the local site after installation are  
written in EEPROM. Execute again the operation in the above item 1.).  
5. Using temperature setup  
/
buttons, set 01 to the item code (DN).  
(Lighting time setup for filter sign)  
6. Compare the contents of the setup data which is displayed in this time with contents noted in a memo in  
Procedure 1 and customer’s information.  
1) If data is incorrect, change it using the timer time  
/
buttons so that it matches with contents noted in  
SET  
a memo, and then push  
button. (OK if display goes on.)  
2) Do nothing if data is same as those in the memo.  
7. Using temperature setup buttons, change the item code (DN).  
/
Check also the contents of the setup data and then change them it to those in the memo.  
8. Then repeat operations in items 6. and 7.  
TEST  
9. After setup operation, push  
button to return to the normal stop status.  
6
(Corresponds to number of the operation diagram of the remote controller in page 218.)  
In a group operation, turn off the power supply once, return the group wires between indoor units and CN41  
connectors as before, and then turn on power of all the indoor units.  
(It requires approx. 1 minute to operate the remote controller.)  
∗ The item code (DN) is consisted with 01 to AA . DN No. may jump on the way.  
SET  
Even if pushing  
button after changing the data incorrectly, the data can be returned to one before  
CL  
change by pushing  
button before changing the item code (DN).  
P.C. board (MCC-1402)  
P.C. board (MCC-1403)  
EPROM (IC10)  
EEPROM layout  
EEPROM (IC10) is attached to IC socket.  
To remove it, use a pair of tweezers, etc.  
To attach EEPROM, arrange the direction  
as shown in the following figures.  
EPROM (IC10)  
Align notch directions of IC socket  
and EEPROM for installation.  
∗ In exchanging time, pay attention not to  
bend the lead wire of IC.  
Notch  
EPROM  
IC socket Notch  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Record the contents of the following before exchanging P.C. boards. (Item code list)  
DN  
Item  
Memo  
Setup at shipment from factory  
According to type  
01 Filter sign lighting time  
02 Dirty condition of filter  
03 Central control address  
06 Heating inlet temp. shift  
0d Cooling Auto mode existence  
0F Cooling only/Heat pump select  
10 Type  
0000: Standard  
0099: Undefined  
0002: +2°C (Floor standing: 0)  
0001: No auto mode cooling/heating  
0000: Heat pump  
* Automatic selection  
by connected  
outdoor unit  
(
)
According to model type  
According to capacity code  
0099: Undefined  
11 Indoor unit capacity  
12 Line address  
13 Indoor unit address  
14 Group address  
0099: Undefined  
0099: Undefined  
19 Louver type (Air direction adjustment)  
According to type  
Temp. width between cooling and heating  
automatic selective control points  
1E  
0003: 3 deg (Ts ± 1.5)  
0000: None  
28 Automatic restart from power failure  
2A  
2E HA terminal (T10) selection  
0000: Normal  
30  
31  
32 Sensor select  
0000: Body sensor  
40  
5d High ceiling selection  
60 Timer setup (Wired remote controller)  
0000: Standard  
0000: Possible  
Type  
Item code [10]  
Indoor unit capacity  
Item code [11]  
Model  
Invalid  
007 type  
—
Setup data  
0016  
0017  
0018  
0019  
0020  
0021  
0022  
0023  
0024  
0025  
0026  
0027  
0028  
~
Model  
Setup  
data  
Model  
abb. name  
Setup data  
0000∗  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
0008  
0009  
0010  
0011  
0012  
0013  
0014  
0015  
Type  
—
0000  
1-way Air Discharge Cassette  
MMU-AP✻✻✻SH  
MMU-AP✻✻✻H  
MMU-AP✻✻✻WH  
048 type  
0001∗ 4-way Air Discharge Cassette  
056 type  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
2-way Air Discharge Cassette  
009 type  
—
—
1-way Air Discharge Cassette  
(Compact type)  
MMU-AP✻✻✻YH  
—
012 type  
—
072 type  
Concealed Duct Standard  
Slim Duct  
MMD-AP✻✻✻BH  
—
MMD-AP✻✻✻SPH  
MMD-AP✻✻✻SH  
015 type  
—
096 type  
0006  
0007  
0008  
0009  
0010  
0011  
0012  
0013  
Concealed Duct High Static Pressure MMD-AP✻✻✻H  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Under Ceiling  
High Wall  
MMC-AP✻✻✻H  
018 type  
—
MMK-AP✻✻✻H  
024 type  
027 type  
030 type  
—
Floor Standing Cabinet  
MML-AP✻✻✻H  
Floor Standing Concealed  
(Floor Standing 8, 10HP)  
Floor Standing (Below 6HP)  
MML-AP✻✻✻BH  
0034  
036 type  
MMF-AP✻✻✻H  
* The initial setup value of EEPROM installed on the service P.C. board  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17-2. Outdoor Unit  
17-2-1. Cautions in Service for Compressor  
1. When checking the inverter output, remove the both wires of the compressor as follows.  
17-2-2. How to Check Inverter Output  
1. Turn off the power supply.  
2. Remove the compressor lead from the compressor. (Be sure to remove lead wires of both compressors.)  
3. Turn on the power supply and drive the air conditioner in cool or heat mode. In this case, be careful so that a  
fasten terminal of the compressor lead does not come to contact with other fasten terminal or you don’t  
touch other parts (Set cabinet).  
4. Check the output voltage of the compressor lead at the inverter side.  
If the result is not accepted by the following criteria, replace IPDU P.C. board.  
No.  
1
Measuring position  
Between Red and White  
Between White and Black  
Between Black and Red  
Criteria  
360V to 520V  
360V to 520V  
360V to 520V  
2
3
∗ After check of output, sufficiently check there is no distortion on the fasten terminals when reconnecting the  
compressor lead to the compressor terminals. If any distortion is found, caulk the fasten terminal with pliers,  
etc. and then connect it.  
<How to check resistance or compressor winding>  
1. Turn off the power supply.  
2. Remove the compressor lead from the compressor.  
3. Using a tester, check the winding resistance between each phases of each compressor and resistance of  
the outdoor cabinet.  
• Is not grounded?  
→ It is normal if there are 10MΩ or more.  
• Is not short-circuited between windings?  
→ It is normal if there are 0.1Ω to 0.3Ω. (Use a precise digital tester.)  
17-2-3. How to Check Outdoor Fan Motor  
1. Turn off the power supply.  
2. Remove three fasten terminals (U, V, W) of the fan motor from IPDU P.C. board for the outdoor fan.  
3. Turn the fan with hands. If it is not turned, a fan motor error (Lock) is considered. Replace the fan motor with  
a new one. When it is turned, measure the winding resistance between each phases of the fasten terminal  
(motor winding) with a tester. It is normal if the winding resistance between phases are 13 to 33Ω.  
(Use a precise digital tester.)  
Part name  
Procedure  
Outdoor fan motor  
Measure resistance of each winding with a tester.  
Red  
U
Position  
Red-White  
Black-Red  
White-Black  
Resistance  
13~33Ω  
13~33Ω  
13~33Ω  
White  
V
Black  
W
(Normal temp.)  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17-2-4. How to Check Fan Power Supply P.C. Board and Fan IPDU  
The fan power supply P.C. board supplies DC power. It supplies DC280V for the fan IPDU, and DC12V and  
DC7V for the control power supply respectively. If the control power is not supplied, a communication error  
(Error code [E31]) is out.  
1. How to check fan power supply P.C. board (MCC-1439)  
As shown in the following table, measure the voltage of the check positions with a digital tester.  
No.  
1
Check item  
DC280V output  
Check position  
Criteria  
DC260 to DC340V  
DC12V  
Between CN500  
and  


‚
ƒ
and ꢀ  
and ꢀ  
2
Between CN500  
Between CN500  
Control power voltage  
3
DC7V  
2. How to check fan IPDU  
1. Check that the lead wires are correctly inserted into 250 fasten terminal of DC280V input and into the  
communication connector (CN01).  
2. After then replace the fan IPDU if an abnormality is recognized.  
MCC-1439 Front View  
CN503  
CN505 RED CN504 BLU UART  
2
F500  
10A 250V~  
5
UNIT 3  
1
5
1
GND +5V  
+12V  
J500  
C501  
C520  
C520  
R513  
+7V  
G O  
C509  
11  
IC503  
1
+
+
+
IC500  
6
C508  
5
T500  
RY500  
R503  
L501  
R519  
D505  
+
F501  
T6.3A 250V~  
R505  
–
~
~
+
DB500  
BLK  
CN506  
3
CAPA  
1
MCC-1439-05S COMPONENT SIDE  
CN500  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17-2-5. Interface Board Replacement Procedure  
This service board is commonly installed in different models. If the board assembly is to be replaced, check the  
displayed inspection contents and replace the board with the correct version for the model and follow this  
procedure.  
Replacement steps  
1. Turn off the power supply of the outdoor unit.  
2. Remove the connectors, fasteners and screw terminals connected to the interface P.C. board.  
3. Remove the interface P.C. board from the six card edge spacers.  
4. Disconnect the jumper wires of the service board, as instructed in the table below.  
The jumper setting differs from the one to be replaced.  
If the model is not specified, inspection code “L10” is displayed and the equipment will not operate.  
No.  
Model name  
Service P.C. board  
J09  
J10  
J11  
At shipment  
Ye s  
Ye s  
Ye s  
1
2
3
MMY-MAP0802FT8-INV  
MMY-MAP1002FT8-INV  
MMY-MAP1202FT8-INV  
Disconnect  
Leave intact  
Disconnect  
Disconnect  
Disconnect  
Leave intact  
Leave intact  
Leave intact  
Leave intact  
5. Set dip switch settings of the service board to the switch settings detailed below before replacement.  
Dip Switch  
SW07  
Setting contents  
Demand setting  
SW10  
Outdoor fan high static pressure setting, etc.  
SW13  
System address setting  
SW14  
SW30  
Terminating resistance setting  
6. After setting the jumper wires of the service board, install the service board in the outdoor control unit  
(Confirm that it is securely fixed to the card edge spacers.)  
7. Connect the connector and fasten terminals (confirm that they are correctly and securely inserted).  
8. If a component part on the board is bent during board replacement, adjust it manually so that it is not in  
contact with other parts/components.  
9. Install the cover then turn on the power supply.  
Check the operation.  
IC02  
IC01  
Jumper wire replacement place  
(J09, 10, 11)  
IC300 IC301  
CN314  
CN311  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17-2-6. Comp-IPDU Board Replacement Procedure Manual  
This service board is commonly installed in different models.  
If the board assembly is to be replaced, replace it properly in with the correct version for the model and follow  
this procedure.  
Replacement steps  
1. Turn off the power supply to the outdoor unit.  
2. Confirm that the capacitor has been fully discharged (confirm that the voltage between CN13 and CN15 is 0 V).  
3. Remove the connectors, fasteners and screw terminals connected to the A3-IPDU board.  
4. Remove 2 screws that fix the IGBT (Q200) of the Comp-IPDU board to the heat sink.  
5. Remove the Comp-IPDU board from the four card edge spacers.  
6. Set the dip Switch (SW801) of the Comp-IPDU board, as instructed in the table below.  
If the model is not specified, inspection “L29” is displayed and the equipment will not operate.  
SW801  
Comp-IPDU No.  
Bit 1  
ON  
Bit 2  
ON  
JAt shipment  
No.1  
ON  
ON  
No.2  
ON  
OFF  
7. After setting the dip Switch of the service board, apply silicone grease evenly onto the IGBT and install it in  
the outdoor control unit (Confirm that it is securely fixed to the card edge spacers).  
8. Fix the IGBT of the Comp-IPDU board to the heat sink with two screws.  
9. Connect connectors/fasteners and confirm they are correctly and securely inserted.  
10. If a component part on the board is bent during board replacement, adjust it manually so that it does not  
touch other parts or components.  
11. Install the cover then turn on the power supply. Check the operation.  
Board layout of the inverter  
Switch layout on the P.C. board  
IC101  
T03  
Noise  
filter  
board  
T01  
SW801  
Fan IPDU  
Interface board  
Power  
supply  
P.C. board  
assembly  
IC222  
CN26  
Magnetic  
switch  
Terminal  
CN15  
CN13  
Q200  
Comp-IPDU  
No.1  
Comp-IPDU  
No.2  
T02  
T04  
T05  
CN17  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17-2-7. Notice for Wiring  
Wiring for service shall be done according to the wiring diagram.  
Special caution is needed for the reactor, which has different connecting points on the COMP-IPDU1 and  
COMP-IPDU2.  
COMP-IPDU No.1  
COMP-IPDU No.2  
TO REACTOR 1  
TO REACTOR 2  
CN20 (REACTOR 1)  
CN21 (REACTOR 1)  
CN08 (REACTOR 2)  
CN07 (REACTOR 2)  
P. C.  
board  
noise  
filter  
P.C. board  
interface  
P. C.  
board  
power  
P.C. board  
P.C. board  
Comp-IPDU Comp-IPDU  
No.1  
No.2  
Inverter front view  
DANGER  
The electrolytic capacitors in this panel are charged to 660 volts D.C.  
Before servicing, turn off the power supply and allow the capacitor to discharge for at least 10 minutes.  
(Purpose: Discharge the capacitor)  
Discharge to a safe level of 10 volts D.C. or LESS.Test with a D.C. Voltmeter as shown.  
CN13  
(CAPA–)  
CN15  
(CAPA+)  
10V, DC  
Comp-IPDU No.1 & No.2  
COMP-IPDU No. 1 and COMP-IPDU No.2 have the same electric potential, measure both.  
Never discharge the capacitor terminals with any metal implement.  
Personal injury or equipment damage may result.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inverter Assembly Configuration  
Fan IPDU  
BUS terminal block  
Power supply P.C. board for fan  
Relay connector  
Magnet swith  
IPDU1  
IPDU2  
Noise filter  
Interface P.C. board  
Power supply terminal block  
Over-current relay  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION  
2 CHOME 12-32, KONAN, MINATOKU, TOKYO, 108-0075, JAPAN  
Copyright © 2005 TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION, ALL Rights Reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Teac Stereo System CD P650 User Manual
TomTom GPS Receiver 1405 User Manual
Topaz Systems Car Amplifier AM1 User Manual
Toshiba DVD VCR Combo D VR5SU User Manual
Tote Vision Computer Monitor LCD 2600HD User Manual
Tricity Bendix Cooktop SE310 User Manual
Tripp Lite Network Cables N002 003 YW User Manual
Tripp Lite Switch B203 104 User Manual
VistaQuest Digital Camera PC30I User Manual
Wagner SprayTech Power Roller Cordless Power Roller User Manual